Home

High End Systems H4 manual

1. gi lei lei Yay Y DaN tom aN Pome Da C O NINO Sh OOS Figure 30 2 Programmer section of the Hog 4 front panel 416 High End Systems Section 30 Cheat Sheets er TA EN Nae ek PEN Naat eke AEN yaey ek DEK Nan jak DSN Na ae EK ASN Na ae jak REK vay ak AEN Se le 2 A K DSN Vr Jaks REN Va ae aks 25N VJ Q oN Varn Naa m fe Figure 30 3 Playback section of the Hog 4 front panel Van Van ae TGT A VINN fastest g gt NI eNA bev lt A lt I eTEN lt lt TTA VININ S TNA VIW N A eNA be lt lt TNA VININ A TTA BZN NN VEI N N 4 IQI gt N ZN High End Systems 417 Section 31 Troubleshooting If you are having problems with the console try the troubleshooting procedures covered in this chapter If you cannot rectify the problem or you think that it is because the console is not working as it should please contact support highend com 31 1 Console won t startup e Ifa software update has failed the console can get into a state where it either fails to start properly or it goes immediately to the shutdown screen A full re install will be necessary see Full Install System Restore p 389 31 2 The console appears to have crashed or frozen Hog 4OS runs as a series of
2. Hog 40S OSC Command Path Data Midi Note On hog midi on channel velocity if velocity 0 then mesage is note treated as note off Midi Note Off hog midi off channel velocity note Hog 40S uses the following OSC paths and commands for receiving Hardware messages faders and encoders not supported on Hog 4PC For keys not listed in the table below the OSC path is hog hardware button name as listed on the front panel For paths that contain master use the master number for the front panel hardware you are trying to control For example to press the go button on the console s front panel for master 6 the OSC path is hog playback go 6 High End Systems Section 21 Open Sound Control Hog 40S OSC Command Path Data Choose Keys Go Keys Pause Keys Back Keys Flash Keys Faders Grand Master Encoders Rate Wheel i Wheel i Wheel Up But ton iWheel Down Button Pig Key Trackball POS Mode Trackball Posi tion Value 0 key 1 key 2 key 3 key 4 key 5 key 6 key 7 key 8 key 9 key Arrow Up key Arrow Down key Arrow Left key Arrow Right key High End Systems hog hardware choose master hog hardware go master hog hardware pause master hog hardware goback master hog hardware flash master hog hardware fader master hog hardware fader 0 ho
3. Pig Pig Backspace Pig Blind Pig Choose Pig Copy Pig Flip Pig Main Go Pig Main Halt Pig Main Back Pig Go Halt Back or Flash ona master Pig Next on the View Toolbar Pig Next Page Pig Nudge Up above the I Wheel Pig Nudge Down below the I Wheel Pig Open Backspace Pig Open Colour Pig Park Pig Record Pig Release Pig Setup Pig Size on the Window Control Toolbar Pig Touch Pig Undo When patching with View by DP enabled un patches the selected fixtures Removes values from the currently highlighted cells in the Programmer or editor When leaving blind mode parameters will fade to their new values in the assigned or default fade time rather than snapping to their new values Opens the playback options for the cuelist on the selected master Copies the contents of the currently selected cells When using Flip to cycle a fixture through its flip positions goes through the possible positions in the reverse order to Flip without Pig Equivalent to pressing Go on all masters Equivalent to pressing Halt on all masters Equivalent to pressing Back on all masters Releases the master Changes the view to the previous view rather than the next view Changes the page to the previous page rather than the next page Nudges the intensity up by half the set nudge value Nudges the intensity down by half the set nudge val
4. cece cette eee eee eee ee ee anes ates a eeea eee 168 9 8 Spreedsheet View vs Button View of Colour Directory 0008 169 10 1 Media Picker WiINdOW ccceceeeceeeneee ee eee eee eea een tesa tesa essa eeneeeaaes 171 10 2 Media Picker Window Options cccceeeeeneee teen teen eeea tesa eeee tenes 172 11 1 The Cue Editor Window ccececceeeee eee eee e eee ates ates ates a eeea nena eeaaes 182 11 2 Cue 3 with a Fade Mark 0 ccc cece ee eee ects eee eee ae tenets a eeeaeeeaes 191 11 3 Cue 3 Actively Fading into its Mark cceeeeeceee nese neee eee eee eeaes 191 11 4 Cue 3 Fully Marked 0 cc ccccecece cece cece ee eee eee eee esa eeaeesa essa essa eeaaeenaes 191 11 5 The Cuelist Directory WINdOW cceeeee ee ee ence cess eee eeaeeeaeeeaeeeee 192 11 6 The Cuelist WINdOW 2 0 0 cece eee e teers teen e sete deen ee anes a eeeaeeeee 193 13 1 CU tin ses secu ec caves ioui eeit a eaaa ennaa Ta AEE TEENE AVATI ENAT AES 202 1322 Path TVpeS vie certs oad eee ein a oe ene ee a ae 205 13 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist WiINdOW ce ceeeecee etter teeta eeeeeeeees 206 13 4 The Wheels Toolbar showing TIMING ceeeeee eee eee e cette eeeneeene es 207 13 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar ssassn 208 13 6 The Slot Toolbar showing Paths ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tesa tena eeaees 208 13 7 The Paths Toolbar nroa etn eds fetes eee ae eens Rec nates 2
5. 157 Section 8 Palettes 8 6 Record Options 8 6 1 Global Per Fixture Type and Per Fixture When you record a palette parameter values can be recorded as global per fixture type or per fixture The three kinds work in different ways when you apply the palette to fixtures during programming e Global the palette s parameter values are applied to all selected fixtures that have that parameter For example a colour palette containing hue and saturation parameters is applied to all selected fixtures that have hue and saturation e Per Fixture Type the palette s parameter values are applied to all fixtures of that type For example a palette containing parameter values for Studio Color 575s will only be applied to selected Studio Color 575s e Per Fixture the palette s parameter values are applied only to those specific fixtures that are both in the palette and selected in the editor For example a palette containing parameter values for Studio Color 575 1 will only be applied to that fixture and only then if it is selected By default the following rules determine how the palette is recorded 1 Position palettes are always recorded Per Fixture 2 Ifall the fixtures to be recorded have exactly the same parameter values then the palette is recorded as Global 3 Otherwise the palette is recorded Per Fixture In the palette s editor the parameter values in a Global palette will appear as All Types Similarly a pa
6. 2 Press the Set to HogNet Input button at the top of the window the value will now be displayed in black Tip All DMX channel value changes made in the dmx output window are stored with the show file and are persisted through log off on as well as through show backups 342 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder The fixture builder gives users the ability to create their own basic fixture libraries The fixture builder should only be used in extreme cases when a new library is needed and there is no time to contact High End Systems support Generally it is best that you contact hoglibraries barco com to request properly built fixture libraries The fixture builder utility is only recommended for advanced programmers with extensive lighting fixture and Hog 4 Operating Software knowledge Knowledge of the fixture DMX pro tocol is essential prior to creating a custom library This guide roughly explains the use of the fixture builder but in no way is intended to be a complete manual for creating custom libraries Users are urged to contact support to have libraries properly built and installed into the software 25 1 Working With the Fixture Builder The fixture builder utility does not allow full access to all abilities of libraries built by High End Systems and therefore should only be utilized in extreme situations Please note that custom libraries become part of the show file they were created in but individual fi
7. 5 Click OK to confirm the settings The Expander should now have its Active DMX OK and TX Mode indicators illuminated A single Widget or single output of a Super Widget may only be connected to one port at any one time If a Widget that is already connected to one port is connected to a second port it will automatically be disconnected from the first port 3 3 64 HogNet Network On the back of every Hog 40S console is a dedicated Base T Ethernet jack that can be used for connecting to a network of DMX Processors computers and other consoles If there is more than one Ethernet jack on the back of the console then the jack labeled HogNet should be used The hardware on personal computers running Hog 4PC will vary but at least one 100 Base T Ethernet hardware device must be properly installed and enabled in order for Hog 4PC to suc cessfully communicate to other nodes on a network All components of a Hog network should be connected using category 5 Ethernet cables and using at least a 100mb Ethernet switch or router Gigabit switches are also HogNet compatible The simplest HogNet network consists of a console and a DMX Processor connected to the lighting rig Only slightly more complex is the case of a system with a single console and several High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Processor Unit Widget Beacon DMX A Single Widget 2252 D FixtureNet J eee 8 D J F131 ACN A v DMX Widgets 1
8. m Recurrence Pattern Next date time for this trigger 27 09 12 4 20 00 PM 5 Adjust the Start Time and Start Date to assign a single shot trigger 6 If you want the trigger to recur at regular intervals check the Recurrence Pattern check box Then click the frequency Time Daily Weekly Monthly Yearly with which you want the trigger to recur and select options for the specified frequency Tip The next valid trigger date and time is shown at the bottom of the Clock Trigger window 7 Click OK Once you have set a clock trigger the cuelist window will now indicate the trigger time and type in the cue s Wait column High End Systems 215 Section 13 Timing Chosen Master List 2 Learn View Enable Folow Folow Insert Renumber Chosen Link Fade 2s 10s 15s 0 28 10s 15s 0 4 42100 PMH Copy o 2s 10s 15s 0 4 4 21 30 PMH Copy of Cue 1 2s 10s 15s 0 4 4 4 2200 PM H Copy of Cue 1 25s 10s 15s 0 To enable or disable the clock functions on a cuelist toggle the Enable Clock button in the cuelist window Chosen Master List 2 Play Learn View Enable Enable Follow Folow Insert Options Ch Timing Number Name rsz puleu 4 20 30 PM H Copy of Cue 1 Tip You can also enable or disable the clock functions for a cuelist in the cuelist s Cuelist Options window or using macros see Macros p 329 The Clock Toolbar The Clock Toolbar shows the time and
9. 442 command line conversion curve crossfade cue cuelist dbo default value delay time desk channel DHCP dimmer curve directory DMX Glossary A method of entering information into the Programmer using the numer ical keypad and the button See Also programmer A curve that defines the relationship between the plotted parameter value and the DMX value sent to the dimmer or fixture Conversion curves are like dimmer curves or profiles on other consoles and should not be con fused with paths Conversion curves are properties of the fixture while the path is a property of a cue See Also path A transition between two cues one replacing the other A look on stage achieved through the manipulation of fixture parameters recorded as part of a cue list A cue requires a trigger either manual or automatic and has attributes such as fade wait and delay times See Also scene fade time wait time delay time A group of cues that run in a specific order consecutively or even simul taneously These may be automatically linked to form a chase or manually triggered A cuelist is run from a master dead black out A parameter value which has not been adjusted by the user This value is assigned by the fixture s Library and may not always be zero For ex ample the default value of Shutter Open Strobe Off may be Open See Also touched value tracking The time the console waits before startin
10. Fx Num a Note Dfa Paka Patch Ty a Patch Note SwpAxes Pan invert Tit invert hiensty Col Cal Parked Studio Spot 575 i r Figure 5 9 Changed Fixture Type 5 5 Removing a Fixture from the Show To remove a fixture 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Fixture 1 Remove Select the fixture s you want to remove and press Remove 3 You will be asked to confirm Select OK Important If you remove a fixture all of its associated programming in groups palettes cues and so on will be removed from the show To disable a fixture while retaining its programming unpatch it see Unpatching Fix tures p 113 5 6 Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically Hog 40S can create groups and palettes automatically based on the fixtures in your show This rapidly gives you a set of building blocks to start programming with To use the Auto Palettes function 116 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Click on the Auto Palettes button located in the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window and select from the options in the Auto Palettes window see Figure 5 10 The Auto Palettes window 3 Click on Generate Auto Palettes v Make Groups Maximum Group repeat W Eg v Make Intensity palettes Make Position palettes Make Colour palettes Make Beam palettes 0O Separate by wheel Alignment spacing v 10
11. High End Systems 25 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Button Function Shortcut Page Up Page Down Page Left and Page Right scroll the currently selected window The cursor isn t moved Copy creates a copy of the selected window This is Open slash helpful when you need to view two parts of the same window at once Size rotates through a range of set positions and Open plus or sizes for the selected window within its current minus screen The options are full screen and top bottom left and right half and quarter screens Holding down the Pig key while pressing Size rotates through the options in the reverse order E eee Move Screen moves the selected window between Open touch screens and external displays Maximise toggles the size of the currently selected Open Full window between full screen and its previous size Focus switches between windows in turn bringing Open Thru each to the front The unlock button allows the positions and sizes of Open all windows to be changed by the Trackball or mouse but not the toolbar buttons Windows are unlocked when this button is enabled E aeg Close closes the frontmost window Open Backspace EJ Using the Mouse or Trackball To move a window click and hold on the window s top status bar whilst dragging it to its new position To move a toolbar click and hold its left hand edge and drag to its new position Windows c
12. High End Systems 87 Section 4 Shows Check that your console s IP address settings are correct for that particular network setup 4 4 Change the Currently Loaded Show If you are logged into a show but want to change to a different show 1 Ds 3 Setup gt Quit Select Log Off In the Start window either launch a new show or browse to launch an existing show 4 5 88 Automatically Launch a Show at Console Startup You can assign the Hog 40S to automatically launch an existing show file at startup 1 2 3 4 Setup Control Panel Auto Launch Select Enable Auto Launch Choose a show file you wish to auto launch Assign a delay time which will determine how long the console will wait before the show is automatically launched At startup a pop up window will tell you that the show will be launched automatically after the assigned delay see Figure 4 1 The Auto Launch window Click Load Now to ignore the re maining delay and launch the show immediately Click Cancel to return to the Start window If you specified a delay of 0 seconds the delay window will not be displayed Auto Launch The following show will automatically launch in Ss Figure 4 1 The Auto Launch window High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 6 Managing Show Data All show data is stored on the internal hard disk of the console Show files and folders are stored in the Shows folder while libraries are
13. To assign MIDI Note information to the console s encoders and wheels not supported on Hog 4PC 1 Connect a MIDI device to a MIDI input on either the console or a USB MIDI input device connected to the console Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab of the Console Settings window Dy Pe Pe oN In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select Encoders to associate encoder messages with that MIDI Channel Any incoming MIDI Note information for the specified MIDI channel will use the following mappings for the associated encoders and wheels not supported on Hog 4PC 308 High End Systems Section 20 MIDI Function Note Function Note i Wheel Encoder 3 12 i Wheel Encoder 3 13 Trackball Pan Encoder 4 14 Trackball Pan Encoder 4 15 Trackball Tilt Encoder 5 16 Trackball Tilt Encoder 5 17 Rate Wheel 18 Rate Wheel 19 Center Wheel 20 Center Wheel 21 Center Ring 22 Center Ring 23 Trackball Ring Trackball Ring Encoder 1 Encoder 1 Encoder 2 Encoder 2 COON OC ARKRWBN ad O 20 2 5 Assigning MIDI Notes to Monitor Soft Keys To assign MIDI Note information to monitor soft keys 1 Connect a MIDI device to a MIDI input on either the console or a USB MIDI input device connected to the console Setup Network open the Netw
14. 41 100 42 100 You can combine repeats and buddying to create complex patterns very simply Repeats and buddying are selected from the Grouping Toolbar press Grouping on the Main Toolbar The toolbar will remain open to allow you to combine Grouping and Buddying press Enter or click on the toolbar s Close button when you have made your selection Figure 6 11 The Grouping Toolbar The toolbar displays the current repeat and buddying size and has buttons to increase and decrease the repeat and the buddying There are also shortcuts for repeats of 0 2 3 4 and 8 and No Buddying Note that grouping and buddying are only used during fanning the grouping and buddying in formation is not recorded into cues and palettes but the resulting parameter values are recorded Tip By default grouping and buddying options are retained even after pressing the Clear key To reset grouping and buddying options when Clear is pressed enable the option in Setup Preferences Program ming 6 5 146 Removing Values As well as assigning values for parameters you will sometimes want to remove parameter values from editors For example e You no longer want to use a particular fixture in a cue scene or palette e You decide to have the colour of several fixtures controlled by a different cuelist on another playback To do this you need to remove colour parameter values so that they don t take over control of the colour pa
15. Lighting Control System User Manual Version 2 0 0 EN High End Systems Hog 4 Lighting Control System User Manual High End Systems by Chris Muenchow and Michael Graham Copyright High End Systems Inc 2013 All Rights Reserved Changes Information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice High End Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual Trademarks High End Systems the Flying Pig Systems logo and Hog 4 logos are registered trademarks of High End Systems Inc or High End Systems Europe Ltd Flying Pig Systems Effects Engine and Hog are registered trade marks of Flying Pig Systems All other brand names and product names used in this book are trademarks registered trademarks or trade names of their respective holders FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case th
16. Matching Levels when Changing Page If this situation happens on a Hog 4 or Full Boar 4 console the built in motorized faders will automatically adjust themselves to match the master s stored level Console such as the Road Hog 4 and Hog 4 Nano that do not feature motorized faders or for connected wing hardware that does not feature motorized faders the master level of the cuelist will be shown on the Playback Bar in blue together with a red dot showing the physical fader position This state is known as having the fader unlocked To relock rematch the levels move the fader until it is at the same level as the blue bar at this point the fader will take control of the cuelist master level in the normal way Page lloaded Page2loaded Page 1 reloaded Physical fader fader moved to masterlevelis moved to 100 50 not matched to matched to physical fader master level Figure 18 2 Matching Levels when Changing Page 292 High End Systems Section 18 Pages 18 3 3 Restoring Activity When Changing Pages You can trigger cues to go and assign masters to specific fader levels when changing page by using Restore Activity To do this you capture the desired activities as a macro which is later executed when the page is loaded To capture page activity 1 Page Open open the Page Directory 2 Goto the desired page and assign the page activity you can playback cuelists and scenes and set fader levels For example Maste
17. Section 13 Timing e Time 140 Enter select a fade time of 1 minute 40 seconds To change the time of an already recorded cue 1 Cuelist 1 select the cuelist unless the desired cuelist or master is already the chosen master 2 Cue 2 Time 7 Enter assigns a fade time of 7 seconds Different Fade in and Fade out Times You can assign different fade in and fade out times known as a split time using the key For example 1 Create the desired look for the cue in the Programmer 2 Fixture Enter select all the fixtures currently in the Programmer 3 Time 7 10 Enter select a fade in time of 7 seconds and a fade out time of 10 seconds 4 Record record the cue on the currently selected master Important Hog 40S s definition of fade in and fade out times is different to that used by some other consoles Some consoles use fade in and fade out times for intensity parameters only and have a separate time for all other parameters Hog 40S has fade in and fade out times for each individual parameter Also with some consoles the fade out time applies when the cue goes out so that cue 2 s fade out time takes effect during the change from cue 2 to cue 3 rather than as with Hog 40S cue 1 to cue 2 Fade Time with Masks You can record fade times with a mask For example e Cue1fFixture1 2 Colour Time 4 Enter sets the fade time for the colour parameter values of Fixtures 1 and 2 in Cue 1 Tip If you want to as
18. and Reference Palettes p 162 Forward Allow Refs Figure 16 2 The Update Toolbar 16 5 Editing Discreetly It is often useful to make changes to parameter values discreetly or without them appearing on stage at all during a rehearsal or performance for example To do this use Hog 40S s Fade Changes and Blind functions 16 5 1 Fade Changes If you select the Fade Changes button in an editor window any changes you make will appear on stage over the current time settings for the changed parameters For example if you have in 246 High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming tensity values in the Programmer with a fade time of ten seconds and you select all of the fixtures and press 0 Enter all of the lights would fade to 0 over 10 seconds This is useful for making changes on the fly during a performance Parameters that don t have timing values in the Programmer will fade in the default time which you can assign in the Default Timing pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Default Timing Press the Fade Changes button again to revert to having parameter values appear in the output instantly To view and assign time values for parameters see Individual Parameter Timings p 206 Tip You can set a trackball key turn Fade Changes on and off see Trackball Keys p 92 16 5 2 Blind Blind mode allows you to continue programming and editing cues groups palettes and scenes w
19. server Running 1072 port 6587 netnum 1 showpath playback Running 5672 port 6537 nodeid 1 netnum 1 desktop Running 5812 port 6587 nodeid 1 netnum 1 dp8k Running 5828 port 6537 instance 1 console Figure 31 1 The Launched Processes window 3 Check the network settings The DMX Processor and console both need to be on the same subnet 4 Check the port number setting The DMX Processor and console both need to have the same Port Number See HogNet Network p 64 5 Check the software The DMX Processor and console both need to be running the same version of the software see Updating the DMX Processor Software p 392 31 4 Playback controls don t behave as expected e Check that the playback controls haven t been mapped to different functions to their normal ones See Configuring Playback Controls p 283 31 5 420 The Front Panel Reboots Unexpectedly Care should be taken when transmitting a personal radio while in close proximity to a console front panel Always keep radio transmitting devices at least eight inches from the console surface In the event of a radio transmitting within close proximity of the console the front panel firmware may reboot causing a temporary loss of control of the keys and hardware for approximately 20 seconds During this time the desk lights may dim as well After 20 seconds the front panel will reboot and normal functionality will be restored If the problems per
20. 202 with selected fixtures only 179 with state 186 desktop views 27 direct palettes 162 effect palettes 230 effects 224 groups 149 link cues 217 pages 289 palettes 153 parameter timings 206 scenes 197 reference palettes 162 release all 290 release cue 256 release key 255 Release on Other Go 257 release time 255 releasing parameters 124 remainder dim button 130 remember fader values 290 renaming shows 48 renumbering cuelists 181 reorder button 128 repeat with fanning 145 459 replace button with cuelists 194 with cues 178 with groups 152 with palettes 163 with scenes 199 replacing faders 425 touch screens 425 trackball 426 replicating fixtures 115 reselecting fixtures 128 restarting 58 processes 419 restore activity 293 restoring default parameters values 142 reverse button 128 RGB 32 RGB colour 134 S safety information 429 saturation 32 134 scene directory 34 scenes 197 configuring playback controls 283 copying 198 copying to pages 294 deleting 198 editing contents 199 moving 198 moving to pages 294 naming 197 recording 197 removing from pages 294 timing 199 scrolling window contents 27 select all 126 select toolbar 127 selected master 252 selecting fixtures 125 from what is onstage 239 selection order 149 selection order the 128 separating parameters 147 servicing 425 set key 57 show connecting to a running 87 460
21. Additionally you can define an offset for the slot name in the field at the bottom of the dialog This offset defines the range used by the function when dialling values on the encoder wheel Leaving this field blank will result in the default 0 being used Additional function feature selections may result in various Real World value selections via a dialog box For instance a strobe function and shutter feature will allow a Real World value entry of either open or closed 25 1 3 Adding User Created Libraries to a Show Once libraries have been built within the fixture builder they are stored within the show file You can then add these fixtures to your show in the same method as existing fixtures within the selected library 1 In the Fixture window open the Fixture Schedule 2 Scroll down to the User Created manufacturer and expand to view all custom made libraries High End Systems 349 Section 25 The Fixture Builder Fixture Schedule E3 Specify how many fixtures of each type you wish to use Select a type and press Set Search fixture name E 0O Limit to fixtures in use Name m Count y Terbly Theatre Projects Thomas Toshiba Twinkle Works Ultralite User Created Ushio Lighting V Light VFX Lighting VLFX _v4 FPS library v4 4 1 Om 3 Add patch and program custom libraries in the same manner as existing lib raries Once a fixture is created it behaves the same as built in fix
22. FixtureNetConfig To configure DP8000 s FixtureNet from the console 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DMX Processor 8000 and press Settings 3 Select the FixtureNet pane of the DMX Processor Settings window To configure the Hog 4 console or Hog 4PC s assigned FixtureNet port from the console 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DMX Processor 8000 assigned to net number 1 or whichever DMX Processor is associated with the local internal DMX Processor 8000 in your show and press Settings 3 Select the FixtureNet pane of the DMX Processor Settings window From these configurations menus you can configure the FixtureNet s IP address source address in one of two ways e Obtain an IP address using DHCP select this option when running the Art Net side of the console on a network that contains a DHCP server such as a DHCP router When using DHCP the IP Address Netmask and Gateway fields will be grayed out The information contained with them is not relevant to the DHCP configuration Important If you select Obtain an IP address using DHCP on the console and no DHCP server is present on the FixtureNet network then the FixtureNet adapter will revert to a loopback address of 127 0 0 1 e Use Custom IP Settings This option allows you to specify the IP address and subnet mask settings of the FixtureNet adapter This option is most commonly used on networks where a DHCP server i
23. O seconds Effect fade time 5 seconds Underlying value 50 Fade time 5 seconds Effect fade time 5 seconds Effect delay time 5 seconds Underlying value 50 Figure 14 3 Controlling Effect Transitions with Timing You can assign effect fade times using the command line 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign an effect time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Effect Time 4 Enter assigns the effect fade time to 4 seconds To assign a effect delay time 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixture s 2 Effect Time Time 2 Enter pressing Time twice assigns the delay time You can also view and assign effect timing values in the Effects Engine window 228 High End Systems Section 14 Effects Effect timings Offset Lenath N Shot ALL 45 5bpm All intensity All Position 14 2 Effect Palettes 14 2 1 Predefined Effect Palettes You can quickly apply effects to the current selection using predefined effects palettes in the Effect Directory see Figure 14 4 The Effect Directory Effects palettes for parameter functions not available in the current selection will be greyed out for example the Iris Step palette is not available for Studio Color 575s as they do not have an iris parameter To open the Effect Directory e Open Effect Effect Effect v v E4 ES E6 E7 Es E9 E 10 gt square lt square gt step lt step can can fly in fly ou
24. Open Macro open the Macro Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally active a Macro when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the Macro 4 Set Name Enter type in the name Tip To name a Macro immediately after recording it press the Set key to open a Quickname window Enter the Macro name and press OK to select Keystroke Macro Playback Every time a Keystroke Macro is recorded it will automatically recall the state of the windows at the time of the recording This assures that when a macro is run that the windows are set up in the correct places for touch screen presses At the time of macro playback the current onscreen windows will be replaced with that of the macro If the macro does not contain any specific touch screen presses you can delete the Recall View step from the macro list See Comment Macros p 329 for editing information Tip While macros provide users with increased functionality they can also cause severe problems if misused even causing the console to lock up During macro playback manual functions may become unavailable or interfere with the macro playback For instance if you enter information on the command line as the macro is doing the same the resulting command line structure may become invalid Macros have no intelligence avoid recoding sequences that access items that are likely to be moved or deleted For example consider the macro
25. Setup gt Preferences open the User Preferences window 2 Click on the Import button browse to the location of your preferences files and select a preferences file to import 4 10 Merging Shows Show merging allows you to take the programming from one show and merge it into another show To merge show files you must first load the show you want to merge data into This is known as the current show The show you then select to merge data in from is called the source show To select a source show to merge in 1 Setup Shows gt Current Show opens the Current Show pane of the Show Manager 2 Press Merge to be guided through the merge process The Merge Show window will open see Figure 4 4 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window 3 Choose a source show file Note that if you have chosen a backup bck or Shw file it may take a few extra moments for the console to uncompress the show file and read its contents 4 Once you have chosen a source show you will be offered several merge op tions Fixture Types Fixtures and Programming groups palettes cuelistst scenes pages macros and views High End Systems 97 Section 4 Shows Merge Show Source Location CY a Description Created Modified Hog 4 Show 9 25 2012 2 53 12 PM 9 25 2012 2 59 42 PM Festival Show Hog 4 Show 9 10 2012 2 29 44 PM 9 25 2012 2 59 50 PM q Main Stage Show Hog 4 Show 9 24 2012 9 45 24 AM 9 24 2012
26. The Slot Toolbar showing Paths 4 Choose In to assign a path to be applied to the parameters when the fixture they belong to is increasing in intensity during the crossfade Choose Out to assign a path to be applied to parameters when the fixture they belong to is decreasing in intensity during the crossfade Choose All to assign a path to be applied to parameters of fixtures irrespective of whether their intensity is in creasing or decreasing The Paths Toolbar will open see Figure 13 7 The Paths Toolbar 5 Select the desired path from the Paths Toolbar The different types of path are explained in Paths p 204 Al h Out Mode Control Figure 13 6 The Slot Toolbar showing Paths Accelerate Figure 13 7 The Paths Toolbar 13 3 2 Assign Parameter Timings with the Command Line 208 To assign the fade time for all parameters of a fixture High End Systems Section 13 Timing 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign a time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Time 4 Enter assigns the fade time to 4 seconds To assign separate fade in and fade out times 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign a time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Time 4 7 Enter assigns the Fade In time to 4 seconds and the Fade Out time to 7 seconds To assign a fade time for a particular parameter type 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fix
27. Unter Spannung stehend e Blau Neutral e Griin Gelb Erde 430 High End Systems Section 33 Safety Information 2 Da die Farben der Leitungen im Hauptanschluss m glicherweise nicht mit den farbigen Markierungen die die Anschlussklemmen identifizieren tiberein stimmen fahren sie wie folgt fort e Die Gr n und Gelb gef rbte Leitung muss im Stecker mit der mit dem Buchstaben E oder dem Erde Symbol markierten oder der Gr n und Gelb gef rbten Anschlussklemme verbunden werden e Die blau gef rbte Leitung muss mit der mit dem Buchstaben N oder der Schwarz gef rbten Anschlussklemme verbunden werden Die Braun gef rbte Leitgun muss mit der mit dem Buchstaben L markierten oder rot gef rbten Anschlussklemme verbunden werden Dieses Ger t geh rt zur Klasse I Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden 4 Diese Ger te sind nur zum Einbau in trockenen Lagen bestimmt und m ssen vor Regen und Feuchtigkeit gesch tzt werden 5 Vor Wartungsarbeiten stets den Netzstecker ziehen 6 Servicearbeiten sollten nur von Fachpersonal ausgef hrt werden Das Ger t enth lt keine wartungsbed rftigen Teile 33 4 Informaci n Importante De Seguridad 33 4 1 Para Protecci n Continua Contra Incendios Este equipo debe conectarse a un circuito que tenga una protecci n m xima contra las sobrecargas de 20 A 33 4 2 Para La Protecci n Continua Contra Electrocuciones 1 Si se recibi este equipo sin el enchufe de alimentacion mo
28. Workspaces opens a sub selection allowing various portions of the front panel to be displayed Default Positions restores all Hog 4PC screens to their default location on the Windows desktop Lock Front Panel Position toggles the ability to move the Hog 4PC Front Panel on the Windows desktop Toggle Front Panel toggles the Front Panel on off Show All restores all Hog 4PC screens to their previous size Minimize minimizes the current Hog 4PC screen Minimize All minimizes all Hog 4PC screens Maximize maximizes the current Hog 4PC screen and hides the title bar Quit displays the exit dialog for the Hog 4PC application Displaying Four Hog 4PC Windows 406 By default only two Hog 4PC windows are shown However the Hog 4PC software supports the display of three or four windows if desired To open these windows 1 3 Setup Control Panel Displays open the Displays pane of the Control Panel see Figure 29 2 The Displays pane of the Control Panel Set the resolutions for External Monitor 1 and External Monitor 2 which correspond to the two external displays on the Hog 4 console Select OK Note that the control panel settings are system specific so the number of screens will be retained regardless of the show file that is launched High End Systems Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC Control Panel v1 0 0 b 268 C Displays Wings Mid wor Time and Date External Monitor 2 E
29. enter your own release time overriding the cuelist s release time Go Go s the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time overriding the cuelist s time Halt Halts the chosen master stopping any fades that are in progress Back Reverses the currently running crossfade on the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own back time overriding the cuelist s back time Restart Goes to the first cue in the cuelist on the chosen master Goto cmdline Goto Skip forward Skip back Enters the Goto command into the command line so that you can enter a cue number and press Enter to go to that cue on the chosen master Enter a cue number to go to in the Target Cue cell Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time overriding the cue s time Go instantly to the next cue on the chosen master Go instantly to the previous cue on the chosen master High End Systems Section 18 Pages 18 1 How Pages Are Used Pages allow you to predefine layouts of cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters so that they can be loaded quickly on to the available playback masters For a concert for example cuelists can be organized in one page per song so that before each performance it is possible to re arrange the pages to reflect the current running order of the songs One cuelist can be used several times within a page or on several pages or it can be unique to a spe
30. in pointer mode you can have Right Click Left Click Flip and Ball Mode mapped while in position mode you could have Flip Next Ortho Toggle and Ball Mode mapped The Trackball keys are assigned in the Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window see Figure 4 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window 92 High End Systems Section 4 Shows w Appearance User Preferences Pointer Mode Toggle KindKeys CmdKeys By Ball Mode WwW t1 Sensitivity S Key Timings gt o Trackball o f Programming Default Timing Default Naming D CO PESE HHI Virtual Faders sJ Figure 4 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window Import The following navigation functions are available High End Systems Ball Mode switches the Trackball between position and pointer modes Ortho Toggle switches the Trackball between Ortho and Normal When in position mode with ortho on the Trackball will only control pan or tilt not both at the same time This can be useful for accurately setting fixtures Right Click the same as a right click with the mouse This is usually used to bring up a contextual menu with commands such as copy and paste Left Click the same as left click with the mouse Shuffle shuffles the pointer across windows bringing that window to the front unlike shuffle on the Window Control Toolbar which shuffles the screen view Swap to Screen moves the p
31. palettes cuelists and cues scenes pages and views from the source show see Figure 4 7 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show window Group Merge t Merge Groups Odd Mac 301 LED 16b8 standard Even Mac 301 LED 16bit standard Mac 301 LED 16bit standard 1 3 Deselect Al Select Al Mac 301 LED 16bt standard 2 3 Mac 301 LED 16bit standard 3 3 Figure 4 7 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show window When merging groups palettes cuelists and cues scenes and views the following merge methods are available from the drop down menu in the Merge field e Append adds all of the programming from the source show to the current show e Append Different if programming with the same name cannot by found in the current show the programming from the source show is appended e Merge By Name if programming with the same name is found in the current show merge the source programming into the current show If there are any clashes the source programming will overwrite the current programming This option is not available when merging views High End Systems 101 Section 4 Shows e Merge By Number is the same as Merge By Name but the matching is done by number This option is not available when merging views e Replace if programming with the same number is found in the current show it is overwritten with programming from the source show If no match is found the source programmin
32. this can be useful with desk channels where you want one desk channel to control several dimmer channels This is sometimes known as soft patching To patch a fixture to a second DMX address select the fixture again and patch it as before Al ternatively using the command line Fixture Desk Channel 1 2 1 1 4 2 5 Enter patches the desk channel to DMX Processor 2 universe 1 address 1 and to DMX Processor 4 universe 2 address 5 Similarly you can patch a fixture multiple times so as to fill a specified range of DMX addresses This can be useful if you want to soft patch a desk channel to a continuous series of dimmer DMxX addresses Fixture Desk Channel 1 1 Thru 10 Enter patches the desk channel to each address between 1 and 10 Tip You don t have to patch fixtures before you start programming Once the fixtures have been added they can be programmed However without a patch you will not be able to output DMX High End Systems 107 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 5 2 3 Finding Unused DMX Addresses Fixture Window Z Clone Unpatch 1 pp 8000 feud Universes Univ U erses Universes i f ve Unpatch A 7 te Fixture Auto Auto View z a FO es Bulkder Paletles Kind B rse 4 um Start Tvo Hur tat Tv Num Start Tvoe So eenn 1 512 Free Channels 512 Free Channels 1 512 Free Channels 17 Studio Color S7S R 33 Studio Color S75 B 49 Studio Color 575 K 6S Studio Color 575
33. 0 button up 1 button down 321 Section 21 Open Sound Control Hog 40S OSC Command Path Data key hog hardware at 0 button up 1 button down key hog hardware minus 0 button up 1 button down key hog hardware plus 0 button up 1 button down key hog hardware slash 0 button up 1 button down backspace key hog hardware back 0 button up 1 button down space H keys func hog hardware h 0 button up 1 button down tion keys Main Play key hog hardware maingo 0 button up 1 button down Main Pause key hog hardware mainhalt 0 button up 1 button down Main Back key hog hardware mainback 0 button up 1 button down Center Choose hog hardware main 0 button up 1 button down key choose Skip Forward hog hardware skipfwd 0 button up 1 button down Skip Back hog hardware skipback 0 button up 1 button down Hog 40S outputs OSC messages for the LED Status of front panel hardware buttons that have an led The OSC path for led feedback is hog status led button name For example to receive LED feedback for the clear key on your OSC device you need to setup an LED to receive hog status led clear 322 High End Systems Section 22 Linear Timecode LTC Linear Timecode LTC is a form of SMPTE timecode encoded into an audio signal The Hog 40S can listen to LTC by inputting the LTC signal directl
34. 1 x 5x20mm 5A T fuse Musical Instrument Digital Interface input output and thru ports 3 pin XLR Linear Timecode Input 3 x DVI I single link female connectors 2 x Neutrik Ethercon Gigabit Ethernet port Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 6 rear 1 inside front utility tray 1 inside armrest 8 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Galvanized Isolated Built in Miniature QWERTY keyboard 34 1 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power Weight Dimensions with Screen Down Dimensions with Screen Up 300W 75 Ibs 34 kg 40 5 wide x 28 49 723 7mm deep x 6 49 164 75mm high 40 5 1028 7mm wide x 28 49 723 7mm deep x 16 43 417 39mm high 34 2 Full Boar 4 Console 34 2 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back High End Systems 435 Mains in DVI out USB Ethernet LTC In MIDI in out thru DMX Out Keyboard Section 34 Technical Specifications IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 5A maximum 2 x 24 pin DVI D single link female connectors Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 4 rear Universal Serial Bus 3 0 ports 1 top 2 x Neutrik Ethercon Gigabit Ethernet port 3 pin XLR Linear Timecode Input Musical Instrument Digital Interface input output and thru ports 4 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Not included Generic Class USB keyboards Supported 34 2 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power Weight Dimens
35. 16 bit fixture 2 Select the channel cell for Channel 3 and press Set Enter 2 3 to indicate that channels 2 and 3 combine to create a single 16 bit fixture 3 Repeat the above for channels 4 and 5 Configure Pan and Tilt Functions 1 Select the function cell for the first 2 3 channel and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Position on the left column to display a list of Position function sub categories 3 Select Pan as the desired function The window will close and you will see pan assigned as the function and feature for channel 2 Note the feature column will auto fill with Pan 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 2 3 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the intensity channel 0 gt 65535 and press Enter High End Systems 355 Section 25 The Fixture Builder 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 2 3 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in degrees 270 gt 270 and press Enter This real world value will map the 540 degrees of movement across the DMX range so the middle of the range 32768 is equal to 0 Note that you could instead enter 0 gt 540 if desired but then this would be different than existing fixtures as the 0 value would equal a DMX value of 0 6 Repeat the above for the second 2 3 channel 7 Repeat all of the above for Tilt on the two 4 5 channels Cyan Magenta Yellow 356 Fixture Builder Tutor
36. 17 Playback Timing Function De Notes fault Release Time 2s The time over which parameter values go to their default values when the cuelist is released see Releasing Masters p 255 Assert Time 2s The time in which parameters go to their values de termined by the cuelist when the cuelist is asserted see Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others p 266 Back Time 2s The time in which the cuelist steps back to the previ ous cue when the Halt key is pressed twice to first halt the cuelist and then send it back Cuelist Rate 100 Default proportion rate of the cuelist A rate of 50 will double all cue timings a rate of 200 will halve all cue timings Cue Only Off Releases previous cue s tracking values as you ad vance the list to the next cue Tracking values are released using the total fade time of the cue being played Tip If you have assigned a release assert or back time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default time press the Default button adjacent to the appropriate cell Cuelist Wrapping Wrapping decides what happens to a cuelist when it reaches the final cue Configure the wrapping in the Action at End of List menu e Wrap to beginning of list Pressing Go after the final cue is reached sends the cuelist to its first cue e Add release end cue Pressing Go after the final cue is reached releases the list and sends it to its first cue e Auto release at end The cuelist is releas
37. 17 1 1 Attaching Cuelists and Scenes to Masters Cuelists and Scenes are automatically attached to a master when you create them with the Record Choose syntax see Recording to a Cuelist on a Master p 177 Otherwise to attach a cuelist to a master List or Scene 1 Move Choose attaches Cuelist 1 onto the chosen master Tip You can reference several cuelists and scenes to different masters using pages see Pages p 289 Moving and Copying Cuelists between Masters Moving a cuelist between masters will detach it from its original master Copying a cuelist between masters will leave the cuelist in its original location and attach a copy of the cuelist to the new location To move a cuelist 1 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to move the cuelist from 2 Move 3 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to move the cuelist to To copy and so duplicate a cuelist 1 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to copy the cuelist from 2 Copy 3 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to copy the cuelist to Detaching a Cuelist from a Master To detach a cuelist from a master High End Systems 251 Section 17 Playback Delete Choose detaches the cuelist from the chosen master Note that this will not delete the cuelist itself or remove it from the cuelist directory only detach it from the master 17 1 2 Controlling Playback Once assigned to masters cuelists can b
38. 270 mt sit o 065535 f0 gt 270 6 Cyan Variable ___ 255 gt 0 0 gt 100 7 Magenta i gt 100 Yellow fariable gt 100 x a a 3 Strobe trobe Fixture Control Fixture Control w Strobe nT Adai inl p 3 g g New D o o oD m 3 x m 3 2 Build Type The number of DMX entries needs to be increased for this channel 1 Select the Channel cell for channel 10 2 Press the New DMX Entry button to add an additional DMX entry for channel 10 3 Repeat the above until there are 8 channel entries for this channel Define each DMX entry for Strobe 362 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder 10 11 12 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub categories Select Strobe as the desired function The window will close and you will see Strobe assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Shutter Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX value for the Open Shutter according to the DMX protocol 0 and press Enter Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set A dialog box will display a list of shutter options Select the open shutter option and press Enter Repeat the above steps for
39. 3 4 4 Configuring E1 31 SACN Output oo ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeaes 80 3 5 Adding Playback WINGS cccececeeeeeee nee e tees a eeee eee eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 82 3 6 Adding Master WINGS cccceeeceeeeeee testes nets ates ates nessa eeea etna eeaee 84 3 7 Adding DMX Widgets ceeceeeeee cece cette eee eee e sees eee eeeaeeeaeeed 85 Be SNOWS veeraa aaa aa e ra Sou weadwe vse neces desi vcustewsecwesceusee 87 4 1 Launch a New Show 0 00 cece reenter eee eee etre eeaeeeaeeeae 87 4 2 Launch an Existing SHOW cccceee cece eee eee eee eects nets nets a eeeaeeeee 87 4 3 Connect to a Network SHOW ccceceeeeeee ences eee e testes tenet need 87 4 4 Change the Currently Loaded SHOW ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 88 4 5 Automatically Launch a Show at Console Startup 008 88 4 6 Managing Show Data ccceececeeee cette eee eset eee ee ates ates ates nena eed 89 4 7 Startup Comment MACOS 0 cece cece e eect eee e eee ee een een een tenes 89 4 8 Backing Up Your SHOW cccccee cece ce ence eee e teers cee nett anes anes eeeee 90 4 9 User Preferences aici ccccctues cestesereestvenygeciuitves paper genaeneeeeeseeeenets 91 4 9 1 Desklight Worklight and Vent Light Preferences 91 4 9 2 Touchscreen Backlight Brightness escenes 91 4 9 3 Trackball and Trackball Ring Preferences eee 91 4 9 4 Center Wheel Preferences ccecceeeeeee tees eeeeeeeaeeene ees 94 4 9
40. 3 54 89 85mm high 34 5 DMX Processor 8000 34 5 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in V Lock style locking IEC 320 connector 100 240V 50 60Hz 4A maximum DMX out Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Isolated Half Duplex DMX512 outputs x8 Ethernet EtherCon Gigabit Ethernet port x2 Expansion USB A 2 0 High Speed x2 High End Systems 437 Section 34 Technical Specifications 34 5 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 200W Weight 2 7Kg Dimensions 480mm w x 280mm d x 45mm h 1U 19 inch rack compatible 34 6 Playback Wing 4 34 6 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in Built in Power Supply with IEC 320 connector 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A maximum Digital video in DVI D connector USB Type B USB input socket USB A 2 0 High Speed x2 34 6 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 75W Weight 27 6 Ibs 12 51 kg Dimensions 20 14 511 56mm wide by 24 02 610 05mm deep by 9 62 244 34mm high 34 6 3 Performance Display 15 6 Diagonal active matrix TFT LCD Native resolution 1366 x 768 Input frequency 31 5 80 kHz H 56 75 Hz V Contrast ratio 500 1 typical Viewing angle 160 x 160 degrees typical Response 80 ms typical Brightness 300 cd mz2 typical 438 High End Systems Section 34 Technical Specifications 34 7 Master Wing 4 34 7 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in Built in Power Supply with IEC 320 connector 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A maximum Digital video in DVI D connector U
41. 4 and Hog 4PC Some of the information contained in this manual will only apply to specific consoles in the Hog 4 family but that information will be clearly identified as console specific In this manual the word key is used to indicate a hardware button on the console s front panel For example press the Enter key The word button when used in this manual refers to virtual buttons that can be pressed on the touch screens or clicked on with the Trackball or mouse This manual can be read in any order but if you haven t used a Hog 4 console before you may want to start with the Hog 40S Fundamentals p 21 You can open your console s built in User Manual at any time by pressing the Help button on the Window Control Toolbar at the top of the right hand screen 1 2 Manual Symbols The following formatting conventions are used in the text of this manual XXXX text that is italicized and underlined indicates a reference to a term in the glossary XXXxX dark red text indicates the name of an interface element such as a button key or window XXXX dark red text inside a set of brackets indicates a button that has a label specific to the show that is created by the console or the user XXXxX dark blue text indicates information that you should literally input into the Hog 40S verbatim XXXX dark blue text inside a set of brackets indicates the manual is only describing the type of information that y
42. 4 Console DMX Processor 8000 or Hog 4PC is the best way realize the full dmx output potential of your setup DMX Built in Widgets to fully Output DMX Out reach DMX output Poten puts potential tial Hog 4 16 Uni 8 Universes 8 Single or 2 Super or Console verses 1 Super duper DMX 16 Uni 8 Universes 8 Single or 2 Super or Pro verses 1 Super duper cessor 8000 Hog 4PC 8 Uni None 8 Single or 2 Super or verses 1 Super duper To attach an external DMX widgets High End Systems 1 Connect the USB port of the dmx widget to the an open USB port on the console Superwidgets also require an external DC power source Setup Network Assign the dmx widget to one of the available dmx outputs of the internal DP8000 by selecting the wing s unique ID number in the drop down menu 85 86 4 Section 3 Setting Up the System If you have more than one dmx widget plugged in you can identify which is which by pressing the Beacon button for the appropriate universe output mapping High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 1 Launch a New Show To launch a new show press the Launch New Show button in the start window A browser window will open Select the directory where you wish to store the show give it a name and then press the finish button The console will then launch all the neccessary processes to get you up and running in your new blank show TIP If the launch new show button is greyed out
43. 44 section priority 43 spreadsheets 41 all button 126 allow refs button when recording palettes 162 apply patch 105 arrow keys see keys cursor art net 78 art net input 341 assert 266 assert time 266 auto kinds 234 auto launch 88 auto palettes 116 auto release 256 auto update 245 back button 183 back key 127 252 back time 259 backlight off time 62 console touch screens 53 backup 90 backwards button 183 beacon 82 beam modifying values 132 133 blind mode 247 blocking 186 removing blocking 187 boot server 67 brightness desklights 91 touch screens 53 buddying with fanning 145 bugs reporting 421 burning a CD 49 High End Systems button 19 C calibration colour 34 135 calibration of touch screens 52 capture activity 293 CD drive creating a CD 49 ejecting a disk 49 CD ROM drive 89 center wheel 94 129 chases configuring playback controls 283 setting rate with Tap Sync 279 using cuelist as 276 choose key 251 252 CITP 172 cleaning faders 426 client 72 clock 22 display format 52 clock toolbar 216 clock triggers 214 clock console 52 clone see copying fixture parameter values cloning patching 111 112 CMY 32 134 collapse aggregated sections 42 colour modifying values 132 133 colour calibration 34 135 colour coding 37 colour models 32 134 colour picker 34 136 colour scheme 53 colour temperature 33 command keys 299
44. 5 Encoder Wheel Button Options cceeeeeeeeeee eter etree 96 4 9 6 Keys and Button Preference cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 96 4 9 7 Importing and Exporting Show Preferences sese 97 4 10 Merging SHOWS ccccceeceeee cece eee e eee eeneeea nese nena eeaa een eeaeeeaes 97 High End Systems Lighting Control System 4 10 1 Merging Fixture Types ceeeeee cece ceee teen teen eeea tena eeaee 98 4 10 2 Merging Fixtures cccccceeeeeeee cece eee ee eeeeeeaeeeaeeeaneeaes 99 4 10 3 Merging Programming cccceeeeeneeeneeeeeeaeeeaeenaes 101 4 10 4 Dependencies sssssrsssssssrssrrsrsrrrsrertrrrerrsrrsrrserererere 102 4 10 5 Merging Examples ccceeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee een een ees 102 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures s eesseeseeeeeeeee 103 5 1 Adding FIXtures secsi arian ea Vane aps nee vied fee de E A es 103 5 2 PatchinguEIXtures soi cet a E E A abet anemia ce ches 105 5 2 1 Patching Several Fixtures at ONCE ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeea eens 106 5 2 2 Patching Fixtures to Multiple Addresses 0 107 5 2 3 Finding Unused DMX Addresses seeen 108 5 2 4 Adding and Removing DMX Processors 0 seeeeeees 108 5 2 5 Fixtures with Multiple Patch Points ceeeeeeeee eee 109 5 2 6 Cloning Universes 0 0 e eee eee eee eee e ea eee atten teed 111 5 2 7 Cloning DMX Processors cecene 112 5 2 8 Unpatching Fixtures 2 0 0 0 cceeceeeeeee eee e eres eee
45. 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers e Fixture 4 70 Enter assigns Fixture 4 to 70 Fixture 4 5 Enter assigns Fixture 4 to 50 not 5 e Fixture 4 05 Enter assigns Fixture 4 to 5 To assign fixtures to full or zero e Fixture 4 Full assigns Fixture 4 to full e Fixture 4 Out assigns Fixture 4 to zero The Out button is on the Main Toolbar The intensity of a fixture can be changed relative to its current level for example e Fixture 4 5 Enter increases the intensity of Fixture 4 by 50 e Fixture 4 10 Enter reduces the intensity of Fixture 4 by 10 The intensity of a fixture can be scaled proportionally for example e Fixture 4 70 Enter scales the intensity of Fixture 4 to 70 of its ori ginal value e Fixture 4 120 Enter scales the intensity of Fixture 4 to 120 of its original value With the i Wheel On the Hog 4 Console and on Hog 4PC only Moving the I Wheel changes the level of the selected fixtures When selecting several fixtures and adjusting levels the wheel will maintain relative differences between them so that all intensities change by the same amount For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 20 and 2 will move to 60 By holding the Pig key whilst using the wheel intensities will be increased or decreased in pro portion to their individual level For example if fixture 1 is at 10
46. 87 automatically 88 launch macros 89 launch new show 87 learn timing 213 leave in background 290 matching master levels 292 levels view window 273 library merged status 48 merging 97 linear timecode see timecode link cues 217 links see link cues live key 239 242 locking console 58 dmx processor 62 logging off 58 loops 217 action of go key 217 tracking through 219 lower priority 43 lowlight 245 lowlight palette 34 LTP 31 264 265 M macro command syntax 329 when changing pages 293 when cues run 280 when launching a show 89 maintain state 219 High End Systems Index maintenance 425 manual crossfade 275 manual cues 212 mark cues 188 mask syntax 21 when recording effect palettes 230 when recording palettes 160 masking when recording fade times 203 master wing adding 84 master wing 4 technical specifications 439 masters choosen 258 grand master 281 inhibitive 282 pages 289 physical 251 selected 258 virtual 251 262 which is the currently chosen master 22 matching Levels 292 media picker 171 catalyst 174 CITP 172 options 171 172 updating older show files with library defined previews 176 merge button with cuelists 194 with cues 178 with groups 152 with palettes 163 with scenes 199 merging shows 97 MIDI 303 Midi Notes 305 midi show control 303 MIDI timecode 312 modifier keys 47 monitor see display move in black mark cues 1
47. 9 2 Press the New DMX Entry button to add an additional DMX entry for channel 9 3 Repeat the above until there are 8 channel entries for this channel High End Systems 357 Section 25 The Fixture Builder ixture Builder Tutorial W CreateNew Copy From Delete Current Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified 05 10 2012 11 02 27 Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel a Function Feature Dmx Value Real World intensity 0 gt 255 0 gt 100 Pan Pan SSS Pan Pan gt B5535 as rit e 065535 0 gt 270 frit tf 65535 0 gt 270 New Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry Define each DMX entry for Slots 358 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder Tutorial W Create New Copy From Delete Current Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified 05 10 2012 11 02 27 Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel a Function Feature Dmx Value Real World 2 Ee ee Pan Pan 0 gt 65535 OT 0 gt 540 Tit e o 065535 0270 l6 Cyan Variable 255 gt 0 0 gt 100 Yellow i cal eal ale l sisisisis s 2 B G a o a a 5 o o a Ss a a obo obo obo UNUSED 0 0100 0 0 0O Sisis o o sislc c lc j j j j New Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry 1 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 9 and press Set A d
48. Boot server processes To use a custom DHCP range on your console enable the Use custom address range button and specify the start and end addresses in the fields below the button Firewalls and Hog 4PC Firewalls help to provide increased network security by controlling access to private networks and computers based on the public IP address of the client Since the Hog 40S depends on multi cast network traffic for communication to other system devices it is encouraged that users con figure their network and computer firewalls and security settings to allow for HogNet network traffic For some firewall applications this might mean turning off the firewall completely Configuring HogNet Network Settings on a DMX Processor In the front panel menu system of the DMX Processor 8000 is a network configuration menu used to configure IP address settings for that particular node This menu can be accessed by first selecting Network HogNet HogNet Config High End Systems 67 Section 3 Setting Up the System Configuring the IP addresses and subnet addresses on Hog processors follow the exact same rules and principals as outlined for network adapters consoles in Configuring Console Network Adapters p 65 Typical HogNet Network Configurations 68 Example A A single console and single DMX Processor Cat 5 Crossover Cable eeoococcoccocces 2222222222000009 8 DMX Universes DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP HE i i
49. Cue Chosen Unk Name Figure 11 3 Cue 3 Actively Fading into its Mark Chosen Master List 1 Enable Enable Follow Folow insert Timecode Clock Cue Chosen nk Figure 11 4 Cue 3 Fully Marked 11 9 Understanding Cuelists Cuelists are lists of cues usually used to play back the cues in a defined order A cue number is specific to each cuelist not the entire console so there can be a cue 1 for cuelists 1 2 and 3 High End Systems 191 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Cuelists are held in the Cuelist Directory Figure 11 5 The Cuelist Directory window and it is possible to copy or move cues between cuelists see Copying and Moving Cues p 180 To open the Cuelist Directory e Open List Alternatively List List Cuelist Directory Figure 11 5 The Cuelist Directory window To open a cuelist Figure 11 6 The Cuelist window Open Cuelist 1 select a cuelist from the Cuelist Directory Or with the command line List1 Open Open Choose select the master with the cuelist Tip Cuelist windows can be set to always show the same cuelist or to follow the currently chosen master see Cuelist Feedback p 270 11 10 Naming Cuelists You can name cuelists 1 Open List open the Cuelist Directory 192 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Chosen Master List 2 Learn View Enable Enable Follow Follow Timing Cue Timecode Clock Cue Chosen Name Mar
50. DP8000 2 Select the Catalyst tab of the node setting window 3 Deselect the enable button and hit apply 10 4 Adding Preview Thumbnails to Pre v2 0 0 Show Files Hog 4 OS and Hog 3 OS show files built with fixture library v4 7 and older will not display library based preview thumbnails in the media picker until the fixtures in the show file are updated using the follow steps 1 Open the patch window 2 Select the fixture s you wish to update with library based preview thumbnails 3 Press the refresh media button at the top of the patch window 176 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 Recording a Cue To record a look created in the Programmer or editor as a cue within a cuelist you need to specify a cuelist and cue number to record to If the cuelist does not yet exist Hog 40S will create it automatically For example to record Cue 4 into Cuelist 2 Record List 2 Cue 4 Enter Recording to a Cuelist on a Master You can choose a master rather than a cuelist when recording a cue This will record the cue to the cuelist currently attached to the chosen master or create a cuelist if it doesn t exist For ex ample 1 Press the Choose key above Master number 10 The Choose key will light up to show that Master 10 is the chosen master 2 Record 1 Enter records Cue 1 in the cuelist attached to Master 10 creating it if necessary To record more cues e Record 1 5 Ente
51. Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry Build Type 360 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder High End Systems Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 9 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Beam on the left column to display a list of Beam function sub categor ies Select Gobo as the desired function The window will close and you will see Gobo assigned as the function and feature for channel 9 Note the feature column will auto fill with slots Select this cell and press Set Choose Spin from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX range values for the gobo spin according to the DMX protocol 100 gt 200 and press Enter Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in RPM 100 gt 100rpm and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the random spin portion of the protocol using an other DMX entry for channel 9 361 Section 25 The Fixture Builder Strobe Control Channel Fixture Builder Tutorial Create New Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel a Function Feature Dmx Value a Real World intensity intensity 0 gt 255 _ _ 0 gt 100 Pan Pan 0 gt 65535 05 40 Pan Pan 0 gt 65535 0 gt 540 Tit o e 065535 0 gt
52. Down below the I Wheel Pig Open Backspace Pig Open Colour Pig Park Pig Record Pig Release Pig Setup Pig Size on the Window Con trol Toolbar Pig Touch Pig Undo Pig with the arrow keys Pig when pressing a button ina directory Pig when entering text with the on screen keyboard 414 Use Result Pig Set Acts as a right mouse click Pig When patching with View by DP enabled unpatches the selected fixtures Removes values from the currently highlighted cells in the Programmer or editor When leaving blind mode parameters will fade to their new values in the assigned or default fade time rather than snapping to their new values Opens the playback options for the cuelist on the selected master Copies the contents of the currently selected cells When using Flip to cycle a fixture through its flip po sitions goes through the possible positions in the reverse order to Flip without Pig Equivalent to pressing Go on all masters Changes the view to the previous view rather than the next view Changes the page to the previous page rather than the next page Nudges the intensity up by half the set nudge value Nudges the intensity down by half the set nudge value Opens the Launched Processes window Opens the Colour Picker rather than the Colour Dir ectory Unparks selected fixtures rather than parking them Pastes into the currently selected cells Rel
53. Fade Time State Strol stion Numa hntensty 27 gt z voe Pan Figure 2 16 A Typical Editor You can open an editor window for any cue scene or palette by holding down the Open key and selecting it from its directory window Alternatively you can use the command line e Cue 1 Open opens an editor for Cue 1 and makes it editable 2 9 1 Editor Window Controls The main part of an editor window shows the fixture parameter values in a spreadsheet view with each row representing a single fixture see Spreadsheets p 39 At the top of the window there are three toolbars with buttons the Editor Values Toolbar toolbar the Editor Toolbar and the Jump Toolbar The following sections describe the buttons that are common across all editors some editors have additional buttons that are specific to that type of editor and these are described in the relevant part of the manual The Editor Values Toolbar The Editor Values Toolbar has buttons for Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table and N Shot Use these buttons to display the different kinds of information associated with the fixture s parameters see Fade Delay and Path p 202 High End Systems 45 The Editor Toolbar Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals The Editor Toolbar has the following buttons Button Purpose Edit Show State Show Palettes Fade Changes Compact a The Jump Toolbar 2 9 2 46
54. Focture N No No 100 ves Figure 5 8 Fixture window before and after replicating 5 4 Changing the Fixture Type It is sometimes useful to change the type of a fixture for example because of production changes where one fixture of one type is replaced by another of a different type or because the rig has been changed perhaps by adding a scroller to a desk channel fixture such as a Par To change the fixture type 1 Setup gt Patch 2 Select the fixtures you want to change by clicking on the numbered button in the left hand column 3 Press the Change Type button and select the new fixture type from the list High End Systems 115 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 4 Hog 40S cannot change a fixture s type while it is patched You will be asked if you want to unpatch any patched fixtures don t forget to repatch them after wards Figure 5 9 Changed Fixture Type shows the contents of the Fixture window before and after changing the fixture type Important Changing a fixture s type may cause ambiguities in any programming that has already taken place Whilst Hog 40S translates all real world figure data including colour and beam between fixture functions it cannot match the performance of a higher specification unit with a greater number of functions to that of a lower specification unit Fx Num a Note Dfa Paka Patch Ty Patch Note SwoAxes Paninvert TRinvert intensty Col Cal Parked
55. HTP ts A Chase Cue Only A Override Other Go Release WewCues New Cues Tip You can quickly open the Playback Options window of a cuelist attached to a master by holding the Pig key and pressing the master s Choose key Properties Pisybeck Prorty V ia a E Use HTP E Pie add Effects E P Persist On Override _ Release On OtherGo 7 QO is chase Oo Timing Master Man Reset On Release g Track Through Loops oO Cue Only Mark Time ps T Defaut go Mark Fade New Cues gO Mark Time Hew Cues Release Time a oO Defaut Rete eels ue rap to begnnng of kst mm E Acne esses M Back Time oO Defaut VO Settings Chock Settings g ool Enable Timecode g Trigger forwards only E Enable Clock E more usci E Supress usc out Reset to Defauts Figure 17 4 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options Window You can configure the default settings for new cuelists in the Playback Defaults pane of the User Preferences window e Setup gt Preferences Playback Defaults You can also customise the function of each of the master controls and main controls see Con figuring Playback Controls p 283 Tip You can revert all of the settings in the Cuelist pane of the Playback De faults window by pressing the Reset to Defaults button in the bottom left corner of the window Cuelist Timing and Rate Settings You can assign several settings that control cuelist timing High End Systems 259 Section
56. K D Timecode Widgets 8 O Diagnostics Figure 3 8 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window DMX Processors connected together with an Ethernet switch Large systems can have several consoles Hog 4PC systems and DMX Processors controlling large lighting rigs 3 3 1 Configuring Console Network Adapters At the top of the HogNet tab in the Control Panel is a drop down menu of all the installed network adapters usable by the Hog OS The Hog 4 console will only list one network adapter and it will be greyed out while Windows computers running Hog 4PC might have more than one network adapter listed depending on how many network adapters are installed and enabled on the computer High End Systems 65 Section 3 Setting Up the System Control Panel v1 0 0 b 238 Network Adapter DHCP Boot Server mm Ospisys Reatek PCie GBE Cortroter ELET wings p MAC e0 cb 4e 01 3b61 MO uo Link State Up Rx Packets 95833 3 Time and Date T Auto Launch HogNet Address Range Start Oaar an corms tons E O Obtain an P address using DHCP Use custom P settings Aea E S2 163 0102 Gateway Fixturelet i System info Dae La 255 255 255 9 Figure 3 9 The Network pane of the Control Panel After selecting an adapter from the drop down menu the area below the menu will show the adapter s current status e A link status of Up indicates the adapter is connected to a network and is ready to
57. Macros from the Command Line To run a Keystroke Macro from the command line Macro 1 Enter sends a start command to Macro 1 During Macro playback the Macro LED will illuminate green and M will appear to the right of the command line 336 High End Systems Section 23 Macros Tip Keystroke Macros can also be triggered within cuelists or scenes by using a Comment Macro See Comment Macros p 329 for more information 23 3 4 Editing Keystroke Macros You can edit the contents of a Macro in an editor window For example to open Macro 1 for editing 1 Open Macro opens the Macro Directory 2 Open Macro 1 opens the Macro editor for Macro 1 3 Alternatively using the command line Open Macro 1 Command Command D Duration Comment Figure 23 1 The Macro Window The Keystroke Macro window has six columns that define each step of the macro e Wait The Wait time is the time between the triggering of the previous step and the next step to be triggered e Name The name of the step e Command Type of comand used in this step e Command Data The data that is applied to the selected command The type of command selected will determine the type of available command data Duration The amount of time for the command data to be applied This inform ation is useful for encoder movements and flash key presses Comment A notes field Each of the above fields can be edited by selecting the appropri
58. Masking toolbar For example suppose that you wanted to add a gobo a beam parameter to the existing Colour Palette 2 1 Open Colour opens the Colour Directory Open Colour 2 opens the palette editor for Colour Palette 2 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current editor Select the B Beam button on the Palette Masking Toolbar Edit the fixture parameter values to assign the required gobo Do piw Ds Press Update to save the changes Tip You can also use the Palette Masking Toolbar to quickly remove all values of a particular parameter type from a palette by deselecting the appro priate button before updating 8 4 Deleting Palettes Important Deleting a palette will remove all references to the palette that have been recorded in cues scenes and other palettes and replace the refer ences with numerical parameter values Creating a new palette in the same location will not replace the references which are removed once the palette is deleted To delete a palette using the command line 1 Colour 1 Delete deletes Colour Palette 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the palette directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the palette to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK 156 High End Systems Section 8 Palettes J Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confi
59. Next This is similar to Follow Current except that the next cue is dis played rather than the current one When the last cue is played the first cue in the cuelist is displayed Tip As well as the buttons in the Cue Editor window you can also step through the cues using the Next and Back keys while holding down the Cue key 11 7 Working with Tracking Hog 40S uses tracking which gives it some very powerful abilities Tracking can also add extra complexity but Hog 40S has several functions that make working with tracking straightforward For a detailed discussion about tracking see Tracking p 31 11 7 1 Tracking Values Backwards When Recording You can use the Track Backwards feature when you record a cue to assign the parameter values to the last cue they appeared in rather than the cue being recorded For example suppose that you have a series of cues with intensity values for three fixtures Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 50 50 50 Cue 2 60 60 Cue 3 70 High End Systems 183 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists If you assign all three fixtures to 100 and record with merge into Cue 3 see Insert Merge and Replace p 178 for recording with merging you would get these values Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 50 50 50 Cue 2 60 60 Cue 3 100 100 100 However if you did the same thing with Track Backwards you would get Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 50 50 100 Cue 2 60 100 Cue 3 100 The value of 100 has been
60. RESUME cuelist number Skip Forward 0x4 TIMED_GO time 0 cue number cuelist number Skip Back 0x4 TIMED_GO time 0 cue number cuelist number Release Oxb GO_OFF cuelist number Change Page Ox1d OPEN_CUE_PATH page number MIDI show control is enabled by default for all cuelists and scenes You can assign a cuelist or scene to ignore incoming MIDI Show Control commands 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Ignore MSC In Similarly you can prevent the MIDI Show Control commands for a cuelist being sent out from the console 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Suppress MSC Out Tip MSC doesn t distinguish between cues and scenes as Hog 40S does so there are no MSC commands to control scenes To work round this you can send an MSC command with a CUE_PATH value of 5 Hog 40S will treat the cue number as a scene number instead 20 2 MIDI Notes MIDI Notes is a common language of the well established MIDI standard that can be used to control console features such as Programming buttons Playback buttons Touch Screen Soft Keys and Comment Macros Each of these feature categories uses a specific MIDI map to asso ciate notes with console functions High End Systems 305 20 2 1 Section 20 MIDI Bringing MIDI Notes into the Console To bring MIDI Notes into the console 1 6 Connect a MIDI device to the MIDI In port on the back of the console If you are using a USB Midi devi
61. Random 3 High weighted Mark On Random 1 Low weighted a KK a Centre weighted Figure 14 1 Effect Tables e Iris Chase A Sawtooth table is applied to the iris Tip You can create many of these useful combinations of tables using the predefined effects palettes see Predefined Effect Palettes p 229 14 1 2 Table Effect Attributes The appearance of the effect table through a combination of adjustments to its attributes rate size offset begin end start length direction bounce and N shot Effect Rate 222 The effect rate controls the speed of the effect in cycles per minute Adjusting an effect s rate globally will increase or decrease the number of cycles it completes per minute When combining effects you can use the rate attribute to build a specific look For example if you create an effect where a fixture performs a circular motion fading in on the first circuit out on the second then the effect on the intensity parameter would need to be half of the rate on the position parameters The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different rate values 60 cpm 30 cpm 120 cpm High End Systems Section 14 Effects Effect Size The range over which the parameter value varies This is described in terms appropriate for the parameter for example degrees for position parameters or slots for slotted colour parameters For
62. Select the palette to be named 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name an effect palette immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window Enter the palette name and select OK Using Effect Palettes in Programming In the Programmer or editor you can apply an effect by selecting it from the Effect Directory The effect will be applied to the current fixture selection providing that it contains parameter information for the selected fixtures An iris step effect cannot therefore be applied to a fixture that has no iris function By default predefined effect palettes are direct see Direct Palettes p 162 For example 1 Open Effect open the Effect Directory window 2 1Thru 5 select the fixtures 3 Effect 1 select the effect from the Effect Directory window Or using the command line 1 Thru 5 Effect 1 Enter Editing Effect Palettes You can edit an effect palette by opening it in an editor window you can then edit its contents in the same way as you edit values in any editor See Building Table Effects in Editors p 226 To open an effect in an editor 1 Open Effect open the Effect Directory 2 Open Effect 1 open the editor for Effect 1 You can select the editor view Table Size Rate Offset Length N Shot you wish to edit in Also ensure that the editor is active with its Edit button selected You can also open an effects palette with the c
63. Settings window 3 Lock or unlock the DMX Processor and OK to apply and close the window Important Make sure that you keep a record of your lock code close to hand if your DMX Processor is located away from the console The DMX Processor cannot be unlocked without it or a console operator Backlight Off Time Selecting Backlight in the Control Panel opens a screen where you can assign the delay time before the backlight goes off The Permanent setting keeps the light on continually Watchdog The Watchdog feature automatically restarts the DMX Processor if its software stops running for some reason Watchdog is on by default and generally it is best to leave it switched on However if you suspect that an DMX Processor is not working correctly you may want to turn Watchdog off so that you can see any error messages before restarting it 1 Inthe Control Panel select Watchdog 2 Deselect the Watchdog checkbox and select OK High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 2 8 3 2 9 3 2 10 Resetting the DMX Processor There are two types of reset soft and hard Soft Reset resets the DMX Processor so that it re initialises communication with the network Hard Reset is equivalent to turning off and on the DMX Processor s mains power You can do both types of reset from the Control Panel In addi tion you can reset a DMX Processor by right clicking on its entry in the Network window of the console Setup Netwo
64. Sikkerhedsinformation Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock VIGTIGT LEDEREN MED GUL GROEN ISOLATION MAA KUN TILSLUTTES KLEMME MAERKET O ELLER 432 High End Systems Section 33 Safety Information 33 7 REIL Oak 33 7 1 Dig Gt KKA D OHH SRO Alc CO EITSARARADEMOAORA 20A OWA ILS HoOTHWET 33 7 2 Ba RBIS Sieh REO Ale High End Systems 1 2 FIFOMWITWIAGLIRE CCOKXBSSIIMOLBSRIE UFO A FRICLEADT BIILFFFERMVAITTHKSL Brown E Live 37 7 Blue Neutral a2 kDIL e Green Yellow x Earth 7 ZA COCHHAENTHSSMMICAT DEKERTA IST OimkOB Ext LTAEUBAMHAVET URID LEAS CHER LTUFSL e Green Yellow KEE ODT TILE JITOA ZELI FP ROV URI OORHOHSMIR fei SD Green Yellow WEE OWI LT Fel e Blue O7 DPILE FIT OBRICN NRE N MALE BICKSSONEBMILEELTERSL Brown Kf OF TPILE FIT OIwWRAIXK L HR ECS MEMELS Id HILSON MICHGMLTRS bs CO BIE Class I ATC ITQAITQREIL7 AZ LINIE YEA COR BILEIR LIKE COMEAHRET CORBEMRtaR IFS HSEWCKSEL S32 RET DAAR BRADY RL OR SL Sip MRO LAKE OLRMOAOMTS 1 7 kD CEH RIRETTAS AN VILFELTHECA 433 Section 34 Technical Specifications 34 1 Hog 4 Console 34 1 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in MIDI in out thru LTC In DVI out Ethernet USB DMX out Keyboard IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 90 250V 50 60Hz 2A maximum
65. Timecode p 313 e Clock A real world time and date value when a cue is triggered see Clock Triggers p 214 Figure 13 1 Cue timings shows how the main kinds of timing and triggering values control the playback of cues Cue 1 Cue 1 Cue 2 trigger completes trigger Intensity Follow on time Delay in Fade in Wait Delay out Fade out Figure 13 1 Cue timings Hog 40S allows you to assign timings to each parameter of each fixture in a cue scene or palette Often you will want to assign the same value to every fixture parameter this is described in Fade Delay and Path p 202 Assigning timings for individual parameters is described in Indi vidual Parameter Timings p 206 13 2 13 2 1 202 Fade Delay and Path You can assign fade time and delay times as well as paths to cues and scenes Cues recorded without assigning any time information will be given the default time this can be adjusted in the Default Timing pane of the User Preferences window Fade Time To record a cue with a fade time other than the default 1 Create the desired look for the cue in the Programmer 2 Fixture Enter select all the fixtures currently in the Programmer 3 Time 7 Enter assign a fade time of 7 seconds 4 Record Cue 1 Enter record the cue on the currently chosen master To assign times greater than 1 minute enter the number of minutes followed by the number of seconds High End Systems
66. To create a direct palette 1 Assign the fixtures as required 2 Record 3 As Direct 4 Position 2 Enter choose a location for the palette To convert an existing palette to a direct palette 1 Open Colour open the appropriate Palette Directory 2 Set the directory window to spreadsheet view by pressing the E button 3 Select the Is Direct cell for the palette you want to change and press Set to toggle the value to Yes Note that converting a palette to a direct palette will not alter any programming done previously using the palette cues and scenes already recorded will still contain references to the palette Only subsequent programming will be effected 8 7 Insert Merge and Replace When recording or copying a palette if the destination location already has a palette recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace If you are moving a palette only the Insert option is available e Insert creates a new destination palette The new palette will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge incorporates the new information into the destination palette If the same fixtures and parameters are in both palettes the new values will replace the old e Replace overwrites the palette information in that destination High End Systems 163 Section 8 Palettes Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or
67. To customise a directory item in button view 38 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Position Directory Up N Out Blinder Figure 2 10 Directory Item Colour 1 Using the mouse right click on the directory button to open the right click menu 2 Click on one of the 15 options shown in Figure 2 11 The Preset Colour Options to assign the directory item this colour 3 Alternatively click on Choose to select a custom colour from a colour wheel or click None to select the standard grey colour Click on Auto to have palettes in the Colour directory automatically determine the button color based upon the dominate colour value recorded in the palette To customise a directory item in spreadsheet view 1 Select the Colour cell and press Set to open the colour selection menu 2 Click on one of the 15 preset colours to assign the directory item this colour 3 Alternatively click on Choose to select a custom colour from a colour wheel or click None to select the standard grey colour Click on Auto to have palettes in the Colour directory automatically determine the button color based upon the dominate colour value recorded in the palette Tip You can select multiple buttons or cells by clicking and dragging to assign the same colour to multiple items 2 8 Spreadsheets Similar to Excel spreadsheets many windows in the Hog 4OS such as the programmer output window and cue editors are presented as spr
68. To name a slot parameter 1 Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 For the desired fixture scroll right and select the Slot cell for the parameter required 3 Press Set select the desired slot name from the list and press Enter Releasable Parameters 124 Fixture parameters move to their default values when they are released You can prevent specific fixture parameters from returning to their default values so that they hold their current value until they are assigned to a new programmed value 1 Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures open the Edit Fixtures window 2 Click on the Releasable cell for the required fixture parameter 3 Press the Set key to assign the fixture parameter to be releasable or not as re quired High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 Selecting Fixtures There are three ways to select fixtures using the command line with the numeric keypad visually selecting and clicking on the fixture s number in the programmer or by selecting groups from the groups directory Selecting Single Fixtures To select a single fixture visually in the programmer or other open editor click on the fixture s number in the Num column of the spreadsheet To select a single fixture using the command line type the fixture s user number using the keypad and then press enter For example to select Studio Color number 1 If more than one fixture in
69. Wheel button the console will create separate beam palettes for each beam effect wheel in fixtures that have more than one This ensures that you can use the palettes to program looks that use both wheels simultaneously without the palettes con flicting with each other The Auto Palettes window also allows you to choose the alignment spacing of the palette s dir ectory window The alignment spacing controls how many palettes are displayed across the dir ectory window for example 6 for a half screen window 12 for a full screen window For more information on groups and palettes see Groups p 149 and Palettes p 153 5 7 Configuring Fixtures Each fixture has a variety of settings that control how Hog 40S handles it Settings that control how the fixture as a whole behaves are configured in the Fixture window while settings that are specific to individual parameters are configured in the Edit Fixtures window 5 7 1 Fixture Configuration To open the Fixture window Figure 5 11 The Fixture window Setup Patch Open Fixture 118 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Repicate Figure 5 11 The Fixture window In the Fixture window you can view but not alter the fixture type and communications protocol for each fixture To show these columns right click on any column header and select either Type or Protocol Modifying the User Number The User Number is the n
70. a x Cancel Generate Figure 5 10 The Auto Palettes window You can choose to have the console automatically make e Groups If the Make Groups button is depressed the console will make groups for each fixture type You can specify the repeat multiple for the groups to be created For example with a value of 3 Group 1 will contain fixtures 1 4 7 10 Group 2 fixtures 2 5 8 11 Group 3 fixtures 3 6 9 12 Intensity Palettes If the Make Intensity Palettes button is depressed the console will make intensity palettes Position Palettes If the Make Position Palettes button is depressed the console will make position palettes e Colour Palettes If the Make Colour Palettes button is depressed the console will make colour palettes If you press the adjacent Separate by Wheel button High End Systems 117 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures the console will create separate colour palettes for each colour wheel in fixtures that have more than one This ensures that you can use the palettes to program looks that use both wheels simultaneously without the palettes conflicting with each other Auto generated Colour palettes that make use of colour mixing in formation will automatically have their buttons colour coded with appropriate custom colour selections e Beam Palettes If the Make Beam Palettes button is depressed the console will make beam palettes If you press the adjacent Separate by
71. a palette is referenced during playback by editing the palette s contents in an editor window see Figure 8 2 The Palette Editor window For example to open Colour Palette 2 for editing 1 Open Colour opens the Colour Directory 2 Open Colour 2 opens the palette editor for Colour Palette 2 3 Alternatively using the command line Colour 2 Open 4 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current editor Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Pro grammer see Individual Parameter Timings p 206 Press Update after editing to save the changes to the palette For more information on working with editors see Editors p 45 Tip When you open a palette for editing you may only appear to see one fixture when you recorded several This is due to the way palettes can be global with a single set of parameter values that can be applied to any fixture see Global Per Fixture Type and Per Fixture p 158 Updating Palettes with Different Parameter Types Palettes contain one or more parameter types If you edit a palette and add values for parameters of a type that was not previously in the palette and then update the palette these values will not be stored If you want to change the parameter types that a palette contains you need to select the type from the Palette Masking Toolbar High End Systems 155 Section 8 Palettes The Palette
72. and press the appropriate button on the View Toolbar 2 Press OK to confirm To delete a view using the Views Directory 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Check that the directory s Guard button is depressed so that you can select buttons within the directory without activating them 3 Press the appropriate directory button and then the Delete key aa Click OK to confirm the delete Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 2 3 Abstraction A key advantange to the Hog 40S is that you don t have to worry about the technicalities of how each lighting manufacturer implemtents the features of their lighting fixtures because the Hog 4OS acts as a layer between you and the lighting hardware automatically converting abstract High End Systems 29 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 30 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals ideas of intensity colour and so on into the specific instructions that the fixtures need defined by their DMX protocol Referring to Fixtures The Hog 4OS treats every fixture as a single entity Every fixture is assigned a user number that allows users to easily recall a fixture and manipulate it s feature set no matter how many parameters it has For more information on givin
73. applied to the last cue that the intensity parameter had a value in If you Track Backwards a parameter that hasn t been given a value since the start of the cuelist the value is added to the first cue in the cuelist To record a cue with Track Backwards select the Backwards button on the Record Options Toolbar that appears after you press the Record key 1 2 3 4 Z Fixture 1 Thru 3 100 Enter Record Cue 3 Select Track Backwards on the Record Options Toolbar Enter Tip You can also Track Backwards when you update cues using Auto Update see Auto Update p 245 11 7 2 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward When you insert a new cue into a cuelist or merge changes into an existing cue the new values track forwards into later cues in the cuelist For example your cuelist has Cues 1 to 4 and Cue 1 has Fixture 1 programmed into it at 30 so that it tracks through the subsequent cues Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 184 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists You now insert a Cue 2 5 with Fixture 1 at 100 Because cues 3 and 4 do not change the intensity of Fixture 1 it will remain at 100 for the rest of the cuelist Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 2 5 100 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 You may want to record the new cue so that parameter values in the new cue return to their ori ginal value in the next cue so that the inse
74. as reference palettes any fixture parameters assigned using another palette is recorded as a numerical value If you want to record a palette as a reference palette select the Allow Refs record option 1 Assign the parameters of the fixtures using other palettes as required 2 Press Record 3 The Record Options Toolbar will appear at the bottom of the right hand touch screen Press the Allow Refs button 4 Press akey to choose the palette type for example Colour The Palette Direct ory will open 5 Select the palette location by pressing it in the Palette Directory window Direct Palettes Normally when you use a palette to assign parameter values for recording in a cue or scene a reference to the palette is inserted rather than numerical values To insert numerical values instead of references use direct palettes Cues and scenes recorded using direct palettes will not update if the palette is later changed because they contain ordinary parameter values rather than refer ences to a palette High End Systems Section 8 Palettes You can use a palette as a direct palette on a one off basis as you program or you can assign it to always act as a direct palette a direct palette is shown by a symbol D in the directory win dow To temporarily use an existing palette as a direct palette when calling it into the Programmer or editor e 1 Colour 1 the key indicates that the palette should be used in direct mode
75. be Hog4PC_X X X X msi where the Xs represented the software version number 2 Double click on the Hog4PC installer file to launch the install wizard The Hog 4PC installer will check your operating system and windows installer versions and then display the welcome screen High End Systems 395 Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC Welcome to the Hog4PC 1 0 0 266 Setup Wizard Please wait while the Setup Wizard prepares to guide you Computing space requirements 3 Ensure any Hog 4 USB devices such as widgets or wings have been discon nected from your computer and click on the Next button to continue 4 The wizard displays an End User License Agreement After you select accept the terms in the License Agreement you can click the Next button to continue 396 High End Systems Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC End User License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully End User License Agreement High End Systems Hog4PC End User License Agreement SERVER amp DESKTOP USE ONLY THIS SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN HES AND YOU AS AN INDIVIDUAL AND OR IF PURCHASED OR OTHERWISE ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY AN ENTITY PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AND USING THE 5 You can now choose which features of Hog 4PC you wish to install The listed options will vary depending on which components are already
76. can deselect a fixture visually in the Programmer or editor window by clicking on its number in the Num column High End Systems 127 6 1 7 6 2 6 2 1 128 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Reselecting Fixtures You can recall the last sub selection made before deselecting fixtures by pressing Previous on the Select Toolbar Selection Order The order in which you select fixtures is significant in controlling how fanning and effects are applied to them see Fanning p 142 and Effects p 221 For example applying a fan or effect after selecting fixtures 1 5 can appear different than if you selected fixtures 1 3 2 4 5 The selection order is relevant during programming and is recorded as part of groups but it is not recorded in palettes cues or scenes Tip Because the console records the selection order as part of groups you can select the group and use the Next and Back keys to subselect each fixture in a particular order By controlling the selection order when you record the group you can then work through a series of fixtures in the order they are physically positioned in the rig instead of in numerical order Reverse Shuffle and Reorder You can change the selection order of fixtures in predefined ways The Reverse Shuffle and Reorder buttons are on the Select Toolbar and Fanning Toolbar e Main Toolbar gt Select open the Select Toolbar Reverse reverses the selection se
77. changing what happens when a command key is pressed 300 copy move delete 299 creating 299 feedback 301 command line 23 syntax 21 comment macro see macro compact mode spreadsheets 41 console 451 locking the console 58 reporting problems 421 updating software 389 console failover 72 console tracking 74 control panel console date and time 52 displays 53 keyboard 56 57 network settings 87 system info 421 copy 44 copying cuelists 194 cuelists to pages 294 cues 180 effects 232 fixture parameter values 140 fixtures 115 groups 151 inhibitive masters to pages 294 pages 295 palettes 157 parameter values into an editor 243 scenes 198 scenes to pages 294 shows 48 user kinds 235 creating effects 224 pages 289 creation date 48 crossfade manual 275 cue only 280 cuelist directory 34 cuelists 191 configuring playback controls 283 copying 194 copying to pages 294 cue only 260 default rate 259 deleting 193 effect size scaling 275 feedback 270 IPCB fader mode 276 moving 194 moving to pages 294 multiple 264 naming 192 452 Index options 258 ordering of cues 217 pages 289 playback 251 rate override 274 removing from pages 294 renumbering 181 status 268 using as a chase 276 wrapping 260 cues clock triggers 214 copying 180 deleting 179 editing contents 182 editing parameter timings 206 editing times 204 follow on 21
78. copy parameter values from the fixtures of one group to the fixtures of another group within an editor Group 1 Copy Fixture Group 2 Enter copies the parameter values of the fixtures in group 1 to the fixtures in group 2 140 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers You can add parameter location and destination masks to any copy command 1 Thru 4 Intensity Copy List 3 Cue 1 Fixture 8 Thru 11 Enter copies the intensities of fixtures 1 to 4 in the current selection to fixtures 8 to 11 in cue 1 of cuelist 3 You can use Copy to reverse the order of values For example if fixture 1 is at 10 fixture 2 at 20 and fixture 3 is at 30 e 1Thru3 Copy 3 Thru 1 Enter the fixtures will now be at 30 20 and 10 respectively Tip When you press the Copy key the words Copy to appear on the com mand line This is a useful reminder of the syntax of the copy command In the Programmer or Editor Window You can copy fixture data by using the Copy and Paste commands click the right hand mouse or Trackball button on the desired cell s in the editor window and select Copy or Paste from the menu You can also use the Pig key to copy and paste selected cells Pig Copy copy e Pig Record paste Copy Options By default when you copy parameter values from one fixture to another the console will copy exactly the data from one fixture to another including any palette reference
79. current editor Parameter values being output by playbacks will not be affected To assign a pre existing palette to be the lowlight palette right click it in the palette directory and select it as the lowlight palette The lowlight palette is shown by the D icon in the palette directory window Tip You can use masking when creating the lowlight palette to ensure that all the required parameter types are included see Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 160 16 4 Auto Update When you are programming a complex show the look on stage may be built up from cuelists and scenes on several masters You can change the look by assigning fixture parameter values in the Programmer but it is difficult to know which cue or scene is contributing which values to the total on stage Hog 40S s Auto Update feature automatically suggests the appropriate cues palettes and scenes to merge the changes into allowing you to choose how the updates are per formed Auto Update E The list below shows cues scenes and palettes that have been overridden by the programmer item ype I List2 1 Cue 1 Cue CT Track Backwards C cotour 3 Palette Figure 16 1 The Auto Update window High End Systems 245 Section 16 Advanced Programming When you have finished editing in the Programmer you can merge the parameter values into the currently playing cues palettes and scenes by pressing the Update key The Auto Update window will open
80. dragged files rather than moving them High End Systems 371 Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity All Hog 40S consoles are capable of connecting directly to visualisers via the HogNet network Currently ESP Vision WYSIWYG MSD Capture and Light Converse are supported The Hog 4 Connectivity application must be installed on the visualization computer for this connectivity to function This section describes the basic information needed to install the Hog 4 Connectivity application on your visualiser computer as well as the configuration of the application For in depth visualiser usage please contact the visualiser manufacturer see Visualiser Support Contacts p 387 27 1 Installing the Connectivity Application You can download the current Hog 4 Connectivity installation application from the High End Systems website www highend com or or you can select to install the connectivity driver when installing Hog 4PC The following instructions assume you are running the separate connectivity driver installation To install the connectivity application 1 Double click the HogConnect_x x x x msi file to launch the install wizard 2 The Hog Connect installer will check your operating system and windows installer versions and then display the welcome screen Press Next to begin the installation process High End Systems 373 Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity g J Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Setup WW S e eces W
81. edge of the screen The graphical environment is highly customisable giving you complete control of the console and individual window layout For example you can rearrange column headers in list windows e g the Cuelist and Programmer windows High End Systems 23 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals to prioritise information that is most pertinent to a specific show or user Inform ation displayed can also be sorted or filtered When a user logs out these pref erences and settings are stored and retrieved again on logging in 2 2 1 Window Management Opening Windows Windows can be opened in four ways e From a Toolbar Some windows may have a dedicated button that can be pressed the Programmer for example e With the Open Key To open a window using console keys hold down Open and press the window s associated key or button For example e Open Position opens the Position Directory window e Open List opens the Cuelist Directory window e Open Choose opens the Cuelist window for the chosen master You can also hold down the Open key to gain access the second level of the main toolbar with buttons for many of the console s windows such as the Output and Parked windows From the Command Line You can specify the window to be opened using the command line and then press the Open key For example e Position 5 Open opens the editor window for Position Palette 5 Cue 4 8 Open opens the edit
82. editor Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Pro grammer see Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters p 125 For general information on working with editors see Editors p 45 12 5 Scene Timing Scene timing controls the fade in and delay of a scene when it is run on a master You assign and edit scene timings in the same way as for cues see Fade Delay and Path p 202 You can assign scene timing in the Programmer before recording the scene or later in the scene editor You can also assign the fade time of a scene from the command line For example to give Scene 1 a fade time of 6 seconds e Scene 1 Time 6 Enter You can also record fade times with a mask For example e Scene 1 Fixture 1 2 Colour Time 4 Enter sets the fade time for the colour parameter values of fixtures 1 and 2 in Scene 1 12 6 Insert Merge and Replace When recording copying or moving a scene if the destination location already has a scene re corded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace Insert creates a new destination scene The new scene will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination scene If the same fixture parameters are in both scenes the new values will replace the old e Replace Overwrites the scene information in that
83. effects ed itor window or in the programmer cue editor Be aware that editing the begin and end values an effect result in an adjustment to the base value for that fixture function as well The start value of an effect is the real world value at which the function will start the effect The start value of an effect is directly tied to the offset value of an effect High End Systems 223 Section 14 Effects The following diagram shows the begin end and start points of a simple efffect Begin Start Effect Length The length is the proportion of the effect s period that it is active for It is assigned as a percentage The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different length values VAN 100 50 200 N Shot This is the number of times that the effect repeats before finishing A dash in the N Shot cell denotes that the effect will run indefinitely Bounce When bounce is enabled for an effect the fixture function will run one direction through the effect cycle and then reverse direction to run through the cycle in the oppositie direction and will con tinue to alternate the direction in which it runs through the cycle Direction The direction of an effect determines whether the selected wave table will be applied to the function in a forward or reverse direction 14 1 3 Building Table Effects in the Effects Engine To apply an effect 1 Inthe Pr
84. enaA aTe MiNi 245 16 5 Editing Discreetly 0 00 00 ccc cceeeceeeeeee eee eese een a a 246 16 5 1 Fade Changes cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeea iaa Eti 246 PO 522 BING ac ccssecteces cece vadaescheces vatcce detent ht cececudacts Seems oooeece 247 16 60 Parking scire aa ivedaae teks a ia aA a heen aS 247 16 6 1 Viewing and Editing What is Parked aeeccccce 248 Playback S E E T E T 251 17 1 Physical Master Playback sssssssssssrssresrsrrerrerrerrerrererrerrenrs 251 17 1 1 Attaching Cuelists and Scenes to Masters 251 17 1 2 Controlling Playback cece cece cette cette eeea teen eeeae 252 17 1 3 Releasing Masters cece eeeeeeee eee sees tesa nena nena eed 255 17 1 4 Choosing and Selecting Masters cceeeeeeeeee eee 258 17 1 5 Cuelist and Scene ODPtions cece eee eects teeta 258 17 2 Virtual Master Playback ccceecee cece eee e eee ee ee eeeeeeaeeeaeeeae 262 17 2 1 Running Virtual Masters from the Cuelist Directory asia veehuse casemate vere a tues date Melmieei daa pr edad s cite obec den seat oes 262 17 2 2 Using Cuelist Play Controls to Play a Master 263 17 2 3 Running Virtual Masters from the Command Line 264 17 3 Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes 00 0 eee eee eee eeeeee tenes 264 17 3 1 Using HTP and LIP aitriai i a ainin 265 17 3 2 Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others 008 266 17 3 3 Changing a Cuelist s Priority eceeceeee
85. fixture selection Using the Programmer Cue Editors You can assign and edit effects values for specific fixture in editors such as the programmer just as you do with other values 14 1 1 Effect Tables One of the main components of a table effect is the effect table iteself which applies a mathem atical function such as sine or tangent to the parameter values The available tables and how the parameter value varies over time are shown in Figure 14 1 Effect Tables Note that the effects table varies the value of the parameter either side of its base level represented by the dotted line in the diagrams The three types of random table are weighted differently bi asing the random parameter values towards the low high or middle part of the possible range Using Effect Tables Listed below are examples of combinations of effects tables in use e Circular Motion A Sine table is applied to pan and tilt with tilt given an Offset of 90 degrees e Square Motion A Sawtooth table is applied to pan and tilt with tilt given an Offset of 90 degrees e Can Can Motion A Step table is applied to pan a Sine table is applied to tilt e Fly In Motion A Step table is applied to pan a Ramp table is applied to tilt Blue Step Colour Effect A Mark On table is applied to cyan and magenta High End Systems 221 Section 14 Effects Sine Tangent Jha Step Sawtooth ay Ramp A Inverse Ramp L Mark Off E Spiral Random 2 ATA
86. for failover each console connected to the show will monitor the status of the primary console the console that first loaded the show on the network for any failures or forced log offs In the event that the primary console suffers a critical error or is disconnected from the network all other consoles connected to the show will post the message shown below notifying the user that a failover has occurred and indicated which of the other server consoles has taken over as the active show server primary console High End Systems 73 3 3 7 74 Section 3 Setting Up the System ve show server Server 1 e0cb4e013b6f has failed up server has been detected For more information please consult the network win OK If you see this message first check to see if the original primary console is still physically con nected to the network then power cycle the original primary console and reconnect it to the show In the event that the console operator intentionally logged off the primary console all other consoles connected to the show will post the failover message shown below to indicate that the primary server console has logged off and another server console has assumed the role as the active show server primary console Hog 4PC La 2354872521 has been logged off 1 The new active show server is S cb4e013 For more information pleas Since this message is the direct result of the primary console being willfully logged off
87. from the show there is no need to perform any troubleshooting Simply reconnect the logged off console to the show and it will once again participate as a show server console on the network Configuring the Network for Console Tracking Console tracking allows two or more consoles to track each other in terms of the chosen page the chosen master and playback state while still maintaining individual desktop programmer experiences between the desks A backup secondary networked show server console set to the same net number as the primary console is recommmended when setting up Hog control systems for live shows This creates system redundancy and protects from total loss of control should the primary console fail High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 3 8 8 DMX Universes 00000000 la o oooooonoon O DMX Processor 8000 J a BSERBSBBEE E g z Net number 1 lj TT LO sesseseses o Hog console Server Net number 1 e Ethemet switch 8 DMX Universes ee000000 DMX Processor 8000 Net number 1 oooooo00co O 2 Paar E li TE D S amp S Sseesesssss T Hog console Server Net number 1 To enable Console Tracking 1 Connect two consoles via an Ethernet switch 2 Enable the Run Server option in the Settings window on at least one of the consoles You can choose to enable the Run Server option on both consoles to also engage failover functionality Set both consoles to Net nu
88. green at the lower right blue at the lower left and the intermediate colours in between The angle between 0 and 360 degrees specifies the hue of the colour red has a hue of 0 degrees yellow has a hue of 60 degrees and cyan has a hue of 180 degrees See Figure 6 7 The Colour Wheel e Saturation how strong or pale the colour is Pale colours have low satura tions while strong colours have high saturations Saturation is specified as a percentage between 0 white and 100 the strongest possible saturation Red Magenta Yellow hue Blue Green Cyan Figure 6 7 The Colour Wheel When you program with the HS parameters Hog 40S stores all values as HS and converts them to CMY or RGB as required when sending DMX data to the fixtures As part of this process the console is able to match the colours of different fixture types see Using Colour Matching p 135 The Hue and Saturation parameters of fixtures with continuous colour mixing are controlled in the same way as other continuous parameters see Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam p 132 You can also use the Colour Picker and Gel Picker see The Colour Picker p 136 and The Gel Picker p 137 Using Colour Matching One of the advantages of the Hog 40S s HS colour system is its ability to match colours across different fixture types Assigning the Hue and Saturation parameters of two different types of High End Systems 135 Section 6 Selecti
89. gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 Select the Default cell of the desired parameter 3 Set mew value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit High End Systems 123 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Assign a Parameter Offset This setting allows you to offset the range of values over which a parameter varies For instance if one fixture is hung at an angle to the bar so that it has a different pan centre point from all the others on that bar then you could assign an offset so that the fixture appeared to line up from a programming and operating point of view To assign a parameter offset 1 Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 Select the Offset cell of the desired parameter 3 Set new value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit Important Applying an offset to a parameter after you have programmed values for it into your show will mean that those values will also be offset Naming Slots Some fixture parameters are continuously variable for example CMY colour mixing On the other hand some parameters for example gobo or colour wheels work in discrete increments or slots The Fixture Library loaded into Hog 40S defines the fixture s default slots displayed on the Slot Toolbar in palettes and the Programmer When custom gobos or colours are used you can customise the show file to display a suitable name for each gobo or colour slot chosen from those in the fixture library
90. intensity of fixtures under the control of this playback to their full programmed value as if the fader had been put to maxim um You can customise the function of master controls to suit the requirements of the user or a par ticular show see Configuring Playback Controls p 283 J Tip Pressing or clicking on the Playback Bar is equivalent to pressing that master s Choose key The Main Controls The main playback controls positioned to the right of the masters see Figure 17 2 The Main Playback Controls work with the currently chosen master You can also use them with another master by holding down the required Choose key while pressing a key from the main controls High End Systems 253 254 Section 17 Playback Choose Key Assert Key Release Key Pig Key Skip Forward Skip Backward Back Key Halt Key Go Key Figure 17 2 The Main Playback Controls The main playback control keys are Assert reasserts control of fixture parameters by the chosen master if other masters have taken control under the Latest Takes Precedence rule see Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others p 266 Release releases the chosen master s control of fixture parameters making the cuelist inactive see Releasing Masters p 255 Skip Forward Skip Back steps forward or backward through the chosen cuelist by one cue Cue timing information will not be used the cue appears on stage immediately Back imm
91. kind However you can add additional functions to a fixed kind if you wish For example you can add a colour mixing function such as Cyan to the fixed position kind if you desire Be aware that any additional functions you add to a wheelset in a fixed kind will not function as part of that fixed kind s masking The arrangement of the functions on the wheelsets within a fixed kind are completely customizable regardless of whether or not they are marked with a lock icon 15 1 2 User Kinds User kinds unlike fixed kinds are not automatically generated when adding fixtures to the show User kinds are custom built by the user allowing you to create smaller collections of fixture functions on fewer wheelsets User kinds are stored in the kinds directory and are also accessable using the 12 function keys on the front panel of the console when the function keys are set to kind mode To toggle the function keys between Kind mode and Command mode hold down Pig and press Enter The mode of the function keys is displayed on the main toolbar To open the kinds directory hold the open key and press the kinds button on the main toolbar Note The user kind keys on the Road Hog 4 console do not have LCD displays Once created user kinds can be selected by pressing the cordinating function key on the front panel or by selecting the kind from the kinds directory when guard is turned off If you create more than 12 user kinds the console will auto High E
92. left and changed from red to green automatically while in black Mark Fade Intensity Position Colour Cue 1 2s 100 Centre Red Cue 2 2s 0 Centre Red Cue 3 Os 5s 100 Left Green Tip Marking occurs with the intensity parameter for standard fixtures as well as Red Green and Blue parameters for RGB fixtures such as LEDs Marking the First Cue in a Cue List If the first cue in a list is assigned to mark it will only mark after the last cue in the list is played By recording a blank cue prior to the first cue in the list you can create a mark cue for the first look of a show For example Mark Fade Intensity Position Colour Cue 0 5 Cue 1 Fade 0 2s 100 Right Blue Cue 2 2s 50 Left When cue 0 5 plays it will mark cue 1 so that cue 1 will fade up intensities on stage after the fixtures are already in position and color Furthermore since the intensity time of cue 1 is assigned to 2 seconds and the other parameters are assigned to zero the mark cue will occur as quickly as possible High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 8 4 Cuelist Feedback for Mark Cues The following figures show the different states of a marking cue Chosen Master List 1 Lear View Enable Enable Folow Folow insert Timing Cue co Clock Cue Chosen Link Comment Figure 11 2 Cue 3 with a Fade Mark Chosen Master List 1 Learn View Enable Enable Follow Folow insert Timing Cue Clock
93. make or type may share the same palette See Also directory High End Systems Glossary parameter Parameter Wheel patch patch point path pig key pile on playback wing point cue port number programmer rate High End Systems A controllable property of the light produced by a fixture For example a fresnel has one attribute intensity Moving fixtures have pan and tilt parameters and perhaps colour beam shape and so on A wheel that facilitates the control of fixture parameters Parameter Wheels are fixture sensitive once loaded from the fixture library para meters are allocated logically to the wheels The assignment of DMX addresses to fixtures See Also DMX The set of information that defines where a fixture is patched including DMX address DMX universe and DMX Processor Some fixtures have multiple patch points See Also DMX DMX address DMX Processor A way of defining the way that a parameter changes during a fade You could assign a path that makes the fixture parameter snap to its final value at the start of the fade for example Paths should not be confused with conversion curves paths are the properties of a cue while a conversion curves is the property of a fixture See Also fade time conversion curve The Pig button is a modifier key and may be used in conjunction with other keys to alter their function A system where new objects are added to previous ones rather than
94. mark While the basic principles of marking are the still the same the timing in which the mark is executed varies between the two methods High End Systems 189 11 8 3 190 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists A Fade mark uses the fade and delay times assigned in the marked cue to mark fixtures Fade marking occurs on a fixture by fixture basis so several fixtures could be marking at different times and rates depending upon their individual cue data in the marked cue In the fade mark example below when cue 2 completes its 2 second fade to 0 intensity cue 3 will automatically play all of its data except intensity in a 5 second fade Then when cue 3 is played only the intensity will crossfade at 5 seconds The fixtures will have moved from centre to left and changed from red to green automatically while in black Mark Fade Intensity Position Colour Cue 1 2s 100 Centre Red Cue 2 2s 0 Centre Red Cue 3 Fade 5s 100 Left Green A Time mark uses the time you enter into the mark column to mark fixtures Time marking occurs at a single uniform rate so all fixture parameters will mark at the same rate regardless of the data in the next cue In the time mark example below when cue 2 completes its 2 second fade to 0 intensity cue 3 will automatically play all of its data except intensity in a Os second fade Then when cue 3 is played only the intensity will crossfade at 5 seconds The fixtures will have moved from centre to
95. method of synchronising the console with other playback sources such as music video or film Hog 40S supports MIDI Linear Timecode and Video Timecode See Also MIDI SMPTE Cues have several values that control timing fade wait delay and path See Also fade time wait time delay time path The output of a master running a cuelist is a mix of hard and tracked parameter values Hard values are those that are in the current cue while tracked values are those that have tracked through from previous cues See Also tracking A method of dealing with cuelists that does not record information in a cue unless it is a change from the previous cue This allows multiple cuelists to be running at the same time without them interfering with each other See Also hard value tracked value touched value default value A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet Hog 40S uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of computers and will not in terfere with them For show critical situations you should run the Hog system on its own independent network See Also ethernet User kinds are customized kinds built by the user allowing you to create smaller collections of fixture functions on fewer wheelsets See Also kinds 449 USB view virtual master visualiser wait time wheelset white point widget Zoom 450 Glossary Universa
96. move a palette to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 164 High End Systems Section 9 Directory Windows Directory windows are the windows that allow users to access recorded data such as palettes cuelists scenes pages effects kinds and groups using a grid of buttons Directory windows and their contents can be displayed in a number of ways In this section we will cover the different options available for directory windows 9 1 Write Permissions IPBCE Palette Directories Users may configure which fixed function kinds are permitted to be recorded into palettes for each of the IPCBE directories by opening the configuration window for that directory navigating to the permissions tab and enabling disabling individual function kinds in the menu Configuration Select which kinds this directory will Directory allow to be recorded into palettes Permissions Intensity Position Colour Beam Effects m O O 0O O Control Figure 9 1 Write Permissions Menu A write permission legend is shown at the top of each directory window and indicates which kinds have been permitted for writing in that directory permitted kinds are shown with a blue background L represents the control kind High End Systems 165 Section 9 Directory Windows Beam Directory Figure 9 2 Write Permissi
97. nR Bat J R aa bd ona fi m Zj je bi z in z ba E j P Joins ft fis x z m z fs xi n zJ asf fre zj lu z zj iin z fis z 27 2 4 Using the Visualizer Once the above configuration is complete the connectivity between the Hog system and the visualiser should begin working You can close the Wholehog DP window and the connectivity will continue as long as the Hog logo remains in the task bar oe M Po 11 57AM 27 3 Connecting to WYSIWYG The Hog Connectivity for WYSIWYG supports multiple DP s up to the number of channels supported by your WYSIWYG dongle Contact Cast for WYSIWYG upgrade information 27 3 1 Configuring the Network Connection When WYSIWYG is launched the Wholehog DP window will be launched and opened on the bottom right of your visualiser computer screen High End Systems 381 27 3 2 382 Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity Swholenog DP E Status Status Locating Wholehog Network Session Info Scanning port 6600 Configuration Por 6600 UserNumber 1 Apply vie A Hog logo will also be placed in the Windows task bar when this application is running wo fy 7 11 57AM If you close the dialog box the Wholehog DP will continue to run and double clicking on the task bar icon will re open the dialog box When a Hog server is detected on the network the Status field will change to Wholehog Network
98. not connect the following consoles Wholehog DP Check that the Wholehog DP window indicates it is connected to the console and is running Check that the address in the Properties window on WYSIWYG matches the DMX Pro cessor in your Hog show and that another device is not already connected to that number WYSIWYG Autofocus does not appear to function High End Systems Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity Check that the Hog show is using a version 2 5 or greater fixture library Check with Cast regarding the WYSIWYG fixture libraries 27 5 Visualiser Support Contacts ESP Vision www espvision com WYSIWYG Cast www castlighting com MSD www martin com Capture www capturesweden com Light Converse www lightconverse net High End Systems 387 Section 28 Upgrading Console Software 28 1 Software Upgrade Hog console software can be upgraded using an fpspkg installer package downloadable from the Flying Pig website Hog 4PC is upgraded using an msi installer package For details on in stalling upgrading Hog 4PC see Installing Hog 4PC p 395 To upgrade software on your Hog 4 not Hog 4PC 1 Download the FPSPKG installer from the Flying Pig website once downloaded the file name will be Hog4_X X X X fpspkg where the Xs represented the software version number 2 Copy the file to a USB Flash drive 3 Insert the USB Flash drive containing the upgrade file into any USB slot on the console 4 Go to the Start window o
99. of MIDI used in the entertainment industry for integrated control of lighting sound and stage automation A key that is used in conjunction with other keys or buttons to change the effect that it has For example the Pig key See Also pig key A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet Hog 40S uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of computers and will not in terfere with them For show critical situations you should run Hog system on its own independent network See Also ethernet The number that identifies the console when it is operating as part of a network Network nodes are items of equipment connected to the network Con soles DMX Processors and Hog 4PC systems are all nodes See Also DMX Processor The output of the console more specifically the fixtures that have non zero intensities a protocol for communication among computers sound synthesizers and other multimedia devices that is optimized for modern networking tech nology The time of the fade of the outgoing cue during a crossfade All fixtures that are decreasing in intensity will go down over this time See Also split fade path fade time A preset arrangement of cuelists residing on the masters Pages can be changed allowing masters to be used by many cuelists A stored parameter setting such as position for one or more fixtures Fixtures of different
100. on Override for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist 17 3 4 Multiple Cuelists with Effects If a cuelist contains parameters that are running an effect when another cuelist or scene changes the underlying values of those parameters the effect continues to run Use Pile Add FX to allow the second cuelist or scene to override the effect as well as the underlying values For example to allow the cuelist on Master 10 override effects running on other masters 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window for Master 10 2 Options open the cuelist s Playback Options window 3 Select the Cuelist pane and select Pile Add FX Properties 0O Use HTP 0O Pile add Effects 0O ls A Chase O Reset On Release 0O Track Through Loops Cl Cue Only 0O Mark Fade New Cues 0O Mark Time New Cues 17 4 Understanding Feedback There are several ways in which you can tell the status of the console s output The status of masters is shown by the playback control key LEDs and the on screen Playback Bar e You can use a cuelist window to follow the progress of running cuelists 268 High End Systems Section 17 Playback e The total output of all fixtures parameter values is shown in the Output window and the total output of all fixture s intensities is shown in the Levels View window 17 4 1 Control and Playback Toolbar Feedback Playback Control LEDs The LEDs of the
101. one and the fade starting The Wait time schedules cues within the cuelist whereas the Delay time schedules the fades of each parameter within the cue A cue can contain multiple Delay times but it can only have one Wait time See Figure 13 1 Cue timings A wait is displayed as the time value in the Wait cell e Follow Triggers the cue once the previous cue has completed all its fade and delay times You can enter a time after pressing the Follow button which de termines the time between the previous cue completing and the follow cue being triggered See Figure 13 1 Cue timings The follow is displayed in the Cuelist window as Follow time The follow time should not be confused with the wait time The follow time controls the time between the end of one cue and the triggering of the next while the wait time controls the time between the triggering of one cue and the triggering of the next Timecode Triggers the cue when the specified timecode value is received See MIDI timecode p 312 The timecode value will be displayed in the wait cell 212 High End Systems Section 13 Timing Manual A manual cue can only be triggered by pressing the Go key This means the cuelist will stop until the Go key is pressed irrespective of any wait follow or timecode triggers that later cues in the list may have Manual cues are useful because the word Manual appears in the Cuelist win dow to remind the operat
102. programming wings 83 Section 3 Setting Up the System Control Panel v1 0 0 b 238 CI Displays Console Connected lt Wings Playback Bar 1 Not Connected Mid MD Playback Bar 2 Not Connected Time an t 2 ime and Date ee a RE None Not Connected g Auto Launch aA TE Mee None Not Connected 2 HogNet 2 FixtureNet System info ee as ee one Not Connected Playback Bar 6 None Not Connected Playback Bar 7 None Not Connected ei a ea NONE Not Connected S OQ R cence Figure 3 13 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Playback Wing Mapping 3 6 84 Adding Master Wings You can increase the number of physical masters by adding Master Wings to the console The Master Wing is a USB device with 30 faderless masters a rate wheel and a 15 LED baclit screen The backit LED screen can be enabled to display any information you move to that monitor including Playback Bars The Master Wing connects to the console in the control panel under the playback wings section The Master wing s desklight and front panel LED settings will always match the console The virtual fader level of the 30 faderless masters on the Master Wing can be configured in the Virtual Faders pane of the User Preferences window To attach a Master Wing 1 Apply AC power to the wing and connect the wing s USB port and DVI port to the console The rate wheel on the Master Wing will already begin to function at this tim
103. selected You can have up to eight editors open but only one can be editable at a time and the parameter wheels I Wheel and command line all operate on the contents of the currently editable editor If you have several editors open at once you can use the Edit button to determine which one you are controlling even if it is not the frontmost window or to lock the editor to prevent accidental changes Z Tip When you open an editor all the fixtures within the editor are automatic ally selected This aids quick editing of cues or palettes You can also deselect the Select All on active editor option under the Misc tab of the preference window so that editors can be opened and closed without changing fixture selection High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 10 After you have finished editing a cue scene or palette press the Update key to apply changes Until you do this changes won t show up if you run the cue or scene or use the palette The ex ception to this is when you are working in the Programmer when the Update key will perform the Auto Update function see Auto Update p 245 If you hold down the Update key the Update Toolbar will appear This allows you to select which parameter types are recorded whether changes should track forwards and whether refer ences should be allowed when recording palettes See Stopping Values from Tracking Forward p 184 and Reference Palettes p 162 If you clo
104. showing which cuelists cues palettes and scenes are contributing to the look on stage so that you can choose which to update For cuelists you have several choices Either update the current cue in the cuelist or track the programming backwards so that the new values are merged into the last cue with a hard value for that parameter see Tracking Values Backwards When Recording p 183 e Ifyou have existing programming that refers to a palette you can choose to update the palette instead of adding new parameter values to a cue In this case these updates will be performed first and anything left in the Programmer after this will be used to update the selected cue or Track Backwards For scenes you have the option to merge the programming into the scene or into the palettes that are referred to in that scene Once you have chosen your options press OK to perform the update Note that the parameter values remain in the Programmer Tip If there is no playback on stage when you press Update the Auto Update window will not appear and the Update key press is ignored When you press the Update key the Update Toolbar will also appear see Figure 16 2 The Update Toolbar This allows you to select which parameter types are updated whether changes should track forwards and whether references should be allowed when updating palettes See Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 160 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward p 184
105. small color swatch in the middle of the button to indicate a dominant mixed color is recorded in that palette To enable the auto color swatch option click on nee icon and enable the show auto color swatch option The option to show the auto color swatch is unique to each directory window and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view Configuration Directory 0O Show fewer buttons 0O Colour Code Entire Button 0O Show Auto Colour Swatch Button size Medium vyv x Cancel Figure 9 7 Auto Color Swatch Option High End Systems Section 9 Directory Windows 9 6 Spreadsheet View By default directory windows are displayed as a grid of touch sized buttons however you can also view the contents of any directory as a spreadsheet by clicking on tne button When in list view the directory buttons can be selected and or applied by pressing on it s number in the num column The option to display a directory in list view is unique to each directory and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view 2 Qm i red mix green mx bie mx The Colour Directory shown in Spreadsheet view The Colour Directory shown in Button view Figure 9 8 Spreedsheet View vs Button View of Colour Directory High End Systems 169 Section 10 Media Picker The media picker is a tabbed graphical window that allows users to view and select slotted function values for the current fixture select
106. stored in the Libraries folder As you edit your show file all of your changes are immediately saved to the console s internal hard disk In the event of power failure the Hog 40S will have already saved the show data to disk so that none of your work is lost You can use the Show Manager window see Figure 4 2 The Show Manager Window to backup your current show file check the integrity of your current show file s data or to move copy and delete existing shows files To open the Show Manager Setup Shows Show Manager Gn So r D croton Creat E CD Burning Name Name Descriptio Crested cm Shows Ql A Big Show Hog 4 Show A File Browser Lbrares tival Sho Hog 4 Show Hog 4 Show Fie Folder Hog 4 Show Hog 4 Show Hog 4 Show Figure 4 2 The Show Manager Window 4 7 Startup Comment Macros You can assign comment macros to be executed when a show file is launched Comment macros can be used to automate a variety of tasks such as recalling views or changing pages Startup comment macros are assigned in the Misc pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Misc High End Systems 89 Section 4 Shows User Preferences amp Appearance Q 3 Senstivity Playback Bar Options Colour Space Options Show cuelist numbers Show cue times Hue Saturation White Point v Note Changing the white point wil change the Key Tinga mi Show cue numbers Show cue names appearance of
107. teahdewnsndeem inari aana ia oa EEr EMITE ETATE 131 6 3 3 Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam eeens 132 6 3 4 Slotted Parameters Colour and Beam 0eeeee 133 6 3 5 Working with Colour ccceeeeeeeee eee eee ates aeeea nese eeeee 134 6 3 6 Fine Control ec eecee eee eee eset ana aE ease esse een a Ea 138 6 3 7 Touching Parameters cceceeeee cece cette eee anes a eeen teen eeeee 138 6 3 8 Copying Parameter SettingS cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 140 6 3 9 Restoring Default Values 2 2 0 eeee etter eee eee eee 142 6 4 FANNING es secede cout cane ar EEE Gu EEE aaa ETa a TEE ESEA vases 142 6 4 1 Using the Fan Key ssssssssssrssrrsrssrerrrersrrerrsrrsrrsrerererene 142 6 4 2 In the Programmer WINdOW scere 143 6 4 3 With the Command Line 1 00 eeeeceeeee eee teen eee a etnias 143 6 4 4 Fanning Options cece ence eee e ects eee eeaeeea teen eeeee 144 6 4 5 Multipart Fanning cceceeeeeeeceee eee ee eee testes eeeaeeeaeeeae 145 High End Systems v vi Lighting Control System 6 4 6 Fanning with GroupingS sssssssseeersererrerrerrerrerrereere 145 6 5 REMOVING VAIUCS 20 2 cee eccee ence ete e eee eee Eua E eaa tesa tesa tesa een REY 146 6 5 1 Removing Entire Fixtures from an Editor essees 147 6 5 2 Removing Kinds from an Editor sescca 147 6 5 3 Removing Individual Parameters from an Editor 147 6 6 Separating Parameters cece e cece ee eee ates a eeea tesa tesa
108. teen ee ne eea een eenaes 249 17 1 The Master Controls 00 00 cece cece nee e teeter eee e sete a esate aeeeaeeeaeeeee 252 17 2 The Main Playback Controls cceeceeee cece eee e eee a eee neee nessa eeeaeeaaes 254 17 3 Example Master 1 is chosen Masters 2 thru 4 are selected 258 17 4 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options Window escenes 259 1725 The Playback Bar vreo aaa seach uve A lames EMiS Pa Paa et SES 269 17 6 The Cuelist Window with a Cue Running ssssesesecceeereerererrenen 271 17 7 The Output WINdOW ssssssssssssssrsrssrssrrsrssrertrarettenrsrrsrnsrrsrunrerererene 272 17 8 The Levels View WINdOW ssssssssssrsrerersrisrnsrrsrrsrsrerererrrrrerrereeres 273 17 9 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Bar 0 283 17 10 The Master pane of the Cuelist Options window ee 284 17 11 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options window 285 18 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences WINdOW cscceseneeeeeneees 291 18 2 Matching Levels when Changing Page cseeeseeeneeeeeea neta eeeaes 292 18 3 Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page 297 18 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page loaded eee 297 19 1 Command directory in list view selecting an action eec 300 20 1 The MIDI pane of the Console Settings Window cceeeeeeeees 304 20 2 The Timecode Toolbar cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeee esse een eeneee
109. the Hog 4 Console the built in motorized faders will automatically adjust themselves to match the master s stored level 290 High End Systems Section 18 Pages Tip You can think of changing pages using the Leave In Background option as being similar to having one very long page and moving the masters to look at different sections of it A further option Remember Fader Values allows a page s fader levels to be restored back to where they were the last time the page was loaded If the physical faders have moved then the motorized faders on the Hog 4 Full Boar 4 Master Wing 4 and Playback Wing 4 will move to match the stored values The Road Hog 4 Hog 4 Nano and other non motorized fader hardware are not capable of moving their faders to match the stored value so a blue unlocked fader bar will appear to show the difference between the restored value and the actual physical potion of the front panel fader see Matching Levels When Changing Page p 292 By default Release All and Remember Fader Values are selected for new pages but you can change this in the User Preferences window e Setup Preferences Misc see Figure 18 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences window Playback Bar Options Colour Space Options pa Appearance Show cuelst numbers Show cue times Hue Saturation White Point 4 O Senstivty oO Sh 7 sh SONU Note Changing the white point wil change the how cue numbers ow cue names Lp
110. the default value for the pan parameter of all the Studio Color 575 fixtures in the show see Figure 5 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by Function High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Feit Fivtures intensty Pan Release Feature Spr Orpen 1 300 rpm 300 rpm Os rpm imear I f L i Figure 5 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by Function Assigning Minimums and Maximums for Parameters When fixtures are placed close to obstacles such as trussing or set pieces it may be important to limit movement to prevent accidental damage especially when the fixture is out of view of the operator However other functions can also be limited for example to implement a house or event policy on the use of strobe lighting Note that limits can only be assigned for continuous parameters not slotted ones To assign limits 1 Setup Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 Select the Minimum cell of the parameter you wish to limit 3 Set new value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit In the case of pan and tilt it will be a plus or minus number of degrees from the fixture s default position 4 Repeat to assign the Maximum value Assigning a Custom Default The default value is the value that the parameter will take when no playbacks or editors are controlling it Fixtures also go to their default setting when the console starts up To assign a custom default 1 Setup
111. the group directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the group to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK You can also delete several groups at once 1 Group 1 Thru 5 Delete deletes groups 1 through 5 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the group directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting all the groups to be deleted from dir ectory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 7 6 Copying and Moving Groups To make a copy of a group e Group 1 Copy Group 2 Enter copies the contents of Group 1 to Group 2 Similarly to move a group to a new location e Group 1 Move Group 2 Enter moves Group 1 to Group 2 If the destination group already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 152 To copy parameter values from the fixtures of one group to the fixtures of another group within an editor e Group 1 Copy Fixture Group 2 Enter copies the parameter values of the fixtures in group 1 to the fixtures in group 2 Similarly with masking options High End Systems 151 Se
112. the loop To stop this happening you need to enable Track Through Loops in the Cuelist Options window 1 Open List 1 open the cuelist window 2 Press Options and select the Track Through Loops tickbox Note that Track Through Loops also applies when the cuelist automatically loops back to the start of the list after you play back the last cue in the list Important The Track Through Loops option applies to the whole cuelist Using it may have unintended consequences when playing back other cues in the cuelist out of sequence High End Systems 219 Section 14 Effects Effects can be used to create a repeating change or movement in the value of fixture parameters Effects are recorded as part of cues scenes and palettes 14 1 Table Effects Table effects are effects applied to fixture functions using wave tables that apply mathematical functions such as sine or tangent to values against time Table effects have seven main attributes table size rate offset and length bounce and direction Each effect table also has its own timing parameters for fade delay and path There are three ways to apply table effects to a fixture selection Predefined Effect Palettes A range of pre programmed effects can be found in the effects dir ectory window that can be quickly applied and then tweaked if desired The Effects Engine A special editor window where users can assign and edit the effects values for the current
113. the screen using a 3mm allen key 2 Carefully remove the front metal work and Soft Key strips soft key strips are on Hog 4 Console Only 3 With the LCD box in the vertical upright position undo the eight scews on the back panel of the screen assembly using a 3mm allen key Remove the back panel metal work This entire step for Hog 4 Console Only 4 With the back panel removed carefully remove the eight screws on the back of the LCD assembly using a 3mm allen key Make sure you have somebody hold the screens from the front of the console while you do this This entire step is for Hog 4 Console Only 5 Lift the screens from the console and unplug the cables from behind 6 Replace with a new screen assembly by performing previous steps in reverse 32 2 Replacing Faders Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel Damaged or dirty faders are easily replaced 1 Pull off the fader knob off for the fader that you wish to replace High End Systems 425 Section 32 Service Undo the four screws front panel screws with a 3mm allen key plus the two thumb screws in the armrest on the Hog 4 console and carefully lift off the front panel from the edge closest to you Gently unplug the fader s cable lead from the main board Unscrew the fader s two front panel screws from the top side of the front panel using a 2mm allen key and remove the fader Fit the new fader in pl
114. tilt or vice versa The Status Bar at the right hand end of the Command Line Toolbar shows when the Trackball is in Position Mode with the legend POS and when it is in Ortho Mode with the legend Ortho You can assign the way that fixtures move in relation to the Trackball See Inverting and Swapping Pan and Tilt Axes p 120 Tip An external mouse will always control the graphical pointer so you can keep the Trackball in position mode to save having to change modes as you program Using the Parameter Wheels The pan and tilt parameters also appear on the parameter wheels after the Position key is de pressed and can be used as an alternative to the Trackball Flip With some moving lights there is more than one combination of pan and tilt that results in the beam hitting the same point on the stage You may sometimes want to change the pan and tilt combination being used for example to ensure that the fixture takes the most direct route during a position change The Flip function cycles the selected fixtures through the possible combinations in turn To do this select the fixture or fixtures and press Flip on the Main Toolbar Holding the Pig key down while pressing Flip cycles through the combinations the other way Tip When the Trackball is in position mode the top left Trackball key also acts as a Flip key for quick access while positioning fixtures High End Systems 131 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modi
115. to assign the value of a parameter is the one that applies A cue run on one master can take control of fixtures set by a cue in another master See Also HTP The Hog 40S s Maintain State feature eliminates the common problem with tracking where playing back cues out of order results in incorrect lighting states on stage See Also tracking A method of selecting information that is specific to a palette fixture cue scene or group when recording making selections editing or pro gramming Typical masks are the parameter masks intensity position colour and beam A master comprises of Go Pause Flash and Choose buttons as well as a fader One cuelist maybe run upon one master at one time Cuelists need not be permanently stored on specific masters and may reside in the cuelist directory See Also cuelist A Hog accessory that increases the number of physical masters available on the console by 30 See Also master A graphic user interface window that displays selectabled thumnbail previews of slotted content for the current fixture selection See Also CITP 445 MIDI MIDI Show Control modifier multicast net number node on stage open sound control OSC out time page palette Glossary Musical Instrument Digital Interface Allows communication of musical notes programmes and timing data between electronic instruments and other devices such as lighting consoles See Also timecode Subset
116. to be the reference point depending on the situation In a theatrical environment where tungsten sources are more common tungsten white is likely to be most appropriate base In other environments predominantly using arc sources it will be more convenient to use arc white for information on changing the white point see Using Colour Matching p 135 High End Systems 33 2 6 2 2 7 34 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals The Colour Matching System The Hog 40S s colour matching system is based on a fixture library that contains colour calibration data for the fixture types in use This calibration ensures that fixtures of different types can easily be assigned to the same colour including to a chosen definition of white It can also be used for fixtures that have not been calibrated but the colours that will be produced may not match the colours from fixtures that do have calibration data You can choose colours using the parameter wheels to assign cyan magenta and yellow values or hue and saturation values or you can use the on screen visual colour picker see The Colour Picker p 136 It is preferable to program using Hue and Saturation whenever possible The advantages are e Selecting colours using Hue and Saturation or the colour picker will produce the same visual colour output on all calibrated fixture types e You can use fanning and effects on Hue and Saturation to produce attractive looks quickly e When you use
117. units or parts with a written explanation of the alleged problem or malfunction Ship returned Product units or parts to 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin Texas 78758 USA High End Systems 3 Note Freight Damage Claims are invalid for products shipped in non factory boxes and packing materials Freight All shipping will be paid by the purchaser Under no circumstances will freight collect shipments be accepted REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED FOR UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER HIGH END SYSTEMS INC MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT AND HIGH END SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HIGH END SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE INCLUDING LOST PROFITS SUSTAINED OR INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT OR CAUSED BY PRODUCT DEFECTS OR THE PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF ANY PRODUCT REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE WAS FORESEEN OR UNFORESEEN Warranty is void if the product is misused damaged modified in any way or for unauthorized repairs or parts This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights specific to your locality Third Party Software Acknowledgements AMD This product uses the Catalyst fglrx drivers Boost The product include Boost s
118. use for OSC output 318 High End Systems Section 21 Open Sound Control Console Settings Security MIDI Shox MIDI Notes MIDI Timecode Open Sound Control Input Port Paddress 192 168 0 102 Enable 0O OSC In Output Port eects 0 0 0 0 Enable 0O OSC Out Protocol uo Pi x Cancel Figure 21 2 The OSC pane of the Console Settings window 21 4 OSC Mappings Hog 40S uses the following OSC paths and commands for sending and receiving Playback messages Hog 40S OSC Command Path Data Go a Cuelist hog playback go 0 cuelist Go a specific cue in a list goto Halt a Cuelist Resume a halted cuelist Release a Cuelist Go a Scene Halt a Scene Release a Scene Go a Macro Halt a Macro Release a Marco hog playback go hog playback halt hog playback re sume hog playback re lease hog playback go hog playback halt hog playback re lease hog playback go hog playback halt hog playback re lease 0 cuelist cue 0 cuelist 0 cuelist 0 cuelist 1 scene 1 scene 1 scene 2 macro 2 macro 2 macro High End Systems 319 320 Section 21 Open Sound Control Hog 40S uses the following OSC paths and commands for receiving Midi Note input For example the Hog 40S recognizes hog midi on 1 10 as a note on command for note 10 on channel 1
119. well as add an additional touchscreen monitor by attaching a Hog 4 Playback Wing 82 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Playback bar 1 for Console playback Masters 11 20 bar for Masters 1 10 f z l enS FERRE aug IMM a Sessseeeesso Playback Wing Hog console Masters 11 20 Masters 1 10 Figure 3 12 Docking Playback Bars with wings and external displays To attach a Playback Wing 1 High End Systems Apply AC power to the wing and connect the wing s USB port and DVI port to the console Setup Control Panel Wings open the Wings pane of the Control Panel window see Figure 3 13 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Playback Wing Mapping Attach the wing to one of the playback bars by selecting the wing s unique ID number in the drop down menu for that playback bar If you have more than one wing you can identify which is which by pressing the Beacon button for the appropriate playback bar The LEDs on the wing will flash Ensure that the playback bar is visible by selecting its Display button Enable the external monitor included on the wing navigate to the Dispalys tab of the control panel and enable the cordinating DVI output where you plugged in the wing NOTE The Full Boar 4 s DVI D monitor output connections do not support analog output to VGA displays such as those featured on the older Full Boar 3 playback and
120. will take priority e Replace Overwrites the cue information in that destination If you are copying a cue all three options are available If you are moving a cue only the Insert option is available Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a cue to an exist ing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 11 1 4 Numbering Cues If you leave out the cue number when recording cues Hog 40S will give the cue the next whole number in the list If you specify a cue number you can use numbers with up to five digits before the decimal and four digits after for example 11111 1111 This can be useful to insert cues between previously recorded ones You can later renumber a complete cuelist see Renumbering Cues within a Cuelist p 181 11 1 5 Naming Cues You can give a cue a name that will be displayed in the Cuelist window and on the Playback Bar 1 Open Choose opens the Cuelist window of the selected master 2 Select the cue s name cell 3 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name a cue immediately after recording it press the Set key This will open a Quickname window Enter the cue name and select OK 178 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 2 11 2 1 11 2 2 Record Options Recording Selected Fixtures Only Normally recording a cue records the total con
121. window 1 2 3 Setup Network open the Network window Select the DMX Processor 8000 and press Settings Select the E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor Settings window see Fig ure 3 11 E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor Settings window Universe this field denotes which DMX universe to configure Multicast check this box to enable Multicasting When enabled all E1 31 in formation will be sent to all nodes Destination IP when the Multicast field is not checked enter an IP address to Unicast E1 31 data to Universe click to select the E1 31 Universe to transmit this universe s data on Changes Only check this box to transmit only changes to E1 31 data High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System DMX Processor 8000 Se Changes Processor Unit Broadcast P Address Subnet Univ Only a 086 Mine zZ OW BRORS BRORS 6 D 6 D 6 D OO v i amp E1 31 SACN DMX Widgets Timecode Widgets Diagnostics THT BPG o BREBHEae Figure 3 10 Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window E1 31 supports two styles of priority The first is a per universe priority that defines a single priority for all of the slots within the universe The second style per slot priority allows a sep arate priority be be assigned to each individual slot within that universe Not all E1 31 receivers support per slot priority On those receivers that support per slot priority the
122. with different fixture types Usually you have to compensate for this yourself by manually creating colour palettes by eye to produce similar colours on all fixture types This is a time consuming process and later restricts you to using the palettes you have already set up The Hog 40S s colour matching system provides a new way to choose colours without these problems Colour Models Traditionally colour mixing fixtures use the CMY Cyan Magenta Yellow system to uniquely define each colour they can produce With the increasing popularity of LED fixtures the RGB Red Green Blue system is also becoming more common These two systems are called colour models Any colour can be represented equally well by either of these two colour models they are just different ways of conveying the same information Many other colour models exist perhaps the most useful of which for lighting control anyway is the HSI Hue Saturation In tensity system Hue This is the term used to specify the colours position in the possible range a colours from red going through yellow green cyan blue and magenta and finally returning to red As the range wraps around you can visualise it as a circle with the colours positioned around the edge with red at the top green at High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals the lower right blue at the lower left and the intermediate colours in between The angle between 0 and 360 de
123. 03 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Fixture Schedule E3 Specify how many fixtures of each type you wish to use Select a type and press Set Search fixture name S255 0O Limit to fixtures in use E Count y 5 Star Systems AC Lighting Adamson Lighting Alkalite Alpha One gt _v4 FPS library v4 4 187 Figure 5 1 The Fixture Schedule window 3 Once you find the fixture type you wish to add click on or touch the fixture in the list and use the count column to input the number fixtures of that type your wish to add 4 When you have finished select OK and you will now see these added fixtures list in the patch window where you will patch them to outputs 104 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 5 2 Patching Fixtures Once fixtures have been added to the show they need to be patched to the appropriate DMX address Many fixtures such as moving lights use several DMX channels to control their various parameters Generally these DMX channels are in a continuous numerical range and it is the first of these channels known as the start address that is the DMX address that you assign during the patching process Hog 40S uses the information about the fixture contained in the Fixture Library to calculate how many DMX channels are used by the fixture and assigns them accordingly starting at the Start Address you have given To patch a fixture 1 2 H
124. 08 13 8 The Cue Editor window with Fade selected ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 210 13 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor 0 cece cece cece eee eee ee ee eeea etna eeaees 211 High End Systems Lighting Control System 13 10 The Trigger Toolbar cc eccceeeee cece cece eee e eee tea eeaeeaeesn essa eeaaeeaaes 212 IATA Cuelist with a LOOP seccsccccecees tas ieii trentini cectaetoestens eee tthasescs es 218 14 1 Effect Tables wrnini anun neniun ined aces ee dA av A T i aa 222 14 2 The Effects ENGIN errre a a didi a 225 14 3 Controlling Effect Transitions with Timing esssssssrersesererrerrere 228 14 4 The Effect Directory ccecccececee ee eeeeeee teen tenes ae eeaeeea essa eeaaeeaeegs 229 14 5 The Wheels Toolbar showing Effect Attributes eee 230 15 1 Fixed Kinds in the Kinds Directory ccceeceeeeeeceee nets tesa eeaeeeaees 234 15 2 User Kinds as displayed in the the Kinds Directory and on the Front PAMMEll E ovvateveteadsaenceeetawel aaekuntuye bavee T 235 15 3 Auto Kinds Button in the Kinds Directory esseere 235 15 4 Wheeslets displayed in a kind editor cc eecceee eee eeeeeeeeeeenees 237 16 1 The Auto Update WINdOW cece cere tetera eee e eee ee seen eeaeeenies 245 16 2 The Update Toolbar cecccccceeeeee eee inais ini aiaee 246 16 3 The Parked column of the Fixture WINdOW cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 248 16 4 The Parked Output WINdOW 2 2 0 0 cece eee e cette cette
125. 1 06 29 PM Tutorial Show Hog 4 Show 9 7 2012 11 40 12AM 9 7 2012 2 36 00 PM Figure 4 4 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window 4 10 1 Merging Fixture Types Once you have selected a source show Hog 40S compares the fixture types contained within each show file and creates a list of fixture types which have changed see Figure 4 5 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show window 98 High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 10 2 Merge Show Type Merge Select the fixture types to merge from the source file SS l l E E Name Rev Change Calibrated EF Martin L _ mac 301 LED 16b8 standard 3 Not In Show Deselect Al A Back Next K Cancel Figure 4 5 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show window An expanding tree shows the fixture types that do not match exactly and will explain what their differences are e Newer the fixture type in the source show is a newer revision e Older the type in the source show is an older revision e Not In Show the type is in the source show but not the current show If you want to see all fixture types in the source show file even if they match the fixture types destination show press Show Same Revision Select the fixture types to merge by clicking on their check boxes The Deselect All button allows you to clear the current selection and start again Press Next to continue Merging Fixtures After choosing to merge fixture types you can merge the f
126. 1 Starting Up the Console To power on and start up the console plug one end of a standard IEC power cable into any 100 220 VAC power source and plug the other end into the console s dedicated IEC power port and then turn the power switch on the back of the console to the on position Make sure that any ex ternal bootable media such as bootable USB flash drives or CDs are removed from the console before booting as the console may try to boot to that media instead of to the installed operating system When the console has finishing booting you will see two windows the Hog 40S splash screen and the Hog 40S start screen Your console is now ready for operation Important Using an ungrounded power source leads to a greater risk of shock and may cause the motorized faders on the Hog 4 and Full Boar 4 consoles to not function properly Always make sure that the power source for your console is properly grounded High End Systems 51 Section 3 Setting Up the System Launch New Show Click here to create a new sho g Launch New Show Launch Existing Show Choose a previous show fro g Launch Existing Show Connect To Show Connect to a running show if Hog Control System Version v1 2 0 b 492 Copyright 2004 2013 High End Systems Inc All Rights Reserved Utility My Control Panel IP 10 10 0 27 MAC 0 cb 4e 01 3b 6f Date 10 April 2013 Figure 3 1 Start Screen your console is ready to use 3 1 2 Adjusting the D
127. 10 Enter copy the parameter values to fixtures 6 10 High End Systems 139 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Strobe Position Colour Mixing et oe Type Pan Tilt Cyan Magenta Yelow Hue Saturatio Studio Color 575 1 100 open a6 Js J J J fs jas 100 open o o Jo Jo fo J f 100 open fo Jo Jo Jo Jo J fe 100 open fo Jo Jo fo Jo J fe Ce oe Ce a ee 100 open 46 53 a ra 100 open 2 0 1 E 100 open F 0 J 0 E E 100 open 0 Ke 0 Ss ES 100 open r 0 J Yo E 5 6 7 Om 3 Record the contents of the editor is recorded with only fixtures 6 10 not 1 3 If the above example had used Touch instead of Pig Touch then you would have to untouch or knockout 1 5 before recording Tip Values with a dark or light blue background in the Programmer or editor are recordable while those with a white or gray background are not re cordable 6 3 8 Copying Parameter Settings You can copy the parameter values of one fixture to another Important If you copy parameter settings between fixtures of different types only those parameters that the fixtures have in common will be copied Using the Command Line To copy from the current selection e Copy 8 Enter copies the parameters of the current selection to fixture 8 To copy from specified fixtures e Fixture 1 Thru 4 Copy 8 Thru 11 Enter copies the parameter settings of Fixtures 1 4 to 8 11 To
128. 100 Cue 2 100 Cue 3 75 As you can see fixture A only has to be recorded at 100 in cue 1 because that value will track all the way from cue 1 to cue 3 On the other hand since fixtures B and C change value in each cue the tracking console needs to have unique values recorded in each cue When discussing the contents of a cue or the state of playback on stage the following terms are commonly used e Hard Values Touched Values Values programmed into the current cue e Tracked Values Transparent Values Values assigned e State The summation of both tracked and hard coded values in playback The Hog 40S automatically recalls the state of any cue regardless of whether or not the cuelist was played in order this allows allows the console operator to jump around and play cues out of order while preserving the way the cue was meant to look 2 5 HTP and LTP Taditional theater desks that are not designed to handle moving lights will work on a Highest Takes Precedence HTP basis This means that if a fixture s intensity is being controlled by two different parts of the console such as a playback and a submaster the intensity will be at the highest of the two levels For example if in the playback fixture 1 is at 50 and in the submaster High End Systems 31 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals it is at 100 then the level seen on stage will be 100 If the submaster is reduced to 40 then the on stage level will be 50 b
129. 14 2 2 Adjusting Predefined Effects ececcccrccrerenee 230 14 2 3 Recording an Effect Palette ceccecercrrcreneee 230 14 2 4 Using Effect Palettes in Programming essscscerere 231 14 2 5 Editing Effect Palettes 2 00 eeeeee eee eee eee eee 231 14 2 6 Deleting Effect Palettes 2 0 0 cece ee tetera eee neeed 232 14 2 7 Copying and Moving Effect Palettes 0 00 232 Kinds and Wheelsets cc sccseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaee 233 T5 1 KINIS ieii pads ean A E AEE ETE E 233 15 0 0 Fixed Kind S aar aa a e aE ag cee E NOAA 233 I5A 2 User KINGS aone aor iaou ia aden tek ai oe aerian ia 233 15 2 WheelsetS irion arn ataa ea aea tienes eet iesin 236 Advanced Programming ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaens 239 16 1 Selecting from What is Onstage essssecereeerieereeereree 239 16 2 Bringing Parameter Values Into the Programmer 5 240 16 2 1 SUCK vietine cece needa eciavgsevl vee erie TENi eGD AA EASRA 240 16 2 2 Using Live and TOUCH ceecceeeeeeeee eee eeeaeeee essa nena 242 16 2 3 Using Copy to Bring Values into an Editor 0 243 16 3 Highlight and Lowlight eee eee e eee e nets ates a eeea tenes 243 16 3 1 Customising Highlight cee eee tees eee e teen eed 244 High End Systems Lighting Control System 17 18 High End Systems 1623 2 VOWIMONE cbs r a e Ades cease dete cca 245 16 4 Auto UPd ate icc ecco tigere ea secsnet gedta nen vagus tay oe
130. 18 5 E176026 VGA ET1919L Only Must use VGA to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 ELO Intel 22 E107766 VGADV latouch Plus ET2201L WAN TD2340 23 VS15023 VGA amp IC HDMI Must use HDMI to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 To connect an external touchscreen to your console connect your touschscreen montor s DVI or VGA video signal cable to one of the video output connections on the back of the console Navigate to the displays tab of the control panel and use the appropriate drop down menu to set the resolution of the external monitor and hit apply You will then be prompted to restart the console After the console has restarted plug in the touschscreen monitor s USB cable to any one of the USB ports on the console Once plugged in the touchscreen will automatically be detected and begin working but may need to be calibrated see Calibrating the Touch Screens p 52 3 1 8 Keyboard Using an External Keyboard You can connect an external keyboard to the console via the console s USB ports Choose a keyboard model and assign the keyboard layout according to the language of the keyboard you have connected in the Keyboard pane of the Control Panel 56 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System You can adjust the timings for Repeat Delay Repeat Period and Double Press in the Key Timings pane of the User Preferences window Tip You can use an external keyboard to con
131. 2 learn timing 213 linking 217 looping 217 manual 212 moving 181 naming 178 numbering 178 ordering 217 paths 204 recording 177 removing parameter values 179 with a delay time 203 with a fade time 202 with selected fixtures only 179 with state 186 timing 201 tracking backwards when recording 183 tracking forwards when deleting 185 tracking forwards when inserting 184 triggering 212 triggering from timecode 313 326 wait time 212 cursor keys 103 cut 44 date creation of a show file 48 format 52 setting the console clock 52 dbo key 281 High End Systems Index default value of parameters 123 delay button 45 delay time 201 203 fanned 211 deleting cuelists 193 cues 179 desktop views 29 effects 232 fixtures from groups 150 groups 150 link cues 217 pages 295 palettes 156 scenes 198 shows 48 user kinds 234 deselecting fixtures 127 desk channels 30 103 desklights 91 desktop views 27 deleting 29 naming 28 options 28 recalling 28 recording 27 DHCP server 61 67 68 diagrams front panel 416 direct palettes 34 162 directories 34 automatic naming of items 37 colour coding items 38 default item names 37 directory windows 165 button sizes 167 color coding 166 color coding entire button 166 list view 169 show auto color swatch 168 show fewer buttons 167 write permissions 165 discrete parameter values see slots displays 52 displays e
132. 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 11 and 2 will move to 55 On the Hog 4 Console and Hog 4PC only The Nudge Up and Nudge Down keys can be used to increase and decrease the intensity by a preset amount The size of the increment is 10 by default but you can change it in the Programming pane of the User Preferences window Using Pig Nudge Up and Pig Nudge Down will create a half nudge step It will increase or decrease the intensity by half of the assigned amount For instance if the nudge value is set to 10 a Pig Nudge Up will produce 5 Remainder Dim The Rem Dim button on the Main Toolbar takes to zero the intensity of any unselected fixtures in the current editor that currently have above zero intensity You can use the Undo button to reverse the Rem Dim command 130 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 3 2 Position Using the Trackball To switch the Trackball from controlling the cursor to controlling fixture position press the top right selection key adjacent to the Trackball When controlling fixture position the Trackball will glow blue and can be used in two modes To change mode press the top right Trackball selection key e Position Mode In the default mode the pan and tilt of the fixture follows the movement of the Trackball e Ortho Mode Ortho mode helps the accurate positioning of fixtures by con straining pan while changing
133. 23 user kinds 233 auto kinds 234 copying 235 creating new 234 deleting 234 moving 235 user manual reporting problems 422 user number modifying 119 user preferences center wheel 94 console 53 56 57 91 92 96 edit 130 147 202 playback defaults 135 290 V value button 45 version numbering software 423 video timecode see timecode view by DP 108 view cue 183 view toolbar 27 views see desktop views views directory 27 34 virtual masters 262 visualisers 373 W wait time 201 212 wheelsets 236 white point 33 135 windows bringing to the front 25 closing 25 cuelist 191 directory 34 edit fixtures 121 editor 45 fixture patch 105 fixture schedule 103 fixture window 118 462 Index launched processes 419 levels view 273 moving 25 on Hog 4PC 405 406 opening 24 output 271 park editor 248 pinning 25 resizing 25 scrolling contents 27 show manager 89 spreadsheets 39 view by DP view 108 window control toolbar 25 wings adding master wings 84 adding playback wing 82 installation with Hog 4PC 404 playback 270 High End Systems
134. 4PC you have the option to select which of your computer s network adapters will act as the FixtureNet port for outputting Art Net and or E1 31 To assign one of your computer s network adapters to act as the Hog 4PC FixtureNet port 1 Control Panel FixtureNet 2 Select a network adapter from the list of available adapters at the top of the window If only one network adapter is available then it will be selected automatically and the drop down box will be greyed out If no network adapters are available the drop down menu will be blank and greyed out Important Hog 4PC will only output Art Net and sACN for universes 1 thru 8 anda USB DMX Widget must be connected and assigned to the matching uni verse Important It is recommended that you do not combine HogNet and Art Net or E1 31 sACN within the same network This can produce network errors and unreliable data When using Hog 4PC you have the ability to assign High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 4 2 both HogNet and Art Net E1 31 to a single adapter but using separate network adapters is strongly advised Configuring the FixtureNet Port In order to successfully output Art Net or E1 31 from your Hog 4 console DMX Processor 8000 or Hog 4PC you must first properly configure the FixtureNet s IP address to settings that are appropriate for your network To configure DMX Processor 8000 s FixtureNet from the DP8000 front panel Network Fixture gt
135. 71 Section 17 Playback e Select Output from the View Toolbar at the top of the left hand touchscreen Values Effects b Strobe Position Tvoe Pan Figure 17 7 The Output Window The Output window by default displays raw parameter values you can configure it via buttons at the top of the window to display output information in the following ways e Values displays the raw parameter values e Effects displays the base value before the effect is applied along with a per centage indication of the effect cycle e Sources displays the source that currently has control of a parameter for ex ample the Programmer or a cuelist and cue number Show Palettes as with sources displays the palette that is supplying the para meter value e Compact Compacts the display of information in the window see Compact Mode p 41 Crossfading values will appear in the Output window in the following colors 272 High End Systems Section 17 Playback Output Show Paeses Valves Strobe Position Num amp intensty Soe Pan Green values are Red values areina Purple values are in in a Go state pause state a release state aan Show Palettes Show Palettes Vales gt Nun amp htensty Nem amp intensity Strobe Postion Toe Tyee Pan Studio Spot 575 21 Orange values are Teal values are Black text on orange in a mark state from an effect v
136. 88 moving cuelists 194 cuelists to pages 294 cues 181 effects 232 High End Systems groups 151 inhibitive masters to pages 294 pages 295 palettes 157 scenes 198 scenes to pages 294 shows 48 user kinds 235 multiple patch points 109 shows on the network 75 multiple consoles 70 naming cuelists 192 cues 178 desktop views 28 effects 231 groups 149 palettes 153 scenes 197 shows 48 slots 124 net number 60 70 108 network 64 68 boot server 67 client 72 connecting to an existing 76 console failover 72 console tracking 74 DHCP server 67 68 dmx processor status 63 dmx processors 67 file sharing 76 firewalls 67 IP address 68 multiple consoles 70 net number 70 port number 69 75 show server 71 using art net 78 network adapter 65 IP address 66 new show 87 next button 183 next key 127 next page key 290 457 nudge up and nudge down keys 130 numbering cues 178 see also renumbering O odd button 127 on screen keyboard 57 open key 24 OSC open sound control 317 input configuration 317 mappings 319 output configuration 318 output window 271 P pages 289 changing 290 clearing 295 copying 295 copying cuelists to 294 copying inhibitive masters to 294 copying scenes to 294 creating 289 deleting 295 moving 295 moving cuelists to 294 moving inhibitive masters to 294 moving scenes to 294 removing cuelists from 294 remov
137. A RA Equivalent to Pig Re lease Release Others RO RO Releases all masters except the one with the macro Fade Master FM master level FM2 50 Fades Master 2 to 50 Fade Grand FGM level FGM10 Fades the Grand Master to Master 10 Choose Master CM master CM1 Controlling Cuelists Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Go Cuelist GL list cue GL1 5 GL2 5 If you omit the cue number the next cue will Go Halt Cuelist HL list HL1 6 Assert Cuelist AL list AL10 Release Cuelist RL list RL4 7 9 Controlling Scenes Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Go Scene GS scene GS12 Halt Scene HS scene HS4 Assert Scene AS scene AS1 Release Scene RS scene RS6 20 High End Systems Section 23 Macros Controlling Pages and Views Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Change Page CP page CP3 Next Page CP CP Goes to the next page in the Page Directory skipping the template page and blank pages Previous Page CP CP Goes to the previous page in the Page Directory skipping the tem plate page and blank pages Recall View RV view RV2 Controlling Timecode Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Enable Time ET cuelist ET2 Enables timecode for the selec code ted cuelist Disable Time DT cuelist DT2 code Open Timecode of node type node mnber OTh1 When DP8000 is specified as the Toolbar node type then an index number is also required example oTd1 1 Sending MIDI str
138. DMX Processors dependent upon the number of universes supported by your visualiser and or license Contact the visualiser manufacturer for upgrade information 27 2 1 Configuring Visualisers Refer to your visualiser documentation for information regarding configuration of DMX input via the Hog visualiser connectivity application Most visualisers require selecting the input source and it must be mapped to the Hog connectivity 27 2 2 Configuring the Network Connection As the visualiser application opens the Wholehog DP window will be opened on the bottom right of your visualiser computer screen High End Systems 379 27 2 3 380 Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity wholehog DP Status Status Locating Wholehog Network Fl a Session info Scanning port 6600 Patch Configuration Reconnect Por 6600 User Number 1 X v3 10 A Hog logo will also be placed in the Windows task bar when this application is running Pe 7 11 57AM If you close the dialog box the Wholehog DP will continue to run and double clicking on the task bar icon will re open the dialog box When a Hog server is detected on the network the Status field will change to Wholehog Network Found then to Loading Show and finally to Running Status Status Status Status Wholehog Network Found Status Loading Show Status Running Sessor Session Connected Session Connected Info Initisksing network 0K Info Loading Fotu
139. Date Modified 05 10 2012 11 02 27 Not The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s Channe Function Feat ure x es 09255 100 Build Type 1 Select the Function cell for channel 1 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub categories 3 Select Intensity as the desired function The window will close and you will see intensity assigned as the function and feature for channel 1 Note that the feature column will auto fill with Intensity 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 1 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the intensity channel 0 gt 255 and press Enter 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 1 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in percentage 0 gt 100 and press Enter 354 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder Pan and Tilt 16 bit Fixture Builder Tutorial Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified 0 211 27 N he fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s Channel Function Feature Pan Pan 0655350540 rit e 0655350270 oe Tl i et Define 16 bit channels for Pan and Tilt 1 Select the channel cell for Channel 2 and press Set Enter 2 3 to indicate that channels 2 and 3 combine to create a single
140. Enter the State button is on the Record Options Toolbar that appears when you press Copy 2 Select Replace The values are now Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 30 40 50 Because of tracking when you copy a cue to another location you only copy the hard values so you do not create a new cue that actually represents the on stage look that you would get by running the original cue To copy both hard and tracked values you can use Copy and State e List 1 Cue 5 Copy State List 2 Cue 1 Enter creates a new cue in Cuelist 2 that is the state of Cue 5 in Cuelist 1 11 7 5 Unblocking Unblocking removes redundant hard parameter values A parameter value is redundant in a cue if itis the same as the value for that parameter in the previous cue in the same cuelist For example Channel 1 2 3 4 Cue 1 100 0 50 50 Cue 2 50 100 Cue 3 50 100 100 50 In this cuelist the values for channels 1 3 and 4 are redundant in cue 3 After unblocking the values in the cuelist would be Channel 1 2 3 4 Cue 1 100 0 50 50 Cue 2 50 100 Cue 3 100 To unblock cues use the Unblock button in the Main Toolbar e Cue3Unblock Enter unblock cue 3 on the currently chosen master ListlCue3Unblock Enter unblock cue 3 of cuelist 1 High End Systems 187 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists e Cue 1 Thru 10 Colour Unblock Enter unblock only colour parameters in cues 1
141. Features ceee 354 25 2 4 Step 4 Build the Fixture 2 0 0 ccecce tees eeee eee tenes 364 25 2 5 Step 5 Add the Fixture in the Fixture Schedule 366 25 2 6 Step 6 Edit Fixture to Define Default Values 366 25 2 7 Step 7 Programming Your Custom Fixture 367 26 Pig Key Commands ccccceeeeeeeeee cece seen eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeaee 369 27 Visualiser Connectivity ccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaees 373 27 1 Installing the Connectivity Application 0 0 cc eeeeeeeeeee eee 373 27 2 Connecting the Console to the Visualizer eccerre 379 27 2 1 Configuring Visualisers eses 379 27 2 2 Configuring the Network Connection cee 379 27 2 3 Configuring the Visualiser Universes ceee 380 27 2 4 Using the Visualizer cece cece eee eee tena eeaeeeaees 381 27 3 Connecting to WYSIWYG cece eee eee e eee e eee ae eeaeeeneeeaies 381 27 3 1 Configuring the Network Connection ceee 381 27 3 2 Configuring WYSIWYG cece eee e eee ee nett aera eed 382 27 3 3 Additional Steps for WYSIWYG Console Edition 385 27 3 4 Using the Connectivity with WYSIWYG neccen 385 27 4 Troubleshooting ccc ceee cece cece eee ee tees eect eae eaten eee n teen tena ees 386 27 5 Visualiser Support Contacts c cece eeeeeeeee eee e eee eeeaeeeaes 387 28 Upgrading Console Software ssssssssnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
142. Fixture Type and Per Fixture assecc 158 8 6 2 Recording Palettes with Kind Masking eeeee 160 8 6 3 Palette TIMING 1 0 eee eee eee ee eee ee ee ae eeaeeeaeeeaneeaes 161 8 6 4 Reference Palettes 20 2 0 ceeceeee eee e nese eeeeeeeaeeeaeeen teed 162 8 6 5 Direct Palettes 2 0 0 0 cececcceeeeeeeeee eee eee Ponha 162 8 7 Insert Merge and Replace ccceeeeeee eee eee eeeaeeea tesa nese eeaaes 163 9 Directory WINdOWS ccccceseeeee seen eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeaee 165 9 1 Write Permissions IPBCE Palette Directories cceeee 165 9 2 Color COdiN Oui kecin od ang Seveadig yetegates te E aada aia ddini 166 9 2 1 Coloring the entire button 2 1 eect e eee etree es 166 9 3 BUttON SIZES is at aie i ee ee ees 167 9 4 Show Fewer Buttons cccceceee cece eee eee eee eeae een eeaeeea teen teed 167 9 5 Show Auto Color Swatch 20 00 cccecccecee este cette eee tesa eee eeaeeeaeeeae 168 9 6 Spreadsheet ViCW ssssssssersrssrrerrsrrsrsrrrererirererrerrernsrrerererere 169 10 Media Picker ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeseeeeseaeuaeeeseeseeeaeeeaeeas 171 10 1 Media Picker Window Options ccccceteeeeeee tees eeee eee eeaee 171 10 2 CITP Preview Thumbnails in the Media Picker 08 172 10 2 1 Supported CITP Media Server Clients ccceeeeeeees 173 10 2 2 Configuring DP8000 for CITP Discovery assesses 173 10 2 3 Patching fixtures to CITP discovered fixtur
143. Found then to Loading Show and finally to Running Status Status Status Status Wholehog Network Found Status Loading Show Status Running Session Session Connected Session Connected Info Initiaksing network OK Into Loading Foture Data Info Outputs Active The Session and Info fields will contain additional network information The Wholehog DP application can be configured similarly to an actual DMX Processor You can assign Hog network port and the net number for this application The Port field must be as signed to the same port as your Hog console on the network The User Number field represents the net number and is similar to the number in the upper right hand corner on a DMX Processor Assign the User Number to a unique device net number that is not used by any other devices on the Hog network Configuring WYSIWYG To configure WYSIWYG 1 In WYSIWYG open the Device Manager Live gt Device Manager High End Systems Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity High End Systems Device Manager Name Type Status Connect on load New Click on New to add an additional device Select Wholehog III DP as the new device Seach path Corne eztin Connectivity Consoles Manufacturer Flying Pig System BaHog I ElHog II Overdrive El Whole Hog Bw ape Moving Pian OSide OFrom Wholehog Bove _ The device window will now display the Hog DMX Processor 8000 Device Manager ane San
144. G file 1 With the WYSIWYG file open go to the Live Module and select Edit gt Universes 2 The Visualisation Universe Selection window will open This window will display all the currently configured universes within your drawing Use this window to select the universe you wish to visualize from the console Visualisation UiMyverse Selection dg Current Universe name Set Current EDMX Using the Connectivity with WYSIWYG Once the above configuration is complete the connectivity between the Hog system and WYSIWYG should begin working You can close the Wholehog DP window and the connectivity will continue as long as the Hog logo remains in the task bar we Me I 11 57AM Autofocus Feature WYSIWYG can send information back to your Hog console to allow lights to be automatically positioned to a particular location on stage rather than individually positioning the fixtures using the console s controls Refer to the WYSIWYG Users Manual for further details on the Autofocus feature When WYSIWYG Autofocus is enabled selecting and deselecting fixtures in WYSIWYG will do the same on your console You can also use the functions in WYSIWYG to assign the intensity iris pan tilt and CMY colour mixing values in the active editor or programmer on the Hog console High End Systems 385 Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity Note that the Autofocus feature requires that the Hog show file uses a fixture library version 2 5 or g
145. Go command to cuelist 1 17 3 Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes Because Hog consoles can simultaneously run ten cuelists on masters and more if virtual masters and playback wings are used the question arises as to which master actually has control over a particular fixture parameter To decide which master takes precedence Hog 40S applies the following rules e For intensity parameters by default intensity parameters are controlled on a Latest Takes Precedence LTP basis therefore the value of an intensity parameter that appears in several cuelists will be output from the cuelist with the highest playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 267 In addi tion you can assign cuelist options so that a master works on a Highest Takes Precedence HTP basis this means that if several masters have programming for the same intensity parameter the highest programmed level will be output to stage For a full discussion of HTP and LTP see HTP and LTP p 31 For position colour and beam parameters Hog 40S deals with position colour and beam parameters on a Latest Takes Precedence LTP basis If sev eral masters have programming for the same parameter then the value from the most recently activated master will override the value from previously activated masters Parameters that are only programmed into a single master will remain at that value When you release the most recently activated master control will be returne
146. Hog consoles reporting problems 421 updating software 389 Hog net 68 hold over if active 290 HSI 32 HTP 31 264 265 hue 32 134 i Wheel 130 ignore MSC in 305 import preferences 91 inhibitive masters 282 copying to pages 294 moving to pages 294 removing from pages 294 insert button with cuelists 194 with cues 178 with groups 152 455 with palettes 163 with scenes 199 installing software 389 intensity 32 modifying values 129 interface see graphical user interface inverting pan and tilt 120 inverting parameter values 133 inverting the fixture selection 126 IP address 66 68 dmx processor 61 with Art net 79 IPCB fader mode with cuelists 276 J jump points in timecode 315 327 jump toolbar 44 46 K key 19 double press time 96 repeat delay 96 repeat period 96 keyboard external 56 57 on screen 57 shortcuts 411 keys 129 back 127 183 252 blind 247 choose 251 252 cursor 103 dbo 281 effect 224 fan 142 flash 252 go 252 halt 252 highlight 243 live 239 242 meaning of LEDs 269 modifier 47 next 127 183 next page 290 nudge up and nudge down 130 open 24 Pig 47 369 see Pig key 456 Index pig 139 247 413 release 255 set 57 skip back 253 skip forward 253 Time 207 trackball 92 update 46 245 killing processes 419 kinds 233 fixed kinds 233 user kinds 233 knockout button 146 L launch existing show
147. Hue and Saturation to pick a colour Hog 40S will automatically use the best possible DMX value settings for each fixture type to achieve maximum light output from each fixture e You can crossfade from a saturated red to a saturated green without the saturation changing The crossfade will work through all the saturated colours between red and green rather than taking an unexpected path to get there as can happen when using CMY programming e Crossfades between colours recorded using Hue and Saturation will remain matched on all fixtures through the progress of the crossfade This produces a better more even looking colour crossfade Tip It is strongly recommended that you do not change between the HSI and CMY systems within a show Palettes and Directories Palettes help to simplify the programming process by allowing pre defined lighting elements to be created and then used as required Once you have created a palette such as a particular set of position settings with moving lights you can recall those settings instantly and record them into cues Palettes are stoed in windows called directories A great advantage of palettes is that when you record a cue using the palette the cue contains a reference to the palette rather than the parameter values that the palette contains If later you change the palette then all cues that have been recorded using the palette are also changed This is especially useful if for example th
148. Index launch automatically 88 launching an existing 87 show manager 89 show palettes button 45 show server 71 87 shows backing up 90 changing current 88 copying 48 creation date 48 deleting 48 managing 89 merging 97 moving 48 multiple on the network 75 naming 48 renaming 48 updating fixture types 97 shuffle button 128 shutting down 58 skip back key 253 skip forward key 253 slots 133 naming 124 SMPTE see timecode soft patching 107 software beta 423 clean install 389 updating 389 version numbering 423 source button 45 specifications 435 split times 203 spreadsheets 39 aggregation 41 compact mode 41 start window 87 starting up 87 startup macros 89 state button 186 status bar 22 sub selections of fixtures 127 Suck button 240 suppress MSC out 305 swapping axes 120 switching off the console see shutting down symbols 19 syntax 21 High End Systems Index T tables effects 221 tap sync 279 technical specifications 435 technical support 419 template page 296 template pages 34 theatre lighting consoles 31 tilt see position time format 52 setting the console clock 52 timecode 212 303 editing values 314 327 jump points 315 327 simulating 315 327 triggering cues 313 326 viewing 313 325 timing 201 effects 227 fanned 211 scenes 199 toolbars clock 216 editor toolbar 46 editor values toolbar 45 fanning toolbar 144 fanning to
149. Key Timings appearance of any existing colours programmed using Hue and Saturation Use with care gt Trank m Highlight template ORE Startup Macro P j tior E resramming Pose Change Optons iad TS 3 Defaut Timing pegs Caspase Aceon an Grand Master Options faut Namin E Remember fader values e Defau 9 Flash Key Action ero ies Cuelst Cuelist Window Options E Scene Clear follow cue on scrol Virtual Faders Misc Figure 18 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences window If you want to hold over a particular cuelist scene or inhibitive master when changing page hold the master s Choose key when changing the page The item s name in the Playback Bar will have a blue background to indicate it is in holdover mode High End Systems 291 Section 18 Pages To remove a held over master simply release it and the cuelist scene or inhibitive master for that master on the new page will replace it if there is one 18 3 2 Matching Levels When Changing Page When you change page using Leave In Background it is possible for the actual position of the physical master faders to be different to the stored master level of the cuelist For example if you have the physical fader at 100 while on Page 1 then go to Page 2 and reduce the physical fader to 50 and then go back to Page 1 the console must resolve the difference between the stored value of the master and the new physical position of the fader see Figure 18 2
150. L Main Pause or Open ESC or O Skip Fwd K Set NumLock or Insert Skip Back J Intensity F11 Goto G Position F2 Release Z Colour F3 Pig Release ALT Z Beam F4 Assert A Effects F7 Next Page or Macro F5 or Group Fl Full or Fixture F12 Thru gt orX Scene F9 Minus or_ Cue F10 Plus 0r List F8 slash or Page F6 Point or gt Record R Choose Master 1 10 ALT 1 0 Merge E GO Master 1 10 TAB 1 0 Move M Pause Master 1 10 Backspace 1 0 Copy P Undo CTRL Z Delete D or Delete Redo CTRL Y Update U Visual Cut CTRL X Live V Visual Copy CTRL C Time T Visual Paste CTRL V Setup S Visual Select Range CTRL cursors Control L Backspace backspace Fan F Enter Enter Highlight H GM and or Blind B Central Choose ALT Clear C Bottom Right toolbar TAB F1 F12 Next N Top Left toolbar Shift F1 F12 Back Y Top Right toolbar ALT F1 F12 High End Systems Section 30 Cheat Sheets 30 2 Pig Key Commands The Pig key is the Hog 40S s main modifier key it can be used to modify or extend many of the console s commands The following tables lists its uses with keys and buttons and with other controls High End Systems 413 Section 30 Cheat Sheets Pig with Keys and Buttons Pig Backspace Pig Blind Pig Choose Pig Copy Pig Flip Pig Go Pig Next on the View Toolbar Pig Next Page Pig Nudge Up above the I Wheel Pig Nudge
151. MIDI pane of the Console Settings window Tip You can selectively disable MSC input for individual cuelists or scenes by enabling the Ignore MSC in option in the options window 20 1 2 Sending MSC from the Console To send MSC from a Hog Console 1 Connect the input of an MSC device to the Midi OUT port on the back of the console If you are sending MSC output directly to a USB Midi device such as a third party control system then connect the USB connection of that external USB midi device to one of the USB ports on your console 2 Setup Control Panel Navigate to the midi tab of the control panel If you are using the console s built in midi output port for MSC output then make sure USB LTC Midi Midi 1 is listed and selected as the midi output device If you are outputting MSC directly to a connected USB device then select that device from the output drop down menu Nw SE w 304 Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window In the MIDI pane check MSC Out High End Systems Section 20 MIDI 20 1 3 Tip You can selectively disable MSC output for individual cuelists or scenes by enabling the Supress MSC out option in the options window Using MIDI Show Control Hog 40S recognises and sends the following MSC commands Hog 40S Com MSC Command MSC Data mand Go 0x1 GO cue number cuelist number Halt 0x2 STOP cuelist number Resume 0x3
152. Master pane select IPCB Crossfader from the Fader drop down menu You can now adjust the value of the parameters contained in the IPCB fader cue by adjusting the master s fader level 17 5 5 Using a Cuelist as a Chase You can use a cuelist to make a chase Any wait times are ignored and each cue becomes a step in the chase where the rate is set in Beats Per Minute BMP To use a cuelist as a chase 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Is a Chase 276 High End Systems Section 17 Playback Properties 0O Use HTP CT ls A Chase 0O Track Through Loops 0O Mark Fade New Cues CT Mark Time New Cues The Playback Bar displays Chase and the rate which defaults to 120 bpm 2 Disco Chase Cue 1 Cue 2 Cue 3 Each cue step is by default equivalent to a beat so to set a chase that advances every second the rate needs to be 60 bpm By holding down the master s Choose key you can modify the chase rate and crossfade times on the parameter wheels Chase Rate Crossfade Cuelist Effect Rate 100 100 145pm When you select Is a Chase the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window the following chase options appear e Chase Rate the speed of the chase defined in Beats Per Minute bpm e Crossfade the amount of each step that a crossfade is active for as a percentage Step Length by default each cue step is the equivalent to a beat This is helpful when you enter a rate using Tap Sync but
153. New Fixture To create the new fixture 1 2 3 4 High End Systems Setup Patch open the Fixture window Press the Fixture Builder button Click OK on the warning dialog Press the Create New button The Create New Custom Type window will open 351 Section 25 The Fixture Builder 25 2 2 Step 2 Enter Fixture Details Enter the Model Name Author and Notes by clicking in each cell and pressing Set 1 Name the model Tutorial Enter your name for Author 2 3 Enter any notes 4 Adjust the channel count to match Protocol 10 channels Create New Custom Type E3 Create New Custom Type Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial O Create Blank Create From Existing Channel Count v 4 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Add patchpoint channel La Reset Patchpoints x Cancel 5 Click OK to close this window and start the fixture creation The blank new fixture will be displayed 352 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modifi Notes the Tutorial Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 T P4 o D ro Function B o 4 5 6 B 9 O a New Dmx Entry Build Type High End Systems 353 Section 25 The Fixture Builder 25 2 3 Step 3 Configure Channel Features Intensity Fixture Builder Tutorial W Create New Copy From ype information Model Name Tutorial
154. Pages 1 Page 1 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete You can delete a range of pages 1 Page 1 Thru 4 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Note that you cannot delete the current page Deleting a page does not delete cuelists or scenes from the show Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 18 7 296 The Template Page The template page specifies which cuelists will appear on specific masters for every page without physically having to load them onto the same masters on all pages For example you could have a primary cuelist containing the commonly used cues of the show which you want available on the same master regardless of which page you are on When you move this cuelist to a master on the Template page it will then appear on the same master of all pages If a normal page and a template page have a cuelist on the same master the normal page s cuelist will override the template page s cuelist To make a page into the template page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directory window 2 Right click on the page and select Set As Template Page from the menu To turn off the template page right click on the template page and select Clear Template Page from the menu There can only be one templ
155. Press this to make the contents of the editor editable rather than just to view it Instructions given to the command line or using the para meter wheels and I Wheel are directed to the editable editor In cue editors press this to see all the parameters that will appear on stage including those that have tracked through from earlier cues in the cuelist With Show State deselected only the hard values actually recorded in the cue are displayed Press Show Palettes to see the palette name rather than the parameter value see Palettes p 153 Press this to have parameter values changed in this editor fade rather than snap onto stage see Fade Changes p 246 Press this to toggle compact mode on and off Compact mode fits more information into the editor without having to scroll However the column for a particular parameter won t necessarily be aligned across different fixture types so sorting is not possible Reports This allows you to print the contents of the window Configure This allows you to control various aspects of how the editor window displays information The Jump Toolbar has a button for each type of fixture currently in the editor allowing you to quickly jump to the parameter values for that type of fixture The Jump Toolbar only appears if aggregation is turned on see Aggregation p 41 Changing Parameter Values in the Editor To make changes to the contents of an editor you need to have its Edit button
156. SB Type B USB input socket USB A 2 0 High Speed x2 34 7 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 75W Weight 27 2 Ibs 12 33 kg Dimensions 20 14 511 56mm wide by 24 02 610 05mm deep by 9 62 244 34mm high 34 7 3 Performance Display 15 6 Diagonal active matrix TFT LCD Native resolution 1366 x 768 Input frequency 31 5 80 kHz H 56 75 Hz V Contrast ratio 500 1 typical Viewing angle 160 x 160 degrees typical Response 80 ms typical Brightness 300 cd m2 typical 34 8 Hog 4PC High End Systems Minimum Processor Supported Operating Microsoft Windows XP 32 bit only Windows Vista 32 Systems Minimum Memory Minimum Hard Disk Space Screen Resolution 1 8 GHz Dual Core CPU or faster bit amp 64 bit Windows 7 32 amp 64 bit Windows 8 32 amp 64 bit 2GB 1 GB of free disk space 1024x768 or higher resolution monitor 439 Section 34 Technical Specifications For larger shows using a more powerful processor is advisable Please ensure that you are using the most up to date drivers for your graphics card 440 High End Systems Glossary 1 10 Base T 100 Base T abstraction layer blocking cue buddying button cell chase CITP command keys High End Systems An older flavour of Ethernet that is slower 10 MBits per second than the 100 Base T used by Hog components If connected to other equipment that only supports this flavour then Hog c
157. Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name a palette immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window Enter the palette name and select OK 8 2 154 Using Palettes in Programming In the Programmer or editor you can apply a palette by selecting it from its directory window The palette will be applied to the current fixture selection as long as the palette contains para meter information for the selected fixtures Doing so assigns the parameter value to be a reference to the palette A palette that puts all Studio Colors in the rig to deep red will therefore apply this immediately to any Studio Colors that are in the current selection see Figure 8 1 Example of Parameters set to reference a Palette For example 1 Open Colour open the Colour Directory window 2 3 Thru 5 select the fixtures 3 Colour 2 select the palette from the Colour Directory window Or using the command line 3 Thru 5 Colour 2 Enter Strobe Position Colour Mixing Colour 1 Num Intensity Ti v s a Pan Magenta Yellow Hue Saturatio Colour Studio Color 575 3 100 O GE Colour 2 O Colour 2 4 ea o l OE O T Colour 2 5 Wea O T Ee O T Colour 2 Figure 8 1 Example of Parameters set to reference a Palette High End Systems Section 8 Palettes 8 3 8 3 1 Editing Palette Contents Figure 8 2 The Palette Editor window You can change the parameter values that are applied when
158. The Jump Toolbar This has a button for each aggregation section clicking a button will scroll the list to bring the section into view Programmer Technobeam Desk Studio Fa Delay at i Rat Offset Length Tabi NShot Value ade Delay Rate se eng able NShots is Channel Color 575 Show Fade Palettes Changes Edit Figure 2 15 The Jump Toolbar To enable the jump toolbar Press EA Press to open the Configuration window 2 Select Enable Jump Toolbar 3 Click on Apply Tip The jump toolbar is turned on by default in all editors such as the Pro grammer 2 8 3 Cut Copy and Paste You can copy and paste the contents of selected cells e Right click and select Copy or Paste from the contextual menu Pig Copy copy e Pig Record paste 44 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 9 Editors Editors are windows where you can view and assign the parameter values of fixtures The most important editor in the Hog 4OS is the programmer which acts as the default active editor for all parameter changes when no other editors are open or active Individual cues scenes and palettes can all be openned in editors Editing parameter values works in essentially the same way for all of editors see Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters p 125 List 1 Cue 1 Studio Folow Feo Vake Fade Delay t i te Lengt e NShots Source udio Desk k _ sab gt Mark Mark Show iz _
159. Timecode Toolbar 20 3 3 Triggering Cues from MIDI Timecode Each cuelist can be assigned to listen to different timecode sources from different consoles To select Midi timecode as the source 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Options Cuelist go to the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window 3 Select Midi timecode source from the drop down list VO Settings n None 0O aay Enable Timeco e DP 8000 1 Index 1 LTC C tonore msc in Console 1 Index 1 MIDI High End Systems 313 20 3 4 314 Section 20 MIDI 4 Ensure that the Enable Timecode button is selected Tip There is an Enable Timecode button in the Cuelist window so you can easily enable and disable timecode during programming and playback without having to open the Playback Options window each time To trigger a cue from timecode 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set From the toolbar select Timecode BO oe apa Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter As well as entering timecode values manually you can use Hog 40S s learn timing function to quickly associate timecode values with cues see Learn Timing p 213 By default cuelists will follow the incoming timecode even if the timecode skips forwards or backwards generally this is a useful behaviour as for example you might rewind t
160. a Studio Color 575 1 2 5 6 Programmer Value Fade y Path Size at Offset Length Table NShots Show Fade a ompact Palettes Changes v Strobe Position Colour Mikina Colour 1 Tvoe Pan i Cvan Macenta Yelow Hue Saturatio Colour 0 0 i fe be 2 0 0 Ge open EE Norma 3 0 0 oo o Oue Cua gt Edit Num 4 intensity Studio Color 575 C 16 2 3 Using Copy to Bring Values into an Editor You can bring parameter values from a palette scene or cue into an editor such as the Programmer using Copy e Cue 1 Copy Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 of the currently chosen cuelist into the current editor You can chose which fixtures or parameter types are copied into the Programmer For example e Cue 1 Position Copy Enter copies only the position values from Cue 1 into the current editor 16 3 Highlight and Lowlight Pressing the Highlight key temporarily adjusts the selected fixtures to open white with intensity at full and all other parameters at their default settings This function can be useful when you want to see the beam of a fixture on a lit stage when assigning focus positions for example Highlight only changes the parameter values in the output not in the current cue or in the Pro High End Systems 243 16 3 1 244 Section 16 Advanced Programming grammer or editor and highlight has the highest priority when the console determines a parameter s output
161. a Go triggered on Master 5 will not override common parameters currently active on Master 4 Conversely you can apply a minus priority so if the cuelist on Master 3 has a priority of 50 common parameters on Master 5 will override those on Master 3 To change a cuelist s priority 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the Playback Priority cell Priority 0O Persist On Override Release On Other Go 3 Set 50 Enter change the priority to 50 Alternatively you can assign the Playback Priority for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist In the event that two or more cuelists share the same priority level normal LTP rules are applied Persist on Override Hog 40S automatically releases cuelists when all of their parameter contents have been overridden by other cuelists However sometimes it is useful to return to a cuelists s look when overriding cuelists have been released in this case you can use Persist on Override When this option is activated the overridden cuelist will not automatically release and will remain active when the overriding cuelist is later released To turn Persist on Override on for a cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Persist on Override High End Systems 267 Section 17 Playback Priority 0O Persist On Override 0O Release On Other Go Alternatively you can assign Persist
162. a single value is entered 100 for a corresponding DMX value range 0 gt 255 then you will not be able to adjust the parameter throughout the defined range When defining the Real World values for a function feature you can simply enter the numeric value 0 gt 100 and the predefined unit type will automatically be defined for intensity this would appear as percentage for position as degrees for strobe as hertz you do not have to enter in the unit type Also if a Real World value is out of the range of the console the minimum or maximum value will automatically be used an entry of 0 gt 200 will become 0 gt 100 Many features also allow negative values to be used When defining the real world values for a rotating gobo for example you could enter 50 gt 50rpm This real world range will be mapped directly to the corresponding DMX value range so if the DMX value range was 0 gt 255 then the real world value of Orpm would be equal to a DMX value of 128 positive rpm values would map to higher DMX values and negative rpm values would map to lower DMX values Decimals may also be used with some Real World values 22 5 gt 99 7rpm In the case of features defined as slots gobos or colours an additional popup box will become available when the Real World cell is selected This dialog box will allow you to select a name for the gobo or colour from a predefined list of names Slot entries will appear on the slot toolbar during programming
163. a usable network address for network show operation In this case you should use a custom IP address Custom IP address This option allows you to specify the IP address and subnet mask settings of the Console This option is most commonly used on networks where a DHCP server is not present but multiple unique IP addresses need to be specified Enabling the DHCP Server In addition to being DHCP client compatible all network enabled consoles are also capable of running a DHCP server themselves Enabling DHCP allows the console to hand out IP addresses to other consoles DMX Processors and computers on the network without needing to manually configure static IP addresses for every device on the network Choosing BOOT Server ONLY Included in the DHCP server options of the console is the Boot server The Boot server process is separate from the DHCP server and is used by Hog consoles to provide remote software imaging for the DMX Processor 8000 You can select options to either run only a Boot server with or without a custom address range or to run both a Boot server and a DHCP server When running both the custom address range applies to both the DHCP server and the Boot server Using a Custom DHCP Server Range Sometimes in more complex networks where more than one DHCP server is present specifying a custom DHCP server range is necessary to avoid IP address conflicts Using a custom DHCP address range applies to both the DHCP server and the
164. ace ensuring that it sits completely flat against the PCB Connect the new fader s cable led to the main board To re assemble follow disasembly steps in reverse order 32 3 Cleaning Faders Faders are often unnecessarily discarded when all they need is a clean 1 2 gt A 5 6 hs 8 9 Remove the dirty fader See Replacing Faders p 425 Undo the top crosshead screw furthest from the flying lead using a small Philips screwdriver Remove the top end cap Very carefully slide the whole mechanical assembly out from the other bottom end Very carefully slide the track assembly out from the bottom end Wipe tracks and wipers with a dry clean tissue Do not use solvents Re insert track assembly Very carefully re insert mechanical assembly Fit top end cap and replace and tighten screw 10 Replace the cleaned fader See Replacing Faders p 425 32 4 Replacing the Trackball t Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel To replace the Trackball 426 High End Systems Section 32 Service High End Systems Undo the four front panel screws with a 3mm allen key plus the two thumb screws in the armrest on the Hog 4 console and carefully lift up the front panel from the edge closest to you and insert into service slot Look undermeath the front panel and locate the cable connection that connects Trackball to the PCB Unplug this connection Unsc
165. addition an unlimited number of DMX outputs is possible when using Hog DMX Processors Connecting and mapping DMX Widgets to Hog 4PC also enables those Hog universes to be output through art net and sACN Always connect DMX widgets either directly to your computer or to a self powered hub To configure Widgets 1 2 Setup Network open the Network window Select the DMX Processor 8000 in the list by clicking on its Network Number and press the Settings button to open the DMX Processor Settings window See Figure 29 1 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings win dow Select the Widget Outputs pane The Hog 4PC application provides one port for each of the DMX outputs on the DMX Processor in the show file To configure a widget to an output port of a DMX Processor click on the box associated with the port and select the widget from the list of serial numbers that appears Super Widget ports will appear with the serial number followed by an output number Click Apply or OK to confirm the selection The widgets that have been con nected should now have their Active DMX OK and TX Mode indicators illu minated Some widget serial numbers will appear with red text This indicates that the USB DMX Widget is not compatible with Hog 4PC and must be upgraded see Upgrading USB DMX Widgets p 407 Z High End Systems Tip You can identify which widget is connected to the port by selecting the Beacon butt
166. aeesaeesaeeaaeeaes 313 21 1 The OSC pane of the Console Settings window cee 318 21 2 The OSC pane of the Console Settings window cee 319 22 1 The Timecode Toolbar cceccceeeece eee eee eee eerste anes ee anes a eeea nega 326 23 1 The Macro Wind OW cicccssseeccevis eco sseceecs cee chscee A o A a iaa 337 23 2 Command Data Selection c cece cece e eee ects ae eeae een eeaeeeaeeeaes 338 24 1 DMX Output WINdOW 0 cece etter terete ates detente ae eeaeeaa etnies 341 25 1 The Create New Custom Type WINdOW c ccceeeeeeeeee teen eeeneeeaees 345 25 2 The Create New Custom Type WINdOW ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaees 346 25 3 The Fixture Builder Window cc cceeceee cece eee eee testes eeaeeeaeeenaes 347 29 1 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 404 29 2 The Displays pane of the Control Panel eceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 407 30 1 Keyboard Status in the Command Line Toolbar ccceceeeeeeeeerees 411 30 2 Programmer section of the Hog 4 front panel c eee eee 416 30 3 Playback section of the Hog 4 front panel cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 417 31 1 The Launched Processes WINdOW ceeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeaeeeaeeenies 420 High End Systems xvii Section 1 Getting Started 1 1 About this Manual This manual describes the Hog 4OS as it pertains to the Hog 4 range of consoles Hog 4 Full Boar 4 Road Hog 4 Nano Hog
167. alue 0 thru 255 Press enter to confirm the value will now be displayed in blue 24 2 Setting DMX Channels to External Art Net Source To set a dmx channel or group of dmx channels to values based on a remote Art Net source High End Systems 34 Section 24 Direct Control of DMX Channels 1 Open the DMX Output window press the SETUP key on the front panel and select the DMX button on the main toolbar 2 Use the two drop down menus at the top of the DMX Output window to select the corresponding DP8000 and universe you wish the manilpulate 3 Select the desired dmx channel cell in the spreadsheet or highlight a group of dmx channel cells 4 Press the Set to Art Net Input button in the top the value will now be dis played in red 5 Open the network settings window for the corresponding DP8000 and ensure the corresponding Hog universe has its Art Net input enabled and set to listen to the correct universe and sub net Fixture Net such as IP address and netmask must also be set appropriate as similar to when outputting art net Caution Do not configure the DP8000 s Art Net input and output settings for a given Hog universe to the same Art Net subnet universe 24 3 Reverting DMX Channels to HogNet Control To set a dmx channel or group of dmx channels back to values generated by Hog programming 1 Select the desired dmx channel cell in the DMX output window s spreadsheet or highlight a group of dmx channel cells
168. alues are parked 17 4 4 The Levels View Window The Levels View window displays the output value of all intensities controlled by Hog 40S from all cuelists virtual cuelists scenes the Programmer and other editors and parked parameters It provides an accurate indication of the status of shared intensity values when multiple cuelists are running simultaneously see Figure 17 8 The Levels View Window To open the Levels View window e Press and hold the Open key then select Levels from the Main Toolbar evels View Show ffi S Palettes Values Effects Sources Desk Channel Studio Color 575 23 Figure 17 8 The Levels View Window High End Systems 273 Section 17 Playback The Levels View window by default displays raw intensity values you can configure it via buttons at the top of the window to display output information in the following ways e Values displays the raw parameter values e Source displays the source that currently has control of an intensity for ex ample the Programmer or a cuelist and cue number Show Palettes as with source displays the palette that is supplying the intensity value Crossfading values will appear in the Levels View window in the following colors Levels View Show Palettes Levels View Levels View E Show D Effects Sources Palettes Values Effects Sources Vi Effects Sourc Palettes Vawes Effects Sources Desk Channel Desk Channel Stud
169. an be resized by clicking and holding on corners until the resize arrow appears You can then drag the corner to make the window bigger or smaller Note that you can only use the mouse or Trackball to move and resize windows if you have un locked them with the Lock button on the Window Control Toolbar Keeping the windows locked is useful when using the touch screens so that you do not accidentally drag or resize windows with their title bars or borders You can still move and resize windows with the buttons on the toolbar 26 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Scrolling Window Contents When a window s contents is too great to fit inside the window scroll bars appear along the right and bottom edges of the window You can scroll by pressing or clicking and then dragging on the scroll bar s slider or by pressing or clicking on the arrows at the ends of the scroll bar In addition you can scroll window contents by holding down the Open key and using the Trackball I Wheel or parameter wheels to scroll Desktop Views Palettes Output Programmer Commands Michaels View Chri Figure 2 3 The View Toolbar Desktop views allow you to store arrangements of windows for quick access so you do not have to re open and re arrange windows to perform specific tasks For example you could create a programming view that shows the group palette and effects directories along with the Program mer window A playback view could dis
170. and modify the parked settings of fixtures in the Parked Output window see Figure 16 4 The Parked Output window To open the Parked Output window e Open Parked the Parked button is on the toolbar that appears when you press the Open key Within this window you can edit parameter values in the same way as in any editor You can knockout fixtures or parameter values to stop them being parked or add or modify parameter values to park them Desk Compact Channel fant Position Colour 1 r2 Colour Num 4 intensity Soe Sone were ene Pan Ta Time Colour Shake Bink Colour Shake Bink me Studio Spot 575 13 100 PY Per Feet eS Desk Channel 31 32 33 4 Figure 16 4 The Parked Output window The Wheels Toolbar Parked parameters are shown in the Wheels Toolbar with an orange background or hatch pattern e Solid orange outline all selected fixtures have the parameter on this wheel parked Diagonal line orange background some of the selected fixtures have the parameter on this wheel parked High End Systems 249 Section 17 Playback 17 1 Physical Master Playback Hog consoles have ten physical playback masters that cuelists scenes and inhibitive submasters groups can be attached to for playback Each master masters has a fader a Go key a Halt Back key a Back key and a Flash key Additional physical playback master can be added to your console by adding a playback wing or executor wing
171. annel A function is defined as the parameter name displayed when programming the fixture Examples of functions include intensity pan tilt gobo cyan etc Functions are selected from a dialog box that is sorted by the following Kind categories Unused Intensity Position Colour Beam and Control Most functions also have a sub category called feature A feature is defined as a sub classification of a function For example a gobo function can have slots spins and random features All features within a function are mutually exclusive In other words each feature is a unique behaviour of the function and no two features can occur at the same time Each feature can have its own DMX value or range of values The function type defined in the function cell will determine what features are available in the feature cell For in stance selecting a Strobe function will result in a choice of 13 features including shutter rate ramp ramp snap random etc Many functions have pre defined features that cannot be changed Intensity Pan Cyan etc When building a fixture library you define a feature as a sub set of a particular function and associate it with a specific DMX value or range A gobo function might have six slot features one for each gobo one spin feature and one random feature Each of these entries should be mapped to the corresponding DMX value s according to the fixture s DMX protocol A single DMxX channel can have many diffe
172. annel 1 Comment Macros MIDI Notes Unassigned MIDI Timecode nce Unassigned si CEGE Unassigned Diagnostics SEGER Unassigned Unassigned 6 Midi Notes Mapping Note Macro 7 Assign a comment macro in the macro field to a specific MIDI Note value High End Systems 311 20 2 7 Section 20 MIDI Using Midi to Control Faders You can control the front panel faders of your console including the Grand Master fader by sending Midi controller event messages to the console Not supported on Hog 4PC Since the Hog 40S listens for Midi controller events on all midi channels a midi channel assign ment for faders is not neccesary The Hog 4 console s front panel faders are hard coded to the following midi controller events event values 0 lt 127 Hog 4 fader values 0 lt 100 Fader Controller Grand Master One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight Nine Ten 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 oO 20 3 20 3 1 312 MIDI timecode Midi Timecode brought into a console is automatically distributed over the network and can be used by any other console Connecting Midi Timecode Input To connect a Midi timecode source to the console 1 Connect the Midi source to the console s MIDI In port on the rear panel If you are connecting a generic Midi Class USB device for Midi Timecode input then you can ignore this step 2 Setup Control Panel Navigate to the midi tab of the control pane
173. any existing colours programmed using Hue and Saturation Use with care Startup Macro lt o Ours women NY Grand Master Options Trackball Highlight template iS Defaut Naming E Remember fader values Flash Key Action eo ir Cuelst Cuelst Window Options E Scene Clear follow cue on scrol Virtual Faders misc For details of the macro syntax see Macros p 329 Backing Up Your Show It is recommended that you backup your show file regularly by saving a compressed copy of your show file on the console s hard disk or on a USB Flash Drive Backup files are small in size and are also easy to transfer from one console to another Compressed backups provide a method for reverting to older archives of your show file should a major problem occur with your show file Use the following steps to make a compressed show file backup 1 Setup gt Shows gt Current Show 2 Click Backup 3 Browse to a location on the hard drive or an external disk to save the backup file 4 Click OK A compressed copy of your show will be saved with _bck appended to its file name High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 9 4 9 1 4 9 2 4 9 3 Tip You should backup your show files to external media regularly so that if something catostrophic happens to you console or internal hard drive you can still access the backups The Hog 4 and Full Boar 4 consoles also feature a quick backup button on the bottom right hand s
174. arameter values 138 list of commands 413 to unpark parameters 247 High End Systems Index when using desktop views 28 when using directories 34 with the i Wheel 130 Pig key list of commands 369 pile add effects 268 pinning windows 25 playback configuring controls 283 cuelists 251 priority 264 using pages 289 playback bar 269 292 displaying 82 playback priority 267 playback wing 270 adding 82 playback wing 4 technical specification 438 point cues 178 pointer mode see trackball port number 69 75 87 dmx processor 61 position flip 131 modifying values 131 position mode see trackball preferences appearance 52 loading and saving 91 prev button 127 priority of aggregated sections 43 priority of cuelists 267 problems reporting 421 solving 419 processes restarting 419 programmer 45 125 bringing in values from onstage 240 clearing the contents of 146 contents after recording 177 proportional patch 121 protocol of fixtures 118 Q quit 58 High End Systems R radios personal use near the console 420 raise priority 43 rate override 274 Rate Wheel 274 real world units 30 record options toolbar with cuelists 194 with cues 178 with groups 152 with palettes 163 with scenes 199 Record Options Toolbar with effect palettes 230 record options toolbar 160 recording CDs 49 cues 177 removing parameter values 179 with a delay time 203 with a fade time
175. arameters such as desk channels You can toggle compact mode on and off with the Compact button in the window s toolbar s tee Len n wore e Os Oswy tee sn S 0 Come we 173 ame T we r A o r W m Cogn OO D R tT 2 Sotero Coine Coins Coteus Colmer frost Ti Suho Coi Sitrebe Pee TR kotero Cotew Colour Coteer Coiowr Prost Figure 2 12 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode Note that you cannot sort a spreadsheet that is in compact mode 2 8 2 Aggregation In windows such as the Programmer it is often useful to keep fixtures of the same type together this is known as aggregation The spreadsheet effectively becomes a list of fixtures in fixture High End Systems 41 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals type order with headings in the list separating each fixture type see Figure 2 13 A Spreadsheet with Aggregation Turned On To use aggregation 1 Make sure the spreadsheet is sorted by Fixture Type right click on the Type column and select Sort If the Type column isn t visible right click on any column heading and select Type Press al to open the Configuration window 3 Select Enable Aggregation 4 Click on OK Note that aggregation is always on if the spreadsheet is in compact mode see Compact Mode p 41 Tip Aggregation is turned on by default in all editors such as the Programmer Collapsing Aggregated Sections You can collapse aggregated sections to hide a
176. ards Setting the Net Number The net number is displayed on the main screen of the DMX Processor in the top right hand corner To assign the net number 1 Main Network navigate to the Network Configuration screen 2 Assign the net number to any value between 01 and 99 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 OK return to the Main screen Setting the Port Number To assign the Port Number 1 Main Network navigate to the Network Configuration screen 2 Assign the Port Number as required 3 OK return to the Main screen Setting IP Addresses for the HogNet Adapter on a DMX Processor 8000 By default DMX Processor 8000s are set to use DHCP to get an IP address automatically from a Hog console You can turn this off in the IP Config screen 1 Main gt Network gt Console gt Console Link Config navigate to the IP Config screen Set DHCP On or Off OK return to the Console Link Status screen Close return to the Network Configuration screen SA RR RD OK return to the Main screen You may want to assign a fixed or static IP address perhaps if the Hog system is sharing a network with non lighting devices such as personal computers You should contact your system administrator to determine the optimum settings for your network To assign a static IP address 1 Main gt Network gt Console gt Console Link Config navigate t
177. ark Select Park from the More options of the Main Toolbar To unpark fixtures select the fixtures set any value for the parked parameters and hold the Pig key while pressing Park Both the park and unpark commands will accept a parameter mask on the command line for example e Position Park parks only position parameters of the selected fixtures 16 6 1 Viewing and Editing What is Parked You can view which fixtures have parked parameters in the Fixture window and the Output window and you can view and edit parked parameters in the Parked Output window Parked parameters are also indicated in the Wheels Toolbar The Fixture Window To view which fixtures have parked parameters in the Fixture window e Open Fixture the Fixture window opens see Figure 16 3 The Parked column of the Fixture window Fixture Window Repic ng Edt Fixture Auto Uapaich Apply Patch Remov a di emove Fidures Fodures Guider Palettes Kind SwoAxes Paninvert Tithvet intensiv ColC Figure 16 3 The Parked column of the Fixture window The Output Window Parked parameters are shown in the Output window with black text on an orange background When the Output window Source view is selected the word Parked is displayed 248 High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming Output Show Compect V Co c Valises Effects Pates OTP 5 s y Noma hiensty Studio Spot 575 100 The Parked Output Window You can view
178. arn the speed of the chase from you in a minimum of two beats after this you can release the Choose key Note that you can only use Tap Sync with chases loaded onto physical masters not virtual ones Cuelists and Tracking You can define how a cuelist deals with tracking in the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window shown in Figure 17 4 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options Window Open Choose gt Options Cuelist The options are Option Default Notes Cue Only Off Use this to run the cuelist without tracking Any parameter that has no value in a cue will go to its default value rather than tracking through from the previous cue Track Through Loops Off Determines whether parameter values track from the end of a loop back to the beginning See Tracking Through Loops p 219 for a full descrip tion Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs You can use Trigger Macros to perform a variety of tasks when a cue runs Macros are simple text instructions placed in the cue s Macro cell 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Select the Macro cell for the desired cue and press Set 3 Type in the Macro command then press Enter For a full description of the available macro commands see Macros p 329 Tip You can display a list of available commands on the console by selecting the Macro cell in the Cuelist window and pressing the Set key Y g You can enable trigger mac
179. as well to join that same show High End Systems 69 3 3 3 3 3 4 70 Section 3 Setting Up the System Node Types and Net Numbers There are two elements that help to identify a node s role in a network show node type and net number The node type is inherent to device hardware and cannot be changed For example a Hog 4 is a console node type while a DMX Processor 8000 is a DMX Processor node type Secondly there is the device s net number The net number is a user configurable setting that further defines the node s role in a network show For example a DMX Processor 8000 set to net number 1 means the DMX Processor 8000 will load and output patch information stored in the show file for DMX Processor 8000 1 Important Within a single node type each device must be set to a unique net num ber For example you cannot set two physical DMX Processor 8000s to net number 1 in a show Only one of the DPs will actually load show data while the other DP will sit idle as a duplicate Consoles are the only ex ception to the duplicate net number rule Individual consoles can be set to identical net numbers which allows them to fully track one another in terms of their current page chosen master and playback state This tracking feature when combined with the failover functionality dis cussed in Configuring the Network for Console Failover p 72 provides the user with the ability to configure a tracking backup consol
180. assemblare montare e azionare l apparecchiatura Informacion Importante De Seguridad En el Informacion Importante De Seguridad p 431 se encuentran instrucciones sobre protecci n continua contra incendios descarga el ctrica y lesiones personales Lea por favor todas las instrucciones antes del ensamblaje montaje y operaci n de este equipo BEGREIAT SiR Rit Lic KR BE RU ADORED OORBICAT OHERA LERI Sle p 433 FSRLTTRS LY CORBEMAUT RE RSET ETORRERA TEE Warranty Information Limited Warranty Unless otherwise stated your product is covered by a one year parts and labour limited warranty It is the owner s responsibility to furnish receipts or invoices for verification of purchase date and dealer or distributor If purchase date cannot be provided date of manufacture will be used to determine warranty period Returning an Item Under Warranty for Repair It is necessary to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from your dealer or point of purchase BEFORE any units are returned for repair The manufacturer will make the final determination as to whether or not the unit is covered by warranty Any Product unit or parts returned to High End Systems must be packaged in a suitable manner to ensure the protection of such Product unit or parts and such package shall be clearly and prominently marked to indicate that the package contains returned Product units or parts and with an RMA number Accompany all returned Product
181. at Cue 2 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 4 2 If the destination cue s already exist you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 178 Moving Cues To move a cue to a new location e Cue 1 Move Cue 2 Enter moves the cue from 1 to Cue 2 effectively remov ing Cue 1 If the destination cue s already exist you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 178 11 5 Renumbering Cues within a Cuelist If your cuelist has many point cues 1 2 1 5 2 5 etc or if cues have been deleted you may wish to renumber the cues so that they are all whole numbers You can renumber cuelists using the Renumber button press More on the Main Toolbar Renumber Choose renumber cues in the cuelist on the selected master starting at 1 and increasing by 1 e List1 Cue 3 Thru Renumber Enter renumber all cues from Cue 3 upwards in Cuelist 1 starting at Cue 3 and increasing by 1 e List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber Enter renumber Cues 3 through 10 in Cuelist 1 starting at Cue 3 finishing at Cue 10 with other cue numbers equally spaced between Alternatively you can specify the range of new numbers to be given List 1 Cue 3 Renumber 5 Enter renumber cue 3 as cue 5 in cuelist 1 List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber 20 Enter renumber cues 3 through 10 in cuelist 1 with new numbers starting at 20 The rest of the new numbers will have the same order and
182. ate and Time The console has a built in clock which is shown at the far right end of the command line toolbar To change the console s date time and time zone open the Control Panel and navigate to the Time and Date tab To change the format in which the console displays the date and time in your show file open the Preferences window and navigate to theAppearance tab The format preference is stored in the show file and will change based on which show file you load Note In order to permanately store changes made to the time and date of the console you must restart the Hog 40S or properly shutdown reboot the console Simply switching the console s power switch off on will result in any time and date changes being lost 3 1 3 Calibrating the Touch Screens The touch screens may occasionally need to be calibrated To recalibrate the touchscreens before launching a show select Touchscreens in the Start window Touch each target as it appears sequentially see Figure 3 2 The Calibration Screen After the calibration sequence is complete press Enter You can press the Set key to start the process again if necessary 52 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System You can also calibrate the touch screens at any time while loaded in a show by pressing the Calibrate Touch Screens button in the Displays pane of the Control Panel Press each of the targets in turn to calibrate Press Set to start calibration again Press Control to s
183. ate cell and pressing Set Command and Command Data fields will display available selections See Figure 23 2 Command Data Selection High End Systems 337 Section 23 Macros Command Command D Duration Comment Main Playback Console Playbacks Wing 1 Playbacks Wing 2 Playbacks Wing 3 Playbacks Wing 4 Playbacks Wing 5 Playbacks Figure 23 2 Command Data Selection Deleting Keystroke Macro Steps To delete a macro step 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the macro step to be deleted from the Macro window 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK 23 3 5 Deleting Keystroke Macros To delete a keystroke macro 1 Macro 1 Delete deletes Macro 1 2 Click OK Or from the macro directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the macro to be deleted from the Macro Directory window 2 Click OK 338 High End Systems Section 23 Macros Tip For advanced Macro control you may wish to delete either of the first two default steps of a macro The first step is a recall view and the second step clears the command line Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Macro Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 23 3 6 Copying and Moving Keystroke Ma
184. ate page assigning a new template page will restore the previous one to a normal page The template page is shown by a T symbol in the directory window Since the template page typically does not relate to a specific portion of your production a song for example template pages are never loaded from the Next Page key When cycling through pages with this key the template page will be skipped You can always directly load the template page using either the page directory or the command line Cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters that appear on a master of a page because they originate from the template page are shown in blue on the Playback Bar by default see Figure 18 3 High End Systems Section 18 Pages Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page You can turn this off in Setup Preferences Misc by deselecting Highlight Template Figure 18 3 Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page If the template page is the current page the entire Playback Bar including empty masters are also shown in blue see Figure 18 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page loaded Figure 18 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page loaded High End Systems 297 Section 19 Command Keys Command Keys are user created single button executers that trigger existing show objects includ ing palettes groups views lists scenes and keystroke macros Command keys are stored in the command
185. bar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys High End Systems 195 Section 12 Scenes 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 12 1 3 Recording Scenes You can record scenes either directly to a physical master for immediate playback or to the Scene Directory Recording to the Scene Directory To record a scene 1 Create the look for the scene in the Programmer or editor 2 Record Scene the Scene Directory window opens 3 Select the destination location in the Scene Directory window 4 Alternatively enter a number on the keypad and press Enter Recording to a Physical Master You can record a scene directly to a physical master Hog 4OS will automatically put it in the next available location in the Scene Directory 1 Create the look for the scene in the Programmer or editor 2 Record Scene 3 Press the Choose key above the desired physical master Naming a Scene You can give a scene a name that will be displayed in the Scene Directory window 1 Open Scene open the Scene Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a scene when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the scene 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name a scene immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window Enter the scene name and select OK High End Systems 197 Section 12 Scenes 12 2 Deleting Scenes To del
186. be configured to communicate to other network devices e A link status of Disconnected indicates the adapter is running but is unable to communicate to other nodes because the network cable is not connected to a network e A link status of Down indicates the adapter is either disabled or in an unstable state and is not usable for show operation Important Only network adapters with a link state of UP will be able to communicate with other nodes on the network If none of the listed adapters are in the UP state then the Hog 40S will not operate on a network and will instead operate as a standalone console using a loopback address Configuring an IP Address for the HogNet Network Adapter In order for a network adapter to properly communicate on a network it must be configured with an IP address setting that is compatible with other devices on the network There are three main options when configuring an IP address for a HogNet adapter Default IP address select this option to use an IP address of 172 31 0 1 Obtain an IP address using DHCP select this option when running the console on a network that contains a DHCP server such as a DHCP router or a Hog console running a DHCP server 66 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Important If you choose to obtain an IP address using DHCP on the console and no DHCP server is present on the network then the console will revert to a loopback address of 127 0 0 1 which is not
187. be transferred to a PC where it can be mailed to support flyingpig com Tip The version number of the software installed on your console can be found on the System Info pane of the Control Panel window High End Systems 421 31 6 2 31 6 3 422 Section 31 Troubleshooting Reporting Problems with Hog 4PC In the event of a failure with Hog 4PC it is important to provide as much information as possible Different computer configurations other applications and additional hardware may all have unexpected results When reporting errors please provide the following information Name Date Hog 4PC software version and build number Operating system Computer specifications Number of displays Connected USB devices Networked devices Other running applications Detailed description of the problem including instructions to reproduce if possible and the exact syntax used List of any errors reported by the software If Hog 4PC crashes or fails it will output a dmp file in the application directory for example C Program Files Flying Pig Systems Hog4PC if you accepted the default location when you installed Hog 4PC Please send this dmp file along with your bug report to support flying pig com Reporting Problems with the User Manual Please include the following information in your bug report 1 The nature of the problem e Missing information e Incorrect information e Unclear or ambiguous informat
188. ble timing types Fade In Fade Out Delay In and Delay Out together with their current settings see Figure 13 4 The Wheels Toolbar showing Timing 4 Use the parameter wheels to assign the desired Fade In Fade Out Delay In and Delay Out Note that if you want to see the timings that you have assigned in the editor you can select the Fade or Delay views using the buttons in the top left of the editor window You don t have to be in these views to assign timings however Fade In Fade Out ree 2s 2s Figure 13 4 The Wheels Toolbar showing Timing To assign fade and delay timings to specific parameter types 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign timings to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key The Wheels Toolbar will show the available timing types 4 Click on Fade In Fade Out Delay In or Delay Out and select a parameter type see Figure 13 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar 5 Use the parameter wheels to assign the desired timing High End Systems 207 Section 13 Timing Fade in Fade Out rns 2s Figure 13 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar To assign a path to all the parameters of a fixture 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign a path to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key 3 The Slot Toolbar will show buttons for All In and Out see Figure 13 6
189. butes DMX output There may be many DMX Processors within a lighting control network See Also node A window for editing the contents of cues scenes groups or palettes See Also programmer The Hog 40S effects engine provides the opportunity to create movement sequences The engine contains library shapes whilst allowing for custom effects to be created See Parameter Wheel A defined way of connecting computer equipment together It comes in a variety of flavours See Also 70 Base T 100 Base T IP address Time in which fixtures crossfade between the parameter levels of two cues one incoming one outgoing See Also split fade in time out time A way of quickly assigning fixture parameters to an evenly spaced range of values For example you could use fanning to assign the intensity of 10 fixtures to 10 20 90 100 in a single operation See Also buddying Fixed kinds are the default collections of functions that collectivity contain all of the fixture functions used in your show There are 7 fixed kinds Intensity Position Colour Beam Effects Time and Control The fixed kinds are represented by dedicated front panel buttons and onscreen menus See Also kinds A data file that contains details of a fixture s parameters required so that Hog 40S understands how the fixture works and what it can do The fixture libraries are an important part of making the console s abstraction layer work See Also abs
190. by clicking on it then press Unpatch at the top of the Fixture window This unpatches the fixture but leaves all programming for the fixture intact 3 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s Or using the command line 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window High End Systems 113 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 2 Fixture 1 Pig Enter 3 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s Unpatching by DMX Address To unpatch a specific DMX start address you need to change the Fixture window to View by DP 1 Setup gt Patch open the Fixture window 2 View by DP change the Fixture window to View by DP When View by DP is selected the Unpatch button is available on the top toolbar of the Fixture window To unpatch start address 200 in the currently selected DMX universe highlighted in blue Unpatch 200 To unpatch several start addresses e Unpatch 1 2 200 2 3 300 To unpatch a range of start addresses e Unpatch 200 Thru 300 unpatches all start addresses between 200 and 300 To unpatch an entire universe 1 Click or press on the universe to unpatch so that it is highlighted in blue 2 Press Unpatch Universe at the top of the Fixture window and confirm that you want to unpatch Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patc
191. c information about the status of the console as well as connected network items Below is a list of the different kinds of data the status toolbar can show Description Example The Trackball mode The name of the current page The current editor The currently chosen master The network status The current time in hours and minutes pointer POS position POS ortho ortho mode Page 1 Programmer Cue 3 Master 4 The network is working normally N Consoles are syncing show data Fa Connected DP8000 s need a software upgrade is a problem with the network 16 28 2 2 The Graphical User Interface In addition to the conventional command line the Hog 40S uses a graphical user interface similar to those found on personal computers The advantages of the graphical user interface are far reaching and will become fully apparent as you get more familiar with Hog 40S Key features of the GUI are e You can work with on screen controls and windows using the touch screen or through a pointer controlled by the built in Trackball or an external mouse Left clicking the mouse is the same as touching the screen and is used for se lecting or activating controls while right clicking brings up a context sensitive range of menu options The Soft Keys adjacent to the touch screens provide another method of accessing functions changing to match whichever toolbar is docked along that
192. ccescceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaneeanes 411 30 1 Keyboard Shortcuts rieni iene ee eee ie 411 30 2 Pig Key COMMAMNAS cece eect eee eee ete e eee eae e eaten tenet need 413 30 3 Front Panel Diagrams ssssssssssssrsrerrrerisrrsresrrsrerererereerreresns 416 Troubleshooting cccceeeeeeeeeeee esas eeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeseaseeneeaneas 419 31 1 Console won t Startup 2 0 0 ee eect erate eaten teen teen etna eed 419 31 2 The console appears to have crashed or frozen eee 419 31 3 Console isn t talking to DMX Processors cecer 419 31 4 Playback controls don t behave as expected saesnec 420 31 5 The Front Panel Reboots Unexpectedly ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 420 31 6 How to Report Problems to Support ceeeee cette tees tees tees 421 31 6 1 Reporting Problems with the Console 006 421 31 6 2 Reporting Problems with Hog 4PC ceeeeeeeee sees 422 31 6 3 Reporting Problems with the User Manual 422 31 6 4 About Software Version Numbering 0 eeeeeeeee ees 423 31 6 5 About Beta Software cece eeee eee sees tesa eeae ees 423 SOPrVICC ie cin cececes cette sees eesednneeaeedvediceensesesenecessenevouseseaduaacees 425 32 1 Replacing the SCreens ccceeeeceeee eee eeeeeeeeee een eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 425 32 2 Replacing Faders ccccceeceeeeee eee eee ee eee e ae een ee aeeeaeeeaeeeaes 425 32 3 Cleaning Fader cccceecceceeee eee ee ee eeee esse
193. ce such as a USB keyboard or an external USB Midi Widget to send Midi Notes into the console then connect the USB con nection of your external USB midi device to one of the USB ports on your console Setup Control Panel Navigate to the midi tab of the control panel If you are using the console s built in midi input port to bring Midi notes into the console then make sure USB LTC Midi Midi 1 is listed and selected as the midi input device If you are using a USB Midi device such as a USB keyboard or external USB Midi widget to bring Midi notes into the console then select that device from the input drop down menu Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Console Settings Enable MIDI Notes In MIDI Show Control Unassigned Midi Channel MIDI Notes z ORAE Unassigned MIDI Timecode OERSEMGER Unassigned Open Sound Control Aeneas Unassigned Diagnostics ORAE UGE Unassigned Unassigned v x Cancel Midi Channel 6 Select the MIDI Notes tab and click on the MIDI Notes In checkbox button 20 2 2 Assigning MIDI Notes to Playback Bars To assign MIDI Note information to playback bars 306 High End Systems Section 20 MIDI Dov oP Nn Connect a MIDI device to a MIDI input on either the console or a USB MIDI input device connected to the console Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Setting
194. cific page A template page can define certain masters to be the same on every page 18 2 Creating a New Page Selecting a page that currently does not exist will automatically create a blank page and load it onto the masters Cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters can then be assigned to the masters on the newly created page To create a new page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directory 2 Make sure that Guard is not selected in the Page Directory otherwise you will not be able to create a new page using this method 3 Press a button in the Page Directory where you want to create the new page A new blank page is created 4 Set name Enter name the page Or using the command line 1 Page number Enter a new blank page is created 2 Set name Enter name the page Important When you create a new blank page it is automatically loaded onto the physical playback masters By default any cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters that were previously loaded will be released and their contents will no longer be output from the console You can change this behaviour see Options When Changing Page p 290 High End Systems 289 Section 18 Pages 18 3 Changing Page Changing the page loads a different set of cuelists scenes and or inhibitive masters onto the physical playback masters You can do this in several ways e Press the Next Page key to go to the next page in the Page Directory To go to th
195. command line syntax is Source Mask Command Options Destination e Source The source is the object within the show that you want to take data from It might be a palette scene cue or the editable editor With most com mands the source object is not modified e Mask The Mask is a filter for when you only want some of the data from that object There are two types of mask a fixture mask specifies only data for certain fixtures for example Cyberlight 1 a kind mask specifies only data for certain kinds for example Colour Beam If no mask is specified then the entire con tents of the current active editor are included in the command e Command The Command is the operation you want to perform Commands include Copy Record Delete Move Merge Knockout Some of these only need a source to be specified others only need a destination but they all have the same syntactical form Options The behaviour of some commands for example Record can be altered with options These usually appear on a popup toolbar once the command key is pressed e Destination The destination is the object that will be affected by the command Again it might be a palette cue scene or the editable editor If the destination already exists and the action to take is unclear then you will be asked what the console should do Some examples of command line syntax are shown below Note that a final press of the Enter key is required to tell the console
196. connected or not multiple Playback Bars can be displayed using the Wings pane of the Control Panel You can drag these and dock them at the edge of an external display placed adjacent to the wing to make cross referencing the screen display and the physical wing playback controls easier If your external display is set to a resolution higher than 1024x768 you can drag the ends of the Playback Bar to stretch it to better align with the spacing of the controls of the wing For information on adding and setting up playback wings see Adding Playback Wings p 82 Cuelist Feedback You can view in detail the running of the cues of a specific cuelist by opening the cuelist window see Figure 17 6 The Cuelist Window with a Cue Running Open Choose e Double click the Playback Bar above the required cuelist Open List 1 select the cuelist from the cuelist directory High End Systems Section 17 Playback Chosen Master List 1 Leem View Enable Enable Folow Folow Cue Timecode Clock Cue Chosen Options Number Wait Mark Comment Figure 17 6 The Cuelist Window with a Cue Running The current cue is displayed with an arrow in the wait column of the cuelist when triggered the arrow turns green and the letter R for Running is displayed the cue s progress is indicated by the percentage completed in the same column Pausing a cue will turn the arrow red and the letter H Halted is displayed Customisi
197. create a bootbale USB flash drive to restore your Hog 40S Console using a Macintosh Computer High End Systems 1 2 10 11 12 13 Download and install Unetbootin http unetbootin sourceforge net Open a terminal window on your Macintosh computer If you don t know how to open a terminal window you can simply type terminal in the spotlight search field and it will usually show up as the first application result in the search results Click on the application to launch a terminal window Insert the USB flash key you wish to use into one of the USB slots on your Macintosh Computer Must be at least 2GB and formated as Fat32 In the terminal window type diskutil list and hit enter You should now see a list of disks in the terminal window Locate your USB flash drive in this list and type sudo fdisk e dev rdisk where is the disk number of your USB flash drive and hit enter When prompted type in your computer password and press enter You may ignore any error messages such as fdisk could not open MBR file Type p in the terminal window and hit enter Type f 1 in the terminal window and press enter The terminal window should now read Partition 1 marked active Type write in the terminal window and press enter When asked to confirm that a reboot will be needed type Y and press enter Type exit and press enter You may now close the terminal window Start Unetbootin When Unetbootin starts you
198. cros To make a copy of a macro in a new location 1 Open Macro open the Macro Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is depressed so you do not accidentally apply macros when trying to select them 3 Select the macro that you want to copy by pressing its button in the directory 4 Press and hold the Copy key 5 Press the button of the location in the directory you want to copy the macro to Or using the command line e Macro 2 Copy Macro 3 Enter copies the contents of Macro 2 to Macro 3 Similarly to move a macro to a new location e Macro 2 Move Macro 3 Enter moves the contents of Macro 2 to Macro 3 leaving 2 empty If the destination macro already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge or Replace Insert Add Steps and Replace When recording or copying a macro if the destination location already has a macro recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Add Steps or Replace If you are moving a macro only the Insert option is available e Insert creates a new destination for the macro The new macro will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Add Steps adds the macro steps from the source macro into the destination macro All new information is appended to the end of the current macro steps e Replace overwrites the macro information in that destination High End Systems 339 Section 23 Macros Tip If
199. cted in the File Browser If a disk will not eject check that you are not browsing its contents elsewhere and that the console is not currently accessing it 2 12 4 Burning files to CD To burn files onto a recordable CD 1 Setup gt Shows gt CD Burning see Figure 2 17 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window 2 Select a file to be copied in the left hand list and click the Add to CD button to move it to the right hand list You may be asked to archive the file before adding it to the list click OK to agree to this 3 Repeat for all the files you want to copy to the CD 4 Insert a recordable CD into the CD drive located under the console s front wrist rest High End Systems 49 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 5 Press the Burn button and then the Start Burn button in the CD Burning window The window will show the progress of the writing operation Show Manager o Browse the files to be barat to the CD Curre ure ME co Buming K Nara Oescretion Created FAY Fie Browser g A Big Show Hog 4 Show s 0223 q Festival Show Hog 4 Show 9102012 22 g Main Stage Show Hog 4 Show 10 2012 3 26 47 Fie Folder 910 201 Hog 4 Show Figure 2 17 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window Tip You can use drag and drop to move files to the CD Master list Note that files will always be copied not moved High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 1 Setting Up the Console 3 1
200. ction 7 Groups e Group 1 Intensity Copy Fixture Group 2 Enter copies the intensity values of the fixtures in group 1 to the fixtures in group 2 7 7 Insert Merge and Replace When recording or copying a group if the destination location already has a group recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace If you are moving a group only the Insert option is available Insert creates a new destination group The new group will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination group e Replace Overwrites the group information in that destination Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a group to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 152 High End Systems Section 8 Palettes 8 1 Recording a Palette There are five palette directories intensity position colour beam effects into which users can record preset values for easy recall during show programming The Hog 40S determines which function values are recorded into palettes based on two things the kind masking specified at the time of recording and the palette directory s write permissions If you wish to exclude certain kinds of functions from being recorded into a palette you can chan
201. ctions such as 6 seconds 3 Time Record Colour 2 Enter records only the timing information that was in the programmer into Colour Palette 2 You can also edit timings in the palette s editor See Editing Palette Contents p 155 Reference Palettes When you record a cue using a palette a reference to the palette is recorded instead of a numer ical value for the parameters Similarly you can record palettes using other palettes so that the new palette contains references rather than numerical values A palette recorded in this way is known as a reference palette and is marked in the palette directory window by a R icon Reference palettes are useful when you want to create palettes to use as simple building blocks which you then make more complex building blocks from For example you might create a po sition palette that focuses some Studio Spot 575s onto the lead singer and further position palettes that position other fixtures onto the remaining band members You could then make an All Band position palette with one fixture lighting each band member in which each fixture refer ences another palette instead of having parameter values If the drum riser was later moved you could adjust the position palette that focused onto it and the change would not only be updated in all scenes and cues programmed with that palette but also all programming done with the All Band palette By default palettes are not recorded
202. cues will be triggered when the timecode reaches each cue s assigned frame For more information on timecode see MIDI timecode p 312 To use Learn Timing without timecode 1 2 3 High End Systems Open Choose open the Cuelist window of the required cuelist Ensure that Enable Timecode is not selected Select Learn Timing 213 13 4 2 214 Section 13 Timing 4 Press the Go key to run the first cue and again to run subsequent cues after the required time interval A time value equivalent to the duration between Go presses will appear in the Wait cell for each cue 5 When you have finished deselect Learn Timing Now when you run the first cue the subsequent cues will be triggered at the same intervals as when you ran them manually Tip Learn Timing will only set a trigger on a cue that is currently set to Halt that is it has an empty Wait cell To remove existing wait times from cues select the wait cell s and press Set Select Halt from the toolbar Clock Triggers To assign a cue to be triggered at a particular time and date using Hog 4OS s internal clock 1 List 1 Open open the cuelist 2 Select the Wait cell for the desired cue and press Set 3 The Trigger Toolbar will appear below the Wait cell see Figure 13 10 The Trigger Toolbar 4 Select Clock the Clock Trigger window will open High End Systems Section 13 Timing sum a o o oo Start Date v September 4 v 2012
203. current cue 4 Select the Fade cell of the link 5 Set cue number Enter assign the cue number to be linked to You can delete link cues in the same way as any other type of cue For example Cue 3 5 Delete Creating a Loop To create a loop you need to have two things A link that points to a cue earlier in the cuelist e All the cues in the loop between the linked to cue and the link cue must be assigned with wait or follow triggers see Cue Wait Timing p 212 Hog 40S will recognise this as a loop see Figure 13 11 A Cuelist with a Loop High End Systems 217 Section 13 Timing Chosen Master List 2 Learn View Enable be Folow Folow insert Timing Cue Time oa Cue Chosen Link Comment Fade Copy of Cue 1 Copy of Cue 1 Copy of Cue 1 Copy of Cue 1 Forever Copy of Cue 1 Figure 13 11 A Cuelist with a Loop Exiting Loops You can determine when the cuelist stops looping and continues with cues after the loop The options are e Forever the loop will run indefinitely until you press the Go key e Count the cuelist will loop the assigned number of times Assigning a count of zero will make the cuelist ignore the link e Timed the cuelist will loop until the assigned time period has elapsed To assign the looping behaviour 1 Open Cuelist 1 open the cuelist window 2 Select the link cue s Delay cell and press Set 3 Select an option from
204. current selection using the Next and Back keys and the Odd Even and Random buttons on the Select Toolbar Main Toolbar gt Select Random The Random button selects a single fixture at random from the current active selection in the Programmer Even and Odd The Even and Odd buttons on the Select Toolbar select the even and odd fixtures from the current selection according to the Selection Order p 128 Note that the selection order is not related to fixture user numbers so the sub selection produced by Odd might contain even numbered fixtures Next and Back The Next and Back keys on the console select a single fixture from within the current selection Repeatedly pressing Next or Back steps forwards or backwards through the current selection with the order determined by the Selection Order p 128 To select even or odd fixtures from the current selection based upon fixture user numbers use Pig Even or Pig Odd Tip When the Trackball is in position mode the bottom left Trackball key also acts as a Next key This can make it very fast to work through a selection of fixtures assigning their position 6 1 6 Deselecting Fixtures To deselect all selected fixtures press the Backspace key when the command line is empty You can also use the following command line syntax Fixture 0 Enter deselects all fixtures To deselect specific fixtures use the key e Fixture 1 deselects Fixture 1 Alternatively you
205. d Dimensions cceeeeeeeeeee es 438 34 6 3 Performance cceecee ence ete e eee ee eee ee anes a eeea etna eenaeed 438 34 7 Master WING A ccicccelecvechsecicesseeseeenendchceeeegeadeeie akaa daa 439 34 7 1 Input and Output Connections cece eee e eee 439 34 7 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeeee ees 439 34 7 3 Performance cece eee eee eee eee eee tees eee ea ee need 439 34 8 HOG 4PC wiseerescensticces cave ccadivahenes T E E 439 GIOSSALY wecceccceeeee cece eee eee eee e eee eee sees esse nanai aeaea naana iannus 441 Ihde osisssa sa ccceetaceed ora aa aaa ISa 451 High End Systems xiii List of Figures 2 1 The Command LIne 3 00 08 cet caves eter ee a a Sheena eee ees 22 2 2 The Status Bats crccssetvectee tion mack eaige aa Hae ea eee ae Gave eed 22 2 3 The View Toolbar ae a a aai ences eee ee een erate anes nee r E a dopin ETEA tigt 27 2 4 The Views Directory cccceeeeeee eee eee ee eee esse eeae esa eea seen eesa essa eeaaeenaes 27 2 5 The Views Directory in Spreadsheet View cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeas 29 2 6 The HSI Colour Wheel koiria eean esa eeae esa eesa essa Ta 33 224 A pica Directory eaat oes Seats ea Sa ed ade edhe vended ge ceaeb ees 35 2 8 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet View cceeeeeeeeeee tees eeeeeeeaeeeae 37 2 9 The Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window 5 38 2 10 Directory Item COlOUr sarren a eee eee eee r
206. d to the previously activated master Alternatively you can assert a previously activated master s parameters so that they override the most recently 264 High End Systems Section 17 Playback activated master see Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others p 266 You can prevent an LTP parameter from being overridden by master actions or asser tions by giving its cuelist a high playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 267 Tip The Programmer or the current editor with blind mode off will always have priority over all masters and virtual masters 17 3 1 Using HTP and LTP You can switch a cuelist s precedence from LTP to HTP allowing intensity parameters that have programming to be output at their highest level rather than the most recently activated level For example you may have a series of intensity chases that you wish to fade in and out over a stage look without overriding the intensity information of the original look or when touring with smoke machines you may wish to manually boost the level of smoke programmed into the main cuelist to combat changes in air conditioning or venue size at specific points in the show For a full explanation of LTP see HTP and LTP p 31 To assign a cuelist s precedence to HTP 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Use HTP Properties Cl Use HTP 0O Pile add Effects Cl ls A Chase 0O Reset On Release 0O Track Through Loops 0O Cue Only 0O Mark Fade New C
207. date according to the Hog 40S clock and information about the next cue due to be triggered To open the Clock Toolbar e Open Clock the Clock Toolbar will open on the left touchscreen Next Trigger Cueist List 2 The Clock Toolbar will automatically update its fields according to the next valid trigger Tip You can assign the format of the date and time in the Appearance pane of the Preferences window The Clock Toolbar Cuelist triggers and the Command Line Toolbar clock will display in the selected format 216 High End Systems Section 13 Timing 13 5 13 5 1 13 5 2 Loops and Links Normally cues in a cuelist will be replayed in numerical order but you can use links to change this Links can be used to jump to other points in the cuelist or to create loops Unlike some consoles Hog 40S creates a link as a special type of cue rather than an attribute of an ordinary cue Because it is a separate item in the cuelist you can move cues within the list without disturbing the link Tip When a cuelist gets to the end it will link back to the first cue by default so there is no need to put a link in Creating a Link To create a link 1 Open Cuelist 1 open the cuelist window 2 Play the cues in the list until the current cue shown by gt in the wait column is the cue before where you want the link 3 Click on the Insert Link button in the window The link cue will be inserted after the
208. de los Estados Unidos e internacionales Las modificaciones al producto podrian afectar la seguridad y dejar al producto fuera de conformidad con las normas de seguridad relevantes 2 High End Systems ETEA a High End Systems N MILT X VAGRHARVU ERRAERZOVBREC BLT KIRHRUREENT EF TOA HRIOMT SRESRSICMLCHEERIET BARU BERERE aR BIAMHVYET Important Safety Information Instructions pertaining to continued protection against fire electric shock and injury to persons are found in Safety Warnings p 429 Please read all instructions prior to assembling mounting and operating this equipment Important Informations De S curit Les instructions se rapportant la protection permanente contre les incendies l lectrocution et aux blessures corporelles se trouvent dans Informations Importantes Sur La S curit p 430 Veuillez lire toutes les instructions avant d assembler de monter ou d utiliser cet quipement Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Sicherheitsanleitungen zum Schutz gegen Feuer elektrischen Schlag und Verletzung von Personen finden Sie in Wichtige Hinweise Fiir Ihre Sicherheit p 430 Vor der Montage dem Zusammenbau und der Inbetriebnahme dieses Ger ts alle Anleitungen sorgf ltig durchlesen Informazioni Importanti Di Sicurezza Le istruzioni sulla protezione da incendi folgorazione e infortuni sono contenute nell Sezione 33 5 Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza Si prega di leggere tutte le istruzioni prima di
209. destination 6 You can create a new DP8000 if you want to clone to a universe on a DP8000 not currently connected to the console Click the Add DP button 7 Click OK 8 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s 112 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Clone DMX Processor Source Destination DMX Processor Universe Usage DMX Processor Universe Net Name Type 5 Net Name 1 DP 8000 DP 8000 DP 8000 DP 8000 npty DP 8000 DP 8000 Source Options Oniy unpatch fotures that wil block the fixtures being cloned E Unpatch Source tinati universes rather tha Unpatch al res in the destination Figure 5 7 The Clone DP window 5 2 8 Unpatching Fixtures You can unpatch a fixture in order to repatch it with a different start address or to stop DMX output being sent to it Unpatching does not erase any programming for the fixture in groups palettes cues and so on There are two ways to unpatch Unpatching by fixture removes all patching information for that fixture even if it has been patched to several start addresses or has multiple patch points Un patching by start address only unpatches a specific start address leaving other start addresses associated with the fixture intact Unpatching by Fixture To unpatch all patch information associated with a fixture 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Select the fixture
210. destination High End Systems 199 200 Section 12 Scenes If you are copying a scene all three options are available If you are moving a scene only the Insert option is available J Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a scene to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys High End Systems Section 13 Timing 13 1 Timing Basics With Hog 40S you can assign individual crossfade timings for each parameter of each fixture giving you complete control of how each parameter changes during a cue Because of this there are no cue parts as found on some other consoles Hog 40S gives you easy ways to assign timings for the whole cue for individual fixtures and by parameter type intensity position colour beam and so on as well as for each parameter You can control three aspects of timing in the Hog 40S The speed and manner in which the transition of parameter values happens when a cue scene is played back See Fade Delay and Path p 202 e The time a cue scene waits before it is triggered See Cue Wait Timing p 212 e The order in which cues in a cuelist are played back See Loops and Links p 217 The different types of timing values are e Fade time The time that it takes fixture parameters to change from their initial value to their value in the cue that is being p
211. e Hog 4 Product Number All Product Options All Conforms to the following EEC directives 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC 89 336 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC Equipment referred to in this declaration of conformity was first manufactured in compliance with the following standards in 2002 Safety EN60950 2000 EMC EN55103 1 1996 E2 EN55103 2 1996 E2 I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards h Kenneth Stuart Hansen Compliance Engineer 30 June 2012 High End Systems Table of Contents 1 Getting Started cccceecee eee ee eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeaees 19 EL About this Manual cscivcius atest hed ius weed ea ee 19 1 2 Manual SymbolS 00 00 00 nee eee eee e detente teen ee sa eeae eed 19 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals cccsceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeesaeeaeeeaeeas 21 2 1 The Command Line cccceeeceeeee E tesa essa essa esse esa aa 21 2 1 1 Command Line Syntax 1 0 0 cece ee eee eee ne eea eee aneenes 21 2 1 2 THE Status Bar aosi he ei enpara a ii n aah ste essen peaeh Shoes ee 22 2 2 The Graphical User Interface ccceeceee ee eeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeneeenaes 23 2 2 1 Window Management 0ccceeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeee een eeae ees 24 203 ADSEFACEION gree nisseee ies was aa A diye pa eek N E ce coset yaacea apneic 29 2 3 1 Referring to Fixtures 2 0 ceieceeeeeeee cece eee eee ee
212. e Quickname window will open 4 Enter a name and click on OK Tip You can also assign view names and add comments to them in the spreadsheet view of the Views Directory See Desktop View Options p 28 Recalling a Desktop View You can recall desktop views in two ways With the View Toolbar located at the top of the left hand screen The views each have their own button and are loaded in pages of ten onto the toolbar You can load the next page by pressing the Next button at the right hand end of the toolbar while Pig Next loads the previous page e With the Views Directory window press the view s button in the Views Directory window Make sure that the Guard button is not depressed otherwise you will only select the view rather than activating it Desktop View Options By default when you recall one desktop view it replaces the previous one so that all windows not part of the new view are closed However you can set views so that they are additive instead 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Select the directory s spreadsheet view 3 Select the view s cell in the Additive column 28 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 4 Press the Set key to toggle between Yes and No Views Directory 1 4 4 5 6 2 s 9 10 Figure 2 5 The Views Directory in Spreadsheet View Deleting a Desktop View To delete a desktop view using the View Toolbar 1 Hold down the Delete key
213. e Type can be useful if you want a palette that contains program ming for more than one type of fixture but that you can apply to any fixture of a type included in the palette For example you want to create a red palette that can be applied to both Studio Colors and Studio Spots If you select the first Studio Spot and make red then select the first Studio Color and make red with different parameter values and record this as palette it will by default be by fixture and work only for those two fixtures However if you select Per Fixture Type when recording then the palette will work for all Studio Spots and all Studio Colors as signing them the same values as was used to create the palette High End Systems 159 8 6 2 Section 8 Palettes Recording Palettes with Kind Masking The Hog 40S determines which function values are recorded into palettes based on two things the kind masking specified at the time of recording and the palette directory s write permissions In this section we will look at using kind masking as a method for filtering which function values are recorded into palettes assuming all kinds are permitted in the palette directory The Palette Directory will display which fixed kinds are included in each palette indicated by I for intensity P for position C for colour B for beam E for effect T for time and L for control see Figure 8 6 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types Colour Dir
214. e changes in the appropriate cue see Auto Update p 245 Customising Highlight By default highlight brings intensity to full with all colour and beam parameters at their default values However you can use a palette to assign the highlight values for each parameter of each fixture This can be useful as the default highlight values for some parameters may not be what you want for example you may prefer to leave zoom focus and iris settings unaltered by Highlight so that you can see the programmed beam size and edge quality To assign a pre existing palette to be the highlight palette right click it in the palette directory and select it as the highlight palette The highlight palette is shown by the o icon in the palette directory window Tip You can use masking when creating the highlight palette to ensure that all the required parameter types are included see Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 160 High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming 16 3 2 Lowlight By default the parameters of fixtures that are not selected when you use highlight remain at their current output values You can customise the output values of these parameters during highlight by creating a lowlight palette For example you could create a lowlight palette that sets the in tensity of all fixtures to 30 to give the highlighted fixture greater contrast Note that lowlight only affects parameter values of the non selected fixtures in the
215. e click on the column header at the top of the spreadsheet To select a single spreadsheet cell Click or press in the cell You can use the cursor keys below the Trackball to change which cell is selected If the cell is editable it will have a red border e To select a range of cells in a spreasheet You can click or press and then drag across a range of cells to select them all Alternatively you can click in the first cell press and hold Thru and click in the last cell this is useful if you want to select a large range and need to scroll the window To edit the contents of cells in a spreadsheet Click or press in the cell and press the Set key or double click in the cell Type in the new value and press Enter This works for both a single selected cell and a range Cells that are ed itable have a red border when selected Cells labeled Colour in cuelists and scenes will open the colour selection dialog to allow you to colour code the cell 2 8 1 Compact Mode In editor windows such as the Programmer you can use compact mode to save space and get more information onto the screen without having to scroll see Figure 2 12 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode In compact mode fixtures only have columns for the actual para meters that they have rather than for all the parameters of any fixture in the editor The console uses the display space more efficiently by having multiple columns for fixture types with few p
216. e current selection e Press and hold the key or Pig keys and press the Fixture key 6 4 6 4 1 142 Fanning Fanning allows you to assign a parameter across several fixtures so that the parameter values are equally spaced For example if you have five fixtures all at 50 intensity you can use fanning easily to assign intensities of 30 40 50 60 and 70 across five fixtures Note that in this example the middle value of the five stays the same and the end values change the most while the other values change proportionally You can fan any values including parameters and timings For example you can use fanning with position suppose that you have seven moving lights on an upstage position all pointing downstage towards the audience You could fan the Pan parameters so that the centre fixture still points downstage and the others turn progressively out to stage left and right The fixture selection order is significant when fanning see Selection Order p 128 The value change when fanning is always relative to its current value if there is no current value the para meter will fan from its default value Tip Choosing the initial or base value is important when fanning as the parameter values cannot go below 0 or above 100 Make sure that you leave enough of the value range for the value to fan into Using the Fan Key To fan a parameter High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modify
217. e eea tenets 30 2 3 2 Real World Un Its priri sryisinip rania ntaso fenta ei a aeaiia RE 30 2 3 3 Complex Parameters cece cece eee cette eee eeen tesa eeaeeeaaes 30 2 3 4 Interchangeable Fixtures cceeeceeeeeeeeee eee eeea teen eeeaes 30 24 MA KNO ane ana eaa rearea i cases PEA E AEE a Pa Taaa TE SESE 31 225 NTP and ETP i orriren a aa EAL EE EKE 31 2 0 Colour Matching oesie naii a ae 32 2 6 1 Colo r Models s dir ennir ei pana ae eee aa anaia 32 2 6 2 The Colour Matching System sesser 34 2 7 Palettes and Directories s sssssssssrsrssrssrrereresrrsrrerisrrsrrrrererere 34 2 7 1 Automatic Naming of Directory Items cee 37 2 7 2 Colour Coding Directory IteMS cc eeeceeeeeee tees eee eee 38 2 8 Spreadsheets o irai odoare deoin ts blnde entadeastebedaetententeey 39 2 8 1 Compact Mod vr ipinirik enteira ia 41 2 8 2 Aggregato simwsinernirarasa ete E ee eae 41 2 8 3 Cut Copy and Paste sssssssssssssrsrrsrerererrsresrrerrrrerererere 44 ZOU a Ni o ET OEE A E E A TE 45 2 9 1 Editor Window Controls sssssssssesssrssrsrrerrsrrerneresreererres 45 2 9 2 Changing Parameter Values in the Editor s es 46 210 Modifier KGS a eter eta Settee 47 2 V1 Undo and Redo 2 2 0 es iepa aves a een dgee veda geal peip iaaa Teann 47 2 12 The File BrOWSEN pree otiga eaa eate aA a ia aiia 48 2 12 1 Moving Copying Deleting and Renaming Files 48 2 12 2 Creating New Folders ssssssssssssrssrsrierisr
218. e fixtures multiple Patch Points which you address separately in the Fixture Patch window For example to patch the fixture with a scroller of fixture type Scroller Dimmer shown in Figure 5 4 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points 1 Setup gt Patch Open the Fixture window 2 Fixture Scroller Dimmer 1 Opens the Fixture Patch window 3 Select the Fixture Patch Point for the scroller from the drop down list in the top right corner of the Fixture Patch window High End Systems 109 110 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Scroller VLS address 1 2 501 Parcan Smart Repeater address 1 1 1 05685550 address 1 4 1 DMX Processor 8000 Figure 5 4 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points Patch points 4 Dmx 1 Dr Intensity Click DMX 2 to select the second DMX universe 501 Enter Enter the DMX address for the scroller 4 5 6 Fixture Scroller Dimmer 1 Opens the Fixture Patch window again 7 Click DMX 4 to select the fourth DMX universe 8 Select the Intensity Patch Point for the dimmer from the drop down list 9 2 Enter Enter the DMX address for the dimmer 10 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s In the Fixture window these types of fixture will span more than one row one for each Patch point see Figure 5 5 A Fixture with Multip
219. e flash level is set to 50 the flashed output intensity will be 30 Solo Off Flashes the contents of the cuelist to the full pro grammed level whilst sending the intensities output by all other masters including Virtual Masters to zero Latch Off If set to on the Flash key stays on as if it were being held down until you press it again Go on flash Off The cuelist is triggered when you press the Flash key as if you had pressed the Go key Release on flash Off The cuelist is released when you press the Flash key 17 2 17 2 1 262 Virtual Master Playback You can run cuelists without assigning them to a physical master by using virtual masters Vir tual masters are always at full intensity so the intensity of fixtures is that programmed in the cues An almost unlimited number of virtual masters running different cuelists can be in operation at any one time You can operate virtual masters from the Cuelist Directory window from the Cuelist window or from the command line Tip You can press List Release to release all running cuelists playing back as virtual masters Running Virtual Masters from the Cuelist Directory You can run cuelist virtual masters from the Cuelist Directory window Open List List List High End Systems Section 17 Playback To run acuelist make sure that the Guard button in the Cuelist Directory window is deselected Then press a cuelist button in the directory a
220. e middle The parameters change more slowly at the end of the cue The parameters change more slowly at the start of the cue The parameters follow a chaotic sawtooth fade over the course of the cue at Sh Ese tla IS Figure 13 2 Path Types For example High End Systems 2s 2 seconds in and out times 2s 5s 2 seconds in 5 seconds out 1m minute in and out times 1m10s 1 minute and 10 seconds in and out times 1h10m30s 1i1h 1 hour 10 minutes and 30 seconds in time and 1 hour out time 205 Section 13 Timing Use the H M and S buttons that appear when editing a fade or delay time cell to enter the H M and S text into the cell Alternatively you can use an external keyboard Note that if you enter 140 the time will be 1 minute 40 seconds not 140 seconds 2 minutes 20 seconds To assign paths directly in the Cuelist window 1 Click in the Path cell for the desired cue and press Set 2 Choose a path from the displayed list see Figure 13 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist Window The In path is applied when a fixture is increasing in intensity during the crossfade and the Out path when a fixture is decreasing in intensity 3 Press OK In Out Linear Linear Figure 13 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist Window The different types of path are explained in Paths p 204 13 3 206 Individual Parameter Timings When you record a cue all of the fixture paramet
221. e name assigned to this library e Author the author of the library e Date Modified the date of the last modification to this library e Notes any notes entered by the author e DMX Footprint total number of DMX channels used by this fixture e Patchpoints total number of unique patch points and their location for this fixture e Edit press this button to edit the information about this library This cell represents the DMX Channel number per the fixture s protocol Several entries for a single DMX channel may exist each defined with different functions or features Typically each DMX value or range defined by a fixture s DMX protocol will result in an additional DMX entry for the same DMX channel Use the New DMX Entry button to add additional blank rows for the currently selected DMX channel and the Delete DMX Entry button to remove unwanted rows High End Systems 347 Function Feature Section 25 The Fixture Builder 16 bit DMX functionality can be defined by combining two DMX channels with the same function and feature Select a DMX channel cell press Set and type in the two DMX channels to be combined separated by from the console keypad For example to combine DMX channels 3 and 4 to create 16 bit DMX functionality enter 3 4 in the Channel cell for channels 3 and 4 Combined channels do not need to be sequential for example 3 8 is valid This cell represents the function or parameter used to access this ch
222. e network processor to update its software at the DP 1 Turn off the mains power to the network processor Check that the DP is connected to the console s network and that the console s Enable DHCP Server and Enable Boot Server options are enabled in the network tab of the control panel 2 Hold down the all three buttons on the network processor s front panel and apply power The DP s display should now read Forcing software reload 3 The network processor will download its software from the console and reboot The DP s net number and port number settings will be set back to defaults DMX Processor 8000 Reset Options The keys on the front panel of the DMX Processor 8000 are used for standard menu navigation However as the unit boots you can view specific boot information via a scroll bar Once the DMX Processor 8000 is fully booted it displays the standard menu In addition the following reset options are available Hard Reset to force a hard reset of the DMX Processor 8000 hold the and gt buttons for four seconds Once the reset begins you will see I O Board Disconnected on the display DMX Board Firmware Reload to reload the DMX board firmware from the Processor s front panel hold down any single key as the unit is powered on Once the process begins you will see the DP8000 Bootloader message on the display After about one minute the firmware will be reloaded CPU Board Firmware Reload and Restore to Defaults to re
223. e on the network Connecting Multiple Consoles Multiple Hog consoles can be connected together in various configurations when running on the same port number Client Server configuration allows multiple users to program on the same show file Console Failover provides network backup of two or more consoles running the same show Console Tracking creates redundancy of all console functions across multiple consoles You should link all consoles and network devices to an Ethernet switch using certified Category 5 non crossover cables High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 3 5 Configuring the Network for Client Server 8 DMX Universes I eesecoc0o DMX Processor 8000 Net number 1 seeseseseeoO s Hog console Server Net number 1 z Ethemet swatch 8 DMX Universes 00000000 ao oo0oc0 o DMX Processor 8000 7 SEBRA E n i DE 999 g Net number 2 li aH FI QI ELLEKE Hog console Client Net number 2 Running the Console as a Show Server When the Run Server option in the Settings window of the start screen is checked the console is enabled as a show server A show server console is able to do three main things that it would not otherwise be able to do as a client 1 Start New Shows 2 Launch existing shows from disk 3 Connect to and sync a local copy of show data from other show server consoles on the network Since consoles that are enabled as show servers conti
224. e played back using the master s contols or using the main controls Master Controls Each of the ten masters has a Choose Go Halt Back Back and Flash key as well as a fader see Figure 17 1 The Master Controls Go Halt Back Back Fader Figure 17 1 The Master Controls By default the controls work as follows e Choose allows the master to be chosen or selected If the blue LED is illumin ated solid then it is the chosen master and you can use the main playback controls to control this master If the blue LED is flashing then it is a selected master and you can use the rate wheel to control the playback and effect rates for the 252 High End Systems Section 17 Playback master The console allows for multiple selected masters but only one master can be chosen at any time Go if the cuelist is inactive pressing Go will activate it onstage If the cuelist is already active then pressing Go will run the next cue or restart paused fades see Halt Back below Halt pauses any running fades If there are no running fades then pressing Halt will start a fade back to the previous cue Back immediaetly begins a fade into the previous cue Fader controls the intensity of fixtures under the control of this playback When the fader is at full fixtures appear on stage at their programmed intensity As the fader level is reduced the intensity of fixtures is reduced proportionally Flash momentarily puts the
225. e position of a piece of set on stage is moved and moving High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals lights have been programmed to light it The palette can be updated once to accommodate the change rather than in every cue For more information see Palettes p 153 Palettes allow intensity position colour and beam parameters to be recorded as easily accessible building blocks to be used when programming Palettes are stored in classified directories For general information on working with directories When you use a palette to assign parameter values in the Programmer and then record the contents of the Programmer as a scene or cue the Hog 40S records a reference to the palette rather than numerical values for the parameters During playback the console refers to the parameter values stored within the palette when outputting cue data to the stage Because of this referencing when you modify a palette s content the cues and scenes that were programmed using it will in effect be automatically updated with the new values The palette is said to be referenced in the cue This is a very powerful feature that allows you to make global changes to the show very simply and quickly rather than having to re program every cue individually If you wish to make a palette that is just a programming tool where later changes to the palette will not cause cues scenes and other palettes recorded with it to be updated then you ca
226. e previous page hold Pig and press Next Page e Using the command line Page number Enter e Select the desired page from the Page Directory window Check that the Guard button in the directory window is not selected e Use a macro within a cuelist see Macros p 329 e Set a trackball key to select the next page see Trackball Keys p 92 The current page is shown in the status area at the right hand end of the Command Line Toolbar The current page Abc Page 2 gt rogrammer Master 10 0 4 01 PM Park Unpark Renumber Backup Tip You can control which page loads next when you use Next Page to change pages by having the pages in the desired order in the Page Directory See Copying and Moving Pages p 295 18 3 1 Options When Changing Page When you change page there are three options for what happens to any cuelists scenes or inhib itive masters that are still active e Release All releases all cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters on the old page and replaces them with the cuelists on the new page Hold Over If Active keeps active cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters from the old page on their master until you release them They are then replaced with the contents on that master on the new page e Leave In Background leaves the old cuelist scene and or inhibitive master active in the background and attaches the new one to the master To get to the background item go back to the page that it is on On
227. e state of the later cues For example you have the following cues High End Systems 185 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 80 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 If you now delete Cue 2 Fixture 1 will track from Cue 1 through Cues 3 and 4 at 30 rather than going to the expected 100 in Cues 3 and 4 Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 You can prevent this happening by deleting the cue cue only which adds any values that previ ously tracked through from the deleted cue into the next cue Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 3 100 80 50 Cue 4 40 To delete a cue without tracking the changes forwards 1 2 3 4 List 1 Cue 3 select the cue to be deleted Press and hold the Delete key The Record Options Toolbar will appear Deselect Forward from the Record Options Toolbar Release the Delete key 11 7 4 Blocking Cues Blocking cues prevent changes made earlier in the cuelist from tracking through to subsequent cues in the cuelist Using State You can create blocking cues using the State button on the Record Options Toolbar For ex ample suppose that you have the following cues Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 186 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists to turn Cue 4 into a blocking cue you copy it to itself with state 1 Cue 4 Copy State Cue 4
228. e time counts down If the cuelist has been released then is displayed with the next cue shown below The next few cues and their times If you want to see more cues click and drag the top of the Playback Bar upwards to make it larger e The master level as a percentage If the master is below 100 then a red bar appears indicating the level It is possible for the position of the physical fader High End Systems 269 Section 17 Playback to be different to the master level of the cuelist in which case the vertical bar will be blue see Matching Levels When Changing Page p 292 e Whether the cuelist is a chase If it is then its rate in BPM is shown see Using a Cuelist as a Chase p 276 e Any options set for the cuelist The symbols used are shown below Symbol Description The cuelist is working under the HTP rule The cuelist is set to Persist on Override See Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 267 R The cuelist is set to Release on Other Go See Releasing on Another Go p 257 The cuelist has a high priority See Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 267 The cuelist has a low priority See Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 267 The scene uses the master as an IPCB fader Note that this applies to scenes only The cuelist uses the master as a manual fader See Manually Crossfading Cuelists p 275 B E K DO E SeA Using the Playback Bar with Playback Wings 17 4 2 270 Whether wings are
229. e user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Product Modification Warning High End Systems products are designed and manufactured to meet the requirements of United States and International safety regulations Modifications to the product could affect safety and render the product non compliant to relevant safety standards Mise En Garde Contre La Modification Du Produit Les produits High End Systems sont con us et fabriqu s conform ment aux exigences des r glements internationaux de s curit Toute modification du produit peut entra ner sa non conformit aux normes de s curit en vigueur Produktmodifikationswarnung Design und Herstellung von High End Systems entsprechen den Anforderungen der U S Amerikanischen und internationalen Sicherheitsvorschriften Aba nderungen dieses Produktes k nnen dessen Sicherheit beeintr chtigen und unter Umst nden gegen die diesbeziiglichen Sicherheitsnormen verstoBen Avvertenza Sulla Modifica Del Prodotto I prodotti di High End Systems sono stati progettati e fabbricati per soddisfare i requisiti delle normative di sicurezza statunitensi ed internazionali Qualsiasi modifica al prodotto potrebbe pregiudicare la sicurezza e rendere il prodotto non conforme agli standard di sicurezza pertinenti Advertencia De Modificaci n Del Producto Los productos de High End Systems estan disefiados y fabricados para cumplir los requisitos de las reglamentaciones de seguridad
230. e with no further configuration 2 Setup gt Control Panel Wings open the Wings pane of the Control Panel window see Figure 3 14 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Master Wing mappings 3 Click on the drop down menu for one of the playback bars listed in the control panel and select one of the master wing s sections to assign it to that playback High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System E bar The Master Wing has three three assignable sections Hog4Master Top Hog4Master Middle and Hog4Master Bottom which cordinate to the three rows of masters on the control surface of the Master Wing If you have more than one wing you can identify which wing is which by pressing the Beacon button for any assigned playback bar The LEDs on the wing will flash Ensure that the playback bars that you have assigned to the Master Wing are visible by selecting the Display button for those particular playback bars To enable the external monitor included on the wing navigate to the displays tab of the control panel and enable the cordinating DVI output where you plugged in the wing Figure 3 14 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Master Wing mappings 3 7 Adding DMX Widgets The number of physical dmx connections on the back of the Hog 4 Console and the DP8000 is actually lower than the number of dmx universes these devices are actually capable of outputting Connecting external USB dmx widgets to your Hog
231. eadsheets High End Systems 39 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Preset Custom Auto None Set As Highlight Palette Figure 2 11 The Preset Colour Options All of the spreadsheets in the Hog 40S share a common set of features e To resize a spreadhseet column Place the cursor over the right hand edge of the column header The cursor will change to a double ended arrow Click and drag to resize the column Programmer Value Fade Delay Path Show Fade Palettes Changes Strobe woe r 3 One column header Compact Num 4 Intensity Studio Color 575 1 100 100 To move a spreasheet column Click and drag on the column header To hide a spreadsheet column Right click on the column header and choose Hide To show a hidden spreadhseet column Right click on a column header and choose the name of the column from the menu To sort the spreadsheet Right click on a column header and select Sort to sort the spreadsheet by the values in that column Select Sort again to the reverse the direction of the sort You can also right click on a column header and select Sub sort to assign a second level of sorting For example if you sort the Fixture window by fixture type and sub sort by Patch then all the Desk Channels will be shown grouped together in the order of their patch address 40 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals To select all the cells in a spreadsheet column Doubl
232. earance Copy of 8 amp 0 Effec Copyof o AA D Senstivity intensity osn Da Copy of 80 Lis Copyof o Bg amp key Trmngs Position osn Da Copy of 80 TE 2D SN Copyof o g Copy of 20 Copyofs o bd Copy of 20 Macro Copyof o AA Copyofso Bad Copyots o AA Figure 2 9 The Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window e amp d the directory name e amp D the directory name dynamic e amp n the directory number e amp N the directory number dynamic e amp o the original text This is used when a directory item is copied the original text is the name of the item that has been copied Lowercase tags are resolved once only when the name is applied while uppercase tags remain unresolved until the name is displayed known as dynamic So pressing Set and entering the name of colour palette 3 as amp d amp n will assign the name to be Colour 3 If you assign the name to be amp D amp N the name will also be assigned to Colour 3 The difference is that moving this palette to position 4 will automatically correct the name to Colour 4 2 7 2 Colour Coding Directory Items Each directory window allows for unique colour coding of each button within the directory The default colour for new directory items is standard grey When you copy a directory item the console will automatically copy the directory item s custom colour as well see Figure 2 10 Directory Item Colour
233. eases all masters Toggles the worklight on and off Cycles through the possible window sizes in the re verse order Un touches specified parameters and fixtures rather than touching them Redoes the last undone action Extends the selected cells or directory items in spreadsheets and directories Overrides the effect of the Guard button Acts as a shift key to type upper case characters High End Systems Section 30 Cheat Sheets Pig with Keys and Buttons Pig with the I Wheel Pig with parameter wheels Pig when dragging files in the File Browser pane of the Show Manager window ESC when starting up the con sole Intensities are increased or decreased in proportion to their individual level rather than all intensities changing by the same amount For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 11 and 2 will move to 55 Moving the parameter wheel with Pig allows fine ad justment of the parameter so that each turn of the wheel will change the parameter value by a smaller amount making exact adjustments easier Copies the dragged files rather than moving them Opens the boot options menu High End Systems 415 Section 30 Cheat Sheets 30 3 Front Panel Diagrams NONI SN EN VA nia i gt VA Die bo i nig io Narn Nae rene BE wiry gt lt A a EI BENSIN ANSA Eg NEN
234. ecause the level in the playback is higher and will take preced ence This system generally works well for non moving light consoles but moving lights introduce a problem Parameters other than intensity don t have higher and lower values a colour of red is not higher or lower than green and a pan of 50 is not higher or lower than one of 20 Working with moving lights needs a new way to decide the precedence called Latest Takes Precedence LTP With this system the fixture parameters are at the value they have been most recently assigned In our example moving the submaster to 40 would result in a level of 40 because this is the latest instruction and will take precedence The submaster would effectively grab control of the parameter from the playback Of course running another cue in the playback might grab it back again Many moving light consoles use HTP for intensity and LTP for all other parameters By default Hog 40S uses LTP for all parameters but you can assign individual cuelists to use HTP for in tensities all other parameters are still LTP see Using HTP and LTP p 265 2 6 2 6 1 32 Colour Matching Fixtures of different types use different methods to perform colour mixing Sending the same parameter values to fixtures of different types might produce a different colour on each type For example sending C 50 M 50 Y 0 will always produce a shade of blue but it ll be a different blue
235. ecess tenet ea A aoa EA 39 2 11 The Preset Colour Options cccceeeeeeeeee eee eee ee sees tea eeaeeeaeeenies 40 2 12 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode ssec 41 2 13 A Spreadsheet with Aggregation Turned ON ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene es 43 2 14 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed ROWS ecce 43 2 15 The JUMP Toolbar 22 2 cece cece cece aa En aa EEEE EATE tesa DE nena EErEE TARE 44 2 16 A Typical Editor iiss aee sin Greet cA evi ee aes N 45 2 17 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window 2 006 50 3 1 Start Screen your console is ready tO USC eceeeeeee sete eeeeaeeeneeenees 52 3 2 The Calibration Screen cece cece ee eset eee eae e eats sees tea ee nee aeeeaies 53 3 3 The On screen Keyboard cece cece e eee eee eee rears nets dees neeea tesa eeaaes 57 3 4 The Shut Down Dialog cece cece e eee e eee teeta teat eaten tented 58 3 5 The Lock Button on the quit toolbar eee eee ee eee ates a eeen tees 58 3 6 The Lock Window Requesting PIN 0 2 0 cece ceeeeee eee e eee ee ee ee eea teen eeeneeed 59 3 7 Security Settings Tab of Console Settings WINdGOW cccecceeeeeeeeee ees 60 3 8 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 65 3 9 The Network pane of the Control Panel c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea teen ees 66 3 10 Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 81 3 11 E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor Settings wind
236. ecord Macro the Macro Directory opens 2 Macro 2 choose a location in the directory Or using the commend line press e Record Macro 2 Enter If you leave out the Macro location e Record Macro Enter The Keystroke Macro will be recorded in the next available location If the destination Macro already exists a popup will offer options Insert Merge Replace When the Keystroke Macro begins recording the Macro key LED will flash red and M will display in the far right of the command line to signify that recording has commenced All subsequent button presses screen events and encoder movements will be recorded into the specified Keystroke Macro The time interval between the previous and current button press will also be recorded Only one macro can be recorded at a time the console will not allow you to record another macro while one is being recorded To stop the recording of a Keystroke Macro e Pig Macro key The Macro key LED will stop flashing and the M will disappear from the command line to signify that the macro has stopped recording To stop the recording of a Keystroke Macro e Pig Macro key The Macro key LED will stop flashing and the M will disappear from the command line to signify that the macro has stopped recording High End Systems 333 23 3 2 23 3 3 334 Section 23 Macros Naming Keystroke Macros You can give a Macro a name that will be displayed in the Macro Directory window 1
237. ect Setup Quit The Quit button is on the right hand end of the Setup ToolbarAfter press the quit button the Shut Down dialog will open see Figure 3 4 The Shut Down Dialog with the following options Shut Down Hog Session jo you want to Figure 3 4 The Shut Down Dialog Shut Down shutting down will turn the Hog console off completely e Restart Console restarting is like shutting the console down and turning it on again and will take you to the Start window e Log Off logging off will close your current desktop Programmer and output screens as well as closing the current show file The console remains powered up and running and returns to the Start window e Cancel cancels the quit command In all cases your show data is automatically saved to disk 3 1 11 Locking the Console for Access Consoles can be locked for access at any time by hitting the setup key on the console front panel and then pressing the lock button on the quit toolbar Consoles can also be locked remotely by enabling the lock local access button under the security tab of the console settings window for the console on the network you wish to lock Abc Page 1 Programmer Master 10 7 Lock Figure 3 5 The Lock Button on the quit toolbar When the console is locked the user cannot access any part of the show file or change any dmx output to the stage To unlock the console enter the PIN code you have setup for your console u
238. ect an external USB LTC widget to one of the USB ports on the rear panel of the DMX Processor 8000 up to 8 USB LTC widgets are supported on the DP8000 each LTC input is mapped to an Index 2 Connect the LTC source to the LTC widget using a balanced 3 pin XLR con nector 3 Setup Network opens the Network window 4 Inthe network window select the DP8000 that you connected the LTC Widget to 5 Settings opens the Settings window 324 High End Systems Section 22 Linear Timecode LTC 6 Inthe Timecode Widgets pane use the drop down menu to map the attached LTC widget to an index View Security Widget Config Toolbar Beacon Processor Unit LTC Widget 1040 4 DMX FixtureNet Art Net E1 31 SACN DMX Widgets Timecode Widgets Diagnostics 7 fF FF FP E ra 22 3 Viewing Incoming LTC You can view the LTC being processed by any DP8000 in the sytem by openning the Timecode Toolbar associated with that DP8000 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DP8000 in the list that you wish to view incoming LTC for LTC inputs directly into a console this is going to be the DP8000 that is running internally on that console 3 Settings opens the Settings window 4 Click on the view timecode toolbar button associated with the LTC index you wish to view High End Systems 325 Section 22 Linear Timecode LTC If you have a cuelist with a timecode source assigned in the
239. ect the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX for the fixture reset according to the DMX protocol 205 and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the shutdown ability of the fixture Note that Real World values are not allowed for Control functions High End Systems 363 Section 25 The Fixture Builder Lamp Control commands from Strobe channel 1 5 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Control on the left column to display a list of Control function sub categories Select Lamp Control as the desired function The window will close and you will see Lamp Control assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Strike Select this cell and press Set Choose Douse from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX for the lamp douse according to the DMX protocol 245 and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the lamp strike ability of the fixture Note that Real World values are not allowed for Lamp Control functions 25 2 4 Step 4 Build the Fixture 364 Your fixture should be similar to the example below High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder Type Information Model Name Tutorial Auth Michael Date Modified Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx F
240. ectory gt Guard 1 fo Palette with only Colour 1 Colour parameters Palette with only Position parameters 5 _ IPCBETL Palette with Intensity Colour 5 Position Colour Beam Effect Time and Control Figure 8 6 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types Masking Using the Record Options Toolbar 160 To specify masking when recording a palette using the Record Options Toolbar 1 Assign the parameters of the fixtures as required 2 Press Record The Kind Mask menu will automatically pop up above the record options toolbar and displays a grid of buttons containing all of the fixed kinds and user kinds included in your show see Figure 8 7 The Record Options Toolbar If kind masking menu does not automatically appear then check the Automatically show kind masking toolbar option in Programming pane of the user preferecnes window 3 Deselect which kinds you do not want to include in the palette by toggling off the buttons 4 Press one of the fixed kind keys to choose a palette type destination for ex ample Colour The Palette Directory will open High End Systems Section 8 Palettes 5 Select a palette location in the directory by pressing on any button in the Palette Directory window Intensity Strobe Frost Forward 3ackward Remove Global Figure 8 7 The Record Options Toolbar Masking Using the Command Line When recording a palette using the command line yo
241. ed There are two Auto Release options for cuelists e Auto release at End Use this to automatically release the Cuelist at the com pletion of the fade and delay times of the last cue e Add Release End Cue After the last cue has run another press of the Go key will release the cuelist rather than running the first cue again You can assign auto release options in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the desired release option from the Action at End of List menu 256 High End Systems Section 17 Playback eE a RAA rap to beginning of list Action of Go when looping Action of Halt when halted You can also assign the default Auto Release options for new cuelists in the Action at End of List menu in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Resetting Cuelists on Release You can assign a cuelist to reset when released so it will proceed from the first cue when Go is pressed again You can assign Reset on Release in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Reset on Release Properties 0O Use HTP 0O Pile add Effects Cl ls A Chase 0O Reset On Release Cl Track Through Loops 0O Cue Only 0O Mark Fade New Cues 0O Mark Time New Cues Alternatively you can turn on Reset on Release for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences wind
242. ed as soon as the last cue in the cuelist has completed all its fade and delay times Don t allow wrapping The cuelist stays on the final cue until released or sent backwards Cue Only Cue Only enables a cuelist to playback cue data one cue at a time otherwise known as a non tracking cuelist For example any cue data in cue 1 is released as you play cue 2 so that only data from cue 2 is onstage The release time of the previous cue is determined by the longest fade time in the cue being played 260 High End Systems Section 17 Playback Action of go when Looping When the cuelist is performing a continuous loop with the use of a link cue you can configure the effect of pressing the Go key using the Action of Go When Looping menu Action Notes Exit loop immediately Jumps the cuelist to the link cue at the end of the loop Use a wait time on the cue after the link if you want to go to that cue automatically when exiting the loop Exit loop at end Allows the loop to proceed to the last cue before jumping to the link cue at the end of the loop Use a wait time on the cue after the link if you want to go to that cue automatically when exiting the loop Restart Jumps immediately to the first cue in the loop Stop at next Stops at the next cue in the loop Ignore Ignores any press of the Go key whilst in a loop and the press is during an actively running wait time For more information on loops see Loop
243. ed dot To rematch the levels and capture the Grand Master s level with the physical fader you must move the fader until it is at the same level as the blue bar at this point the fader will take control of the Grand Master level in the normal way DBO Key The DBO key above the Grand Master toggles the console between dead black out and the grand master s level When you engage the DBO key it will light up in red and all fixture intensities will be restricted to 0 with the exception of parked intensities When you disengage the DBO key its red light will turn off and the Grandmaster fader will regain control Flash key below the Grand Master The Flash key below the Grand Master fader is a non latching key that can be assigned in the user preferences window to send the grand master s level to zero to full or to whichever value is opposing the grandmaster s current fader position High End Systems 281 Section 17 Playback 17 7 282 Inhibitive Masters Inhibitive masters allow you to limit the intensity of a group of fixtures If the inhibitive master is at full then the fixtures that it controls will be at the level determined by the playbacks Pro grammer and so on As the inhibitive master level is reduced the fixture intensities will be re duced in proportion For example if you have four fixtures at 0 50 80 and 100 in a cue that is being output and these fixtures are also in an inhibitive master then the levels wi
244. ediaetly begins a fade into the previous cue Halt pauses any running crossfades on the chosen master If there are no run ning crossfades then pressing Halt will start a fade back to the previous cue Go if the chosen cuelist is inactive pressing Go will activate it onstage If the cuelist is already active then pressing Go will run the next cue or restart paused crossfades High End Systems Section 17 Playback 17 1 3 Releasing Masters You can remove a cuelist s look from the stage so that it relinquishes control of all fixture parameters and effectively turns the cuelist s output off this is known as releasing the cuelist To release a cuelist on a master e Release releases the currently chosen master e Release Choose use the Choose key of the master with the cuelist you wish to release Pressing Go after a cuelist is released will resume playback from the current cue To have the cuelist go back to the beginning when it is released see Resetting Cuelists on Release p 257 Tip You can release all playbacks at once by pressing Pig Release If you have no other cuelists scenes or groups active when you release the cuelist then releasing returns all fixture parameters to their default values A fixture s default parameter values will be determined by the Fixture Library you can change the default values in the Edit Fixtures window see Assigning a Custom Default p 123 If you have other cuelists scen
245. eee eee sees a eeeaeeeaes 206 13 3 1 Assign Parameter Timings using Wheels 00 207 13 3 2 Assign Parameter Timings with the Command LING eid cetera eee Poe here E eae ads E 208 13 3 3 Assign Parameter Timings in an Editor 0 209 13 3 4 Fanned TIMINGS oriee ia need 211 13 4 Cue Wait TIMING sirieni dni a a ee reece seen cen setieese de atu 212 I amp I Learn TIMING eina E iene hice scart eecoun cede 213 13 4 2 Clock Triggers cc ceeceeee eee e eee eee e cette eee eee eee een ee need 214 1325 LOOPS and LINKS s svsessoasecuvedssenes goapeenenes eraa raa teamed 217 13 5 1 Creating a LINK 20 cece eee e eee eae ee neta eeen eee eeeee 217 13 5 2 Creating d LOOP cieicireeds a ert eels 217 13 5 3 Tracking Through LOOPS 0ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea eee 219 Pa ol geese eer tren Peer Cor eereeere Creer cre err cere err Cece Ce rere err cre reer cern 221 14 1 Table Effects arris rei nioi uin G aa EEE A eed tage ene 221 14 4 1 Effect Tables mrena a E E iene ees 221 14 1 2 Table Effect Attributes 2 00 eect eee eater need 222 14 1 3 Building Table Effects in the Effects Engine 224 14 1 4 Building Table Effects in Editors 1 0 eee 226 14 1 5 Tracking Table Effects cc cccecececseeeeeeee tesa eee eeee teed 227 14 1 6 Cue Timing and Table Effects 1 0 eeeeeeeeeeee eee 227 14 2 Effect Palettes mnre nino oaea a A a i EA iaaii 229 14 2 1 Predefined Effect Palettes nccneneee ee 229
246. eee eter eens 267 17 3 4 Multiple Cuelists with Effects 2 1 0 0 eeeeeeeee eens 268 17 4 Understanding Feedback 00 0 ccccccceececeee eee eeeneee nessa een eeaee 268 17 4 1 Control and Playback Toolbar Feedback scene 269 17 4 2 Cuelist Feedback ssssssssssssssrssrrsrsrtrererisrrsrrsrrerererere 270 17 4 3 The Output WINdOW 2 0 0 eect cece cette eee anes anes aetna 271 17 4 4 The Levels View WiNdOW cccceeeeeeeeeeee sete ates a eeeaes 273 17 5 Advanced Playback ccceeeceeeee eee e eee e tenet ates ates eeaeeeaeeeae 274 17 5 1 Changing Playback and FX Rates ceeeeeeeeeeeee es 274 17 5 2 Scaling the size of Effects 2 0 0 ceeceee tees eeeeeeeeee 275 17 5 3 Manually Crossfading Cuelists s n 275 17 5 4 PCB FAGELS eri ceseccasteechyes pasmat naaa pan EEA evens engs 276 17 5 5 Using a Cuelist as a Chase 2 0 cece eect ee eee eerie 276 17 5 6 Cuelists and Tracking sssrinin ia 280 17 5 7 Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs 280 17 6 Grand Masten cereau aiaa eoiag eaa oiai aaia eens 281 176 LGM Key oh saraaa atic Pa to a one 281 17 62 DBO GY soph atten tle Roce ed Se tate 281 17 6 3 Flash key below the Grand Master eeeeeeeeees 281 17 7 Inhibitive Masters ccc ee cece cece eee e nee nee ne a iii i 282 17 8 Configuring Playback Controls ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee eee 283 17 8 1 Configuring Master Controls cceeeeeeeneee tees tena es 285 17 8 2 Confi
247. eeeeaeeea eed 113 5 3 Replicating Fixtures cece ence eee e eee e eee ated tenets aeeeaeeeaes 115 5 4 Changing the Fixture Type cece eeeeee ee ee ee ee cette eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 115 5 5 Removing a Fixture from the SNOW cceeeceeeeeee nese eeeeeeeaee 116 5 6 Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically ceee 116 5 7 Configuring Fixtures ssssssssssrsssrersrrrrrsresrrsrrsrrsrerererereerrereens 118 5 7 1 Fixture Configuration sssssssssssrsrssersresrnsrrsrerrnsrrererere 118 5 7 2 Parameter Configuration cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ater need 121 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters 0 s00008 125 6 1 Selecting FIXtures vrni mirria eii inea teen i eian Aia 125 6 1 1 Selecting Single Fixtures eseese 125 6 1 2 Selecting Multiple Fixtures eessen 125 6 1 3 Select AN riii eg a atin E A E E E 126 6 1 4 Inverting the Selection sseseerreererreerrrneree 126 6 1 5 SUB Selections anapa eati aaa aai 127 6 1 6 Deselecting Fixtures ssssssssssrsrrrersrrrererrsrrersrrererere 127 6 1 7 Reselecting Fixtures ssssssssssrsssssrsrererereeresrrsrrerererere 128 6 2 Selection Order cece ceceee eee e eee eee eee a ease essa essa een eeaeeeaeeeaes 128 6 2 1 Reverse Shuffle and Reorder ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 128 6 3 Modifying Parameters ccc eee eect eee eee e ea eee atten teen etna eed 129 Or SE VINTEMSICY vies atin eG een das a eee a ae te 129 6 3 2 POSITION eseri
248. eeenies 111 5 7 The Clone DP Window ceccceeeeeee eee eee e eee eaten eee ates nee aaeeaa een eeaies 113 5 8 Fixture window before and after replicating ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 115 High End Systems xv Lighting Control System 5 9 Changed Fixture Type ccccceecece eee e eee e eee eee eee a eee een eeaeeeaeeeaeeaaes 116 5 10 The Auto Palettes WINdOW 2 0 00 cceeeceeeee eee eee eset eae e eae e eae een teen eeai ees 117 5 11 The Fixture WiINdOW ccccceeeeeee eee e eee a nese tesa tesa essa essa een esneeeaeeaaes 119 5 12 The Edit Fixtures WiINdOW sssssssssrsrerersrrsrrsrrsrrsresersrerererereereerrsns 122 5 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by Function cceceeeeeeeeeeee es 123 6 1 The Select Toolbar sinri a a iaae eaa 126 6 2 Wheels Toolbar for the Beam Parameters of a Studio Spot 575 132 6 3 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 assesescscererreerre 132 6 4 The Wheels Toolbar Direct Entry Dialog escscsccccecerreeerernene 133 6 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 asssseresesereseeereereerenren 133 6 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 lasssssssescccrecere 134 6 7 The Colour Wheel aa ra e ae a a A EEA AAE E AE EREET 135 6 8 The Colour Picker disvenki oa aaen Naaa p paa E EDET i aiaa ea Tania 137 6 9 The Gel Picket creii aaeoa aa aE eE aa ENEA ERE aSa 138 6 10 The Fanning Toolbar ssssssssssssserssrrsrsrresrrrnrinrnnrntrnnrnnrnnrenrnrnrnnn 144 6 11 The Group
249. eel mode playback effect none press the rate key located below the rate wheel The rate wheel s mode is displayed on the main playback bar Moving the rate wheel in the upward direction will increase the selected rate while moving the wheel in the downward direction will descrease the selected rate To clear the rate wheel s modifications for the active rate mode of the rate wheel press the restore key located above the rate thruster To permantently store the rate wheel s modifications hold the pig key and press the restore key Any rate thruster modifications that are not stored will be lost when the master is released Scaling the size of Effects You can scale the size of the effects controlled by a master cuelist scene chase by holding choose and adjust the third encoder wheel Changes made to a master s effects size are stored and will persist You can also set the effect size scaling in the Cuelist Options window and you can set the default effect size value for new cuelists and scenes in Setup gt Preferences gt Cuelist Cuelist Rate Cuelist Effect Rate Cuelist Eff 100 100 Manually Crossfading Cuelists You can assign any cuelist to be operated manually allowing you to perform the crossfades from one cue to the next manually using the fader Once a cuelist s Manual Fade option is selected the Master s fader will no longer control intensity but instead the crossfade progress of all para meters from the current cue to t
250. elcome to the Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard will install Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 on your computer Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard 3 The wizard displays an End User License Agreement 374 High End Systems Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity r J Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Setup WERD ea in End User License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully End User License Agreement High End Systems Hog4PC End User License Agreement SERVER amp DESKTOP USE ONLY THIS SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN HES AND YOU AS AN INDIVIDUAL AND OR IF PURCHASED OR OTHERWISE ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY AN ENTITY PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AND USING THE After you select J accept the terms in the License Agreement press Next to continue 4 The installer now shows you which features of the Hog Connect application are going to be installed and into which location Do not make any changes to the install location as most 3rd party visualizer applications are hard coded to point to the default installation directory and changing this option could lead to failure of the connectivity driver to start properly Press Next to con tinue High End Systems 375 Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity ii a a 4 Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Setup C
251. elease at zero cick Flash WwW Fash ae 100 Bs a Go on flash g Release on off E Solo E Latching Figure 17 10 The Master pane of the Cuelist Options window High End Systems Section 17 Playback Chosen Master List 5 Playback Options 4 i gt Cueist Psor O waster Assert Assert Release Release Skip Forwards Skip forward v Skip Backwards Skip back v Main lt Use Cuelist Time Use Cuelist Time Back WwW E Use Fade Time O Trigger Cuelist Macro Main g E Use Fade Time O Trigger Cuelist Macro Figure 17 11 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options window 17 8 1 Configuring Master Controls When you configure master controls these settings are part of the cuelist and will be applied to the master that the cuelist is on The configuration options for the master controls are shown in the following tables High End Systems 285 Section 17 Playback The Master Go and Master Halt keys Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Assert Asserts the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own assert time for the master overriding the cuelist s assert time Release Releases the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own release time for the master overriding the cuelist s release time Go Go s the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time for the master overriding the cuelist
252. els Gobo 2 Global Time Gobo lt gt gt Beam Time Gobo Shake Size Focus ins Figure 6 3 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Some parameters that appear on the parameter wheels have more than one mode These modes are shown as a list on the Wheels Toolbar and you can select the modes by clicking on the wheel s button on the toolbar Direct Value Entry For parameters appearing on the parameter wheels you can hold Set then press the associated button on the Wheels Toolbar to open a direct value entry dialog see Figure 6 4 The Wheels Toolbar Direct Entry Dialog 132 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Gobo pe Gobo gt Focus Figure 6 4 The Wheels Toolbar Direct Entry Dialog Enter a value for the parameter in the direct value entry box and select any available modes Press Enter to complete the direct value entry Snapping to a Single Value When you have several fixtures selected you can make all the values of a parameter the same as that of the first fixture e Press and hold the key while turning the appropriate parameter wheel Jumping to Endstop Values You can assign a parameter to its endstop values e Press and hold the key and adjust the appropriate parameter wheel clockwise to assign the parameter to its maximum value and anticlockwise to assign the parameter to its minimum value Inverting Parameter Values Some paramete
253. ems Section 23 Macros 23 1 Intro to Macros There are two types of macros you can use to automate tasks on the console Comment Macros are placed in the macro field of cuelist and other objects to trigger activity on the console Key stroke Macros allow a sequence of screen and button presses to be recorded for later playback 23 2 Comment Macros You can use comment macros to automate tasks on the console such as e Going Halting Asserting Releasing and Fading Masters e Going Halting Asserting and Releasing Cuelists e Going Halting Asserting and Releasing Scenes Comment macros can be configured to run at these times e When a show is launched see Startup Comment Macros p 89 e When a page is loaded see Restoring Activity When Changing Pages p 293 e When a cue or scene plays see Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs p 280 Comment Macros are text commands that you type or place into a macro cell the syntax used is the same in each case High End Systems 329 Section 23 Macros Controlling Masters Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Go Master GM master cue GM1 3 Use for the current chosen master If you omit the cue number the next cue will Go Go Master GM range GM2 gt 7 Go next cue on a range of masters Halt Master HM master or range HM1 3 HM2 gt 7 Assert Master AM master or range AM1 AM2 gt 7 Release Master RM master or range RM1 RM2 gt 7 Release All R
254. en 332 23 2 2 Additional Comment Macro Syntax eeeeeeeeeee ee 332 23 3 Keystroke Macros vice hirie a aia aaa aai Ea Eie iA 333 23 3 1 Recording Keystroke MAaCTOS seeren 333 23 3 2 Naming Keystroke Macros sessresrsrrererrrsrrerrerrernes 334 23 3 3 Keystroke Macro Playback sssesececerenererrenee 334 23 3 4 Editing Keystroke Macros ccceeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeaeenees 337 23 3 5 Deleting Keystroke MacroS ccccceeeeeeee tees eeee tena ees 338 23 3 6 Copying and Moving Keystroke Macros ecese 339 24 Direct Control of DMX Channels cccsceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 341 24 1 Manually specifying DMX Channel Values senene 341 24 2 Setting DMX Channels to External Art Net Source 341 24 3 Reverting DMX Channels to HogNet Control ceeee 342 25 The Fixture Builder ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeuaeeeeenane 343 25 1 Working With the Fixture Builder cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeee teens 343 25 1 1 Creating Editing and Deleting Fixture Libraries 343 25 1 2 Building the Fixture ee eeee cece eee eeeeaeeea teen nese 347 25 1 3 Adding User Created Libraries to a Show 005 349 25 2 Fixture Builder Tutorial cccceeeeeeeeee eee eeea teen eeea teen eeaa eed 351 25 2 1 Step 1 Create the New Fixture ccccseeeeeeeeeeneees 351 25 2 2 Step 2 Enter Fixture Details 2 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 352 25 2 3 Step 3 Configure Channel
255. en eeeaes 194 11 12 2 Moving Cuelists 0 0 0 cece cece eee eee ian aii 194 11 12 3 Insert Merge and Replace cceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eres 194 D2 SCONGS caridade anapeana a aenea a aiea Ea uaia auaa kinain 197 12 1 Recording SCENES s sssssersrssrrsrrsrrsrsrrrertrtrrrerrereeresrrerererere 197 12 1 1 Recording to the Scene Directory esesescccerere 197 12 1 2 Recording to a Physical Master cceeeeeeeeeee eee 197 12 1 3 Naming a Scene ccc ceeee cece ence ene ee eee eeee esa eeaeeeaeeeae 197 12 2 Deleting Scenes soe neti eve a gia A a KE 198 12 3 Copying and Moving SCENES ssssssrssissrerrerierrerrereererrerren 198 12 4 Editing Scene Contents 0 0 0 cece e nee eee tees eee eeeeeeaeeae 199 12 5 Scene TIMING 4 sucecesoegccacseveacsvocsetaeereecteanuecadgbaaeecaatteeataeagerss 199 High End Systems vii viii 13 14 15 16 Lighting Control System 12 6 Insert Merge and Replace ssssserssrssisrrerrsrerrerrsrnrrnrrerren 199 TIMING wesinces nana ea ao raea aae iaaea aa ASEE Kaana 201 13 1 Timing BASICS enanar a nia i iae aa nied 201 13 2 Fade Delay and Pathisirc siaii a a eeaaeeaee 202 V3 221 Fade TUM i ae ohe goede sstsoaed ates ANET AEEA rE uae dap AROA 202 13 2 2 Delay TIME venrai iera pia aAA are a i 203 133223 Paths i ia iati cass a a apie ranted EE Ea ar ey 204 13 2 4 Assigning Cue Timings in the Cuelist Window 204 13 3 Individual Parameter TIMINGS ceeececeee
256. ences 91 external displays 53 keyboard 56 57 touch screens 54 F fade button 45 fade changes 246 247 fade time 201 202 default 202 overriding during playback 274 with masks 203 fader go off zero 261 release at zero 261 faders cleaning 426 replacing 425 fanning 142 211 effects 224 fanning toolbar 144 from the command line 143 in spreadsheet view 143 multipart 145 options 144 with groupings 145 454 Index with the fan key 142 feedback cuelist 270 file browser 48 files sharing over a network 76 fine control of parameter values 138 firewalls 67 fixed kinds 233 fixture builder 343 fixture patch window 105 fixture schedule window 103 fixture types 97 fixture window 118 FixtureNet 78 IP Address 79 fixtures 30 adding 103 changing type 115 cloning patching 111 112 configuring 118 copying 115 copying parameter values 140 deselecting 127 duplicating 115 fixture builder 343 generic 103 interchangeable 30 inverting pan and tilt 120 inverting the selection 126 modes 103 notes 120 patch notes 120 patching 105 proportional patch 121 protocol 118 removing 116 removing from an editor 147 replicating 115 reselecting 128 select all 126 selecting 125 selecting from what is onstage 239 selection order 128 sub selections 127 swapping axes 120 timing 206 type 118 unpatching 113 user number 119 High End Systems Index flash button
257. ent to rain or moisture 5 Disconnect power before servicing 6 Refer servicing to qualified personnel no user serviceable parts inside High End Systems Section 33 Safety Information 33 2 Informations Importantes Sur La S curit 33 2 1 Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Incendies e Cet appareil comporte une protection de 20 A contre les surcharges lectrique 33 2 2 Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs Electriques 1 Si cet quipement est livr sans prise sur le cable d alimentation veuillez connecter la prise de courant selon le code suivant e marron phase e bleu neutre e vert jaune terre 2 D brancher le courant avant d effectuer des r parations 3 Cet quipement doit tre uniquement utilis dans des endroits secs Ne pas l exposer la pluie ou l humidit 4 A l int rieur de l quipement il n y a pas de pi ces remplagables par l utilisateur Confiez l entretien 4 un personnel qualifi 5 Equipement de Classe I Cet quipement doit tre mis la terre 33 3 Wichtige Hinweise Fur Ihre Sicherheit 33 3 1 Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr Dieses Ger t darf nur an eine Zweigleitung mit einem Uberlastungsschutz von h chstens 20 A angeschlossen werden 33 3 2 Zum Schutz Gegen Gef hrliche K rperstr me 1 Wenn dieses Ger t ohne einen Netzkabelstecker erhalten wurde ist der ents prechende Netzkabelstecker entsprechend dem folgenden Code anzubringen e Braun
258. ers in the cue are assigned the default fade delay and path values Similarly when you assign timings to a cue after recording the timing value is applied to all fixture parameters in the cue However you can assign fade delay or path values to individual parameters in the Programmer and these settings are then included when you record cues and scenes and optionally palettes You can also assign timings to parameters High End Systems Section 13 Timing 13 3 1 in the cue scene and palette editors Note that you can only assign timings for a parameter that has a value in the editor To display parameter fade times delay times or paths in an editor select the Fade Delay or Path buttons from the top left of the editor window You can assign the individual timings of parameters using the parameter wheels the command line or directly in editor windows You can also assign timings to all parameters of a fixture using the parameter wheels or the command line Important If you assign individual timings for parameters and subsequently assign an overall cue time then the individual parameter timings will be replaced by the overall cue time Assign Parameter Timings using Wheels To assign fade and delay timings to all the parameters of a fixture 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign timings to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key 3 The Wheels Toolbar will show the availa
259. es 173 10 2 4 Refreshing CITP preview thumbnails 6 174 10 2 5 Disabling CITP on DP8000 seese 174 10 3 Catalyst Preview Thumbnails in the Media Picker 05 174 10 3 1 Configuring DP8000 for Catalyst Preview Thumb Dal Saeed eae eta atd neonate care enka a eee AS eae eae hia ha 175 High End Systems Lighting Control System 10 3 2 Patching Catalyst fixtures to Catalyst Media Serv a EEE naaienegdenebecanay sugavkus und ann A ine twets bayeeetacs 175 10 3 3 Refreshing Catalyst Preview Thumbnails 176 10 3 4 Disabling Catalyst Thumbnail Preview Fetching on DP8000 2 ie ssc cae A weds ts eons T a iaae Yc Switaatansn een pentane ode tees 176 10 4 Adding Preview Thumbnails to Pre v2 0 0 Show Files 176 11 Cues and Cuelists cccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenees 177 TL1 Recording a Cues srein aaa a Ear A ESE 177 11 1 1 Recording to a Cuelist on a Master eee 177 11 1 2 Programmer contents after Recording a Cue 177 11 1 3 Insert Merge and Replace snccccercrenereee 178 11 1 4 Numbering Cues ssssssssssssrsrrsrssrrrrrererererererrrerrsresres 178 11 1 5 Naming Cues satii nieni rie eset naii aaen rataa aih eea ii 178 11 2 Record Options si si iiien a aa aaa Aa LEE 179 11 2 1 Recording Selected Fixtures Only sssseserecrree 179 11 2 2 Record Remove Values from CUES cscccrcrcene 179 T13 Deleting CUES iiaa ana oaa a aE a aS AA 179 11 4 Copy
260. es Here you will see the option to display the directory s buttons in three dif ferent sizes small medium and large Set the button size menu option to the desired setting and press okay The button size option you select for each directory is unique to that directory and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view Configuration Directory 0O Show Auto Colour Swatch an D Medium Figure 9 5 Button Sizes Option Cance 9 4 Show Fewer Buttons By default directory windows display both active buttons buttons that contain data and inactive buttons buttons with no data In some cases you may wish to hide the inactive buttons in the directory To hide the inactive buttons in a directory click on nee icon to open the window configuration menu and enable the show fewer buttons option The option to show fewer buttons is unique to each directory and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view High End Systems 167 Section 9 Directory Windows Configuration Directory Figure 9 6 Show Fewer Buttons Option 9 5 168 Show Auto Color Swatch The show auto color swatch option is avaiable only in palette directory windows and is only useful in cases where the user has programmed color mixing values into a palette within that directory When this option is turned on any buttons in the directory window that contain palettes with color mixing data will display a
261. es or groups active then control of fixture parameters may be transferred to one of them on releasing the cuelist see Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes p 264 Release Time When you release a cuelist and fixture parameters go to their default values they do so over the release time and this change may be visible if you have fixtures that are visibly live on stage i e with intensities above zero To assign the cuelist s release time 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window for the cuelist on the selected master 2 Options Cuelist open the Options window and select the Cuelist pane Alternatively press Pig Choose to open the Options window for the selected master 3 Select the Release Time cell High End Systems 255 Section 17 Playback Timing Mark Time Back Time Cuelist Effect Rate Cuelist Rate 4 Set 5 Enter assign the desired release time You can also set a default release time for all newly created cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Tip If you have assigned a release time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default release time press the Default button adjacent to the Re lease Time cell Auto Release You can use auto release options to send fixture parameters to their default values at the end of a show or to relinquish control of parameters for use by other cuelists when a cuelist is no longer need
262. ess Enter to finish Note that if you enter an invalid command then the cell will revert to being empty when you press Enter Additional Comment Macro Syntax For some comment macro commands such as fading masters you can specify the execution timing of the macro by adding a t followed by a numerical value in seconds FM10 1t10 Also within a comment macro command you can specify multiple targets separated with commas RS6 20 or a range with a right angle bracket HM2 gt 7 You can have multiple comment macros executed by one cue by separating them with colons HM1 3 HM2 gt 7 You can also send commands to a specified network device using H Hog to refer to a console D to refer to a DMX Processor and IOP to refer to an MIDI Timecode Processor For example GM1H2 will Go master 1 on console number 2 RND3 will reset DMX Processor number 3 High End Systems Section 23 Macros 23 3 23 3 1 Keystroke Macros Keystroke Macros are a series of keystrokes screen events and encoder movements that are re corded into an object similar to a cuelist When the Keystroke Macro is executed the recorded key presses and actions are regenerated Keystroke Macros can be executed manually or triggered by Comment Macros Recording Keystroke Macros Key presses screen events and encoder movements can be recorded interactively and are always recorded into Macros in the Macro directory To begin recording key presses 1 R
263. essa eeaaeeaeeaeeeaeeeas 426 32 4 Replacing the Trackball eee e sete eee ee eeea teen teen teen nena eed 426 Safety Information ccceceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeaees 429 33 1 Safety WarnindS c cece teen e eters eee e ae ee deed ee aes a teeaes 429 33 1 1 For Continued Protection Against Fire e 429 33 1 2 For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock 429 33 2 Informations Importantes Sur La S curit eee 430 33 2 1 Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Incen CIOS a eosevates cts eceeeehtentesedsenentiaretedsas teexand evant al yenune A 430 33 2 2 Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs lectrique S eee en ee een eee RT eaten eer ee 430 33 3 Wichtige Hinweise Fur Ihre Sicherheit ceeceeeeeeeeee eee 430 33 3 1 Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefalr eseese 430 33 3 2 Zum Schutz Gegen Gef hrliche K rperstr me 430 33 4 Informaci n Importante De Seguridad eese 431 33 4 1 Para Protecci n Continua Contra Incendios 431 High End Systems Lighting Control System 33 4 2 Para La Protecci n Continua Contra Electrocu CIONES aean e a a aaa parses ameds vekasetas dtu aa aaas Aneis 431 33 5 Importanti Informazioni Di SicureZZa asese 432 33 5 1 Per Prevenire Incendi ssssssssssrsrerersresrrsrrsrrererererens 432 33 5 2 Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche scscececeree 432 33 6 Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation sesssssseerserrsreerserrrrrrrerrerne
264. ete a scene 1 Scene 1 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences gt Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items You can delete a range of scenes 1 Scene 1 Thru 4 Delete deletes scenes 1 to 4 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip To detach a scene from its master rather than deleting it completely hold Delete while pressing the master s Choose button This removes the scene from the master but not from the scene directory 12 3 Copying and Moving Scenes To make a copy of a scene e Scene 1 Copy Scene 2 Enter copies the contents of Scene 1 to Scene 2 Similarly to move a scene to a new location e Scene 1 Move Scene 2 Enter moves Scene 1 to Scene 2 effectively deleting 1 If the destination scene already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 199 198 High End Systems Section 12 Scenes 12 4 Editing Scene Contents You can edit the contents of a scene in an editor window For example to open Scene 1 for editing 1 Open Scene opens the Scene Directory 2 Open Scene 1 opens the scene editor for Scene 1 3 Alternatively using the command line Scene 1 Open 4 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current
265. etna eeaaes 147 7 GOUPS wecesceeecceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeseeeeaaeeeaaeeeaeeseaeeeeueeeegeeeeaee 149 7 1 Recording GrOUPS sess sien aeae aa een aa eas 149 7 2 NAMING GrOUDS cece eee eee eee eee eee ene aaia alaa eaten 149 7 3 Using Groups in Programming ccceeeeeeeeeee eee eeea essa nese eeeee 150 7 4 Editing Group Contents ccececcce eee ents eee ee eeeeeeaeeea een eee 150 7 4 1 Removing Fixtures from Group ceceeeeeeeeeeeee nena es 150 FES Deleting Groups sesssecoe krivinah anat ances a odaat aiaa ba B Daa Tiai 150 7 6 Copying and Moving GrouUpS sssessssssssssisrisrrerrerrerrrerrerrerrenns 151 7 7 Insert Merge and Replace ssssssssssisrrsrisrrerrerrerrrrrerrrrerrerns 152 8 Palettes ccccceeceeeeee eee eee sees eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeaeeaeenaee 153 8 1 Recording a Palette 2 0 e eee e etre nets nessa eee a eeea nena eeaee 153 8 1 1 Naming a Palette 20 0 0 eect eee ee eee ee eeeaeeea teen essa ees 153 8 2 Using Palettes in Programming ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 154 8 3 Editing Palette Contents cece cece eee e ects eee nessa een teenies 155 8 3 1 Updating Palettes with Different Parameter Types 155 8 4 Deleting Palettes 20 2 0 eeceeeeeeee eee e nese tesa tesa eeea esse essa eeaaeeaaes 156 8 5 Copying and Moving Palettes ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeneeenees 157 8 6 Rec rd OptlOnS 4 4320 feiss aE tenn A ARATE EEEE 158 8 6 1 Global Per
266. example applying a Sine wave with the default size of 5Hz to a base value strobe rate of 5Hz will vary it from O0Hz through to 10Hz You can decrease this range by adjusting the size 2Hz will give a range between 3Hz and 7Hz When combining effects adjusting specific parameters effect sizes will change the look of the effect For example a circle effect comprising of a sine table on the pan and tilt can be modified to look like an elipse by altering the size of either pan or tilt The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different size values Ax 100 50 150 Effect Offset The offset sets the effect start and finish point for each effect so they can be staggered It is as signed in degrees For example to create an intensity ripple across a range of fixtures divide 360 degrees by the number of fixtures and offset each fixture by multiples of this amount For example with six fixtures offset at 0 60 120 180 240 300 degrees The easiest way to do this is to use fanning see Fanning p 142 The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different offset values 0 180 360 Effect Begin End Start The begin and end values of an effect represent the limits that the function value will hit as it passes through the effect table The begin and end values can be edited diretly in the
267. f cloning will overwrite patch information in the destination you will be asked for confirmation The console will only unpatch previous fixtures that are in the way of new ones the rest of the destination universe will be untouched High End Systems 111 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Tip You can also move patching from one universe to another by cloning the patch to the new universe and then unpatching the old universe see Unpatching Fixtures p 113 5 2 7 Cloning DMX Processors You can copy fixture and associated patch information from one DP8000 to another by cloning a DP8000 s patch A selected fixture will then control recurring patch locations across several DP8000s To clone the patching of one DP8000 to another 1 Setup Patch gt View by DP open the Fixture window in View by DP view 2 Select the DP8000 to clone by selecting it from the DP8000 drop down menu 3 Press Clone DP The Clone DMX Processor window will open see Figure 5 7 The Clone DP window 4 Select a source DP8000 from the source section of the window Click Unpatch Source if you wish to move patch entries to the destination DP8000 instead of copying them 5 Select a destination DP8000 from the destination section of the window If there is conflicting patching on the destination DP8000 you can choose to unpatch only fixtures in conflict from the destination DP8000 or to unpatch all fixtures already patched to the
268. fS 81 _ Studio Coor S75 l6 197 Studio Color S757 113 7 Free Channels pee H 121 Desk Channel 12 es Cues S tebe Cranner s a Desk Channel 125 388 Free Channels 4 Figure 5 3 The View by DP view of the Fixture window You can see an overview of all patched fixtures in the Fixture window by using View by DP see Figure 5 3 The View by DP view of the Fixture window This shows a spreadsheet with start address fixture type and user number for each DMX universe Additional rows show where there is an available space in the allocated DMX addresses This is useful when you are patching additional fixtures and you need to know what ranges of DMX addresses are free To show this view e Setup gt Patch gt View by DP the View by DP button is on the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window You can use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of the window to view each group of four uni verses of a DMX Processor Deselect the View by DP button to return the Fixture window to its normal view 5 2 4 Adding and Removing DMX Processors All fixtures in the Hog 40S are patched to DP8000s The Hog 40S automatically detects and makes available any connected DP800s for patching but if you want to patch fixtures to DP8000s that are not currently connected to the console you must first add the DP8000s to the show 1 Setup gt Patch gt Patch open the Fixture Patch window The Patch button is on the toolbar at the
269. first cue needs to be increased by 12 frames you may want the values for all the subsequent cues to also be increased by 12 frames to maintain the 1 second separation Hog 40S allows you to do this easily 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Click and drag to select the Wait cells for the range of cues you want to edit 3 Press Set 4 Edit the timecode value of the first cell then press Enter All the selected timecode values will be adjusted by the same amount of time added or subtrac ted from the first value 22 6 Simulating LTC You can temporarily simulate timecode perhaps because the actual LTC source is not available during programming Timecode simulation is controlled from the Timecode Toolbar To simulate timecode 1 Press the simulate button on the Timecode Toolbar Simulate is now enabled and all external timecode input for that LTC source will be ignored 2 Press the GO button located to the right of the simulate button to simulate timecode High End Systems 327 328 Section 22 Linear Timecode LTC TIP Using the jump toolbar you can jump the simulated timecode to six dif ferent jump points by clicking on the jump button and then clicking on one of the six jump buttons To change the jump button values click on the word TIMECODE on the far left hand side of the timecode toolbar A drop down menu will appear with a set of fields allowing you to change the jump points High End Syst
270. flash level 261 go on flash 261 latching 261 release on off 261 solo 261 flash key 252 flip 131 follow chosen 271 follow cue 271 follow current 183 follow next 183 follow on 212 follow on time 201 forward button 184 185 front panel diagrams 416 G generic fixtures 103 global palettes 158 global button when recording palettes 158 glossary 19 441 gm key 281 go key 252 gobo reversing rotation 133 grand master 281 dbo Key 281 flash key 281 gm key 281 graphical user interface 23 405 group directory 34 groupings see fanning groups 149 copying 151 creating automatically 116 deleting 150 editing contents 150 moving 151 naming 149 recording 149 removing fixtures 150 using 150 guard button 34 45 262 H halt 212 High End Systems action of halt when halted 261 halt key 252 hard command see hard value hard values 31 138 186 help getting started 19 key to this manual 19 help button 34 45 highlight 243 customising 244 highlight palette 34 Hog 4 Consoles clean software install 389 Full Boar 4 technical specifications 435 Making A Bootable USB Flash Drive 390 391 Nano Hog 4 technical specifications 437 Road Hog 4 technical specifications 436 technical specifications 435 Hog 4PC configuring widgets 403 installing hardware 402 interface 405 patching 403 removing software 402 system requirements 439 upgrading widgets 407 windows 405 406
271. for the particular parameter is reached You can turn effects on and off set them to track through in the Table column of the Effects Engine Programmer or editor In the Programmer for example 1 Select Table view 2 Select the cell of the parameter for which you want to turn the effect off or allow to track through and press Set 3 Select Off or Track from the drop down menu 14 1 6 Cue Timing and Table Effects When you record a cue scene or palette that includes effects values each fixture parameter has its fade delay and path value in the usual way see Individual Parameter Timings p 206 These timings control how the fixture parameter changes from its starting value to its underlying value in the cue or scene as the cue or scene is played back You can assign separate effects timings fade delay and path to control how the effects movement changes as the cue or scene is played back Figure 14 3 Controlling Effect Transitions with Timing shows how different timing values control how a parameter with a step effect changes during playback of a cue High End Systems 227 100 Intensity oan le Os 5s 10s Time 100 Intensity 50 Os 5s 10s Time 100 Intensity 50 Os 5s 10s Time 100 Intensity 50 Os 5s 10s Time Section 14 Effects Fade time 5 seconds Underlying value 50 No effect Fade time 5 seconds Effect fade time 5 seconds Underlying value 50 Fade time
272. frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter As well as entering timecode values manually you can use Hog 40S s learn timing function to quickly associate timecode values with cues see Learn Timing p 213 By default cuelists will follow the incoming timecode even if the timecode skips forwards or backwards generally this is a useful behaviour as for example you might rewind the timecode during rehearsals to repeat a part of the show and the cuelist will automatically go to the correct cue Sometimes you may want to prevent a cuelist going backwards if the timecode goes back wards You can do this using Trigger Forwards Only High End Systems Section 22 Linear Timecode LTC 22 5 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Trigger Forwards Only Editing Timecode Values for a Cue To change the timecode value used to trigger a cue 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set 3 From the toolbar select Timecode 4 Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter You may need to change the timecode value for one cue and then change the timecode values for subsequent cues by the same amount to keep the same relative timings For example you might have a series of cues where each one is triggered by timecode one second after the previous one If the timecode value triggering the
273. fying Paramet ers 6 3 3 Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam Colour and beam parameters can be either discrete known as slotted or continuous An example of a slotted parameter is the gobo and colour wheels in a moving light which can be assigned to values such as Gobo 1 and Colour 3 Examples of continuous parameters are the colour mixing controls on some moving lights irises and variable speed strobes these can be assigned to a percentage or real world value It is sometimes useful to treat slotted parameters as continuous for example you might want to assign a gobo or colour wheel part way between two positions to achieve a particular effect Hog 40S allows you to treat such parameters as either slotted or continuous when assigning values to them To control continuous colour and beam parameters 1 Press the appropriate parameter type key Colour or Beam or any user kind key that contains colour and beam functions The Wheels Toolbar shows the available parameters and their current value see Figure 6 2 Wheels Toolbar for the Beam Parameters of a Studio Spot 575 2 If the selected fixture has more parameters of the selected type than there are wheels the Wheelsets Toolbar will open see Figure 6 3 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Page through the available parameters by pressing the parameter type key again or select a button on the toolbar 3 Adjust the parameter value using the parameter whe
274. g hardware encoder wheel hog hardware rate wheel hog hardware iwheel hog hardware iwheelup hog hardware iwheel down hog hardware pig hog hardware pos hog hardware trackball hog hardware zero hog hardware one hog hardware two hog hardware three hog hardware four hog hardware five hog hardware six hog hardware seven hog hardware eight hog hardware nine hog hardware up hog hardware down hog hardware left hog hardware right 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 lt 255 discreet fader value 0 lt 255 discreet fader value 20 lt 20 variable value 20 lt 20 variable value 20 lt 20 variable value 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 toggle off 1 toggle on X Y values 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down
275. g 40S allows you to control the CMY or RGB parameters of fixtures directly this method has several disadvantages e With both the RGB and CMY systems it is difficult to remember what combin ation of settings will achieve the colour you want e With both systems colour and fixture intensity are linked Under the CMY system giving all three parameters values above 0 unnecessarily reduces the light output with the RGB system fixtures often don t provide a separate in tensity parameter so you have to control it with the colour parameters However it is usually much more convenient when programming to keep colour and in tensity completely separate The different colour systems together with different lamp types used make it difficult to match colours between fixtures of different types Furthermore High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers during crossfades colours tend not to remain matched through the duration of the cue producing uneven colour fades Hog 40S solves these problems by using a third colour system Hue and Saturation HS Under the HS system a fixture s colour is determined by two parameters e Hue the colour s position in the possible range of colours from red going through yellow green cyan blue and magenta and finally returning to red As the range wraps around you can visualise it as a circle with the colours posi tioned around the edge with red at the top
276. g 4PC Click Install to begin the installation Click Back to review or change any of your installation settings Click Cancel to exit the wizard 10 When the installation has finished a final screen confirms that the application has successfully installed Click Finish You will then be prompted to restart your computer 400 High End Systems Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC f J Hog4PC 1 0 0 266 Setup M o s Completed the Hog4PC 1 0 0 266 Setup Wizard Click the Finish button to exit the Setup Wizard Important It is important that you restart your computer at this point to ensure proper device driver configuration A Hog 4PC group will be added to the Programs folder on your Start Menu with icons to start the Hog 4PC application and view installed documentation A shortcut to the Hog 4PC application will also appear on your desktop In addition to the Hog 4PC application the Hog 4PC group contains the Hog 4PC Widget Up grader and a link to the User Manual Warning When running the Windows XP firewall or aftermarket firewall products the firewall may block TCP IP communications Often you can add excep tions for the individual Hog 4PC processes or add exceptions for traffic that has a source IP address and destination IP address that are both pointing to the local machine Refer to the documentation provided with your firewall for further details High End Systems 401 Section 29 Installing Ho
277. g 4PC 29 2 Software Removal You can remove the Hog 4PC application from your computer using the Add Remove Programs utility found in the Windows Control Panel 1 Inthe Windows Start menu select Control Panel then double click on Add Remove Programs 2 Select Hog 4PC in the list of installed programs and click Change Remove 3 Select Remove click Next and follow the on screen instructions to complete the un installation of Hog 4PC software 29 3 Hardware Installation Hardware installation for Hog 4PC should only be performed after the Hog 4PC software has been installed on your computer 29 3 1 Unpacking Hardware Components If you ordered a USB DMX Widget Super Widget or Super Duper Widget you should have received e USB Widget e Power supply not needed for single universe dmx widget e USB cable e Hog 4PC software installation CD If you ordered a USB Wing you should have received e USB Wing e Protective cover for the wing e USB cable e Power supply unit with IEC power cable e LED desklight with protective pouch If you ordered an LTC Midi Combo I O Widget you should have received e USB I O widget e USB cable 402 High End Systems Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC 29 3 2 USB DMX Widgets Hog 4PC supports up to eight universes of DMX output via USB DMX widgets You can connect any combination of USB DMX Super Widgets or USB DMX Widgets or USB DMX Super Duper Widgets to total 8 DMX outputs In
278. g a cue s crossfade See Also wait time crossfade path Single conventional lights that only have intensity control via a dimmer are defined as desk channels by Hog 40S By contrast automated lights are referred to as fixtures Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a way for a computer to ask a master computer on a network to assign it an IP address when it connects Many existing networks are configured this way and Hog 40S supports this system You should talk to the administrator of the network you want to connect to to find out more See Also ethernet IP address See conversion curve A window which displays palettes scenes or groups See Also palette Short for DMX 512 DMX is the communications protocol most com monly used to connect lighting consoles to fixtures and dimmers High End Systems Glossary DMX address DMxX universe DMX Processor editor effects engine encoder wheel ethernet fade time fanning fixed kind fixture library function High End Systems A number between 1 and 512 that identifies a controllable parameter of a fixture Each fixture or group of dimmers has a start address the first of the range of DMX addresses that it uses A single DMX output with 512 channels is known as one DMX universe A Hog network may support many universes each with fixture addresses between 1 and 512 See Also DMX Processor A nineteen inch rack mounted network node that distri
279. g is appended to the current show After selecting the merge method you can select which groups palettes cuelists and cues scenes and views to merge by clicking on each item displayed in the window Items highlighted in blue are selected for merging Tip You cannot replace palettes in the current show because you could replace a palette with one that doesn t contain programming for fixture paramet ers that other programming expects it to have 4 10 4 Dependencies In order to merge certain parts of a show you must have chosen to merge other parts To merge groups you must have merged fixtures To merge palettes you must have merged fixtures To merge cuelists and cues you must have merged palettes To merge scenes you must have merged palettes To merge pages you must have merged cuelists and scenes 4 10 5 Merging Examples Example 1 You have programmed your show on two separate consoles perhaps one controlling moving fixtures and one controlling conventionals and you want to merge the shows for playback on one console Each show file contains identical palette and cuelist structures but they just control their own fixtures In this case Append fixtures and Merge By Name for all programming Example 2 You have two shows programmed using the same rig which you now want to merge Each show contains exactly the same fixtures In this case Replace fixtures and Append Different all of the programmi
280. g your fixtures custom user numbers see Modifying the User Number p 119 Hog 40S treats conventional lights consisting of a luminaire controlled by a dimmer as a special kind of fixture known as a desk channel A desk channel has only one parameter intensity Real World Units Fixture parameters are described as far as possible in real world units For example rotation is described in degrees while chases are described in beat per minute This speeds up programming and allows fixtures of different types to be selected and adjusted at the same time for example you can assign several fixtures of different types to all strobe at 10 Hz without having to worry about the different DMX values required by each fixture to achieve this Hog 40S will give you the best possible match between fixtures the only limitations are those of the fixtures themselves Complex Parameters Some fixtures put more than one parameter onto a single DMX address For example a fixture might use DMX values in the range 0 127 for intensity 128 250 for strobe and 251 255 for fixture reset The Hog 40S separates such functions into independent parameters so that you do not need to remember the detailed workings of a particular fixture in the example given above the intensity strobe and reset functions all appear as separate parameters so there is no possibility of going from strobe into reset With parameters that share a DMX address changing the value of o
281. ge cccceceeeceee nee eneeee teen essa essa eeaeeaeesaeeeas 296 Command KEYS ccsceeeeeeee cece eeeeeeeseeeaeeaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaees 299 19 1 Creating Command KeyS ccecceeeeeeeeteeeeeee eee eeaeeeaeeea eee 299 19 2 Copying Moving and Deleting Command Keys n 299 19 3 Changing the Action of a Command Key ceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 300 19 4 Command Key Feedback ccccceeeeeeeneee eee eee eeaeeeaeeeaeeeae 301 MIDI iieusitecccciaatacatssaaccseceqecycusnacedoansaeassycaee sedate gaeieeetaaeds cece 303 20 1 MIDI Show Control cece eee eee e eee ee eeeaeeea tesa essa nena eenaes 303 20 1 1 Bringing MSC into the Console ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 303 20 1 2 Sending MSC from the Console sassen 304 20 1 3 Using MIDI Show Control sesers 305 20 2 MIDI NOteS 0 cece cece eee neces eee eee eee aere uaia iiur ai ia 305 20 2 1 Bringing MIDI Notes into the Console assesses 306 20 2 2 Assigning MIDI Notes to Playback Bars escenes 306 20 2 3 Assigning MIDI Notes to Programming Keys 307 20 2 4 Assigning MIDI Notes to Encoders and Wheels 308 20 2 5 Assigning MIDI Notes to Monitor Soft Keys eseas 309 20 2 6 Assigning MIDI Notes to Comment Macros 06 310 20 2 7 Using Midi to Control Faders ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 312 20 3 MIDI timecode 1 00 cece reece eee teeters eed ee dee neeenies 312 20 3 1 Connecting Midi Timecode Input lecce 312 20 3 2 Viewing Incoming MIDI Ti
282. ge the write permissions for the directory see Write Permissions IPBCE Palette Directories p 165 or you can deselect kinds from the kind masking toolbar after pressing record see Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 160 By default Hog 40S records the appropriate parameter values of all fixtures in the Programmer or editor not just those of the selected fixtures To only record from selected fixtures see Record ing Only Selected Fixtures p 161 To record for example a position palette 1 Inthe Programmer or editor assign the position parameters of the desired fixtures as you want them in the palette 2 Record Position the Position Directory opens 3 Palette 2 choose a location in the directory Or using the command line e Record Position 2 Enter If you leave out the palette location Record Position Enter the palette will be recorded in the next available location If the destination palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 163 8 1 1 Naming a Palette You can give a palette a name that will be displayed in the Palette Directory 1 Open Position opens the Position Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a palette when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the palette to be named by pressing its button in the directory High End Systems 153 Section 8 Palettes 4
283. genta M and Yellow Y Fixtures that use the CMY system start by producing white light and then filter out the unwanted colours to leave the desired colour higher parameter values produce a greater filtering effect so that setting them all to 100 produces black To avoid wasting the light intensity of the fixture you should always keep at least one of the CMY parameters at 0 setting the other two at higher values to get more saturated colours For example values of 0 C 0 M 20 Y will produce a pale yellow tint while 0 C 100 M O Y will produce a fully saturated magenta Mixing two of the colours will produce further shades so 50 C 0 M 50 Y will produce a middle saturation green e RGB this system is used mainly by fixtures based on LEDs The colour is controlled by three parameters Red R Green G and Blue B with the three parameters at 0 the fixture produces no light output and the higher than value of these parameters the greater the fixture s total light output If the three parameters have equal values then the light output will be white within the limits of the technologies used Use one or two of the parameters to get the colour you want and then add the other s to de saturate it dilute it towards white For example values of 0 R 0 G 100 B will produce a bright satur ated blue while 80 R 80 G 100 B will produce a bright blue tint 50 R 100 G 100 B will produce a middle saturation cyan While Ho
284. grees specifies the hue of the colour red has a hue of 0 degrees yellow has a hue of 60 degrees and cyan has a hue of 180 degrees see Figure 2 6 The HSI Colour Wheel Saturation This is how strong or pale the colour is Pale colours have low saturations while strong colours have high saturations Saturation is specified as a percentage between 0 white and 100 the strongest possible saturation Intensity This is simply a measure of how much light is being emitted from 0 black to 100 the brightest possible This is identical to the dimmer control on most fixtures Red Magenta Yellow hue Blue Green Cyan Figure 2 6 The HSI Colour Wheel With these three pieces of information hue saturation and intensity every possible colour can be represented As most fixtures already feature a dimmer to control the intensity it is only ne cessary to specify the Hue and Saturation to uniquely represent any colour The Hue and Saturation of White Light White is defined as the colour with 0 saturation the hue doesn t matter However while tungsten and arc lamps both produce white light when you compare them side to side their colours are considerably different The tungsten lamp has a warmer colour with a higher red and yellow content while arc lamps usually have a cooler light with more blue in it One version of white is not more correct than the other so either may be chosen
285. guring the Main Controls ccceeeeeeeeeeee teres 287 it Le fee eT TERETE TT PMCee ETP RCeeE TC Pere er iy CoCr eer CET CREE CCT Tee ee CTC or TT 289 18 1 How Pages Are Used cccceeeceee eee eter cette teen tenes aeeeaeeeaeeaaes 289 18 2 Creating a New Page ceeeeeeee eee e eee teeta tesa tesa eeee ee aeeeaneeas 289 18 3 Changing Page ccee cece e cette eee e eee ee eee e eee aetna ee aeeea eee 290 18 3 1 Options When Changing Page c seeeeeeeeeee tenes 290 ix 19 20 21 22 Lighting Control System 18 3 2 Matching Levels When Changing Page 6058 292 18 3 3 Restoring Activity When Changing Pages 4 293 18 4 Modifying Pages cc cece cece eee eee eee eee ates anes deen eea naan eens 294 18 4 1 Copying Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a PAGO wii cies detest cehecvmen nets dren s Ive cate tee Vesbnualey ekegh oh tania Teedeetinceure 294 18 4 2 Moving Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a PAG Ciera linc dete Mattes ecard cence adhe ea adh ug gies aae aa a a ewe adegd eee 294 18 4 3 Removing Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from A gt PAG Croan tetas A a a a a dimen a a a a Sa Na 294 18 4 4 Clearing Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from a ee AE E A T 295 18 5 Copying and Moving Pages sseesesriererrereerrrreerrrrererens 295 18 6 Deleting Pages ccecceccceeeeee eee ceee nee aeeea seen essa tesa tesa eeaeeegs 295 18 7 The Template Pa
286. h information to the DP8000 To unpatch an entire DP8000 1 Select the DP8000 to unpatch from the dropdown list at the top of the Fixture window 2 Press Unpatch DP and confirm that you want to unpatch Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DP8000 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 5 3 Replicating Fixtures You can expand your show to accommodate a larger rig using the Replicate Fixture function This will create copies of fixtures including all their programming To replicate fixtures 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Select one or more fixtures in the Fixture window by clicking on its numbered button in the left hand column 3 Press Replicate Fixture located in the toolbar at the top of the Fixture win dow Figure 5 8 Fixture window before and after replicating shows the contents of the Fixture window before and after replicating fixtures The new fixtures are an exact copy of the originals and will be added to every palette cue and scene that contains programming for the original fixture The comment cell shows you which fixture it is a copy of New fixtures are given User Numbers that follow on sequentially from the original fixtures numbers but they are not patched or added to any groups An asterisk will appear next to User Numbers that may now conflict with existing ones E 1 1 0P 1 136
287. he refresh media button at the top of the patch window A green and white animated refresh icon will appear at the top right of the media picker window to the right of the search field The media refresh is finished when the icon disappears 10 2 5 Disabling CITP on DP8000 By default CITP is enabled on all DP8000s in new shows To disable CITP on a DP8000 1 Open the node settings window for the DP8000 2 Select the CITP tab of the node settings window 3 Deselect the enable button and hit apply 10 3 Catalyst Preview Thumbnails in the Media Picker In addition to CITP and fixture library defined preview thumbnails the Hog 40S is also capable of fetching and displaying preview thumbnails for content stored on Catalyst media servers connected to the FixtureNet network In this section we will review how to configure D8000s 174 High End Systems Section 10 Media Picker for Catalyst thumbnail previewing how to associate Catalyst fixtures to Catalyst media servers in the patch window and how to use the patch window to refresh Catalyst media previews 10 3 1 Configuring DP8000 for Catalyst Preview Thumbnails In order for the console to properly fetch and display thumnail previews for Catalyst media servers on a DP8000 s FixtureNet network the FixtureNet adapter for the DP8000 must be properly configured 1 Open the node settings window for the DP8000 that is connected via FixtureNet to the Catalyst media servers 2 Select the F
288. he DMX Processor back to Defaults 0 61 3 2 5 Locking the DMX Processor Front Panel Controls 62 3 2 6 Backlight Off TiMe 0 0 0 eect e eee eee eee eee ee ae ee atten eee 62 3 2 7 Watchdog wxisces cectevsciaene st piveie eat EAEE ATE SEKYU SA RENA 62 3 2 8 Resetting the DMX Processor ssseesserersrerrererrerrrererrn 63 3 2 9 Checking a DMX Processor s Status ccccccseeeneeeeeneees 63 3 2 10 Expanding the DMX Outputs of a DP8000 saene 63 3 3 HOgNet NetWork ivoirien eendi eia ender aa ERa aE 64 3 3 1 Configuring Console Network Adapters s es 65 3 3 2 Port NUMDET wessieccceteeaceteetidecoess aa ai anaa 69 3 3 3 Node Types and Net NUMberS cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenerees 70 3 3 4 Connecting Multiple Consoles ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 70 3 3 5 Configuring the Network for Client Server eee 71 3 3 6 Configuring the Network for Console Failover 00 72 3 3 7 Configuring the Network for Console Tracking 74 3 3 8 More than One Show on the Network eeeeeeeeeeees 75 3 3 9 Connecting to an Existing Network eessen 76 3 3 10 Network File Sharing cccceceeceeeeee tees testes eee eeaee 76 3 4 Art Net and E1 31 SACN ccccccccccccseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeevevevevavevauenens 78 3 4 1 Identifying the FixtureNet Port leses 78 3 4 2 Configuring the FixtureNet Port cceceeeeeeeeeee eee tees 79 3 4 3 Configuring Art Net Output eee eeee etree eee a tees 80
289. he Encoder Wheel Options preference see See Encoder Wheel Button Options p 96 The inner part of the center wheel acts exactly like the main encoder wheels on the desk The outer spring loaded ring of the center wheel acts more like a shuttle whereby a move in either direction will initialize a value change at a fixed rate The more you turn the ring the high the rate of change High End Systems 95 4 9 5 4 9 6 96 S Section 4 Shows Shuttle Control Direct Control Encoder Wheel Button Change Function Encoder Wheel Button Options You can adjust the action that occurs when pressing the grey encoder wheel button located to bottom left of each encoder wheel in the Programming pane of the User Preferences window Setting Function Fine Mode de fault Cycle Feature Mode Set Max Min Neg Pos Adjust by One makes encoder wheel adjustments more refined same as holding pig key when encoder wheel button is held down changes the feature mode of the function assigned to the encoder wheel when the encoder wheel button is pressed opens a direct entry dialogue box for the encoder wheel when button is pressed similar to holding set and turning encoder wheel sets wheel to max value when button is pressed first time sets wheel to minimum value when pressed second time sets wheel to negative value when button is pressed first time sets wheel back to positive value when pressed second time i
290. he next starting when moved from any end stop finishing when the opposite end stop is reached If you select Manual Fader mode when the fader is at 50 a manual fade cannot take place until the fader is moved to and then from an end stop further moves from end stops will manually work through the cuelist sequentially To assign a cuelist s Manual Fade function 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Master 2 Select Manual Crossfader from the Fader menu High End Systems 275 Section 17 Playback None fader IPCB crossfader Manual crossfader Manual crossfade mode will be indicated on the Playback Bar above the selec ted master by M Tip You can still run cues to time when manual fader mode is selected by pressing the master s Go key Note that you have no individual fader control of intensity and accidentally moving a fader will start to run the next cue manually 17 5 4 IPCB Faders You can adjust the output values of any intensity position colour or beam parameter information in any cuelist by assigning its fader as a IPCB fader To assign a cuelist to use the IPCB fader function 1 Open the Programmer from the Main Toolbar In the Programmer select the fixtures and parameters that you wish to adjust with the fader then assign a maximum level 2 Record 1 Enter record the cue to the chosen master 3 Pig Choose gt Playback Options open the options window for the cuelist s master 4 Inthe
291. he timecode during rehearsals to repeat a part of the show and the cuelist will automatically go to the correct cue Sometimes you may want to prevent a cuelist going backwards if the timecode goes back wards You can do this using Trigger Forwards Only 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Trigger Forwards Only Editing Timecode Values To change the timecode value used to trigger a cue 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set 3 From the toolbar select Timecode 4 Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter You may need to change the timecode value for one cue and then change the timecode values for subsequent cues by the same amount to keep the same relative timings For example you might have a series of cues where each one is triggered by timecode one second after the previous one If the timecode value triggering the first cue needs to be increased by 12 frames you may want the values for all the subsequent cues to also be increased by 12 frames to maintain the 1 second separation Hog 40S allows you to do this easily 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Click and drag to select the Wait cells for the range of cues you want to edit High End Systems Section 20 MIDI Press Set 4 Edit the timecode value of the first cell then press Enter All the selected t
292. he wheelsets established in the fixed or user kinds For more in formation on the center wheel s function assignments Center Wheel Preferences p 94 Every effort has been made by the developers of the Hog 40S to provide you with a logical wheelset arrangement by default but sometimes a re arrangement of the functions within a wheelset or a re arrangement of the wheelsets themselves is neccessary This section is intended to increase your understanding of how to manage the wheelsets in your show To access the wheelset for any particular fixed or user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window 2 Hold Open and click on any existing kind in the Kinds Directory Within each kind editor are two main sections On the left is a list of functions On the right is a graphical interface showing sets of encoder wheels arranged in groups of five Each one of these groups of encoder wheels is called a wheelset High End Systems Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets Kind Editor intensity Fusctons mag Y Search Function Wheelset Bana H Beam Shape gt Beam Shape 2 Pan Function Socket Indicates functions can t be deleted from kind Secerste Parameters Figure 15 4 Wheeslets displayed in a kind editor Wheels are holding places for fixture functions and cordinate with the encoders on the front panel You will notice that several wheelsets can exist within a single kind editor To assign a function to a wheelset C
293. his allows you to select all fixtures that are onstage that are assigned to particular values or palettes For example e Live 50 selects fixtures that are on stage at 50 e Live 50 Thru 80 selects fixtures that are on stage at 50 to 80 Live 0 selects fixtures that are at 0 Using a palette as a mask Live Blue selects fixtures that are on stage that are at their Blue palette settings You can use the Live and keys together to select fixtures that are both live on stage and in a specified fixture selection e Live 1 Thru 5 selects fixtures that are in the range 1 to 5 that are live on stage e Live Group 1 selects fixtures that are in Group 1 that are live on stage Note that in all the above examples using the Live key only selects fixtures it does not alter values in the Programmer or editor Tip Fixtures that do not have an intensity parameter such as a colour scroller are always considered live on stage and will be selected when using the Live key High End Systems 239 Section 16 Advanced Programming 16 2 Bringing Parameter Values Into the Programmer Sometimes you will end up with a look onstage or in a cue scene or palette that you want to reuse in further programming There are various ways in which you can bring those fixtures and parameter values into the Programmer or editor 16 2 1 Suck You can use Suck to assign fixture parameters to the values that they currently have on
294. hoose a master simply press the choose button associated with that master Masters can also be selected Selected masters only respond to rate wheel changes Selected masters do not respond to the main playback controls and do not directly receive commands from the command line To select a master hold down the choose key of one master while pressing the choose keys of other masters When selecting multiple masters the last choose key to be released will become the choosen master When a master is selected it s choose LED will flash and the title of the master will be shown on the playback bar with a striped blue background 1 List 1 2 List 2 3 List 3 4 List 4 5 List 5 Grand Cue 1 2s Cue 1 2s Cue 1 2s Cue 1 2s Cue 1 Master Figure 17 3 Example Master 1 is chosen Masters 2 thru 4 are selected 17 1 5 Cuelist and Scene Options You can configure various options that determine the cuelist s priority timing and other properties that affect how it is played back in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window of the chosen master 2 Options Cuelist open the Cuelist pane of the Cuelist Options window Alternatively you can quickly access many cuelist options from the Cuelist Options Toolbar by holding down the Choose key of the master the cuelist is on 258 High End Systems Section 17 Playback sist A F D Prortyo S Persist On Release On Reset On Mark Fade Mark Time Use
295. howing Effect Attributes 14 2 3 Recording an Effect Palette You can record any combination of effect parameter values into a palette 1 In the Programmer or editor select the fixtures and assign the required effects You can do this directly in an editor or using the Effects Engine 2 Record Effect the Effect Directory window opens 3 Select a location by pressing a button in the directory window This will only record parameters that have been touched in the Effect window and does not in clude the parameters underlying values To include underlying intensity position colour beam and time information use the mask function 1 Select the fixtures and assign the desired effect table 2 Record Effect 3 Select Mask from the Record Options Toolbar and select the parameter types that you wish to record Use for intensity Use P for position Use C for colour Use B for beam and Use T for time values For more on masking when recording palettes see Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 160 4 Select a location from the Effect Directory window 230 High End Systems Section 14 Effects Naming an Effect Palette 14 2 4 14 2 5 You can give an effect palette a name that will be displayed in the Effect Directory 1 Open Effect opens the Effect Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a palette when pressing its button in the directory 3
296. ial Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael D Modified 0 27 Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel Function raves Dmx Value a RealV a lt a a 100 2 6 cyan Variable f255 gt 0 0 gt 100 Zo Magenta Variabe 2550 o 100 e eiw varabe 2550 om00 1 Select the function cell for channel 6 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Colour on the left column to display a list of Colour function sub cat egories 3 Select Cyan as the desired function The window will close and you will see Cyan assigned as the function and feature for channel 6 Note the feature column will auto fill with variable High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 6 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the Cyan channel 255 gt 0 and press Enter Note that the DMX value is inverted because the protocol shows 0 is full colour and 255 is no colour 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 6 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in percentage 0 gt 100 and press Enter 6 Repeat the above steps for Magenta on channel 7 and Yellow on channel 8 Gobo Wheel Since the DMX Protocol lists 8 discrete DMX values or ranges used by channel 9 the number of DMX entries needs to be increased for this channel 1 Select the Channel cell for channel
297. ialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Beam on the left column to display a list of Beam function sub categor ies 3 Select Gobo as the desired function The window will close and you will see Gobo assigned as the function and feature for channel 9 Note the feature column will auto fill with slots High End Systems 359 Section 25 The Fixture Builder 4 Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the first gobo value 0 and press Enter 5 Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set A dialog box will display a list of slot names Select a slot name and press Enter 6 Repeat the above steps for the other DMX entries for each gobo in the protocol Define each DMX entry for Spins Tutorial W CreateNew Copy From Delete Current Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified 05 10 2012 11 02 27 Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel a Function Dmx Value a Real World gt 255 100 gt 65535 540 gt 65535 540 gt 65535 gt 270 gt 65535 gt 270 fariable 55 gt 0 gt 100 55 gt 0 gt 100 55 gt 0 2100 lt RJE BHHE H ao 7 lt lt D Gi w oni oni onion BEElElESislsieleleleie ziz eoto fS AAR 5 FAFAFA i e Goo ses hsz n Gobo TSn onas oorstop 0 UNS PEIEE F WEI New
298. ide of the right screen s main toolbar Clicking on the backup button will quickly generate a backup of your show file in the shows directory using your show file s name If other backups with the same name exist in the shows directory the console will automatically append the new backup file with a number User Preferences Settings within the User Preferences window are stored as part of the show file and are applied whenever the show file is launched Desklight Worklight and Vent Light Preferences You can individually adjust the brightness of the console s desklights worklight and front panel key LEDs by holding down the Setup key and adjusting the cordinating parameter wheel The vent light brightness level on the Hog 4 Full Boar 4 and Road Hog 4 consoles is controlled by a slider that is located in in the Appearance pane of the User Preferences window The vent light will turn off during periods of console unactivivity as determined by the Changing the LCD Backlight Timeout p 53 setting Similar to the desk lights the vent light will come on at full intensity on a cold boot before you have loaded a show file The desklights feature both blue and white LEDs By default the desklights are white during normal activity and turn blue during periods of unactivivity as determined by the Changing the LCD Backlight Timeout p 53 setting If you prefer the desklights to always be blue you can select Use Blue Desklights in the Appearance pa
299. iew in the Programmer the pan and tilt column will read Off Select all pan and tilt cells of the selected fixtures by clicking and dragging Set Sine Enter choose the Sine table from the drop down menu and confirm by pressing Enter Select Offset select the Offset view in the Programmer the pan and tilt column will read 0 Deg Select all pan and tilt cells of the selected fixtures by clicking and dragging Set 1 Thru 288 Enter offset pan and tilt equally across the fixtures Once you have applied an effect to a parameter it will appear in the Value view of the Programmer or editor with the effects symbol next to the value 226 High End Systems Section 14 Effects Programmer Studio Spot 575 Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Show Fade Mm Compact Palettes Changes i Strobe Postion Colour 1 Colour 2 Num 4 intensity a r Chal i c Q Ai Tvoe Pan I Time Colour Shake Bink Colour Shake Blink Studio Spot 575 n 927 q 33 Track OM a a a E 12 S0 A1357 13 Q3 14 4 v35 130 Track OC As a a oe 4 gt Tip When assigning effect parameters such as Offset remember that values 0 and 360 Degrees are the same Fanning a range of fixtures from 0 through to 360 degrees of offset will mean that the first and last fixtures will share the same offset value 14 1 5 Tracking Table Effects By default effects values track through to subsequent cues until a new value
300. ig and fan keys 7 The installation will occur without further user interaction Note that it will take a few minutes to complete 28 2 1 Creating a Bootable USB Flash Drive on a Windows Computer The following procedure demonstrates how to create a bootbale USB flash drive to restore your Hog 40S Console using a Windows Computer 1 Download and install Linux Live s USB Stick Maker to your Windows PC http www linuxliveusb com 2 Insert a USB flash drive into on of your Windows computer s USB slots and start Linux Live s USB Stick Maker USB flash drive must be at least 2GB 3 Instep 1 of Linux Live USB Creator select the USB flash drive you inserted into your computer 4 In step 2 of Linux Live USB Creator click on ISO IMG ZIP and select the Hog 40S full restore ISO file that you downloaded from the Hog 40S support page online 390 High End Systems Section 28 Upgrading Console Software Skip step 3 of the Linux Live USB Creator and look at step 4 Select Format the key in Fat32 Click on the lightning bolt in step 5 of the Linux Live USB creator A dialogue box will pop up warning you that your USB flash drive contents will be erased Click okay When Linux Live USB Creator is finished it will alert you Remove your USB flash drive and proceed to restore your console as outlined in section 24 1 28 2 2 Creating a Bootable USB Flash Drive on a Macintosh Computer The following procedure demonstrates how to
301. igh End Systems Setup Patch this opens theFixture window Select the fixture fixtures you wish to patch and then press the Patch button to open the Fixture Patch window See Figure 5 2 The Fixture Patch win dow Select a DP8000 in the list on the left hand side of the window If there are no DP8000s shown or you want to patch to one that isn t listed shown in the list you need to add it See Adding and Removing DMX Processors p 108 Click or press one of the available DMX universes shown to select a universe to patch to The display gives a graphical indication of which addresses are already occupied Type in a number for the fixture s DMX start address the next free address is shown below each universe Click on OK or press Enter If you have finished patching click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors 105 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Fixture Patch E Net Name Type inUse Found Patchpoints HOOCH V 1 DP 8000 DP 8000 Yes Found Dmx 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OK 3 Cance Dmx 5 Dmx 1 Dmx 2 Dmx 3 Dmx 4 Dmx 6 Dmx 7 321 1 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 5 2 The Fixture Patch window You can also use the keypad to patch fixtures For example to patch Studio Color 1 to DMX Processor 2 Universe 4 at address 17 Fixture 1 2 4 17 Enter To patch further fixtures to the same DMX Processor and universe you can u
302. iiililiiig Lo 8 seessssse8 Hog 4 console Static IP 172 31 0 1 Run DHCP server Example B The console is a DHCP server and all other nodes obtain an IP address from it 8 DMX Universes TT DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP Hog 4 console Static IP 172 341 0 1 Run DHCP server Example C A DHCP Router serves all components High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 220999999099 0909099 9999999999999929 Hog 4 console Obtain IP using DHCP Example D All components have a custom unique static IP address LLLLLLLLTLLLLLLS 900900099 009999009 Hog 4 console Static IP 172 31 0 1 3 3 2 Port Number 8 DMX Universes LLL a aR III DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP 8 DMX Universes 00000000 DMX Processor 8000 Static IP 172 31 0 2 8 DMX Universes DMX Processor 8000 Static IP 172 31 0 3 Since multiple shows can be run on a single network each show server running on the network must have its own port number to keep lighting data for each show on the network seperated Nodes connecting to the show server must then have the same port number as the show server console For example a console running a show server on the network on port 6600 means other nodes such as DMX Processors on the network will need a port number of 6600
303. imecode values will be adjusted by the same amount of time added or subtrac ted from the first value 20 3 5 Simulating MIDI Timecode You can temporarily simulate midi timecode on the console using the Timecode Toolbar To simulate Midi timecode 1 Press the simulate button on the Timecode Toolbar Simulate is now enabled and all external timecode input for that source will be ignored 2 Press the play button next to the simulate button to simulate timecode from the current clock value as displayed for that timecode toolbar TIP Using the jump toolbar you can jump the simulated timecode value to six different jump points To change the jump points click on the word TIMECODE on the far left hand side of the timecode toolbar A drop down menu will appear with a set of fields allowing you to change the simulated jump points High End Systems 315 Section 21 Open Sound Control 21 1 Introduction to OSC Open Sound Control OSC is a modern network based communication protocol that can be used to send a variety of control messages between OSC enabled devices OSC input is supported on every console in the Hog 4 family including Hog 4PC When configured properly OSC will enable you to use OSC enabled controllers such as a synthesizers electronic music instruments produc tion audio software and mobile phone apps such as Touch OSC to control the basic functions of the Hog 40S 21 2 Configuring OSC Input To bring OSC message
304. imes e Fixture 1 Thru 5 Time Time 5 Thru 10 Enter fans the delay times of Fix tures 1 through 5 between 5 and 10 seconds For more on fanning including fanning using the parameter wheels and in spreadsheet views see Fanning p 142 High End Systems 211 Section 13 Timing 13 4 Cue Wait Timing In addition to manually pressingGo to execute you can also automate the triggering of a cue by assigning a wati value for the cue The wait value for a cue is assigned in the wait column of the cuelist window To assign how long a cue timing 1 List 1 Open open the cuelist 2 Select the Wait cell for the desired cue and press Set 3 The Trigger Toolbar will appear below the Wait cell see Figure 13 10 The Trigger Toolbar Select an option from this Hak Wat Folow Timecode Manual Clock 25 Figure 13 10 The Trigger Toolbar A cue s wait column options are e Halt Does not allow the cue to be triggered automatically unless a timecode value later in the list causes the cue to be jumped In all other cases the Go key must be manually pressed to execute this cue Halt is shown by an empty Wait cell and it is the default wait column value for newly created cues e Wait Triggers the cue after the specified time has passed from the triggering of the previous cue either automatically or by pressing Go It should not be confused with the Delay which is the time between the cue being triggered after a Wait if there is
305. indow 3 Adjust the Size Rate Offset and Length parameter wheels as required High End Systems 225 Section 14 Effects Note that the parameter wheels only control the current effects row selected using the buttons in the Function column There are buttons for all parameter types for all intensity all colour all position all beam and for each individual parameter type Z Tip All effect attributes can be fanned using the Fan key and parameter wheels remember to select the required parameter types in the Effects Engine Functioncolumn first You can also enter a value of say 50 Thru 80 in a cell of the Effects Engine window See Fanning p 142 14 1 4 Building Table Effects in Editors Effects can be assigned directly to specific fixtures and their attributes in any editor including the Programmer This is helpful when you wish to make small changes without opening the Effects Engine Effect types are assigned and edited in the Table view whilst effect attributes can be adjusted in the Size Rate Offset Length Table and N Shot views The views are selected by buttons at the top of the Programmer or editor window For example to create an offset circle effect using fixtures in positions from the current onstage look hs 8 Main Toolbar Programmer open the Programmer 1 Thru 5 Position Suck sucks position information from fixtures 1 through 5 that are currently live on stage Table select the Table v
306. ing Paramet ers 6 4 2 6 4 3 1 1Thru 5 30 Enter select the fixtures and assign the intensities to 30 Num 4 Intensity Studio Color 575 1 30 3 2 Press and hold the Fan key whilst slowly moving the l Wheel The fixtures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with those in between evenly spread across the intervening range Strobe Position Num amp Intensity Tyoe Pan Tit Studio Color 575 1 4 open open open open E a E ae ESS S35 In the Programmer Window To fan a parameter 1 Select a range of cells for example the intensity cells of Studio Colors 1 to 5 2 Set10Thru 50 Enter The fixtures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with those in between evenly spread across the intervening range You can also fan backwards continuing the above example e Set 50 Thru 10 Enter Studio Color 1 has an intensity of 50 and Studio Color 5 an intensity of 10 You can also fan several columns at once fanning both Pan and Tilt for example With the Command Line To fan intensities from the command line e 1Thru5 10 Thru 50 Enter The fixtures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with those in between evenly spread across the in tervening range You can also fan backwards High End Systems 143 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers e 1Thru5 5 Thru 10 Enter fixture 1 has an intensity of 50 and fix
307. ing Toolbar marrer eana En EEEE EEO EEE KESA 146 6 12 A Kind Editor for the Colour kind with seperate parameters turned OMe ec veeeneddaexee ded upat che aveeddesaivevacss evntecsavveadeesvenencebbves nAn AAG Kataa vauneeeshe 148 8 1 Example of Parameters set to reference a Palette cccceseeeenes 154 8 2 The Palette Editor WINGOW cece ee cece eee e ee ee ee ee ee ee sees setae eeaeeenies 155 8 3 A Palette with Global Parameter Values ccceeee cece eee ates neeeae es 158 8 4 A Palette with Per Fixture Type Values cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeeaees 159 8 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Values 0 cccceeceeeee ences eee eeeeeeae nena eeaees 159 8 6 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types 160 8 7 The Record Options Toolbar 0 2 0 cece eect e eee eee ee eee ae eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 161 9 1 Write Permissions Menu ccccceeeee eee e eee e ee ee ee ee eee e eee eee a ee aeeenies 165 9 2 Write Permissions Legend cece ceeeee eee eee eee eee ante anes a eeea nese tees 166 9 3 Right Click Color Coding Menu cceceeeeeeeteee tees tees eee eeeeaeeeaeeeaeees 166 9 4 Color Coding Entire Button cee eee eect ects seta tenes aeeeaies 166 9 5 Button Sizes Options sissit csod Cehiwesges eerie cdavas dbs theeeserlaer sana sae races 167 9 6 Show Fewer Buttons Option c cece cee eee e eee eee e eee eee ae eea eee a nese tees 168 9 7 Auto Color Swatch Option
308. ing and Moving CUES sssssssssssserssrrsrrrrsrerrerrerinrrerns 180 11 4 1 Copying CUeS sssssissssssssssrssrrsrrrrrerrrsrrernsnrsrnnrererere 180 114 2 Moving CUES ee a es a eee dees 181 11 5 Renumbering Cues within a Cuelist esccccccceceeee etree 181 11 6 Editing Cue Contents sriid 182 11 6 1 Viewing Different Cues in the Editor cecene 183 11 7 Working with Tracking ccccceeee cece eee ee eee eee ates ates eeeeeeaeeeas 183 11 7 1 Tracking Values Backwards When Recording 183 11 7 2 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward 08 184 11 7 3 Deleting without Tracking Forward eeeeeeeee 185 1137 4 BIOCKING CUCS vae cedars eE tee radea he ts 186 T1725 UADIOCKING i rene eae apanar aana a aieia EA EETA bret 187 11 8 Mark Cues Move in Black ssssssssssrssrssrsrrsrrnrrrrnrrnrrerrnrenreees 188 11 8 1 How to Mark to a Cue 0 c eee eee eee e ee eee nett aetna 188 11 8 2 Fade Mark verses Time Marks cceeeeeeeee sete eeeeeeeeee 189 11 8 3 Marking the First Cue in a Cue List ee 190 11 8 4 Cuelist Feedback for Mark CUES ceeeeeeee eter neers 191 11 9 Understanding Cuelists 20 00 00 cccececeeeeee ects eeee eee eee eeae een ees 191 11 10 Naming Cuelists 2 0 0 0 cece a eee ee ee eeeeeeaa tena a 192 11 11 Deleting Cuelists 20 0 0 cence cette tees renee ne eeaeeeaeeaaeeaee 193 11 12 Copying and Moving Cuelists esee 194 11 12 1 Copying Cuelists 2 0 0 cece eee eee eeeeeeea te
309. ing inhibitive masters from 294 removing scenes from 294 template 296 which is the current page 22 palette directory 34 palettes 34 153 automatic naming 37 copying 157 creating automatically 116 default names 37 deleting 156 direct 162 editing contents 155 effect 230 global 158 moving 157 naming 153 recording 153 recording with masking 160 458 Index recording with timings 161 reference 162 showing references to in editors 45 types of content 158 using in programming 154 pan see position parameter defaults 255 parameter types removing from an editor 147 parameter wheels 131 132 center wheel 94 parameters 30 129 default value 123 default values restoring 142 making non releasable 124 minimum and maximum values 123 modifying values 129 naming slot values 124 offset value 124 removing value from an editor 147 separating 147 timing 206 park editor window 248 parking 247 paste 44 patch proportional 121 patch points multiple 109 patching 105 adding DPs 108 cloning 111 112 finding unused addresses 108 fixtures to multiple addresses 107 Hog 4PC 403 multiple patch points 109 removing DPs 108 several fixtures at once 106 unpatching 113 path button 45 paths 201 204 per fixture button when recording palettes 158 per fixture type button when recording palettes 158 persist on override 267 pig key 47 139 for copy and paste 44 for fine control of p
310. ings Comment Macro Syntax Example MIDI String MS node type node number MIDI message MSh1 90473F The node number is h for a console i for a MIDI Timecode Processor and its net number The MIDI message is in Hex Controlling Network Devices CommentMaao Syntax Example Notes Reset Node node type net number RNH3 Resets the selected network device such as a DMX Processor For the device type use the following letter codes H for WholeHog D for DMX Processor and for MIDI Timecode Processor Controlling Keystroke Macros Macro Syntax Example Notes GK GK macro number GK2 Runs Macro 2 HK HK macro number HK2 Pauses Macro 2 RK RK macro number RK2 Stops Macro 2 Tip You can display and select from a list of available macro commands on the console by selecting the Macro cell and pressing the Set key High End Systems 331 23 2 1 23 2 2 332 Section 23 Macros Entering Comment Macro Commands To enter a comment macro command into a macro cell 1 Select the macro cell and press Set 2 Select a command from the drop down menu 3 Enter the specific information for the macro such as the master number 4 Press Enter to finish or select another macro and repeat If you add a further macro command the will be entered automatically Alternatively 1 Select the macro cell and press Set 2 Enter the macro command manually using the keyboard 3 Pr
311. installed on your machine Select your preferences and click on Next to continue High End Systems 397 398 Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC Select the way you want features to be installed Click the icons in the tree below to change the way features will be installed This feature requires 7702KB on your hard drive It has 1 of 1 subfeatures selected The subfeatures require 496KB on your hard drive C Program Files x86 Flying Pig Systems Hog4PC Browse By default the software will be installed into the C Program Files Flying Pig Systems hog4pc directory You can use the Browse button to navigate to another location for the application After selecting a drive location and components to install click on Next to continue installation The installer will now offer a link to the Elo TouchSystems website If you plan to use Elo touchscreens with your Hog 4PC setup then it is recommended you click on the Elos Drivers button bookmark the website in your browser and download and install the latest touchscreen drivers from the Elo Touch Systems website after you complete the Hog 4PC installation Click on Next to continue the installation High End Systems Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC 9 This prompts a Ready to Install screen with instructions on beginning or can celling the installation Click Install to begin installing High End Systems 399 Section 29 Installing Ho
312. io Color 575 21 22 23 Studio Color 575 21 22 23 24 25 26 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt Green values are in a Red values are in a Purple values are in a Go state Pause state Release state Studio Color 575 21 22 23 24 25 26 Levels View A Levels View Show Show Vales Effects Sources ffects Sour Palettes Palettes Vales Effects urces Desk Channel Desk Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Studio Color 575 Studio Color 575 2i 22 21 22 23 4 4 Teal values are from Black text on orange an Effect values are Parked 17 5 Advanced Playback 17 5 1 Changing Playback and FX Rates You can alter the playback and effects rates of a master cuelist scene chase in two ways Holding choose and adjusting the encoder wheels When you hold down a Choose key you can use the parameter wheels to control the playback and ef fects rates for the selected master Any rates you change are stored and will 274 High End Systems Section 17 Playback 17 5 2 17 5 3 persist You can also set this rate in the Cuelist Options window and you can set the default rate for new cuelists in Setup Preferences Cuelist Cuelist Rate Cuelist Effect Rate 100 100 Using the Rate Wheel The wheel located on the left hand side of the console is known as the rate wheel The rate wheel allows users to make temporary modifications to the stored playback and effects rates for the chosen and selected masters To toggle the rate wh
313. ion e Unable to find information in the index The section number where the problem is The version number of the manual In printed and PDF editions you can find this on the title page at the start of the manual The on line help within the console shows the version on the main contents page you can go to this page by clicking home at the bottom of any page High End Systems Section 31 Troubleshooting 31 6 4 About Software Version Numbering The software version number is made up of four parts the major version number the minor version number the current release number and the build number For example v1 2 3 b512 1 is the major number 2 is the minor version number 3 is the current release and 512 is the build 31 6 5 About Beta Software As new releases of Hog 40S are developed High End Systems relies on input from console users If you are interested in learning more about the High End Systems Software Testing Pro gram please visit www flyingpig com High End Systems 423 Section 32 Service All Hog 4 family consoles must be serviced by a qualified service technician The information in this section is intended to assist qualified personnel only 32 1 Replacing the Screens Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel Damaged screens are easily replaced 1 With the LCD box in the horizontal flat position undo the six screws sur rounding
314. ion at end of ist POEGA Loop Behaviour Cuelst Effect Rate SERES Te 120bpm Loop Type amp Crossfade 0 Stop after iep Soau beat oO Release On Stop Direction Ii Reset to Defauts e Continuous the chase steps indefinitely until paused or released Stop On Last the chase stops at the last cue in the cuelist until released or triggered again with a Go e Release On Last the cuelist chase is released when it reaches the final step e Stop On First the chase completes one cycle and stops on the first cue until triggered again If any loop type other than continuous is chosen then you can assign the number of cycles the chase completes before the loop behaviour is actioned Selecting Release on Stop releases the chase cuelist either when it stops because of an actioned loop behaviour or because of a manual stop using the Halt key Tip The Playback Options of a master can be quickly accessed by holding Pig and pressing the master s Choose key Adjusting Chase Rate with Tap Sync A cuelist chase can be manually sync ed to a beat such as a piece of music using Tap Sync Once sync ed Hog 40S maintains the chase rate until a new one is assigned To adjust the rate of a chase using Tap Sync hold down the Choose key of the master the chase is attached to while pressing the master s Go key repeatedly to the required beat Hog 40S will High End Systems 279 17 5 6 17 5 7 280 Section 17 Playback le
315. ion using preview thumbnails To open the media picker window hold the open key and press the media picker button on the main toolbar or press Pig Open Beam on the console front panel When a fixture selection is made the console will populate the media picker with preview thumbnails as defined by the fixture library or as gathered by the console using CITP or Catalyst protocols Most automated lighting fixtures will display tabs containing preview thumbnails for slotted functions such as gobos colors and prisms while digital media servers such as the DL 3 will display tabs containing preview thumbnails for digital media files 3 D objects and masks Media picker window selections are applied to the current active editor Media Picker Object y D g A Luna Blue Media SAk N Figure 10 1 Media Picker Window 10 1 Media Picker Window Options The media picker has several options for how preview thumbnails are displayed in the window 1 Merged Different default on when this option is turned on the media picker window merges thumbnails for content across the current fixture selec tion even if the content does not match When in this mode a page turn icon High End Systems 171 Section 10 Media Picker will appear in the upper right corner for any content that is not the same across the entire fixture selection Show hide dmx value default on shows and hides the dmx value of the content displayed in the
316. ions 500W 45 Ibs 20 41 kg 35 49 901 19mm wide x 22 65 575 36mm deep x 9 62 244 34mm high 34 3 Road Hog 4 Console 34 3 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in Video out USB Ethernet DMX out Keyboard 436 V Lock style locking IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 5A maximum 1 x DVI female connector 1 x VGA female connect only 1 can be used at a time 3 x Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 2 rear 1 front 2 x Universal Serial Bus 3 0 ports 2 rear 2 x Neutrik Ethercon Gigabit base TX Ethernet port 4 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Not included Generic Class USB keyboards Supported High End Systems Section 34 Technical Specifications 34 3 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 500W Weight 38 6 Ibs 17 5 kg Dimensions 26 7 678 18mm wide by 27 61 701 32mm deep by 8 10 205 8mm high 34 4 Nano Hog 4 Console 34 4 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in External DC Power Supply 5 5A 12V 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A maximum USB Type B USB Input Socket Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 2 rear DMX Out 4 x 5 pin XLR DMX Outputs when DMX output kit is in stalled 34 4 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 5W Weight 18 1 Ibs 8 21 kg Dimensions 26 7 678 18mm wide by 13 76 349 52mm deep by
317. ir new values over the assert time The default is 2 seconds but you can assign your preferred assert time for each cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the Assert Time cell Release Time 0O Default Assert Time Cl Default Back Time a a CJ Default Cuelist Effect Rate 1002 eat 100 3 Set 5 Enter change the assert time to 5 seconds Alternatively you can assign the Assert Time for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Tip If you have assigned an assert time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default assert time press the Default button adjacent to the Assert Time cell High End Systems Section 17 Playback 17 3 3 Changing a Cuelist s Priority Under the LTP rule the most recent action determines the value of a fixture parameter see Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes p 264 However you can override this precedence by as signing cuelists different priorities so that cuelists with a higher priority take precedence over those with a lower one If their priority is equal then the LTP rule is used to determine which cuelist will take precedence and determine the parameter s value A cuelist s default priority is 0 and you can assign the priority value in increments of 10 For example if the priority of the cuelist attached to Master 5 is at default 0 and the priority of that on Master 4 is 50 then
318. irm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences gt Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items You can delete a range of cues 1 List 1 Cue 1 Thru 4 Delete deletes Cues 1 to 4 in Cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip To delete a cue cue only so that changes caused by deleting the cue don t track through to later cues see Deleting without Tracking Forward p 185 11 4 11 4 1 180 Copying and Moving Cues Tip Copying or moving cues affect hard values only the cue you wish to copy move may also contain tracked values that create the current on stage state If you wish to copy this look rather than just changes made by the current cue use Copy and Move with State see Using State p 186 Copying Cues To make a copy of a cue in the same cuelist 1 Make sure that the cuelist you want to work with is on the currently chosen master 2 Cue 1 Copy Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 to Cue 2 To copy in a cuelist other than the chosen one or to copy between cuelists specify the cuelist with the List key For example e List 1 Cue 1 Copy List 2 Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 of Cuelist 1 to Cue 2 of Cuelist 2 To copy a range of cues e List 1 Cue 1 Thru 4 Copy List 2 Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of cues 1 to 4 of Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 starting
319. ithout changing the onstage parameter values of fixtures The Blind key is located above the Trackball when in blind mode the Blind key will illuminate Note that when you turn off blind mode all parameter values that you have changed in the Pro grammer or editor will instantly appear on stage To exit blind mode gracefully hold down the Pig key while pressing Blind parameters will fade to their new values in the assigned or default fade time Alternatively select Fade Changes in the editor you are using prior to turning blind on or off Tip Using Pig Blind on Hog 40S is equivalent to using the Try Cue key on the Wholehog II 16 6 Parking Sometimes it is useful to lock certain parameter values of fixtures independently from program ming playback and the Grand Master For example you might want to lock a particular dimmer at a certain level as a working light or point a fixture to provide light for maintenance whilst a rehearsal or programming is in progress Park is also helpful for dealing with a fixture malfunction locking its pan and tilt so that it doesn t make a noise as it tries to move during the show Parking holds a fixture s parameters on stage but still allows you to edit the data in the Program mer or other editors High End Systems 247 Section 16 Advanced Programming To park fixture parameter values 1 Fixture 1 50 Select fixture s and assign the parameter s you wish to park 2 More gt P
320. ixtureNet tab of the node settings window 3 Ensure that the IP address and subnet settings are appropriate for the network environment in which the Catalyst media servers are connected This is similar to configuring the FixtureNet network adapter for Art Net and sACN output To better ensure connectivity it is recommended that the IP address assigned to the FixtureNet adapter be within in the same sub network as the Catalyst it is receving preview thumnails from 10 3 2 Patching Catalyst fixtures to Catalyst Media Servers Once a Catalyst fixture is scheduled in the patch window and patch to a DMX output the Catalyst fixture can then be patched to a Catalyst media server that is connected to the FixtureNet network of any active DP8000 connected to the console Follow these steps to patch a Catalyst fixture to a Catalyst media server 1 2 D High End Systems Open the patch window Select the Catalyst fixture s you wish to associate with a Catalyst media server in the rig Press the patch media button at the top of the patch window Select the Catalyst tab in the media patch window Enter the IP Address of the Catalyst media server Press okay You will now see the IP address of the Catalyst media server in the patch window listed for the Catalyst fixtures you selected in step 2 This will now associate the Catalyst fixtures in your show file with the Catalyst media servers in the rig as long as the Catalyst media server s IP remain
321. ixtures used in the two shows see Figure 4 6 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show window If you choose not to merge fixtures you will not be able to merge any programming High End Systems 99 100 Section 4 Shows Fixture Merge Merge Fixtures Figure 4 6 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show window There are two options for merging fixtures Append appending fixtures will add a copy of all of the fixtures from the source show into the current show Any programming that is merged from the source show will use the appended fixtures and all programming in the current show will continue to use the same fixtures as before Replace replacing fixtures will match fixtures from the source show with fixtures in the current show if they have the same type and user number If a match is made the fixture in the current show is replaced with the one in the source show and all programming in the source and current show that used that fixture will use the merged fixture If no match is made the source fixture is appended to the current show as above Important If you merge fixtures and then merge programming because both the source show and the current show are using the same fixture any pro gramming from the source show using that fixture will overwrite the programming in the current show High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 10 3 Merging Programming After merging fixtures you can merge the programming groups
322. k Comment Figure 11 6 The Cuelist window 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a cuelist when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the cuelist 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip You can rename a cuelist when it is attached to a master by pressing Set Choose 11 11 Deleting Cuelists To delete a cuelist 1 List 1 Delete deletes cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the cuelist directory 1 Open List open cuelist directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a cuelist when pressing its button in the directory 3 Delete Cuelist 1 delete the cuelist You will be asked to confirm the action Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items High End Systems 193 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Tip To detach a cuelist from its master rather than deleting it completely from the show file hold Delete while pressing the master s Choose button This removes the cuelist from the master but not from the cuelist direct ory 11 12 Copying and Moving Cuelists Cuelists can be copied and moved within the Cuelist Directory To open the Cuelist Directory Ope
323. ked as modified then the library has been altered through a library merge Moving Copying Deleting and Renaming Files To move a file e Drag and drop files to destinations in the left hand folder list Generally you will find dragging with the mouse or Trackball much easier than using the touchscreen To copy a file e Drag and drop files while holding down the Pig key or the Control key on an external keyboard To delete a file High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals e Right click on the file and select Delete from the contextual menu You will be asked to confirm the action To rename a file e Right click on the file and select Rename from the contextual menu Type in the new name and press Enter Tip You can also copy and paste files by right clicking on them and selecting Copy or Paste from the contextual menu 2 12 2 Creating New Folders You can create sub folders in the Shows and Libraries folders to help organise your work 1 Click on the folder you want to make a new folder in LA Click on the FA button 3 Enter a name for the folder and press Enter Note that you cannot create folders on a CD ROM Tip You can also create a new folder inside an existing one by right clicking on it and using the contextual menu 2 12 3 Ejecting Disks You cannot eject a disk in the console CD drive if it is in use Before ejecting make sure that you don t have the disks folder sele
324. key while pressing a directory button 2 7 1 Automatic Naming of Directory Items When you create or copy a directory item the console automatically generates a name for the new item For example if you have two position palettes and them create a third the new one will be recorded into location 3 in the directory and named Position 3 If you then copy this position palette the copy will be recorded into location 4 in the directory and named Copy of Position 3 You can customise how the console automatically generates these names in the Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window see Figure 2 9 The Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window To open the Default Naming pane Setup Preferences Default Naming To customise the generated labels 1 Click or press on the text box for the required type of directory group intens ity position and so on Labels for when the new directory item is created by recording or by copying are handled in separate text boxes 2 Set new label text Enter type in the label you want 3 Alternatively click or press on the arrow at the right hand end of the text box to get a list of useful labels Click on the one you want You can use special tags to have the console insert text into the name for you according to the directory name and the location in the directory High End Systems 37 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals User Preferences a App
325. king p 31 and Working with Tracking p 183 However some parameter types are treated as a single fixture attribute so for example when you touch one of the three colour parameters of a colour mixing fixture cyan magenta or yellow the other two are automatically touched at either their current value from playback or at their default values High End Systems 147 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers For most purposes this provides the results that you would expect but there may be situations where you want to separate the linked parameters for example to run separate chases with the cyan magenta and yellow parameters By default Hog 40S links all position parameters together and all colour parameters together You can separate linked parameter types in the kinds editor window for both fixed and user kinds 1 Hold Open key and select the Kinds button from the steup toolbar 2 Toggle separating parameters on and off by pressing the parameter type buttons see Figure 6 12 A Kind Editor for the Colour kind with seperate parameters turned on Kind Editor Colour Hue Saturation Blank EH Beam image image GF Beam Shape Background ransparenc EF Beam Shape 2 amp Colour EF Colour 1 EFH Colour 2 Separate Parameters Figure 6 12 A Kind Editor for the Colour kind with seperate parameters turned on 148 High End Systems Section 7 Groups 7 1 Recording Grou
326. l If you are using the console s built in midi input port to bring Midi Timecode into the console then make sure USB LTC Midi Midi 1 is listed and selected High End Systems Section 20 MIDI as the midi input device If you are using an external Generic Midi Class USB device the make sure you select that device from the input drop down menu Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Nn a In the Timecode pane select MIDI as the active port 20 3 2 Viewing Incoming MIDI Timecode You can view the timecode generated by any source in a Timecode Toolbar 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select a network node such as a console or a MIDI Timecode Processor 3 Press Timecode Toolbar The Timecode Toolbar will open If you have a cuelist with a timecode source selected you can also open the Timecode Toolbar with the View Timecode button in the Cuelist window The Timecode Toolbar displays the incoming timecode type format value and frame regener ation Frame Regeneration occurs when the console does not receive a clean timecode signal and must make up for the missing frames itself in order to prevent missed cues You can set how many frames of timecode are generated by the console before timecode is lost in the timecode settings window by clicking on the word TIMECODE in the timecode toolbar we sew 00 00 00 00 Figure 20 2 The
327. l Serial Bus a means of connecting computer peripherals such as keyboards and mice Hog consoles also use USB to connect expansion wings See Also playback wing An user defined arrangement of windows that can be accessed with a single button press from the View Toolbar A means of running a cuelist without having it attached to a physical master on the console See Also cuelist master A real time computer rendering package that allows the Programmer to create their lighting virtually before getting to the venue The time between the previous cue being triggered and the current one being run automatically Not to be confused with the delay time See Also delay time the building blocks of both fixed kinds and user kinds that specify how fixture funtions assigned within a kind are displayed on the console s main encoder wheels when a fixture selection is made See Also kinds A definition of white light used by Hog 4OS s colour calibration system to match the colour of fixtures with different lamp types such as tungsten and arc A device that allows the connection of accessories to the console or PC via USB Such accessories may range from input control panels to DMX outputs See Also USB Allows the size of beam image to be adjusted whilst maintaining its focus High End Systems Symbols key 129 A abstraction 29 action of go when looping 261 aggregation collapsing sections 42 jumping between sections
328. l allows you to control the basic playback functionalities of the Hog 4 OS from other MSC enabled consoles or from a Midi Show Control output device such as a personal computer running show control software 20 1 1 Bringing MSC into the Console To bring MSC into a Hog Console High End Systems 1 Connect the output of an MSC device to the MIDI In port on the back of the console If you are using a USB Midi device such as a USB keyboard or an external USB Midi Widget to send MSC into the console then connect the USB connection of your external USB midi device to one of the USB ports on your console Setup Control Panel Navigate to the midi tab of the control panel If you are using the console s built in midi input port then make sure USB LTC Midi Midi 1 is selected as the midi input device If you are using a USB Midi device such as a USB keyboard or external USB Midi widget to bring MSC into the console then select that device from the input drop down menu Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window see Figure 20 1 The MIDI pane of the Console Settings window In the MIDI pane check MSC In 303 Console Settings Security MIDI Show Control MIDI Notes MIDI Timecode Section 20 MIDI sive SysEx Device Group 112 MIDI Show Control MSC unei 01 General Lighting Bad Enable 0O MSC In MSC Out x Cancel Figure 20 1 The
329. l displays you must enable them and set the screen resolution in the Displays pane of the Control Panel Setup Control Panel Displays You will need to restart the console to enable the external monitors NOTE The Full Boar 4 s DVI D monitor output connections do not support analog output to VGA displays such as those featured on the older Full Boar 3 playback and programming wings Adding External Touch Screens External USB touch screens are supported on the Hog 4 Full Boar 4 and Road Hog 4 consoles When an external touchscreen is required High End Systems recommends using Master Wing 4 or Playback Wing 4 for the greatest level of compatability and integration Additionally Hog 4 OS consoles are compatible with touchscreen monitors listed below High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Manu Model Size fac turer Part Number Video Notes High End Systems ELO AccuTouch 12 ET1229L ELO AccuTouch 12 ET1215L ELO AccuTouch 17 ET1725L ELO iTouch 15 6 ET1519L All Part No E432532 E103047 E232070 VGA Only Must use VGA to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 VGA Only Must use VGA to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 VGADM VGA Only Must use VGA to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 Ep Section 3 Setting Up the System Manu Model Size Part Video fac Number Notes turer ELO iTouch
330. lash The Flash key brings the fixture intensities currently controlled by the master to their full level determined by the cuelist or scene on the master This is equivalent to momentarily bringing the fader to full You can enter a percentage level for the Flash function If this is less than 100 fixture intensities will be reduced in proportion when the Flash key is pressed Press Go On Flash to go the master when the Flash key is pressed Press Release on Off to release the master when the Flash key is released Press Solo to have the intensity outputs of all other masters taken to zero when the Flash key is pressed If you select Latching the action of the Flash key is maintained until it is pressed a second time 17 8 2 Configuring the Main Controls When you configure the main playback controls the settings are part of the cuelist and will be applied whenever you select the Choose key for the master that the cuelist is on The configur ation options for the main control keys are shown in the following table High End Systems 287 288 Section 17 Playback The Assert Release Goto Skip Forwards Skip Backwards Main Halt and Main Go keys Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Assert Asserts the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own assert time overriding the cuelist s assert time Release Releases the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to
331. layed back You can assign a single fade time for the cue or have separate fade in and fade out times The fade in time is the fade time for parameters belonging to fixtures that are increasing in intensity while the fade out time is the fade time for parameters belonging to fixtures that are decreasing in intensity e Delay time The time between the cue being triggered and parameter values starting to change As with fade times you can assign a single delay time or have separate in delay and out delay times The in delay time is the delay between the cue being triggered and parameters belonging to fixtures that are increasing in intensity starting to change while the out delay time is the delay between the cue being triggered and parameters belonging to fixtures that are decreasing in intensity starting to change e Path How parameter values change during the fade The simplest path is a straight line so that parameter values change smoothly and evenly throughout the fade but you can use paths that make all of the change happen at the start of the fade for example The different types of trigger values are e Wait time The time from the previous cue being triggered to the current cue being triggered e Follow on time The time from the end of the previous cue to the current cue being triggered High End Systems 201 Section 13 Timing e Timecode A specific timecode value when a cue is triggered see Triggering Cues from MIDI
332. le Failover When two or more show server consoles are connected to a network show a feature known as failover is automatically enabled allowing for one of the consoles to fail without causing a loss of control over the show data or dmx output Each show server on the network has the ability to take over control of the show should one of the other show server consoles suffer from power loss a severed network connection or localized failure Users are encouraged to run at least two networked show server consoles in live performance situations in the event that if one console fails the show can remain running on the secondary console while the first console is recovered High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 8 DMX Universes e0000000 Oo o ooooooooon 0 j o f DMX Processor 8000 2 FAARBAHBER 8 Net number 1 lj TT LO sesseseses o Hog console Server Net number 1 rat Ethernet switch 8 DMX Universes ee000000 0 oocooonoon 0 DMX Processor 8000 3EBE3BBSE Net number 2 2 TE O S amp S Seesessse6 Hog console Server Net number 2 To enable console failover 1 Connect two consoles via an Ethernet switch 2 Enable the Run Server option in the Settings window on each console 3 Configure the primary console as Net number 1 and the secondary console as Net number 2 4 Log on primary console and then connect secondary console After configuring the network
333. le Patch Points 1 1 DP 8000 2 23 Intensity 1 DP 8000 4 420 Fixture Figure 5 5 A Fixture with Multiple Patch Points High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 5 2 6 Cloning Universes Cloning patching copies fixture and associated patch information from one DMX universe to another A selected fixture will therefore control recurring patch locations across several universes To clone the patching of one universe to another 1 Setup Patch gt View by DP open the Fixture window in View by DP view 2 Select the universe to clone by clicking on the column in the spreadsheet The selected universe is highlighted in blue 3 Press Clone Universe The Clone Universe window will open see Figure 5 6 The Clone Universe window 4 Select a destination DP8000 and universe You can create a new DP8000 if you want to clone to a universe on a DP8000 not currently connected to the console and you can specify an offset for the patch addresses to position them differently in the universe Click on OK when you have finished 5 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s Clone Universe Clone the patch from universe 1 on DP 1 Target DP Target Universe Net Name Type O 1 DP 8000 DP 8000 2 DP 8000 DP 8000 O O Offset Specify a value to offset the addresses by Figure 5 6 The Clone Universe window I
334. lette with Per Fixture Type values will show them grouped by fixture type see Figure 8 3 A Palette with Global Parameter Values Figure 8 4 A Palette with Per Fixture Type Values and Figure 8 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Values Make sure that you have aggregation turned on see Aggregation p 41 Yellow Global Colour 1 Saturate Colour Figure 8 3 A Palette with Global Parameter Values 158 High End Systems Section 8 Palettes Yellow Per Type Vale Fede Deisy Show Show Edt Siste Paletios Strobe Num a hiensty gt voe Yelow Hue So All Studio 575 All Studio Color 575 Yellow Per Fixture Value Fede Deisy Figure 8 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Values You can override the default settings using the Record Options Toolbar for example to record a single fixture s parameter values as per fixture 1 Assign the parameters of the fixture as required 2 Press Record 3 The Record Options Toolbar will appear on the bottom of the right hand touch screen Select Per Fixture 4 Press the key to choose the palette type for example Colour The Palette Directory will open 5 Select the palette location by pressing it in the Palette Directory window Similarly to force a palette with one of each fixture type to be recorded as Per Fixture Type rather than the default Per Fixture use the Per Fixture Type button on the Record Options Toolbar Forcing a palette to be Per Fixtur
335. lick and drag a function from the list of functions on the left hand side of the window to any wheel on one of the wheelsets To delete a function from a wheelset Click on the function It will highlight in yellow Press delete The function will be deleted from the wheelset To add a wheelset Click and drag a function from the list of functions on the left hand side of the window to wheel on the greyed out wheelset at the bottom of the right hand side side of window To delete an entire wheelset Click anywhere on the wheelset s frame The wheelset will highlight in yellow Press delete The entire wheelset and its contained functions will be deleted To move a function on a wheelset Click and drag the function you wish to move Tip Functions marked with a lock icon and wheelsets containing functions marked with a lock icon cannot be deleted High End Systems 237 Section 16 Advanced Programming 16 1 Selecting from What is Onstage You can select fixtures from what is on stage using the Live key Fixtures are considered to be on stage if their intensities are non zero If you wish to select fixtures that are onstage but have intensity values at zero then you can use Pig Live Below are some examples of how live can be used e Live Enter selects all fixtures that are on stage with intensities above 0 e Pig Live Enter selects all fixtures that are on stage regardless of intensity You can apply a mask to the selection T
336. ll change as follows Fixture 1 2 3 4 Master at 100 0 50 80 100 Master at50 0 25 40 50 Master at 0 0 0 0 0 Pressing the Flash key of an inhibitive master is the same as momentarily changing its fader level to 0 taking all fixture intensities controlled by the inhibitive master to 0 Intensity values are restored when you release the key To create an inhibitive master 1 Record a group containing the required fixtures See Recording Groups p 149 2 Group Group open the Group Directory 3 Select the required group To ensure you don t select the group in the Program mer or editor enable the Guard button in the Group Directory or press and hold the Pig key while selecting the group 4 Move Choose move the group to the required master Or using the command line 1 Record a group containing the required fixtures 2 Group group number Move Choose The Playback Bar will show the group name above the chosen master When the master level is less than 100 the Playback Bar will also display a bar showing the level When the Flash key is pressed the Playback Bar will display BO see Figure 17 9 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Bar High End Systems Section 17 Playback 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 Group Inhibitive Inhibitive Inhibitive master with master at full master at50 flash key pressed Figure 17 9 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Ba
337. ll enable blind mode until changes are updated or Edit is deselected see Blind p 247 You can leave the mode otherwise by pressing the Blind key List 1 Cue 2 Value Fade Desy Path Size Rate Mark usn Show Show Face Fade Tene State Paleties Chan oston Eat Num amp intensty 2 ve t575 12 Studio Color 575 1 100 pen 100 per 4 Figure 11 1 The Cue Editor window High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Pro grammer See Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters p 125 Once you have made changes be sure to press the Update key to save them the Cue Editor will then automatically close 11 6 1 Viewing Different Cues in the Editor In addition to the usual functions available in all editors described in Editors p 45 the Cue Editor window has controls that allow you to select which cue is displayed e Next and Back The Next and Back buttons to allow you to easily step through the cues in the cuelist to view or edit them e View Cue You can jump to another cue by typing its number in to the View Cue box and pressing the Enter key Follow Current If you select the Follow Current button the Cue Editor window will always show the current cue as the cuelist is played back If you use Next Back or View Cue to view another cue or if you edit the current cue then Follow Current is disabled Follow
338. ll the rows in that section see Figure 2 14 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed Rows To collapse an aggregate section right click the black heading bar and select Collapse To expand the aggregation section again right click the section s black heading bar and select Expand 42 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Programmer Edit a Compact Palettes Changes Positior Num amp intensity zate Pan Studio Spot 575 11 12 Technobeam Iris 21 100 22 100 Desk Channel 31 100 32 100 Studio Color 575 BAA Programmer Value Fade Delay Path gt gt Show Fade Palettes Changes Position Edit Compact A Num amp Intensity Studio Spot 575 Studio Color 575 Technobeam Iris R OO T a A 22 E 7 1 1 A Desk Channel tH Figure 2 14 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed Rows Priority of Aggregated Sections You can change the position of an aggregation section in the list by altering its priority Raising a section s priority will make it appear nearer the top of the spreadsheet High End Systems 43 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals To move an aggregate row up or down in priority right click the section s black header bar and then select Raise Priority or Lower Priority Jumping Between Aggregated Sections You can quickly bring aggregated sections into view using the Jump Toolbar located on the upper right of a spreadsheet window see Figure 2 15
339. load the CPU board firmware hold down the lt and gt keys as the unit is powered on The DMX Processor 8000 will High End Systems Section 28 Upgrading Console Software then reload its firmware from the network Once the process begins you will see the Forcing Software Reload message on the display High End Systems 393 Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC Hog 4PC is a software program that runs the Hog 40S on Windows based computers You can download the current version for no charge at www flyingpig com The software can be used as an offline editor a backup server or a stand alone controller through the use of USB DMX Widgets or DMX Processors 29 1 Software Installation Hog 4PC requires Windows XP SP2 or greater to ensure proper functionality Since the Hog 40S makes use of multiple processes communicating via TCP IP sockets some Windows com puter configurations may prevent the Hog 4PC processes from communicating with each other Not meeting the system requirements of Windows XP SP2 or greater lack of an enabled network connection or multiple active network connections and or firewall settings can all result in Hog 4PC communication failures These communication failures typically cause the Splash Screen to repeatedly display Scanning port 6600 in its status window To install Hog 4PC 1 Download the installer for the latest version of Hog 4PC from the Flying Pig website once downloaded the file name will
340. lour of fixtures using Hue and Saturation make sure that you have selected your preferred white point Changing it after you have started programming will change the appearance of previously programmed colours The Colour Picker You can use the Colour Picker to graphically select Hue and Saturation values To open the Colour Picker e Hold down the Open key and select HS Picker e Pig Open Colour There is also a button to open the Colour Picker in the Colour Directory window The Colour Picker will change its display according to the fixture selection e With no fixtures selected you just see the colour wheel with saturated colours around the outside and paler colours towards the centre 136 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Colour Picker Figure 6 8 The Colour Picker e When a calibrated fixture is selected a dashed line will be superimposed on the colour wheel This line represents the fixture s gamut or range of colours that it can achieve To select any colour within this range simply click on it The new selection will be marked by a superimposed cross and circle If you select a colour outside the fixture s gamut one marker X indicates the colour that was chosen while a second O indicates the closest colour that the fixture can produce The two markers are joined by a line to indicate they are related e Fixtures that do not have colour mixing ca
341. lt values This is similar to suck except that it will bring all values into the Programmer or editor including those that are at their default values The Touch button is located on the Main Toolbar For example if Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 are in the output with an intensity of 100 e Live Touch brings all the parameters of Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 into the Programmer not just the intensity values as suck would Output E k ti SOW Compact q A sem Values Effects Sources Eann i ee Palettes p v Color 575 Channel Spot 575 Strob Position Colour Mikina Colour 1 Num 4 intensity gt lt A Tvoe Pan R L Cvan Macenta Yelow Hue Saturatio Colour Studio Color 575 wn 4 5 6 Programmer Studio Value Fade Delay Path iz t Offset Length Table NShots Color S75 c 575 h Fade Eda ai Compact KA Palettes Changes _ Strobe Position Colour Mixina l amp intensity neen Tvoe Pan Cvan Maoenta Yellow Studio Color 575 1 100 open 0 0 0 0 100 open 0 0 0 kl 2 3 100 open 0 0 0 i j Bo You can select the parameter types to touch e Live Colour Touch only the colour parameters are touched 242 High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming Output E3 Show na Studio Desk Studio on t j Effects Sour Palettes Vales Elects Sources Color 575 Channel Spot 575 Strobe sit Colour Mixine Colour 1 Num 4 intensity yi S 4 sY WV Cvan Macenta Yellow e Saturatio Colour
342. m10s minute and 10 seconds in and out times 1h10m30s 1h 1 hour 10 minutes and 30 seconds in time and 1 hour out time Use the H M and S buttons that appear when editing a fade or delay time cell to enter the H M and S text into the cell Alternatively you can use an external keyboard Tip If you enter 120 this will be interpreted as 1 minute 20 seconds To have the console interpret it as 120 seconds i e 2 minutes enter 120s To assign paths directly in the spreadsheet of an editor 1 Press the Path button in the top left of the editor window 2 Click in the cell for the desired parameter or click and drag to select a range of cells 3 Press Set 4 Choose a path from the displayed list see Figure 13 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor The In path is applied when the fixture is increasing in intensity during the crossfade and the Out path when the fixture is decreasing in intensity 5 Press OK High End Systems Section 13 Timing In Linear Linear Figure 13 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor The different types of path are explained in Paths p 204 13 3 4 Fanned Timings You can fan timings across multiple fixtures just as you can fan colour or position For example to fan times across 10 fixtures e Fixture 1 Thru 10 Time 5 Thru 14 Enter fans the fade times of Fixtures 1 through 10 between 5 and 14 seconds 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Similarly you can fan delay t
343. mber 1 4 Log the primary console to a show and then connect the secondary console to the same show The two consoles will now mirror each other in terms of chosen master current page and playback state More than One Show on the Network If you want to run more than one show on the same network you need to choose a port number for each show The default port number is 6600 so the second show could be on 6601 the third High End Systems 75 3 3 9 Section 3 Setting Up the System on 6602 and so on You need to assign the port number of each console system and network device according to the show it is used with Connecting to an Existing Network You can connect the console to an existing ethernet network if desired Contact the administrator of the network to obtain the correct network settings Important You should disable the DHCP server of the console before connecting to an existing computer network otherwise it may interfere with the correct operation of the network 3 3 10 Network File Sharing Mapping Network Drives 76 You can connect to drives on a local network or remote computer to transfer show files Only compressed show file backup tar gz or shw files can be transferred with Network File Sharing Network drives are available within the Start window and the Backup window To map a network drive 1 2 Connect a remote computer or network to the HogNet network Click the Browse but
344. me out time A way of displaying values in a grid Hog 40S editor windows use a spreadsheet to display parameter values A console function that will put any values that are on stage in playback from a master for the selected fixtures into your current active editor When you want to connect more than two Hog components together then you need a special piece of equipment to allow them to interconnect called an Ethernet Hub or Ethernet Switch See Also ethernet High End Systems Glossary T TCP IP toolbar touch screens touched value timecode timing tracked value tracking UDP user kind High End Systems A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet Hog 40S uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of computers and will not in terfere with them For show critical situations you should run the Hog system on its own independent network See Also ethernet A long thin window with a series of buttons that generally sits along the top or bottom edge of the screens When in this position a toolbar is said to be docked See Also Soft Key The two LCD screens on the console which display and allow the user to select information from them A parameter value that has been assigned or edited by the user Values which are not touched will remain at their default value See Also default value tracking A
345. mecode eeeeeeeeeeees 313 20 3 3 Triggering Cues from MIDI Timecode ccceeeeeee eens 313 20 3 4 Editing Timecode Values cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenees 314 20 3 5 Simulating MIDI Timecode ccecce 315 Open Sound Control ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 317 21 1 Introduction to OSG wean techie es tee ie a eee Ae 317 21 2 Configuring OSC INpUt 0 0 eee eee etter eae eeneeea een eenaes 317 21 3 Configuring OSC Output sissisota elnie aaa eee 318 21 4 OSC MappingS ccecceeceee cece kine i essa een E EEEa 319 Linear Timecode LTC sssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 323 22 1 LTC Input into Console 0 0 0 0 eee eect eee esc eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 323 22 2 LTC Input into a DMX Processor 8000 ascen 324 22 3 Viewing INCOMING LTC 2 0 eee cee cece eee e eee e eee e eee ee tesa een eenees 325 22 4 Triggering Cues from LIC cceeecceee eee eee ee ee ee neta een een eeeaes 326 22 5 Editing Timecode Values for a Cue ieeeeeeeeeee tees tees een eenees 327 22 6 Simulating WGC eaei inana ea iaa sey cant veae age Moen AKDA EENE 327 High End Systems Lighting Control System 23 MACOS woccccceeccceeeceeeeceeeeceeeeaeeseaeeeaeeeseeeesueeeeageueugeusageueagenen 329 23212 INFO to MACKOS iiri reson inna dadi atoia aeaiiai an eais asensi 329 23 2 Comment MAaCrosS seesssssessssrssrsrersrsresererrrnrnrnannnnerenenernenrenen 329 23 2 1 Entering Comment Macro Commands seen
346. media picker Show hide name shows and hides the name of the content displayed in the media picker Reverse Display Order reversed the order in which the content is displaed in the media picker Search Filter input text to filter the contents of the media picker window Function Tabs fixture functions such as gobo wheels color wheels media indexes etc are grouped into selectable tabs for easy navigation Media Picker ome y D A Luna Blue Figure 10 2 Media Picker Window Options 10 2 172 CITP Preview Thumbnails in the Media Picker The media picker primarily displays preview thumbnails as defined by the fixture library but is also capable of fetching and displaying preview thumbnails for connected CITP enabled fixtures that are on the FixtureNet network In this section we will review which CITP clients are supported by the Hog 40S how to configure the DP8000 for CITP fixture discovery how to associate fixtures to CITP media servers in the patch window and finally how to use the patch window to refresh CITP media previews High End Systems Section 10 Media Picker 10 2 1 Supported CITP Media Server Clients Hog 40S v2 0 0 supports the following CITP Media server clients Arkaos MediaMaster Coolux Pandoras Box software version 4 7 or greater Green Hippo Hippotizer software version 3 2 1 or greater High End Systems Axon software version 2 1 2 or greater High End Systems DL 2 software versi
347. move the item from the master the item will not itself be deleted from the show 18 4 4 Clearing Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from a Page To clear all cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters from the current page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directory window 2 Press Clear Current Page in the Page Directory Note that clearing the current page will remove items from the masters the items themselves will not be deleted from the show Important When you clear the current page any cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters that were previously loaded onto the physical masters will be released and their contents will no longer be output from the console 18 5 Copying and Moving Pages You can copy and move pages 1 Open Page open the Page Directory 2 Make sure that the Guard button is selected otherwise pressing a directory button will activate the page rather than just selecting it 3 Page 1 Copy Page 3 copies Page 1 to Page 3 Similarly using the command line e Page 2 Move Page 4 Enter moves Page 2 to Page 4 Tip The order of the pages in the directory determines which page you get when changing pages using the Next Page key You can copy and move your pages so that they appear in the correct order for your show You can then go through the performance using Next Page rather than select ing from the directory 18 6 Deleting Pages To delete a page High End Systems 295 Section 18
348. n List 11 12 1 Copying Cuelists To make a copy of a cuelist e List 1 Copy List 2 Enter copies Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 If the destination cuelist already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 194 11 12 2 Moving Cuelists To move a cuelist to a new location within the Cuelist Directory e List 1 Move List 2 Enter moves Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 If the destination cuelist already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 194 11 12 3 Insert Merge and Replace When copying or moving a cuelist if the destination location already has a cuelist in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace e Insert creates a new destination cuelist The new cuelist will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge Incorporates the source information into the destination cuelist If the cue numbers are in both cuelists the new parameter values of the cues will re place the old e Replace Overwrites the cuelist information in that destination If you are copying a cuelist all three options are available If you are moving a cuelist only the Insert option is available 194 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Tip If you know that you are about to copy or move a cuelist to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Tool
349. n use direct palettes With direct palettes actual parameter values are placed into cues rather than references See Direct Palettes p 162 Tip Hog 40S can automatically generate a useful set of palettes based on the fixtures in your show see Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically p 116 Directory windows give you quick access to groups palettes scenes cuelists and so on and they all work in essentially the same way Colour Directory 11 C T2 magenta1 red 16 c17 C 18 Cc 19 C 120 C 21 cyan mix magenta yellow mix red mix green mix blue mix mix Figure 2 7 A Typical Directory High End Systems 35 36 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Figure 2 7 A Typical Directory shows a typical directory The main part of the window is filled with large buttons used to access the group palette scene cuelist or page as well as dis playing their names and some other key information Description Display Applies To Ga Palettes D Palettes R Palettes H Palettes L Palettes Cuelists Cuelists Cuelists T Pages R Pages Shows the parameter types recorded in the palette intensity P position C colour B beam E effect T time See Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 160 The palette is a direct palette See Direct Palettes p 162 The palette contains references to other palettes See Reference Palettes p 162 The palette is the Highlight Palette See Cust
350. n your console and press the Software button located at the bottom of the Start window 5 Browse to the USB flash drive and select the file containing the software version to upgrade and press OK 6 Hog 4OS will continue with the upgrade without further interaction Upgrades typically less than 20 seconds unless otherwise noted in the release notes When the console completes the upgrade all upggrade dialogue boxes will close Check the splash screen to ensure the console is indeed running the upgraded software version You may now use the console as normal 28 2 Full Install System Restore You may occasionally need to do a clean install of the Hog 40S on your console Performing a full system restore completely erases and replaces the Hog OS core operating system A full system restore isn t recommended unless you have been having problems with the console it is specified in the release notes or you have been advised by support staff to do a full install Important Before installing new software ensure that your show data is backed up A Full Install will erase all data on the console s hard drive To do a full install system restore High End Systems 389 Section 28 Upgrading Console Software 1 First ensure that your data stored on the hard drive is backed up onto CD or USB flash drive See Backing Up Your Show p 90 2 Download the proper version of your console s full resotre ISO file from the Flyinpig web
351. nated press Next Select a Widget ID number to upgrade from the drop down menu To confirm the selected widget press the Beacon button to flash the LEDs on the widget Step 2 of S Select Widget ID Please select the Widget ID number of the widget you are trying to upgrade No DMX Widgets found gt If the drop down menu displays No DMX Widgets found check your USB connections Press Next to continue to the next step Enter the authorization code for the selected widget and press Next The au thorization code will be delivered with the Hog 3PC Widget Upgrade Kit ll Hog3PC_Widget_Upgrader 21x Step 3 of 5 Enter Authorization Code Enter the authorization code for Widget 2347 kycnnyshwrs If the code is incorrect an error message will be displayed Click OK to close the error and re enter the proper authorization code Codes are unique for each USB DMX Widget and will not function unless they match the expected serial number and Widget ID number The upgrade process will take a few seconds to complete High End Systems Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC High End Systems Hog3PC_Widget_Upgrader Once complete the widget will be fully upgraded You can now select Start Over to upgrade another widget or press Finish or Quit to exit the application In the event of an error a message will be displayed Please contact High End Systems support for further assistance see How to Report Problems
352. ncrements wheel by one real world value when button is pressed descreases wheel value by one when holding pig and pressing button Keys and Button Preferences You can adjust various key timings in the Key Timings pane of the User Preferences window Setting Function Key repeat delay Key repeat period Key double press time When you press a key twice within this time the console in When you hold down a key this is the delay before it starts to repeat When you hold down a key this is the time between repeats terprets this as a double press Note these timings only apply to the physical keys on the console s front panel and not to the on screen buttons High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 9 7 Tip Double pressing a key is often a shortcut way of opening the window associated with the key for example double pressing the Beam key will open the Bean directory window If you prefer not to use the double press shortcuts then assign the double press time to zero to disable it Importing and Exporting Show Preferences You can export the user preference settings as a separate file so that you can later import them into any show that you are working on To export your user preferences 1 Setup gt Preferences open the User Preferences window 2 Click on the Export button and select a location to save the preferences file to To load your preferences into the current show 1
353. nd Systems 233 Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets Kinds Auto Kinds Guard 1 2 7 Intensty Postion C Control a Fixed Kinds 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Strobe Colour Colour 1 T Colour Fx Gobo 1 Gobo 2 Mixing 16 17 20 21 Beam Beam Macro Global Shape Shape 2 Figure 15 1 Fixed Kinds in the Kinds Directory matically change the last function key on the front panel to a next button You can create as many user kinds as you want Tip TIP To quickly edit a user kind simply hold Open and press the user kind s button on the front panel Manually Creating User Kinds To manually create a new user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window 2 Press Record and then press any empty cell in the Kinds Directory window Auto generating User Kinds You can auto generate user kinds for your show by pressing the auto kind button a the top of the kinds directory or fixture schedule window Auto generated user kinds are based on pre defined families of functions established by the Hog 40S For example Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue and Saturation are all part of the colour mixing family as defined in the Hog 40S library model therefore a fixture that features they functions would automatically generate a user kind containing CMY and HS functions Deleting Users Kinds To delete a user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window 2 Press and hold Delete and then press the cell of the kind you wish to delete in
354. nd it will playback onstage as if Go had been pressed on a physical master Holding your finger down on the cuelist s button is the equivalent of holding the master s Choose key and you can then use the central playback controls The cuelist buttons in the directory are coloured to show the cuelist status e Green cuelist is crossfading into a cue e Red cuelist is paused in the middle of a crossfade e Purple cuelist is releasing e Grey cuelist is overridden e Blue cuelist is active on stage and halted e Teal cuelist is active on stage halted and running effects Active w Running FX Cue 1 17 2 2 Using Cuelist Play Controls to Play a Master To run a cuelist virtual master from the cuelist window 1 Open List open the Cuelist Directory window Check that the Guard button is depressed 2 3 Open List 1 open the required cuelist 4 Press the Play Controls button in the Cuelist window The on screen playback controls will appear High End Systems 263 Section 17 Playback Chosen Master List 1 PI L gt a0 lt I Pi ii hiii ae Timing lumber Name The controls are from left to right the Go Halt Back Skip Back Skip Forward and Release buttons These function in the same way as their front panel equivalents see The Main Controls p 253 17 2 3 Running Virtual Masters from the Command Line To run a cuelist on a virtual master from the command line List 1 Enter sends a
355. ne of the User Preferences window Touchscreen Backlight Brightness You can adjust the brightness of each of the console s touchscreen backlights by holding down the Setup key and adjusting the cordinating parameter wheel Trackball and Trackball Ring Preferences The Trackball and it s outer ring have two modes e Pointer Mode The trackball controls the on screen pointer like a mouse on a personal computer while the trackball ring acts as a vertical scroll wheel High End Systems 91 Section 4 Shows e Position Mode The trackball lights up in blue and controls the position pan and tilt of fixtures while the trackball ring controls whichever function is as signed to it in the Trackball tab of the User Preferences window You can switch between the two modes by pressing the top right Trackball key To lock the Trackball to one mode 1 Setup gt Preferences gt Trackball 2 Select Pointer or Position from the drop down menu to lock the Trackball in that mode Select Toggles to restore the ability to change modes with the top right Trackball key 3 Select OK to apply and close Tip Make sure you have an external mouse connected if you lock the Trackball in position mode and you don t want to control the on screen pointer only by pressing the touchscreens Trackball Keys You can configure the function of the four keys surrounding the Trackball according to the current mode pointer or position For example
356. ne will override the value of all the others since there can only be one DMX value In the case of our example assigning a strobe speed will override any intensity value the console will show a in place of the intensity value to indicate that this has happened Interchangeable Fixtures Any fixture already programmed into a show can be replaced by a fixture of a different type at any time and Hog 4OS will as far as possible convert the programmed data to apply to the new fixture type If the new fixture has more limited capabilities than the old one this is handled as gracefully as possible For more on replacing fixtures see Changing the Fixture Type p 115 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 4 Tracking All Hog 4 family consoles are tracking by default which means the Hog 40S records only changed cue data into cues and scenes allowing unchanged data that was recorded in previous cues and scenes to track through until a change is recorded for that particular fixture parameter Below is an example of how a series of cues might be seen by a viewing audience Fixture A B Cc Cue 1 100 50 100 Cue 2 100 25 50 Cue 3 100 79 75 With a non tracking console each value would have to be recorded into each cue as displayed above However with a tracking console such as the Hog 4 the only data that really needs to be recorded is much simpler as shown in the table below Fixture A B C Cue 1 100 50
357. ng assuming all of the programming has unique names 102 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 5 1 Adding Fixtures To add a fixture to a show High End Systems 1 2 Setup Patch opens the Fixture window Press the Fixture Schedule button in the top left hand corner of the Fixture window The Fixture Schedule window will open with a list of fixture per sonalities in the current show file as well as fixtures that are part of the currently chosen Fixture Library The currently chosen fixture library is listed at the bottom of the fixture selec tion window To add fixtures from another library you must first install the library onto your console by openning the file browser and dragging the fixture library archive file from a USB stick or CD into the libraries folder After the library is installed you can select it as your current library in the fixture selec tion window Each fixture is listed under its manufacturer while conventional fixtures such as Desk Channels and Scroller Dimmers are listed under Generic You can filter the list of fixtures to only the fixtures currently scheduled in the show by clicking on the Limit to fixture in use button at the top of the Fixture window Alternatively you can type a fixture name into the Search fixture name field at the top of the window to filter the names of the fixtures to more quickly find the exact fixture type you are looking for 1
358. ng Cuelist Feedback There are several view options selected by buttons at the top of Cuelist window e Play Controls displays alternative play controls at the top of the Cuelist win dow These are useful for running virtual masters see Using Cuelist Play Controls to Play a Master p 263 e View Cue opens the current cue as denoted by an arrow in the wait column in an editor e Follow Cue selecting Follow Cue from the top of the Cuelist window will make the list of cues scroll to keep the current cue in view as the cues are played back e Follow Chosen during playback you may not want to have multiple Cuelist windows open Select Follow Chosen from the top of any Cuelist window so Hog 40S automatically displays the cuelist of the currently chosen master If Follow Chosen is off the same cuelist will always be shown in the window ir respective of the chosen master e View Timecode turn the display of timecode information on or off 17 4 3 The Output Window The Output window displays the output value of all parameters controlled by Hog 40S from all cuelists virtual cuelists scenes the Programmer and other editors and parked parameters It provides an accurate indication of the status of shared parameter values when multiple cuelists are running simultaneously see Figure 17 7 The Output Window To open the Output window e Press and hold the Open key then select Output from the Main Toolbar High End Systems 2
359. ng Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers fixtures will set them to the same visual colour within the limitations of the fixtures but it might send different DMX values to each Furthermore they will maintain that match through a crossfade ensuring even colour fades For colour matching to work the fixtures need to have a colour calibration in the fixture library you can check this in the Fixture window Setup Patch If the fixture has Yes in the Col Cal column then it has a colour calibration Fixtures that are not calibrated will use a standard DMX mapping to determine hue and saturation Different types of fixture have different colours for white because of the different types of lamp used Tungsten lamps have a warmer colour with a higher red and yellow content while arc lamps usually have a cooler light with more blue in it One version of white is not more correct than the other but there needs to be a single agreed white point for all fixtures to match when the Saturation parameter is assigned to 0 Hog 40S allows you to assign the White Point to Tungsten or Arc 1 Setup gt Preferences Misc 2 Choose between Arc and Tungsten In a theatrical environment where tungsten sources are more common tungsten white is likely to be most appropriate base In other environments predominantly using arc sources it will be more convenient to use arc white Important Before assigning the co
360. nnnn 389 28 1 Software Upgrade cece eee cece eect este eae e ene ee anes a eeea eee eeaee 389 28 2 Full Install System Restore ccccccceeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeaeeneeaeenes 389 28 2 1 Creating a Bootable USB Flash Drive on a Windows COM PUL iets eaaa T EASE Eea AT temaded A aT e e A a i 390 High End Systems xi xii 29 30 31 32 33 Lighting Control System 28 2 2 Creating a Bootable USB Flash Drive on a Macintosh COMPULCN icsccsscrebessceves snini ae KENNER AS PEENED AAEE Da 391 28 3 Updating the DMX Processor Software cccessseeeeeeereeenenees 392 28 3 1 DMX Processor 8000 Reset Options ecsccccrcrene 392 Installing Hog 4PC ssssssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 395 29 1 Software Installation eee eee e etree teats nee ea eeea nena eed 395 29 2 Software Removal cece eee cee sete eee e eee eeae een eea een eee 402 29 3 Hardware Installation ccccccee eee eee e eee a teen eeea nese nena tenes 402 29 3 1 Unpacking Hardware Components cccceeeeeeneee ees 402 29 3 2 USB DMX Widgets cccecceeceee nese eeeee ees eeaeeeaeeeaeeees 403 29 3 3 USB WINGS an deiae e aie dees dein 404 29 4 ODELatlon xi secretin idsaseed ete aieiae des dyed eae ee stanaectnst i teenens 405 29 4 1 Using the Hog 4PC Interface ee eeeeeeeee tees eeeeee 405 29 5 Upgrading USB DMX Widgets ceeeeeeeeeee nets tesa eeeaeeaa eed 407 Cheat Sheets
361. ns 432 33 7 AERIS DIER oiire Sirus aA ees ERIE ee i 433 33 7 1 FE KRD SORA E REED Ble eer 433 33 7 2 ZA REICHT DMA REDAS oeiee 433 34 Technical Specifications sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 435 34 1 Hog 4 Console cer tee eee ee ee eee 435 34 1 1 Input and Output Connections eee eee eee 435 34 1 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeee ees 435 34 2 Full Boar 4 Console cccceceeeee cece nese eee eeae een eeeneeen essa essa eed 435 34 2 1 Input and Output Connections eee eee eee 435 34 2 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeeeee es 436 34 3 Road Hog 4 Console ccceeceee cece cette eee e snes eae eeaeeea nena eeaee 436 34 3 1 Input and Output Connections eee eee eee 436 34 3 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeee ees 437 34 4 Nano Hog 4 Console cece eee eee e eee e eee eee nessa essa een eeaaes 437 34 4 1 Input and Output Connections eect eee eee 437 34 4 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeee ees 437 34 5 DMX Processor 8000 ccceceeeeeneee eee eee een eeeeeaeeseeseeneeneeeeaes 437 34 5 1 Input and Output Connections 2 1 0 eee eee 437 34 5 2 Power Weight and Dimensions lessees 438 34 6 Playback WING 4 eee ceceecee ete e eee eee eee eee tesa een iaeoa teen nena eed 438 34 6 1 Input and Output Connections cece eee eee 438 34 6 2 Power Weight an
362. nt High End Systems 345 Section 25 The Fixture Builder is currently allowed Select OK to submit the library information and begin the building process see Building the Fixture p 347 Creating a New Fixture Library Using an Existing Library When you press the Copy From button the Create New Custom Type window will open see Figure 25 2 The Create New Custom Type window Create New Custom Type E Create New Custom Type tellus User Fixture Type 1 Author Sassy Notes wr Create Blank O Create From Existing Name E High End Studio Color 575 Figure 25 2 The Create New Custom Type window Within this window you can define the Model Name Author and enter any Notes The currently loaded fixture library within the show will be displayed Select a manufacture and fixture to copy the existing library to the fixture builder Select OK to submit the library information and begin the building process see Building the Fixture p 347 346 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder 25 1 2 Building the Fixture Once you have added a fixture library from blank or from a copy you will see the DMX channels in the fixture builder Fixture Builder Ea Fixture Builder peh Figure 25 3 The Fixture Builder window Use the fixture s DMX Protocol to edit the cells as needed to build the custom library The various cells and their uses are Type Information Channel e Model Name th
363. nte usted el enchufe correcto seg n el clave siguente e moreno vivo e azul neutral e verde amarillo tierra 2 Desconecte el suministro de energ a antes de prestar servicio de reparaci n 3 Este equipo se adecua a lugares secos solamente no lo exponga a la lluvia o humedad High End Systems 431 Section 33 Safety Information 4 Derive el servicio de reparaci n de este equipo al personal calificado El interior no contiene repuestos que puedan ser reparados por el usuario 5 Equipo de Clase I Este equipo debe conectarse a la tierra 33 5 Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza 33 5 1 Per Prevenire Incendi e Questa apparecchiatura e da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezzione da sovraccarico massima di 20 amperes 33 5 2 Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche 1 Se questa apparecchiatura stata consegnata senza una spina del cavo di ali mentazione collegare la spina appropriata del cavo di alimentazione in base ai seguenti codici e marrone sotto tensione e blu neutro e verde giallo terra 2 Disinnestare la corrente prima di eseguire qualsiasi riparazione 3 Questa apparecchiatura e da usarsi in ambienti secchi Non e da essere esposta ne alla pioggia ne all umidita 4 Per qualsiasi riparazione rivolgersi al personale specializzato L utente non deve riparare nessuna parte dentro l unita 5 Aparecchio di Classe I Questa apparecchiatura deve essere messa a terra 33 6 Vigtig
364. nuously sync and store local copies of show data during programming setting up more than one show server in your network allows for continued show operation should one console fail This is method of redundancy is called fail over See Configuring the Network for Console Failover p 72 High End Systems 71 Section 3 Setting Up the System Running the Console as a Client 3 3 6 72 When the Run Server option in the Settings window of the Start screen is not checked the console will operate only as a client to other show server consoles on the network As a client the console will not keep a local copy of the network show file and as a result will be forced to log off the connected show session if all show servers running on the network are logged off Tip The generic word server is often mentioned when working with a Hog 4OS system There are three types of servers that are at work in a net worked Hog show The DHCP server manages IP address assignments to other consoles nodes and computers on the network through the use of Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP A Show server refers to the server process running on the console which manages show data and distribution The DHCP server and the Show server are independent of one another and do not need to be running on the same console The Boot server process is used by Hog consoles to provide remote software imaging for the DMX Processor 8000 Configuring the Network for Conso
365. o Lists and Scenes The available actions include Go Pause Back and Flash The default action is Go Tip Holding down the PIG key while pressing a command key linked to a lists or scene will release that list or scene High End Systems Section 19 Command Keys 19 4 Command Key Feedback When a command key is executed the function key associated with that command key will provide the following feedback to indicate the running state of the show object linked to the command key For Command Keys linked to Groups Pages amp IPCBE Palettes Blue LED on indicates the object is selected Blue LED off indicates the object is not selected For Command Keys linked to Lists Scenes amp Keystroke Macros Blue LED on indicates the object is onstage Blue LED off indicates the object is not onstage released Fast flashing blue LED indicates the linked object is actively executing cross fading running releasing slow flash blue LED indicates the linked object is paused For Command Keys linked to Views No LED feedback is provided for command keys linked to views as views are simply recalled when executed and do not have a status The commands directory also provides feedback for the running state of the show objects linked to by the command keys High End Systems 301 Section 20 MIDI 20 1 MIDI Show Control MIDI Show Control MSC is supported on every console in the Hog family including Hog 4PC Midi Show contro
366. o swap axes Proportional Patch You can use proportional patching to change the intensity value output by the console to a fixture relative to the intensity value that has been programmed All intensity values for the fixture are reduced in proportion so that with a proportional patch of 80 a programmed intensity of 100 would be output as an intensity of 80 and one of 50 would be output as 40 You can use this to limit the maximum intensity of a fixture so that it never goes above 80 for example by assigning the proportional patch to 80 To assign a fixture s proportional patch 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the Intensity cell for the fixture required 3 Set percentage Enter enter a percentage 4 To return the proportional patch to normal assign the value to 100 You can assign a proportional patch value of above 100 For example if you patch at 200 the intensity value that the console outputs will be twice that programmed A programmed value of 25 will give 50 output and 50 will give 100 Programmed levels above 50 will not regrettably give fixture intensities above 100 Note that if you proportionally patch a fixture its intensity will still be displayed on the console in the range 0 to 100 even though the output value will be varying over the range defined by the proportional patch value Colour Calibration The Fixture window has a column labeled Col Cal which shows whether the fixture has colo
367. o the IP Config screen Set DHCP Off Set the IP Address and Subnet Mask as required OK return to the Console Link Status screen Close return to the Network Configuration screen De PR eS OK return to the Main screen Setting the DMX Processor back to Defaults In the Control Panel screen you can set the DP back to it s factory default settings Main Control PanelSet to Defaults High End Systems 61 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 62 Section 3 Setting Up the System Locking the DMX Processor Front Panel Controls You can use the Lock function to lock the DMX Processor s controls The default PIN is 1234 a new PIN can be assigned from a Hog console via Setup Network on the Setup Toolbar Select the required DMX Processor in the network window and click Settings Change PIN and OK to apply and close the window To lock the DMX Processor locally e Inthe Control Panel select Lock the Enter PIN to Unlock screen will appear To unlock the DMX Processor locally Enter your chosen 4 digit code number and cursor right to confirm The code number will be the default 1234 if you have not changed it to your own You can lock and unlock remotely from a console via the DMX Processor Settings window for each specific DMX Processor 1 Setup Network the Network button can be found on the Setup Toolbar 2 Select the required DMX Processor in the Network window and click Settings to open the DMX Processor
368. o the Programmer i z t t t r Studio Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Color 575 Show Fade pran E Palettes Changes Comet a ie Num 4 Intensity Strobe Position Colour Mixina Colour 1 Colour F Colour Tvoe Pan t Cvan Macenta Yelow Hue Ssturatio Colour Mode Studio Color 575 Edit Or you can use a mask to bring particular parameter type values from specific palettes that are on stage For example to bring the intensity values of Red Palette into the editor Live Red Palette Intensity Suck the intensity values of fixtures on stage assigned to Red Palette are brought into the Programmer Output Show pe Z F n Studio Desk Studio Palettes COPAC Bm Vokes Effects Sources Color575 Channel Spot S75 Strobe Position Colour Mikina Colour 1 Num amp int a Tvoe Pan t Time Cvan Macenta Yelow Hue Saturatio Colour a Studio Color 575 Programmer Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Studio Color 575 a Show Fade m Edt Palettes Changes s v Strobe a Colour Mikina Colour 1 Colour Colour F Num amp intensity Tvoe Ta Cvan Macenta Yelow Hue Saturatio Colour Mode Studio Color 575 E il 4 gt High End Systems 241 Section 16 Advanced Programming 16 2 2 Using Live and Touch Using Live and Touch together touches all parameters that belong to fixtures that are at non zero intensity on stage including parameters at their defau
369. o the center wheel on the front panel of the Hog 4 Console is managed in the Center Wheel pane of the User Preferences window In this window you can assign as many functions as you like to the center wheel by dragging functions from left hand side of the window to the wheel display on the right hand side of the window To delete functions from the center wheel click on the function in the right hand pane of the preferences window to highlight the function in blue and then press the delete key on the console front panel 94 High End Systems Section 4 Shows User Preferences Appearance amp ied in Show WY Search es t1 Sensitivity Sensitivity Function a S Key Timings Colour Mixing gt Colour Temperature o Trackball oe a o Control 33 Center Wheel oe Focus f Programming Framing Frost Default Timing Global iS Default Naming Gobo 1 Gobo PES aa Pi Scene Gobo Shake Gobo Blink Virtual Faders misc import When a fixture selection is made functions assigned to the center wheel will be diplayed on the toolbar located at the bottom of the front panel s center display Functions that you ve assigned to the center wheel wil only be displayed if they are valid for your current fixture selection To cycle the center wheel through the functions press the button to the bottom right of the center wheel The action of the button to the bottom left of the center wheel is determined by t
370. oftware distributed under the Boost Software License Version 1 0 ht tp www boost org LICENSE_1_0 txt Botan This product includes software developed by the Botan Project and its contributors Copyright 1999 2005 The Botan Project All rights reserved Libtar This product includes software developed by the University of Illinois Board of Trustees and Mark D Roth Copyright 1998 2003 University of Illinois Board of Trustees Copyright 1998 2003 Mark D Roth All rights reserved QT The Qt GUI Toolkit is Copyright C 2011 Nokia Corporation and or its subsidiary ies Contact Nokia Corporation qt info nokia com Qt is available under the LGPL version 2 1 GNU Lesser General Public License version 2 1 X11 TM and X Window System TM is a trademark of The XFree86 Project Inc XFree86 is a trademark of The XFree86 Project Inc Xorg Xorg is copyright software provided under licenses that permit modification and redistribution in source and binary form without fee Xorg is copyright by numerous authors and contributors from around the world Licensing information can be found at http www x org Refer to the source code for specific copyright notices 4 High End Systems Declaration of Conformity According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45104 Manufacturer s name High End Systems Distributor s name High End Systems Distributor s address 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA Declares that the product Product Nam
371. ogrammer or editor select the required fixtures and assign their base parameter values These settings will be the underlying state for the effect for example the center position of a fixture doing a circular movement effect 224 High End Systems Section 14 Effects Equally an intensity ripple between 0 100 will need a base value of 50 in order to use the full length of the effect 2 Open Effect the Effects Engine and Effect Directory will open 3 In the Effects Engine select the Table cells for the fixture parameters that you want to apply the effect to 4 Press Set choose the effect table from the menu and press Enter Effects Engine Layer 1 Table Figure 14 2 The Effects Engine Once the effect table is assigned you can modify the effect attributes either by editing the values in the spreadsheet or using the parameter wheels when the Effect key is selected Tip You can quickly edit the attributes of all one parameter type All Intensity All Position All Colour All Beam or for all parameters within the top five rows of the Effects Engine To edit the values in the spreadsheet 1 Select the cells for the parameters that you want to edit and press Set 2 Type a new value and press Enter Or using the parameter wheels 1 Press the Effect key 2 Select the individual parameters that you want to edit in the left hand Function column of the Effects Engine w
372. ointer between screens useful for when external displays are connected to quickly move between screens Set the same as the Set key but closer to the Trackball for quick cell editing 93 Section 4 Shows Close Window closes the active window Toggle KindKeys CmdKeys toggles the function keys between kind mode and command key mode In addition the following fixture and playback functions are available Next sub selects the next fixture in the current selection See Sub Selections p 127 Back sub selects the previous fixture in the current selection See Sub Selections p 127 Select All selects all the fixtures currently in the Programmer See Select All p 126 Flip changes the pan and tilt of a moving head fixture to point at the same position on the stage but from the other end of its movement range See Flip p 131 Fade Changes toggles the state of the Fade Changes button in the active editor See Fade Changes p 246 Next Page advances to the next page in the page directory See Changing Page p 290 Out assigns the current selection s intensity to zero see Intensity p 129 The default settings for the Trackball keys are Trackball Key Pointer Mode Position Mode top left flip flip top right ball mode ball mode bottom left left click next bottom right right click ortho toggle 4 9 4 Center Wheel Preferences The user preference for which fixture functions are assigned t
373. olbar 128 jump toolbar 46 playback bar 269 292 record options toolbar 160 with cuelists 194 with cues 178 with groups 152 with palettes 163 with scenes 199 Record Options Toolbar with effect palettes 230 select toolbar 127 Slot Toolbar 124 status bar 22 view toolbar 27 window control toolbar 25 touch screens backlight off time 53 brightness 53 calibration 52 High End Systems external 54 replacing 425 touched values 177 touching parameter 138 touching parameters with live 242 with pig 139 touchscreen brightness 91 track backwards 183 track forwards 184 185 track through 138 track through loops 280 trackball 120 131 keys 92 modes 91 replacing 426 ring 91 using for pan and tilt 131 which is the current mode 22 tracked value 31 tracking 31 138 147 186 cue only 280 mark cues 188 stopping values tracking forwards 184 185 through loops 219 track through loops 280 tracking backwards 183 trigger forwards only 313 326 trigger macro 280 triggers 212 turning off the console see shutting down type of fixtures 118 U unblock button 187 unblocking 187 undo 47 units real world 30 universe cloning 111 unpatching 114 unpatching 113 by DMX address 114 update key 46 auto update 245 updating 461 fixture types 97 software 389 updating software 389 USB Flash Drive Making A Bootable USB Flash Drive on Win dows 390 391 user interface
374. omising Highlight p 244 The palette is the Lowlight Palette See Customising Highlight p 244 The cuelist is a chase See Using a Cuelist as a Chase p 276 The cuelist has timecode active See MIDI p 303 The cuelist has clock triggers that are enabled See Clock Triggers p 214 The page is the template page See The Template Page p 296 The page has a Restore Activity macro defined See Restoring Activity When Changing Pages p 293 You can rename the selected button with the red border by pressing the Set key You can also hold Set and press any button to rename it At the top of the window there are four buttons common to all directories Switches to a spreadsheet view allowing you to edit attributes of the items in the directory such as their names See Spreadsheets p 39 and Figure 2 8 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet View Reports This allows you to print the contents of the window Td i Configure This allows you to control various aspects of how the directory window displays information Guard When this is depressed pressing the directory s buttons does not activate them Instead it selects the item and inserts it in the command line High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Colour Directory Guard green mix Figure 2 8 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet View Tip You can override the effect of the Guard button by holding down the Pig
375. ommand line For example High End Systems 231 Section 14 Effects Effect 1 Open 14 2 6 Deleting Effect Palettes To delete an effect palette using the commandline 1 Effect 1 Delete deletes Effect Palette 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the Effect Directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the palette to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 14 2 7 Copying and Moving Effect Palettes To make a copy of an effect palette in a new location e Effect 1 Copy Effect 2 Enter copies the contents of Effect Palette 1 to Effect Palette 2 Effect 1 Position 2 Copy Effect 2 Enter copies fixtures that are in Effect Palette 1 and in Position 2 into Effect Palette 2 Similarly to move an effect palette to a new location Effect 1 Move Effect 2 Enter moves the contents of Effect Palette 1 to Effect Palette 2 leaving 1 empty If the destination effect palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 163 232 High End Systems Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets 15 1 Kinds Kinds are collections of fi
376. omponents will automatically detect this and run their Ethernet connections at this slower speed See Also 100 Base T A flavour of Ethernet that supports data rates of up to 100 MBits per second All Hog components support this flavour of Ethernet and comply with all relevant standards so networking equipment designed for 100Base T should be compatible with the Hog See Also 10 Base T Hog 40S separates abstracts the user from the details of how fixtures work For example most values are expressed in real world values such as degrees of rotation rather than DMX values A blocking cue prevents changes made to earlier cues from tracking through to later cues See Also tracking During fanning buddying keeps fixtures in gangs that all take the same parameter value See Also fanning An on screen control operated by clicking with the mouse or trackball or touching the screen In this manual the work key is reserved for hardware buttons on the console s front panel A single rectangle in a spreadsheet containing a value See Also spreadsheet A series of cues that run automatically connected with link and delay attributes See Also cue cuelist Controller Interface Transfer Protocol a protocol used by the Hog 4 OS to supply the media picker with thumbnail previews of content on con nected Media Servers See Also media picker User created single button executers that trigger existing show objects 44
377. on 2 1 2 or greater High End Systems DL 3 software version 2 1 2 or greater High End Systems DLV software version 2 1 1 or greater PRG Mbox Studio amp Mbox Extreme software version 3 6 1 or greater 10 2 2 Configuring DP8000 for CITP Discovery In order for the console to properly discover CITP enabled fixtures on a DP8000 s FixtureNet network the FixtureNet adapter for the DP8000 must be properly configured 1 Open the node settings window for the DP8000 that is connected via FixtureNet to the CITP enable fixtures Select the FixtureNet tab of the node settings window Ensure that the IP address and subnet settings are appropriate for the network environment in which the CITP discovered fixtures are connected This is similar to configuring the FixtureNet adapter for Art Net and sACN output To better ensure connectivity it is recommended that the IP address assigned to the FixtureNet adapter be within in the same sub network as the CITP fix tures it is receving preview thumbnails from 10 2 3 Patching fixtures to CITP discovered fixtures Once a fixture is scheduled into the patch window and patched to a DMX output the fixture can then be patched to a CITP fixture has been discovered on the FixtureNet network of any active DP8000 connected to the console Follow these steps to patch a fixutre to a CITP discovered fixture 1 2 High End Systems Open the patch window Select the fixture s you wish to associate wi
378. on to the right of the port The widget connected to that port will flash its indicator lights for a few seconds 403 Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC Widget Processor Unit A Single Widget 2252 x D D D D 6 D D D 6 D WW v x Cancel Figure 29 1 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window FixtureNet Art Net E1 31 SACN DMX Widgets Timecode Widgets Diagnostics Clin ee a o e E 29 3 3 USB Wings The USB Programming and Playback Wings can be used either with or without the supplied external power supplies If used without the desklight and internal USB hub will not function and LED dimming will be unavailable All other functions will remain unaffected The USB Expansion wing is self powered and requires external power When the internal hub is active with an external power supply connected it operates as a self powered hub It is therefore possible to connect high power USB devices to the internal hub such as the USB DMX Widget or another Wing USB Wings are high power USB devices when used without an external power supply and so should not be connected to bus powered USB hubs unless the external power supply is connected Use the supplied cables to connect any Flying Pig Systems USB devices to your computer Windows should automatically detect and install the new hardware This process may take a few seconds but should not require any input from you If
379. ons Legend 9 2 9 2 1 166 Color Coding Each button within a directory window can be color coded to help distinguish it from the other buttons in the directory To color code a directory button right click on the button in the directory window and choose from a preset palette of 12 colors mix a custom color or choose to have the console auto color code the button based on the dominant mixed color data recorded in the button palette buttons only Preset Custom Auto None Set As Highlight Palette Set As Lowlight Palette Figure 9 3 Right Click Color Coding Menu Coloring the entire button By default each directory window displays color coding using an outline around the directory buttons If you prefer that the console color the entire background of the directory buttons click on nee icon to open the window configuration menu and enable the Color Code Entire Button option The option to color code the entire button is unique for each directory and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view al Figure 9 4 Color Coding Entire Button High End Systems Section 9 Directory Windows 9 3 Button Sizes By default each directory window displays its buttons using a medium size To change the dis played button sizes in any directory window open the window configuration menu by clicking on the a icon located at the top of the directory window Locate the drop down menu option called button siz
380. ootprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel To build the fixture 1 Press the Build Type button to build the fixture library 2 If any errors are found a dialog will explain the error Make any corrections and build again 3 A dialog box will confirm a successful build of a library High End Systems a Functio Feature D e Vorid mx Valu a Re A intensity intensity 0 gt 255 ____ 0 gt 100 Pan Pan 0 gt 65535___ 0 gt 540 Slots locks 0 Slots e5 __ techwedge 0 moil 0 Slots i Slots Jes 100 gt 200 Spin 2012255 100 gt 100rpm Shutter e 20 S a S ae ipwheel 0 Strobe ooo Lamp Control Douss b 30Hz 30H2 dure Control Global Reset 205 eeture Control Shutdown 235 25s Strike Strobe Shutter SS c G o 193 ARE Yelow Gobo id Gobo sid Gobo Gobo Gobo i Gobo id Gobo Gobo Strobe Lamp Control Strobe Strobe Lamp Control Strobe New Dmx Entry el mx Entry Build Type 365 Section 25 The Fixture Builder Hog 4PC Custom type built successfully OK 25 2 5 Step 5 Add the Fixture in the Fixture Schedule 1 Open the Fixture Schedule window and scroll to the User Created manufacturer 2 Select your new fixture and press Set Enter the number of fixtures to be used in the show 3 Press OK and patch the fixtures swap axes and so on as normal Fixture Window Replicate Change Edt Picture Auto A
381. options for that cuelist then you can open the Timecode Toolbar with the View Timecode button in the Cuelist window From left to right the Timecode Toolbar displays the logical name of the timecode source the index number for that source the timecode type the timecode format the timecode clock value and the number of frames generated by the console the number frames the console is configured to auto generate when the incoming timecode source stutters or drops out tre sew 00 00 00 00 Figure 22 1 The Timecode Toolbar 22 4 326 Triggering Cues from LTC Cuelist can be assigned to listen to a single LTC source To select an LTC timecode source for a cuelist 1 Open gt Choose opens the Cuelist window 2 Options Cuelist go to the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window 3 Select LTC timecode source from the drop down list Each source will have a node name and an index 4 Once you have chosen the timecode source ensure that the Enable Timecode button is selected Tip There is an Enable Timecode button in the Cuelist window so you can easily enable and disable timecode during programming and playback without having to open the Playback Options window each time To trigger a cue from timecode 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set From the toolbar select Timecode amp Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and
382. or details on the different timing methods you can use when marking cues How to Mark to a Cue There are several methods to assign a cue to mark e Select the Mark cell of a cue press Set and then Enter If you wish to time mark the cue then first input a time using the keypad and then Enter To re move the mark from a cue select the Mark cell of the cue press Set hit Backspace and then Enter High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Learn View Enable Enable Folow Follow Timing Cue Timecode Clock Cue Chosen Name Mark Comment e Enable the Mark Fade New Cues or Mark Time New Cues option in the Cuelist Options window All new cues will be created with the mark type Note that when Mark Time New Cues is selected all newly recorded cues will get a 2s mark time by default Properties _ use nT _ Pie add effects 0O ls A Chase CT Reset On Release 0o Track Through Loops 0O Cue Only rT Mark Fade New Cues 0O Mark Time New Cues e Eae AS VVrap to beginning of list Baa e Toggle the Mark Fade or Mark Time button in a Cue Editor window of the cue you wish to mark Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Source ss Mark Show Show Fade a Time State Palettes Changes Compact a oeli Colour M Num 4 Intensity ae ustion Colour Mixino Studio Color 575 _ Pan TR Cvan Macenta Yelow Hue Saturatio 11 8 2 Fade Mark verses Time Marks Cues can be marked with either a fade mark or a time
383. or that they need to press the Go key They are also useful to prevent times being recorded into the Wait column when using Learn Timing p 213 Clock Triggers the cue when the specified real world time and date is reached on the Hog 40S built in clock see Clock Triggers p 214 13 4 1 Learn Timing Learn Timing allows you to assign a cue s wait time value by manual executing the cues with the Go key when the learn timing option is selected for the cuelist If a timecode clock assigned to that list is running when learn timing is enabled then the wait value recorded into the wait cell will be a timecode value To use Learn Timing with timecode 1 2 8 Open Choose open the Cuelist window of the required cuelist Options Cuelist Options open the Cuelist pane of the cuelist s Options window Select Enable Timecode and choose a timecode source Close the Options window In the Cuelist window click View Timecode The Timecode Toolbar will open If your timecode source is not currently running click Simulate on the Timecode Toolbar to have the console create a timecode source Controls for the timecode will appear In the Cuelist window select Learn Timing Start the timecode and press the Go key when the timecode reaches the time that you want each cue to go A timecode frame value will appear in the Wait cell for each cue When you have finished deselect Learn Timing Now when you run the timecode the
384. or unavalaible make sure that the run server option is checked in the start screen s settings window If run server is checked but the new show button is still greyed out then it s possible another console is running a show on the same port on the network 4 2 Launch an Existing Show To launch an existing show press the Launch Existing Show button in the start window to launch the last launched show file Alternatively you can press the Browse button to select from existing shows on your console s hard drive a USB flash drive or a CD Show files with a icon are ready to launch existing show files Show files that have a icon are archived show files and will need to be extracted to the hard drive in order to load The unarchiving process is done automatically by the console but will slightly lengthen the amount of time needed to launch the show 4 3 Connect to a Network Show To connect to a show already running on the network look at the connect to show section of the start window If a show is running on the network and on the same port number then it s file name will show up on the button Pressing the button will connect the console to that show If No Show found is displayed on the button then it s possible your network settings may need to be reconfigured in order to connect to a network show First check the following e Make sure your console is set to the same port number as the server console on the network
385. or window for Cue 8 in the cuelist on Master 4 Double Pressing Keys You can also open some windows by double pressing the appropriate key e Position Position opens the Position Directory window Tip If you prefer not to use the double press shortcut to open windows then assign the double press time to zero to disable it see Keys and Button Preferences p 96 24 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Closing Windows Windows can be closed using the window s Close button marked with a cross at the right hand end of its title bar by pressing Open Backspace or with the Close button EJ on the Window Control Toolbar Fronting Resizing and Moving Windows You can open as many windows as you wish but you can only work in one at a time To work in a window make it the frontmost by clicking or pressing the touch screen within it or use the Focus button on the Window Control Toolbar The window s title bar will turn blue to show that the window is frontmost otherwise it is grey Windows and toolbars can be placed any where within the console s internal touch screens or on the optional external displays You can move and resize windows using keys and buttons or by using the mouse or trackball Using Keys and Buttons The Window Control Toolbar sits at the top of the right hand touch screen and provides a quick and easy way to manipulate windows Its functions are also available as keyboard shortcuts
386. ork window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab of the Console Settings window Nw eS a In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select Soft Keys to associate with the MIDI Channel Any incoming MIDI Note information for the specified MIDI channel will use the following mappings for the associated Soft Keys High End Systems 309 Section 20 MIDI Button Lower Right 1 Lower Right 2 Lower Right 3 Lower Right 4 Lower Right 5 Lower Right 6 Lower Right 7 Lower Right 8 Lower Right 9 Lower Right 10 Lower Right 11 Lower Right 12 Note Button Upper Right 1 Upper Right 2 Upper Right 3 Upper Right 4 Upper Right 5 Upper Right 6 Upper Right 7 Upper Right 8 Upper Right 9 Upper Right 10 Upper Right 11 Upper Right 12 Note Button Upper Left 1 Upper Left 2 Upper Left 3 Upper Left 4 Upper Left 5 Upper Left 6 Upper Left 7 Upper Left 8 Upper Left 9 Upper Left 10 Upper Left 11 Upper Left 12 Note 20 2 6 Assigning MIDI Notes to Comment Macros To assign MIDI Note information to comment macros Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab ee Ne o In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select Comment Macros to associate with the MIDI Channel 310 High End Systems Section 20 MIDI Console Settings Enable MIDI Notes In Ch
387. orm an action on the selected fixtures After that subsequent selections start from nothing unless you use or to add or subtract from the previous selection Tip To select all fixtures of a particular type press the Fixture key then Pig Fixture type from the toolbar at the bottom of the right hand touch screen Select All You can select all the fixtures in the Programmer by pressing the ALL key on the front panel of the console or by using the All button on the Select Toolbar For example 1 Studio Colors 1 to 5 are in the Programmer but not selected 2 Main Toolbar gt Select open the Select Toolbar see Figure 6 1 The Select Toolbar 3 All the selection is now Studio Colors 1 to 5 Al hwet Random Even Odd Previous Reverse Shuffe Reorder Cose Figure 6 1 The Select Toolbar Inverting the Selection You can invert the current selection of fixtures so that the fixtures in the editor that were previously not selected become the new selection For example 1 Studio Colors 1 to 5 are in the Programmer 2 Fixture 1 3 5 select Studio Colors 1 3 and 5 Studio Color 575 3 Main Toolbar gt Select open the Select Toolbar see Figure 6 1 The Select Toolbar High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 4 Invert the selection is now Studio Colors 2 and 4 Studio Color 575 6 1 5 Sub Selections You can make sub selections from within the
388. otes right click on any column header in the editor and select Note Patch Notes Patch Notes can be used to attach a comment to a fixture regarding its patching To add a Patch Note 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the fixture s Patch Note cell 3 Set text of note Enter Type in the note text Inverting and Swapping Pan and Tilt Axes Depending on a fixture s orientation in the rig you may want to invert or swap its pan and tilt axes For example inverting the pan can ensure that when moving the Trackball left a fixture rigged facing the operator moves to the operator s left not the fixture s left Similarly if units are rigged facing across the stage rather than facing up or down stage then swapping the axes keeps the Trackball movement and the fixture movement the same This also ensures that fixtures selected in groups all move in the same direction as the Trackball is moved Fixtures that are rigged in other positions for example on the stage floor as opposed to hanging then combinations of swap and invert either pan tilt or both may be required To invert axes 120 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 1 Open Fixture 2 Scroll to the desired fixture and select either its Pan Invert or Tilt Invert cell 3 Press Set and choose Yes to invert the axis To swap axes 1 Open Fixture 2 Scroll to the desired fixture and select its SwpAxes cell 3 Press Set and choose Swap t
389. ou should input into the Hog 40S XXXX XXXX XXXX dark red text separated by commas indicates key or button presses that are sequential XXXX XXXX dark red text followed by indicates a key or button press that is held down while the second key or button is pressed XXXX XXXX XXXX dark red text mixed with arrows indicates a sequence of operations that navigate you through windows and toolbars High End Systems 19 20 Section 1 Getting Started You will also find important or useful information highlighted t Z Caution Information regarding potetial hazards to the equipment or your person nel Important Information regarding items require special attention Tip Information to help you be more productive in your programming High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 1 The Command Line The majority of user input into the Hog 4 Operating System is handled through the command line Keystrokes and button presses accumulate on the Command Line Toolbar where users build executable commands such as recording a cue In some cases command line entries are executed immediately but in most cases you must press Enter to confirm that the command is complete and ready to be executed To remove any unwanted keystrokes from the command line press Backspace once To completely clear the command line double press Backspace 2 1 1 Command Line Syntax The basic order and structure of the Hog 4 OS
390. ow eee 82 3 12 Docking Playback Bars with wings and external displays 83 3 13 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Playback Wing Map PING afin thecesh hae T os ge vuanue A tek ramalssaedibeaeghade iets uadoes d eetastanddaky 84 3 14 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Master Wing map PINGS weecteveeeviaeevensaae eer apaes u e TENENTE EEEIEE ied arene 85 4 1 The Auto Launch WINdOW 1 0 cece eee eee e eee e eee eee ae tenet nee aneeies 88 4 2 The Show Manager WINdOW cceceeeeeee eee e eee e eaten e ene eeneeeaeeaa tenes 89 4 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences WINdOW cseceeeneees 93 4 4 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window 008 98 4 5 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show window ccseeeeeeeeneenes 99 4 6 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show window 0 ssceeeeees 100 4 7 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show window eeee 101 5 1 The Fixture Schedule Window cccceeeeeeee eee e teen teenies nessa eeeaeeaaes 104 5 2 The Fixture Patch Window ccceeeeeeeee eee e tees eee a teen eee aeee nessa nese eenaes 106 5 3 The View by DP view of the Fixture WINdOW ceeeeeeeneee eee nes 108 5 4 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points 0 005 110 5 5 A Fixture with Multiple Patch Points essnee 110 5 6 The Clone Universe WiINdOW cccceeceeeeee eee eee eee ee seen een eea
391. ow Setup Preferences Cuelist Releasing on Another Go When running several cuelists in a show see Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes p 264 you may want a cuelist to release when another cuelist is triggered This effectively gives the cuelist the lowest possible playback priority for more on playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 267 You can set Release on Other Go in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Release on Other Go High End Systems 257 Section 17 Playback Priority _ eras aa i O Persist On Override o Release On Other Go Alternatively you can turn on Release on Other Go for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist 17 1 4 Choosing and Selecting Masters At all times one of the physical masters of the console is chosen When a master is chosen its choose LED will be illuminated the title of the master will be shown on the playback bar with a blue background and the master s name will be announced on the main toolbar The chosen master can be controlled using the play halt back and pause keys in the main playback section of the console The chosen master also directly receives commands from the command line such as record goto and delete when a destination is not otherwise specified There can only be one chosen master at a time To c
392. pabilities do not appear in the Colour Picker If you have several different fixture types selected the lines on the colour picker change to display the range of colours that all of the selected fixtures can achieve shown as a dotted line as well as the range of colours that at least one of the fixtures can achieve shown as a dashed line When you select a colour a single target marker X is displayed connected to a series of O markers one for each fixture type The Colour Picker also displays the gamuts and markers for fixtures that are currently in the editor but not selected These are shown in grey Fixtures that are not color calibrated use a standard HS method and the Colour Picker will appear without any dashed lines The Gel Picker You can use the Gel Picker to select colours matched to traditional gels Clicking on a button in the Gel Picker sets the Hue and Saturation parameters of the selected fixtures to values that match the selected colour as closely as possible You can select colours from the Lee Rosco E Colour Rosco Supergel and GamColor ranges using the buttons in the toolbar at the top of the window You can also select whether to match High End Systems 137 6 3 6 6 3 7 138 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers to the gel as it would appear in a Par 64 or similar conventional tungsten source or in a Source 4 which has a slightly bluer light output The
393. per universe priority will be ignored when per slot priority is enabled e Priority click to the per universe priority for the E1 31 data being sent for that universe of data Valid settings range from 0 to 200 with higher numbers representing higher priority e Per Slot Priority click on the Enable button to enable per slot priorities for the universe Click on the Configure button to set the per slot priority values for individual slots within that universe Valid settings range from 0 to 200 Higher numbers represent higher priority A slot priority of 0 indicates that the slot should be ignored e click these keys to expand or reduce the number of E1 31 configurations for a specific DMX universe High End Systems 81 Section 3 Setting Up the System DMX Processor 8000 Settings Changes Per channei Processor Unt Multicast PAddress Universe Only Priorty Priority DMX gt E B a D o N ON De N ON De N ON De Fixturettet E Art Net 1 31 SACN g DMX Widgets g Timecode Vidgets Diagnostics Pr AE AE E AE AE w COMco MC Mco mcs Ms MGs MGs 4 Figure 3 11 E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor Settings window When E1 31 is configured and fixtures are patched the Net Data LED on the DMX Processor 8000 will illuminate to indicate E1 31 Output 3 5 Adding Playback Wings You can increase the number of physical masters on your console as
394. play the cuelist and scene directories and the Output window Desktop views are managed by the View Toolbar at the top of the left hand touch screen see Figure 2 3 The View Toolbar and the Views Directory see Figure 2 4 The Views Direct ory You can open the Views Directory by holding down the Open key and pressing the View button on the View Toolbar Views Directory a t a Se Da 1 2 3 5 6 7 Palettes Cuelist Kinds Output Programme Commands W hris s Figure 2 4 The Views Directory Tip When you create a new show it automatically contains desktop views for palettes cuelists output and the Programmer Recording a Desktop View To record a desktop view using the View Toolbar High End Systems 27 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 1 Arrange the console s windows as you want them stored in the desktop view 2 Hold down the Record key and press one of the numbered buttons on the View Toolbar Naming a Desktop View To name a desktop view using the View Toolbar 1 Press the Set key together with the appropriate button on the View Toolbar The Quickname window will open 2 Enter a name and click on OK To name a desktop view using the Views Directory 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Select the button for the view you want to name Make sure that the Guard button is depressed otherwise you will activate the view instead of just select ing it 3 Press the Set key Th
395. playback controls give information about the cuelist s status e Go key Green When solidly lit this indicates that a fade is in progress When flashing it indicates that a fade has been paused e Halt Back key Red When solidly lit this indicates that this playback is controlling parameters other than intensity When flashing it indicates that its control of those parameters has been overridden by other playbacks e Flash key Red When solidly lit this indicates that this playback is controlling intensity When flashing it indicates that its control of intensity has been over ridden by other playbacks The Playback Bar Figure 17 5 The Playback Bar The Playback Bar is located at the bottom of the left touchscreen giving feedback for each master see Figure 17 5 The Playback Bar For each master the Playback Bar displays the following information e If the master is empty its number is shown Console masters are numbered 1 to 10 while masters on playback wings are numbered 1 1 to 1 10 for the first wing 2 1 to 2 10 for the second wing and so on The number and name of the cuelist This is shown in blue if the master has been held over after a page change see Options When Changing Page p 290 The name and number will appear in lavender if the master is from a template page see The Template Page p 296 e The current cue and its overall time When the cue is running it is displayed in green text and th
396. ps When recording a group only the active fixture selection is recorded not all the fixtures currently in the editor To record a group 1 Select the desired fixtures in the Programmer or editor Record Group the Group Directory window opens Select the destination location in the Group Directory window Alternatively enter a number on the keypad and press Enter RS If the destination location is already used you will be asked to choose an op tion Insert Merge and Replace p 152 When you record a group the selection order is also saved This controls how fanning and effects are applied to the fixtures in the group and is significant when using the Next and Back buttons see Selection Order p 128 Fanning p 142 and Effects p 221 Tip Hog 40S can automatically generate a useful set of groups based on the fixtures in your show see Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically p 116 7 2 Naming Groups You can give a group a name that will be displayed in the Group Directory window 1 Open Group opens the Group Directory window 2 Select the group to be named 3 Set name Enter type in the name Tip You can name a group cue scene or palette immediately after recording it by pressing the Set key The Quickname window will open and you can enter the name and select OK High End Systems 149 Section 7 Groups 7 3 Using Groups in Programming You use groups in the same way that you would
397. quence so that the last is first and the first is last For example the fixture selection 1 5 becomes 5 1 Shuffle randomises the selection order of the current selection For example the fixture selection 1 5 becomes 3 54 2 14 4 Reorder sorts the selection order to match the User Number order For example the fixture selection 3 5 2 1 4 becomes 1 5 Tip The Reverse Shuffle and Reorder buttons can also be found on the Fanning Toolbar which you can open by pressing and holding the Fan key See Fanning p 142 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 3 Modifying Parameters Once fixtures are selected within an editor you can modify their parameters Hog consoles provide several ways to adjust the different parameter types Command Line Use for intensity and selecting palettes I Wheel Use for intensity Trackball Use for position pan and tilt Use the top right Trackball key to switch the Trackball between controlling the on screen pointer and the position of selected fixtures Parameter Wheels Use for all fixture functions To change the parameter type currently controlled by the parameter wheels select one of the fixed kind keys on the front panel Intensity Position Colour Beam Effect and Time or one of the user kind keys on the front panel For consoles that don t have a dedicated user kind keys on the front panel you may select user kinds using the kinds director
398. r 17 8 Configuring Playback Controls For each cuelist and scene you can configure how the playback controls work For example you can e Assign the master Go key to assert the selected cuelist over 3 seconds e Assign the main Halt Back key to Halt the selected cuelist with the option to Release if already halted e Assign the Fader to be a manual crossfader rather than an intensity fader e Assign the Flash key to only flash to 50 and to Go the cuelist To assign the function of each control together with any associated options 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Options open the Options for the cuelist 3 Under Controls select the Master or Main Controls pane see Figure 17 10 The Master pane of the Cuelist Options window and Figure 17 11 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options window 4 Select the action you want controls to have from the corresponding drop down list together with any options 5 Press OK when you have finished High End Systems 283 284 Section 17 Playback Tip Holding down the PIG key while pressing any one of a master s playback keys will release that playback regard less of the function assigned to that key Chosen Master List 5 Playback Options Master gt 4 is cueist Fy Master d L E Use Fade Time T Trigger Cuelist Macro Master lt Back E Use Fade Time oO Trigger Cuelist Macro Fader fader m Go off zero g R
399. r inserts a new cue numbered 1 5 into the cuelist on the currently chosen master e Record Enter appends the cue to the end of the cuelist attached to the currently chosen master e Record Choose appends the cue to the end of the cuelist of the selected master This allows the current master to remain chosen while recording cues onto other masters Programmer contents after Recording a Cue When you record a cue the values remain in the Programmer but the background colour changes from blue to grey This indicates that the parameter values in the Programmer are no longer touched and so are available for recording to another cuelist but not to the same cuelist You can keep the values in the Programmer to act as the basis for the next cue on the same list but because of tracking only the changed parameter values will be recorded For an overview of tracking see Tracking p 31 High End Systems 177 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 1 3 Insert Merge and Replace When recording copying or moving a cue if the destination location already has a cue recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace Insert creates a new destination cue The new cue will be assigned a free loc ation lower than the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination cue If the same fixtures and parameters are in both cues the new values being merged
400. r 1 Go Master 4 at 50 Master 8 at 25 3 Select Capture Activity from the Page Directory to store the activity as a macro for the page To directly edit a page s macro 1 Page Open open the Page Directory Select to change to the spreadsheet view 3 Select the Macro cell and press the Set key Type in the macro you require and press Enter For details of the macro syntax see Macros p 329 Tip You can display a list of available macro commands on the console by selecting the Macro cell and pressing the Set key To clear the macro 1 Page Open open the Page Directory Deselect HH to change to the button view 3 Right click on the page and select Clear Activity Macros from the contextual menu Similarly you can enable or disable Restore Activity without deleting the macro itself by right clicking on the page and selecting from the contextual menu A R icon will appear as a reminder that Restore Activity is on High End Systems 293 Section 18 Pages 18 4 18 4 1 18 4 2 18 4 3 294 Modifying Pages You can copy or move cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters to a page or remove them as well as clearing the whole page If you change which cuelists scenes or inhibitive masters are assigned to the current page then that assignment will automatically be recorded as part of the page Changes made to cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters such as editing their contents remain with
401. rameters under the LTP rule See HTP and LTP p 31 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 Tip If you want to clear the entire contents of an editor use the Clear key Removing Entire Fixtures from an Editor To remove selected fixtures from an editor known as knocking out press the Knockout button on the Main Toolbar For example Fixture 1 Thru 5 Knockout removes Fixtures to 5 from the editor e Group 2 Knockout removes all fixtures in Group 2 from the editor Removing Kinds from an Editor You can remove specific parameter types from the selected fixtures in an editor using fixed kinds or user kinds keys e Colour Knockout Select the parameter type and press Knockout Removing Individual Parameters from an Editor You can remove individual parameters from the selected fixtures in an editor e Hold Knockout and move the relevant parameter wheel or press the relevant button on the Slot Toolbar e Hold Backspace and move the relevant parameter wheel e Hold Backspace and press the relevant parameter type key this gives single handed operation e You can remove the values from the currently highlighted cells in the Program mer by pressing Pig Backspace 6 6 Separating Parameters When recording a cue scene or palette Hog 40S only records parameters that have been changed or touched since the last cue was recorded See Trac
402. re placing them Hog 40S can be assigned to pile on desktop views so that new windows are opened but ones from the previous view are not closed A Hog accessory that increases the number of physical masters available by 10 See Also master A cue who s number contains a decimal point Point cues are initially given whole numbers but a point cue can be inserted between two whole number cues For example cue 2 5 is a point cue between cues 2 and 3 On a computer network the port number defines a particular type of network traffic In the case of a Hog network each show running on the network has its own port number so that a console can identify and connect to a particular show A window where cue and scene data is created or edited The Programmer takes priority over all commands sent to a fixture elsewhere in the console The adjusted speed at which a recorded cuelists scenes chases and ef fects are played For recorded chases rate is represented in beats per minute For recorded cues scenes scenes and effects rate is represnted in percentage For example a 2s cue will playback in 4s when the cuelist it is part of has a rate of 50 447 448 Rate Wheel remainder dim saturation scene selection order show server slot SMPTE Soft Key soft parameter value split fade spreadsheet suck switch Glossary The wheel on the left hand side of the Hog 4 console and Hog 4PC used for adjusting pla
403. re Data Info Outputs Active The Session and Info fields will contain additional network information The Wholehog DP application can be configured similarly to an actual DMX Processor You can assign Hog network port and the net number for this application The Port field must be as signed to the same port as your Hog console on the network The Number field represents the net number and is similar to the number in the upper right hand corner on a DMX Processor Assign the number to a unique device net number that is not used by any other devices on the Hog network Press Apply after making changes Configuring the Visualiser Universes In the Wholehog DP window on your visualiser computer press the Patch button to open the Patch window Using this window you can connect any of the 24 DMX universes within your visualiser to any DMX Processor and universe from your Hog show For example to assign visualiser universe 3 to respond to the DMX from universe 3 of DMX Processor 2 simply select DP 2 Universe 3 in the 3 row Press OK after completing the patching High End Systems Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity Patch F i Es Der Ureverse er Ureverse ore 050 ore Useverse g X J A f T ak zj J asf z Carcel eh zR J mi J fo J ie k z k e 2 fio of f J mh fr vJiask f Jmk fn yena mh Am Jl mk vy sk fe z ee Universe sa aes Ureverse pre Urevorse 5 on at 3 gt zj
404. re is a button to open the Gel Picker in the Colour Directory window Gel Picker Guard Par64 Source 4 Medium Bastard Surprise Peach 22 2 z mber Dark Amber Carl gt ted Bright Red Medium Figure 6 9 The Gel Picker Note that the Gel Picker colours are not palettes and will not be embedded in programming they are simply shortcuts to the appropriate HS values Gel Picker colours are a closer match when applied to colour calibrated fixtures than non calibrated ones Fine Control Holding the Pig key and moving the encoder wheel allows fine adjustment of the currently selected parameter so that each turn of the wheel will change the parameter value by a smaller amount This is useful for making exact adjustments to values Touching Parameters When you start to record your programming as cues you will find that only the parameters that you have assigned values to are stored these are known as Hard Values This is important be cause in cuelists values track through until they are changed and this allows different playbacks to interact to create a single onstage look For a complete explanation of tracking see Tracking p 31 However you will sometimes want to ensure that a value is stored at its current value in a cue or palette To do this you can Touch it e To touch all parameters of the current selection simply press the Touch key on the Main Toolbar High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixt
405. reater 27 4 386 Troubleshooting 1 10 When launching a visualiser a message saying Error loading lt path gt lxhog3dp dll or hog4 d11 appears The driver can not be located Run the installer again Windows 98 or ME will not run the msi installer Download and install the Windows Installer 2 0 update from Microsoft and run the Hog Connectivity installer again The Wholehog DP window does not open when the visualiser is launched Run the installer again The Wholehog DP window always says Locating Wholehog Network Check the port matches on the settings on the console Check Ethernet connections Check that there is only one DHCP server in your network Reboot the visualiser computer The Wholehog DP window displays Connection Error while trying to connect Check the network settings on both the visualiser computer and the Hog console Reboot the visualiser computer The Wholehog DP window displays Couldn t get file handle while trying to connect Check that another visualiser is not running on the same computer Reboot the visualiser computer The Wholehog DP window displays Loader version is old need x y z while trying to connect You need to update the Connectivity Application Check www flyingpig com for the latest version No visible fixture output in the visualiser Check that the console Grand Master is up Cycle the Blind key to assert the contents of the Programmer WYSIWYG displays Could
406. rent functions and features each with their own unique DMX values or ranges of values DMX Value This field is used to define the exact DMX value or range of values used by the function and feature of the DMX channel Entries in this field can be a single DMX value or a range of values Ranges can be entered with the Thru key on the console keypad For example 0 gt 255 would result in a full range for an 8 bit DMX channel DMX ranges can be inverted if desired for ex ample 255 gt 0 to match the real world range they correspond to If a function is defined as a 16 bit DMX function then DMX values and ranges may be between 0 and 65535 If a DMX value is out of the allowable DMX range the minimum or maximum value will auto matically be used an entry of 0 gt 500 will become 0 gt 255 Real World 348 This field defines the label value or range that is displayed on the console when the function and feature is used The selected function and feature will automatically define the type of value available within this field For example an intensity function will always be displayed as a per High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder centage while pan or tilt will always be displayed in degrees and strobe frequency in hertz Hz You may enter a single value or a range of values 0 gt 260 using the Thru key on the console keypad The Real World range will be mapped directly to the corresponding DMX value range Note that if
407. rew the 3 allen screws that hold the Trackball to the front panel using a 3mm allen key You should now be able to remove the trackball from the console Replace with a new trackball assembly and reassemble your console by per forming this procedure in reverse 427 Section 33 Safety Information 33 1 Safety Warnings 33 1 1 For Continued Protection Against Fire e Only connect this equipment to a branch circuit having a maximum overload protection of 20 A 33 1 2 For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock 1 If this equipment was received without a line cord plug attach the appropriate line cord plug according to the following code e brown live e blue neutral e green yellow earth 2 As the colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not corres pond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows e the core which is coloured green and yellow must be connec ted to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow e the core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black e the core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red 3 Class I equipment This equipment must be earthed 4 Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipm
408. rk and selecting Reset Node Checking a DMX Processor s Status The indicator lights on the front of a DMX Processor 8000 display its status on the network Light On Blinking Off Status Connected to ashow Connecting Not Connected to a show DMX Data DMX Data output 2Hz Keep Alive No DMX sending Net Data Art Net output Art Net configured but Art Net not configured not connected USB USB Device connected USB Device found but not No USB Device found and active configured HogNet Link light for HogNet HogNet activity HogNet not connected connection FixtureNet Link light for fixture Fixture activity Fixture not connected Art Net connection Write Writing flash memory Fast bootloader active Normal activity Slow updating firmware Expanding the DMX Outputs of a DP8000 The DMX Processor 8000 is always processing 16 universes of DMX These universes are available via the eight 5 pin XLR outputs on the front of the unit as well as via Art Net You can expand the XLR outputs to access the full sixteen universes by using external USB Widgets Expanding a DMX Processor 8000 Using an Expander When you connect a USB Expander to a USB port of a DMX Processor 8000 you will need to configure it to outputs 9 16 of the DMX Processor To manually configure Widgets 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DMX Processor 8000 in the list by clicking on its net number and press the Settings button to open the DMX Proces
409. rm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences gt Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 8 5 Copying and Moving Palettes To make a copy of a palette in a new location 1 2 Open Colour open the Colour directory Make sure that the Guard button is pressed so that you do not accidentally apply palettes when trying to select them Select the palette that you want to copy by pressing its button in the directory Press the Copy key Press the button of the location in the directory you want to copy the palette to Or using the command line Colour 2 Copy Colour 3 Enter copies the contents of Colour Palette 2 to Colour Palette 3 Group 5 Colour 2 Copy Colour 3 Enter copies fixtures that are in Colour Palette 2 and Group 5 into Colour Palette 3 Similarly to move a palette to a new location Colour 2 Move Colour 3 Enter moves the contents of Colour Palette 2 to Colour Palette 3 leaving 2 empty If the destination palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 163 Z High End Systems Tip References to palettes refer to the palette not its location in the directory If you move a palette from location 3 to location 4 references to the palette still refer to it in its new location not to another palette you put in location 3
410. ros to occur when using the Back key to go backwards through a cuelist See Configuring Master Controls p 285 High End Systems Section 17 Playback 17 6 17 6 1 17 6 2 17 6 3 Grand Master The Grand Master inhibits the intensities of all fixtures on the console including those within the Programmer Parked intensities are NOT effected by the Grand Master level GM Key Since the Nano Hog 4 and Road Hog 4 consoles do not have a dedicated Grand Master fader it is possible that you can write a cuelist over the grandmaster portion of the playback bar When you do this fader 1 and it s corresponding flash key will no longer act as a control for the Grand Master but rather as a control for the assigned cuelist on that master However you can still access the Grandmaster by holding down the GM key This allows you to access the Grand Master when a normal master on the current page is obscuring it The GM key LED shows the state of the Grand Master e Off Grand Master is at 100 e On Grand Master is at 0 e Slow flashing Grand Master is between 0 and 100 If you use the GM key in conjunction with fader 1 on the console to change the Grand Master level it is possible for the position of the physical fader 1 to be different from the Grand Master s actual stored level If this happens then when the GM key is held down the Grand Master level will be shown on the in blue and the level of the physical fader 1 will be shown as a r
411. rs have values either side of zero for example gobo rotation speed You can invert such parameters so that they have the same value but the other side of zero In the case of gobo rotation this reverses the direction whilst maintaining the current speed To invert a parameter e Press and hold the key and adjust the appropriate parameter wheel 6 3 4 Slotted Parameters Colour and Beam To control slotted colour and beam parameters such as gobo and colour wheels 1 Press the appropriate parameter type key Colour or Beam The Slot Toolbar shows the available parameters see Figure 6 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 2 Click on the required parameter and an additional toolbar will open showing the available slot positions see Figure 6 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 3 Select a slot from the available slot positions Srote Cotoer Gebe Geto 2 Macro Figure 6 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 High End Systems 133 6 3 5 134 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers open yellow Strobe Colour Go 2 Macro Figure 6 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Working with Colour Fixtures that have continuously variable colour mixing create colour in different ways The two main systems are e CMY this system is used by most moving lights that have continuous colour mixing the colour is controlled by three parameters Cyan C Ma
412. rsrnsrrereerseres 49 2 12 3 Ejecting DISKS ccccccceeee ence ana a iaa aa aaia 49 2 12 4 Burning files to CD sssssssssssrsrssrssrrsrrsrssrrrreresresrrerens 49 3 Setting Up the System ccccccseeeeeeeee eee sees eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 51 3 1 Setting Up the Console nnie a r T A i an 51 3 1 1 Starting Up the Console 20 00 ecceeee eee eee tsetse eeeaeeeae 51 3 1 2 Adjusting the Date and Time scenene 52 3 1 3 Calibrating the Touch Screens cceeeeee tees eeee eee eens 52 3 1 4 Adjusting the Screen Brightness ccceceeeeeeeeeeeee nes 53 3 1 5 Changing the LCD Backlight Timeout eee 53 3 1 6 Adding External Monitors ccccceeeeeee cece nese eeeeeeeaeeeae 53 3 1 7 Adding External Touch Screens essnee 54 3 18 Key bOard t ar ey ck ahah ea eet 56 351 9 Trackpad nek ect de ceueo ness TAA e A Aaaa ib tae ne ETa ETE 57 3 1 10 Shutting Down and Restarting the Console 58 High End Systems iii Lighting Control System 3 1 11 Locking the Console for ACCESS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeneenes 58 3 2 DMX Processor 8000 Setup ccceeeeeee eee eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenes 60 3 2 1 Setting the Net NUMbE cece eee sete eeea teen eeeaes 60 3 2 2 Setting the Port NUMbE eect eee e cette eee anes nee 61 3 2 3 Setting IP Addresses for the HogNet Adapter on a DMX Processor 8000 inc ccceecsiesieenstylaeceutetiaons te anne coders ose EED ends 61 3 2 4 Setting t
413. rted cue does not change the original looks due to tracking Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 2 5 100 Cue 3 30 50 Cue 4 40 Hog 40S allows you to record a cue between other cues without destroying existing tracking values To do this record the inserted cue without tracking forwards by deselecting the Forward button on the Record Options Toolbar that appears after pressing the Record key For example 1 Press the Record key 2 Deselect Forward on the Record Options Toolbar 3 Cue2 5 Enter insert Cue 2 5 into the cuelist on the currently chosen master This is sometimes refered to as recording cue only as the changes only affect the recorded cue and do not track into subsequent cues Note that you can only turn tracking forwards off when you insert a new cue into a cuelist or when you merge values into a cue not when adding new cues to the end of a cuelist Important When recording or merging as cue only any parameter values that did not previously exist in a cuelist an Off indication will be placed into the subsequent cue for these parameters This Off indication will release the parameter value back to its previous state as if it were not programmed in the list 11 7 3 Deleting without Tracking Forward When you delete a cue this can have unexpected consequences on later cues in the cuelist if the deleted cue contained parameter values that tracked through to contribute to th
414. s open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab in the Console Settings window In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select a Playback Bar to asso ciate with the MIDI Channel Any incoming MIDI Note information for the specified MIDI channel will use the following mappings for the selected playback bar and its associated functions fel Ge Dect Dect Dect Dest Deel Del Kel Keel Sacro Ro Soxhov P b i 1 BA 8l 20 2 3 Assigning MIDI Notes to Programming Keys To assign MIDI Note information to programming keys 1 On ee eS Connect a MIDI device to a MIDI input on either the console or a USB MIDI input device connected to the console Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab of the Console Settings window In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select a Programming Keys to associate with the MIDI Channel Any incoming MIDI Note information for the specified MIDI channel will use the following mappings for the associated Programming Keys High End Systems 307 Section 20 MIDI 20 2 4 Assigning MIDI Notes to Encoders and Wheels
415. s You can optionally have the hard values from within the referenced palette copied to the destination instead of the palette references 1 Fixture 1 select the fixture you want to copy Copy Deselect the Allow Refs button on the copy toolbar 8 select the fixture to copy to Sd R S Enter copies the parameters of Fixture 1 to Fixture 8 converting any palette references to hard values Tip You can copy a fixture to itself with Allow Refs deselected to convert palette references to hard values High End Systems 141 6 3 9 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Restoring Default Values You can reset parameter values to their default settings by using the point key or Pig keys as a modifier Default values for parameters can be set in the Edit Fixtures window When using the key as a modifier modes such as gobo rotate will be restored to default value but the current mode will remain gobo rotate When using the Pig keys as a modifier modes such as gobo rotate will be restored to default value and default mode index To restore the default value for a single parameter of the current selection e Press and hold the key or Pig keys and turn the appropriate parameter wheel To restore the default values of a parameter kind for the current selection e Press and hold the key or Pig keys and press the appropriate kind key To restore the default values for all parameters of th
416. s Caoa Ga Delete Connect Select All Unbind AutoF ocus Connecton load Close Double click on this device or select it and press Properties The Properties window will open 383 Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity Console Manufacturer Open Protocol Wholehog Ill Network Z Model Wholehog DP8000 Bind Name Wholehog DP8000 Bnd Address Ports Universe Chans Output 1 None Output 2 None Output 3 None Output 4 None Output 5 None Output 6 None Outnut 7 Nanne ad 4 Wh r ok cancet amy 4 Inthe Address field enter the DP number used when patching on the Hog console Click OK to close this window 5 Bind the ports to the universes in your WYSIWYG show consult the WYSI WYG documentation for detailed instructions ID Name Console Port EDMx EDMx patch Not bound Automated PORT B Not bound 6 Once the universes are bound you can connect to the Wholehog DP Repeat the above steps for each DMX Processor used in your Hog show file 384 High End Systems Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity 27 3 3 27 3 4 Additional Steps for WYSIWYG Console Edition When using some versions of Console Edition CE WYSIWYG to connect directly to a Hog system only one universe of visualization is possible at a time If your version of CE is limited to one universe you will need to specify which universe is active within the WYSIWY
417. s and Links p 217 Action of Halt when Halted By default pressing the Halt key when a cue is halted steps the cuelist back a cue in the assigned back time see Cuelist Timing and Rate Settings p 259 You can change this action using the Action of Halt When Halted menu Action Notes None The current cue remains halted Resume The current cue continues to fade Release The cuelist is released see Releasing Masters p 255 Toggle FX Toggles effects between running at 0 BPM and the pro grammed rate Configuring Fader Actions You can configure a master s fader to trigger actions A fader s actions can be configured in the Master pane of the cuelist s Playback Options window e Go Off Zero The cuelist is triggered when the fader is moved from zero as if you had pressed the Go key e Release At Zero The cuelist is released when the fader returns to zero see Releasing Masters p 255 Configuring Flash Button Actions You can configure the level and actions of the Flash key High End Systems 261 Section 17 Playback Setting Default Notes Flash on Flash off On Set to off to prevent accidentally flashing of a cuelist s contents When on pressing the Flash key will output the cuelist s intensities at their programmed values irrespective of the fader po sition Level 100 The proportion of the programmed intensity that a cuelist s contents is flashed to If programmed levels are 60 and th
418. s directory and are also accessable using the 12 function keys on the front panel of the console when the function keys are set to command mode To toggle the function keys between kind mode and command mode hold down Pig and press Enter The mode of the function keys is displayed on the main toolbar KIND CMD To open the command directory hold the open key and press the Commands button on the main toolbar 19 1 Creating Command Keys Command keys are created by using the move syntax of the console to assign existing show objects to empty cells in the commands directory or to blank function keys on the front panel when the console s function keys are set to CMD mode Please note that the original show objects are not actually being moved Here is an example of how to create a command key for cuelist 1 1 List 1 2 Move 3 Press any empty cell in the command directory or press any empty function key on the front panel if the console s function keys are set to command mode Tip When command keys are created they automatically inherit the name and color coding of the show object that they are linked to Changing the name or color coding of a command key will change the name and color coding of the show object it is linked to and vice versa 19 2 Copying Moving and Deleting Command Keys Command keys can be copied moved and deleted using both the commands directory and the function keys on the front panel when the con
419. s into the console 1 High End Systems Connect your OSC controller to a physical network port that is attached to the same local area network as the console s HogNet port Setup Network opens the network window Right click on the console number and select Settings opens the Settings window In the Open Sound Control pane enable OSC In and assign the input port to match the output port of your OSC output device For your convenience the console s IP address is also listed to the right of the port number to assist in configuring the output of your other OSC devices 317 Section 21 Open Sound Control Console Settings Input Port Neem 192 168 0102 MIDI Notes enable _ oscin MIDI Timecode Output Open Sound Control Port BEGGES 0 0 0 0 Diagnostics Enable 0O OSC Out Protocol uoe Pi D x Cancel Figure 21 1 The OSC pane of the Console Settings window 21 3 Configuring OSC Output To send OSC messages from the Console 1 Connect your OSC controller to a physical network port that is attached to the same local area network as the console s HogNet port 2 Setup Network opens the network window 3 Right click on the console number and select Settings opens the Settings window 4 Inthe Open Sound Control pane enable OSC Out and assign the output port to match the input port of your OSC output device You must specify the IP address you wish to output to as well as which protocol you wish to
420. s not present Once selected you will need to enter the IP Address Netmask and Gateway for this device on the network High End Systems 79 3 4 3 3 4 4 80 Section 3 Setting Up the System Configuring Art Net Output Art Net output is configurable using the Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 1 2 Setup Network open the Network window Select the DMX Processor 8000 and press Settings Select the Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window see Figure 3 10 Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings win dow Universe this field denotes which DMX universe to configure Broadcast check this box to enable Broadcasting When enabled all Art Net information will be sent to all nodes UnicastIP when the Broadcast field is not checked enter an IP address of an Art Net node to Unicast the universe s data to Subnet click to select the Art Net subnet 0 15 to transmit this universe s data on By default the subnet will match the Node number of the DMX Pro cessor 8000 Universe click to select the Art Net Universe 0 15 to transmit this universe s data on Changes Only check this box to transmit only changes to Art Net data click these keys to expand or reduce the number of Art Net configurations for a specific DMX universe Configuring E1 31 sACN Output E1 31 Output is configurable using the E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor
421. s the same Caution If the IP address of a Catalyst Media server in the rig changes you will need to perform the patch media task again 175 Section 10 Media Picker Tip Entering an IP address of 0 0 0 0 in the Catalyst tab of the media patch window will disassociate unpatch the selected fixtures from Catalyst media servers and revert the fixture to using the preview thumbnails in the fixture library 10 3 3 Refreshing Catalyst Preview Thumbnails Catalyst media server content may change during the programming of your show For example the video clip file used in the openning scene might have been changed on the Catalyst media server The console is not automatically made aware of these content changes and so it is necessary to request new preview thumbnails from the Catalyst media server Follow these steps to update the previews on the console 1 Open the patch window 2 Select the fixture s you wish to refresh the media 3 Press the refresh media button at the top of the patch window A green and white animated refresh icon will appear at the top right of the media picker window to the right of the search field The media refresh is finished when the icon disappears 10 3 4 Disabling Catalyst Thumbnail Preview Fetching on DP8000 By default Cataylyst thumbnail preview fetching is enabled on all DP8000s in new shows To disable Cataylyst thumbnail preview fetching on a DP8000 1 Open the node settings window for the
422. s time Halt Halts the master stopping any fades that are in progress Select Use Fade Time to use the previous cue s fade time when going backwards instead of the cuelist s Back Time Select Trigger Cuelist Macro to trigger the previous cue s macro when going backwards Back Reverses the currently running crossfade Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own back time for the master overriding the cuelist s back time Restart Goes to the first cue in the cuelist Goto cmdline Goto Skip forward Enters the Goto command into the command line so that you can enter a cue number and press Enter to go to that cue Enter a cue number to go to in the Target Cue cell Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time overriding the cue s time Go instantly to the next cue Skip back Go instantly to the previous cue The Fader Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Fader The fader controls fixture intensities being output by the master Manual cross fader Press Go Off Zero to Go the next cue when the fader is moved above zero Press Release At Zero to release the master when the fader is moved down to zero The fader control cues manually move the fader to the bottom to pick up the next cue then move it up to start the crossfade High End Systems Section 17 Playback The Flash key Function Options and Notes None Disables the control F
423. se the editor without updating you will be asked whether you want to save or discard the changes or cancel the closing of the editor Tip The name of the current editable editor is shown in the Command Line Toolbar By default it is the Programmer The name of the item being edited appears in the title bar of the editor window Modifier Keys The Hog 4 family of consoles all share a common set of useful multi purpose modifier keys that when held down extend the base functionality of other keys and wheels on the front panel similar way to a Shift or Control key works on personal computers There are several modifier keys but the core modifier keys in the Hog 40S are Pig Open Delete Backspace Set Cue and Move r r y Setup Goto S r r Q Fan Open Pig Key Modifier Examples 1 Pig l Wheel Changes wheel to proportional intensity mode 2 Pig Record Pastes information into the selected location Pig Key Commands p 369 has a full list of commands that use the Pig key 2 11 Undo and Redo The Undo button found on the Main Toolbar is similar to the undo command found in computer applications allowing the user to work back through the last commands entered by the user undoing them each time the button is pressed In the Hog 408 the undo key is global working High End Systems 47 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals back through operations in chronological order and you can go back all the way to the point a
424. se the shorthand Fixture 2 33 Enter To patch a fixture at the next available address on the same DMX Processor and universe Fixture 3 Enter Again if you have finished patching click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors 5 2 1 Patching Several Fixtures at Once If you select several fixtures and patch them Hog 40S will allocate them to a continuous range of DMX addresses assigning each fixture s patch address so that it follows on from the last For example to patch 5 Studio Colors starting at DMX address 1 106 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 1 Open Fixture open the Fixture window 2 Fixture 1 Thru 5 Patch 1 Enter You can use the key as an al ternative to the Patch button Studio Colors 1 to 5 will now have the incremental patch addresses of 1 1 1 17 1 33 1 49 and 1 65 Note that the fixtures selected do not have to be from a contiguous range and they can be of different types gZ Tip When you patch a range of fixtures Hog 40S takes the selection order into account so that Fixture 1 Thru 10 1 patches the fixtures starting with Fixture 1 and going up in numerical order while Fixture 10 Thru 1 1 patches the fixtures starting with Fixture 10 and going down in re verse numerical order 5 2 2 Patching Fixtures to Multiple Addresses You can patch one fixture to multiple different DMX addresses
425. separate processes that can start and stop individually Often when the console appears to have crashed or frozen it is only one process that is causing the problem while the rest of the processes are still running normally In particular an editor or the desktop may crash while playback continues normally Before restarting the entire console therefore you should see if the problem can be cured by restarting the individual process 1 Pig Open Backspace open the Launched Processes window see Fig ure 31 1 The Launched Processes window 2 Kill processes that are not responding by right clicking on them and selecting Kill 3 Restart the process by right clicking and selecting Restart An exception is the Editor process which will disappear when killed you can restart it by re opening the Programmer or an editor window 31 3 Console isn t talking to DMX Processors 1 Check that the display on the DMX Processor shows Outputs Active If it does not then see if it is in the process of getting the show data or connecting or crashed if it has crashed restart it by disconnecting the mains power waiting a few moments and reconnecting it 2 Check the network cabling The Link light will be lit on the DMX Processor if the correct connection has been made High End Systems 419 Section 31 Troubleshooting Launched Processes Name State Pid Command Line fpdriver Running 2460 launcher Running 2584
426. sequence where a cuelist is opened and some edit operations are then performed on this cuelist The cuelist is then deleted from the cuelist directory and the macro replayed No cuelist window will open since the cuelist no longer exists so all the subsequent edit operations will occur on whatever window was below it possible altering the contents of unintended items When opening a window it will appear in the position in which it was last used This means that unless the window is open when the macro is recorded there is no guarantee that it will open in the right place with the macro is replayed For example consider recording a macro with a blank set of screens The group window is opened and a couple of buttons are touched then recording is stopped Move the group window to the other touch screen and close it When the macro is replayed the group window will get opened on the other touch screen but all the touch screen presses will still be on the original blank touch screen High End Systems Section 23 Macros It is also possible to speed up a macro so that it runs faster than the console can keep up with This problem tends to manifest itself as key presses being missed out when replaying the macro Increasing the amount of time in the Wait column of the macro will solve this problem The size of the wait required varies depending upon the number of things the desk is trying to do at once and the complexity of the task initiated by
427. sign individual times for several fixtures or fixture para meters you can edit them in the Cue Editor window by clicking on its Fade button see Individual Parameter Timings p 206 13 2 2 Delay Time You can create a delay between the cue being triggered and the fade times beginning to execute by assigning the Delay time 1 List 1 Open open the cuelist High End Systems 203 Section 13 Timing 2 Select the cue s Delay cell and press Set 3 5 Enter enter the delay time As with fade times you can assign separate delay times for the incoming and outgoing parts of the cue for example 3 5 Alternatively you can use the command line pressing the Time key twice to assign the delay time Cue 2 Time Time 5 Enter Tip Note that the Delay time should not be confused with the Wait time see Cue Wait Timing p 212 13 2 3 Paths Paths determine the way parameter values change during a cue For example with the simplest linear path an intensity parameter travels from its start value to its end value at a steady rate for the duration of the cue The paths available are shown in Figure 13 2 Path Types To select a path for a cue 1 List 1 Open open the Cuelist window 2 Select the cue s Path cell and press Set The Crossfade Paths window will open 3 Select the path type required for the incoming and outgoing parts of the cue 4 Press OK Tip The shape of the paths described above applies when the c
428. sing the touch screen the numeric keypad on the front panel or an external keyboard 58 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Locked Enter PIN Code E n n 7 4 Figure 3 6 The Lock Window Requesting Pin By default the lock code for consoles is 1234 To change the lock PIN code for the console open the network window right click on the console you want to change the settings for click on settings and navigate to the security tab Change the PIN code to the desired value and hit apply High End Systems 59 Section 3 Setting Up the System Console Settings Security eT LocalAccess Locked MIDI Sh Control PIN Co MIDI Notes MIDI Timecode Figure 3 7 Security Settings Tab of Console Settings Window If you forget the passcode and are locked out of the console you will need to powercycle the console and relaunch the show in order to regain access to the show Lock pin codes are stored per show and per console 3 2 3 2 1 60 DMX Processor 8000 Setup To begin setting up your DMX Processor 8000 plug in mains power at any voltage between 100 and 240V AC The DMX Processor 8000 s most fundamental settings are available using the built in front panel menu system To navigate through the front panel menu system of the DMX Processor 8000 lt Move the cursor through the options backwards e Select the option currently highlighted by the cursor gt Move the cursor through the options forw
429. sist move the radio transmit ting device further from the console High End Systems Section 31 Troubleshooting 31 6 31 6 1 How to Report Problems to Support When reporting problems with the console known as bugs it is important that the information you provide is as clear and detailed as possible to ensure that the problem can be fixed Please follow the guidelines below Please report bugs to support flyingpig com 24 7 phone support 1 800 890 8989 http forums highend com Reporting Problems with the Console Please include the following information in your bug report 1 The piece of hardware that exhibited the problem including the version number of the software being used 2 The actions taken that induce the problem in the first place including whether the problem is repeatable using the same actions 3 The symptoms of the problem 4 The network configuration of system The type and number of Hog console systems in use e How many DMX Processors and MIDI Timecode Processors e What sort of routers hubs are being used e Other PC s or applications such as Artnet ETCNet Web Servers and so on that are sharing the same network Once a problem has been reported it will often be necessary for the support team at Flying Pig Systems to clarify some of the details and obtain additional information Typically this ends up with a request for a copy of the show so a backup of the show should
430. site 3 Burn the ISO file to a CD as an image file do not burn as a regular data disk For Windows 7 users it is recommended you simply right click on the ISO file and select Burn as Image If you prefer to use a USB flash drive to restore your console please see sections 24 2 1 and 24 2 2 for instructions on how to create a bootable USB flash drive on your Windows or Macintosh computer for console restore 4 Insert CD ROM in the console s drive and close it Alternatively you can insert the USB flash drive you created in step 3 into any one of the console s USB slots 5 Restart the console 6 When the restore menu appears press Enter on the built in keyboard to begin the system restore Note If you used Unetbootin on your Macintosh computer to create the USB flash drive you will not see this step and the restore process will begin automatically Full Boar 4 and Road Hog 4 If do not have an external keyboard plugged into the console you can use the enter key on the front panel for this step by putting the console s front panel into HID mode To put the console front panel into HID mode press the cursor up key while holding down the pig and fan keys The blind key led will flash three times The front panel is now in HID mode Pressing enter on your console s front panel will now continue the full install procedure To return the front panel to normal mode power cycle the console or press the cursor down key while holding down the p
431. sole s function keys are set to command mode To delete a command key Press and hold delete then press a command key on the front panel or in the commands directory To move a command key Press and hold move then press a command key on the front panel or in the commands directory after you release the move key press any empty command key on the front panel or empty cell in the commands directory High End Systems 299 Section 19 Command Keys To copy a command key Press and hold copy then press a command key on the front panel or in the commands directory after you release the copy key press any empty command key on the front panel or empty cell in the commands directory 19 3 300 Changing the Action of a Command Key The action that occurs when a command key is pressed can be configured by viewing the com mands directory in spreadsheet view and editing the Action cell Commands N Name j Action Target Type Target Number ee L FOCTURES OO 7 TT r TECHNOS FULL MMMM Gist Sf TECHNOS GREEN FF Go Scene S Go Pause Back Figure 19 1 Command directory in list view selecting an action Not all command keys have the same action options The list of available actions for a Command Key depends on the capitiblities of the show object that it is linked to For Command Keys linked to Groups Pages Views Keystroke Macros amp IPCBE Palettes The only available action is Select For Command Keys linked t
432. sor Settings window see Figure 3 8 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 3 Select the Widget Outputs pane High End Systems 63 Section 3 Setting Up the System 4 To configure an expander to output ports 9 16 of a DMX Processor 8000 click on a box associated with a port 9 16 and select the expander from the list of serial numbers that appears Repeat for all the universes you want to output via the widget 5 Click OK to confirm the settings The Expander should now have its DMX Data indicator illuminated Expanding a DMX Processor 8000 Using Widgets and Super Widgets When you connect a USB DMX Widget or Super Widget to a USB port of a DMX Processor 8000 you will need to configure it to the next available output of the DMX Processor To manually configure Widgets 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DMX Processor 8000 in the list by clicking on its net number and press the Settings button to open the DMX Processor Settings window see Figure 3 8 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 3 Select the Widget Outputs pane 4 To configure an expander to output ports 9 16 of a DMX Processor 8000 click on a box associated with a port 9 16 and select the widget from the list of serial numbers that appears Super Widget ports will appear with the serial number followed by an output number Repeat for all the universes you want to output via the Widget
433. spacing as before List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber 20 Thru 30 Enter renumber cues 3 through 10 in cuelist 1 starting at 20 finishing at 30 with other cue numbers equally spaced between Note that renumbering does not moves cues within the cuelist if you try to renumber Cue 5 as Cue 3 you will get an error message You should use Move for this purpose see Copying and Moving Cues p 180 High End Systems 181 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Important Using Renumber will affect the number column and numeric entries in the Name column Also renumber will not rewrite macros or links that refer to renumbered cues you will need to update these manually 11 6 182 Editing Cue Contents You can edit the contents of a cue in an editor window see Figure 11 1 The Cue Editor win dow To open the current cue of the chosen master Cue Open e Cue Cue To open a specific cue in a specific cuelist for example Cue 2 of Cuelist 1 1 Open List opens the Cuelist Directory window 2 Open Cuelist 1 opens the Cuelist window for Cuelist 1 3 Open Cue 2 opens the Cue Editor for Cue 2 Alternatively using the command line List 1 Cue 2 Open You can also preview a cue using View Cue in the Cuelist window however you will need to press the Edit button in the Cue Editor window to select this as your current editor in order to make any changes If the cue to be edited is on stage selecting Edit wi
434. stage It doesn t assign parameters that are at their default value or that belong to fixtures with an in tensity value of zero This helps to ensure that you don t have redundant values in the cues that you create which can cause problems later by blocking values that should track through The Suck button is located on the Main Toolbar You need to have fixtures selected before using the Suck command For example if Group 3 contains Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 e Group 3 Suck assigns the fixtures in Group 3 to their current on stage values Output Show o aan A Ol ct s Vi Effect r Palettes COMPS x ales Effects Sources Channel Strobe Position Colour Mixina Num amp intensity O a Tvoe Pan T T Cvan Macenta Yelow Hue Saturatio Colour a Studio Color 575 fios 100 100 100 2 z 4 5 6 Programmer Value Fade Delay Path Sie Rate Offset Length Table NShots Show Fade l Compact y Edt Palettes Changes gt o Position Colour Mixin Colour 1 Num amp Intensty gt be sitio olour Mixina obu Tvoe Pan L Cvan Macents Yelow Hi Saturatio Colour Studio Color 575 1 100 Pey 2 100 P 3 eor a ic Similarly you can apply this to palettes scenes and cues using the Live key to bring in fixtures and their parameter values that are on stage 240 High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming Live Red Palette Suck fixtures on stage assigned to Red Palette are brought int
435. t element of colour notation See Also saturation The I Wheel on the right hand side of the console is used to control fixture intensity The time of the fade up of the incoming cue during a crossfade All fix tures that are increasing in intensity will come up over this time See Also split fade path fade time A master that sets a maximum level on a group of fixtures If the master is at 80 then the fixtures will never come above 80 in the console s output On an Ethernet network each Hog component has an address called an IP address used to identify it You can usually use the default addresses High End Systems Glossary key kinds knockout LTP maintain state mask master master wing media picker High End Systems but if you are connecting to an existing network you may need to specify a different address according to how your network is configured See Also ethernet A physical button on the console s front panel The manual reserves the word button for buttons that appear on screen Kinds are collections of fixture functions organized into wheelsets Kinds are stored in the kinds directory and exist in two different forms fixed kinds and user kinds See Also fixed kind user kind Knocking out is the process of removing fixtures from the Programmer window so that they will not be recorded into cues Latest Takes Precedence In this system of operation the most recent instruction
436. t which you logged on to the console generally this is when you started the console up In cases where multiple consoles are networked together the undo task will only undo actions of the local desk Pressing the Pig button together with the Undo button will redo the last undone action Again if you have gone back through several undos you can redo repeatedly until you get back to the most recent action The undo and redo feature works on your show data but generally not on other things Undo is not available for e Changes to the fixture selection in the Programmer However the selection may change as a side effect of an undo action e Changes to Control Panel settings and other things not directly related to your programmed show e Changes to window positions and views and the like If undo is not available you will always be asked to confirm important changes before they take place 2 12 2 12 1 48 The File Browser You can browse and organize several different kinds of system files in the File Browser pane of the Show Manager window see Figure 4 2 The Show Manager Window On the left is a list of the main console folders and the console s drives Clicking on one of these will display its contents in the right hand list The browser shows the name description and creation date and time of the file as well as the version number of the library used to create the show in parentheses If the show is mar
437. t on mark square square 11 E 12 LE 13 E 14 E 15 CE 16 CE 17 CE 18 CE 19 CE 20 CE off mark chaser fader smooth blue step red step green step blue step redstep green step D D D D D D D D D D 21 CE 22 CE 23 CE 24 CE 25 CE 26 CE 27 CE 28 E 29 E 30 BE blue fade red fade green fade blue red green rainbow iis step iris step iris rainbow rainbow rainbow Figure 14 4 The Effect Directory High End Systems 229 Section 14 Effects To apply an effects palette 1 1Thru5 50 Enter select the required fixtures and assign an intensity value 2 Effect 13 Enter assigns Effect Palette 13 Studio Colors 1 to 5 fade their intensity between 0 and 100 You can also select the effect palette by pressing or clicking on its button in the Effect Directory window 14 2 2 Adjusting Predefined Effects Once you have applied a predefined effects palette to the selected fixtures you can alter the at tributes Rate Size Offset and Length of the effect using the parameter wheels for explanations of the different attributes see Table Effect Attributes p 222 The Wheels Toolbar shows the current parameter value being assigned by each wheel whenever the Effect key is selected see Figure 14 5 The Wheels Toolbar showing Effect Attributes For more on the different effect attributes see Table Effect Attributes p 222 Effects Rate Effects Size Effects Offset Effects Length Spm 60 y 100 Figure 14 5 The Wheels Toolbar s
438. tents of the Programmer or editor but you can choose to record only the currently selected fixtures For example 1 Select the fixtures that you want to record 2 Record 3 Press Selected on the Record Options Toolbar 4 Choose records the selected fixtures as a new cue in the cuelist on the selected master Record Remove Values from Cues You can remove the contents of the Programmer or editor from a previously recorded cue For example you might have made changes to a cue and you want the changes to track through subsequent cues see Tracking p 31 for an explanation of tracking To remove parameter values 1 Ensure that the parameters that you want to remove are in the Programmer The parameter values do not matter only that the parameters have values 2 Record Remove the Remove button is on the Record Options Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen 3 Cue 5 Enter removes the selected parameter values from Cue 5 To remove a whole fixture ensure that all parameters are selected You can do this by selecting the fixture and pressing the Touch button on the Main Toolbar 11 3 Deleting Cues To delete a cue 1 Cue 1 Delete deletes Cue 1 in the currently chosen cuelist 2 Click OK to confirm the delete 1 List 1 Cue 1 Delete deletes cue 1 in cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete High End Systems 179 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Tip If you prefer not to be asked to conf
439. th a CITP fixture in the rig if your show file contains Press the patch media button at the top of the patch window Select the IP address of a discovered CITP fixture from the media patch win dow Press okay You will now see the IP address of the CITP fixture in the patch window listed for the fixtures you selected in step 2 This will now associate 173 Section 10 Media Picker the fixture in your show file with the CITP fixture in the rig as long as the CITP fixture s IP remains the same Caution If the IP address of a discovered CITP fixture in the rig changes you will need to perform the patch media task again Tip Selecting None from the list of CITP discovered fixtures in the media patch window will disassociate unpatch the selected fixtures from CITP discovered fixtures and revert the fixture to using the preview thumbnails for that fixture type as defined in the fixture library 10 2 4 Refreshing CITP preview thumbnails The content stored on CITP discovered fixtures may change during the programming of your show For example the video clip file used in the openning scene might have been changed on the media server The console is not automatically made aware of these content changes and so it is necessary to request new preview thumbnails from the fixture Follow these steps to update the previews on the console 1 Open the patch window 2 Select the fixture s you wish to refresh the media 3 Press t
440. that item and not with the page Copying Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a Page Copying a cuelist to a page creates a new cuelist which is independent of the one it is a copy of Any changes made to this new cuelist will not effect the original cuelist To copy an existing cuelist to a page e List 2 Copy Choose copies cuelist 2 to the selected master You can also copy a cuelist from one master to another 1 Choose press the Choose key of the master with the cuelist you want to copy 2 Copy 3 Choose press the Choose key of the master you want to copy the cuelist to You can copy scenes and inhibitive masters in the same way Moving Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a Page Moving a cuelist to a page does not create a new cuelist so changes made to the cuelist will affect all other uses of that cuelist on other pages To move an existing cuelist to a page List 2 Move Choose moves cuelist 2 to the selected master You can also move a cuelist from one master to another 1 Choose Move press the Choose key of the master with the cuelist you want to move 2 Choose press the Choose key of the master you want to move the cuelist to You can move scenes and inhibitive masters in the same way Removing Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from a Page To remove a cuelist scene or inhibitive master from a page Delete Choose High End Systems Section 18 Pages Note that this will only re
441. the closed shutter ability of the fixture Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub categories Select Strobe as the desired function The window will close and you will see Strobe assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Shutter Select this cell and press Set Choose Rate from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX range for the Linear Strobe according to the DMX protocol 1 gt 127 and press Enter Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in Hertz 0 gt 30hz and press Enter Repeat steps 8 13 for the random strobe ability of the fixture Fixture Control commands from Strobe channel 1 5 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Control on the left column to display a list of Control function sub categories Select Fixture Control as the desired function The window will close and you will see Fixture Control assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Idle Select this cell and press Set Choose Global Reset from the dialog box Sel
442. the Kinds Directory window 234 High End Systems Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets Colour Colour M Kinds I Auto Kinds Guard 1 2 Colour Colour F K 2 Fx Gobo intensity Postion r d r 11 12 n Beam cw Gnu eo r d r 20 Macro Beam Focus Snape 2 tor2 r r r Figure 15 2 User Kinds as displayed in the the Kinds Directory and on the Front Panel amp 5 7 intensity Position Colour Beam Effects Control 8 9 10 11 12 Strobe Colour Colour 1 Colour 2 Colour Fx Mixing Figure 15 3 Auto Kinds Button in the Kinds Directory Copying and Moving Users Kinds To copy a user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window 2 Click on an existing user kind in the Kinds Directory press the Copy key and then click on any empty cell in the Kinds Directory window To move a user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window High End Systems 235 Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets 2 Click on an existing User Kind in the Kinds Directory press Move and then click on any empty cell in the Kinds Directory window 15 2 236 Wheelsets Wheelsets are the building blocks of both fixed kinds and user kinds They specify how fixture funtions assigned within a kind are displayed on the console s main encoder wheels when a fixture selection is made Note The center wheel located below the center touchscreen on the Hog 4 console s front panel is configured separately from t
443. the Loops Toolbar 4 If you have selected Count or Timed enter a count or timed value You can also configure what happens when you press the Go key during a loop see Action of go when Looping p 261 218 High End Systems Section 13 Timing 13 5 3 Tracking Through Loops By default Hog 4OS s feature ensures that when you use links to change the order of cue play back the cues appear on stage as if they had been played back in the order they appear in the cuelist Sometimes however you might want to track through links rather than maintain state For ex ample you are creating a loop where the first time through you want the four fixtures to come on one at a time and throughout the loop you want them to alternate colour between red and blue To do this you might plot Cue Fixture 1 Fixture 2 Fixture 3 Fixture 4 Int Colour Int Colour Int Colour Int Colour 1 50 Red Blue Red Blue 2 J Blue 50 Red Blue Red 3 L Red 4 Blue 50 Red Blue 4 J Blue L Red L Blue 50 Red 5 Link to Cue 1 The idea is that the intensity of the next fixture is brought to 50 in each cue and that these values then track through for the duration of the loop shown by the arrows However because of the Maintain State function when the cuelist loops back to cue 1 Hog 40S will make cue 1 look as it would have if you had run the cuelist in order The result is that fixtures 2 to 4 will go out just as they were the first time round
444. the preceding key presses To stop the playback of a running macro 1 Macro Release 2 Alternatively Pig Macro Running a Keystroke Macro from the Macro Directory Window You can run Keystroke Macros from the Macro Directory window Open Macro OR e Macro Macro To run a Macro make sure that the Guard button in the Macro Directory window is deselected Then press a Macro button in the directory and it will playback During Macro playback the Macro LED will illuminate green and M will appear to the right of the command line The Macro buttons in the directory are colored to show the Macro status e Red the Macro is recording Macro Directory 1 Macro 1 e Green the Macro is running High End Systems 335 Section 23 Macros Macro Directory a v 1 2 3 N Macro 1 Macro 2 acro 3 Running a Keystroke Macro from the Macro Window 1 Open Macro open the Macro Directory Window Check that the Guard button is depressed Open Macro 4 open the required Macro T Press the Play Controls button in the Macro window The on screen playback controls will appear Play Folow Controis Maco S Command Command D Duration The controls are from left to right the Go Pause and Stop buttons During Macro playback the Macro LED will illuminate green and M will appear to the right of the command line When a Macro is paused the Macro key LED will flash green Running Keystroke
445. the show file has the same user number then you must first specify the fixture type as demonstrated below e Fixture Studio Color 575 1 when you press the Fixture key types of available fixtures will appear at the bottom of the right hand touch screen where you can select Studio Color 575 Desk Studio Studio Technobeam Channel Color 575 Spot 575 Iris Hog 40S maintains the type of the last fixture selected If for example Studio Colors are selected then all fixture numbers entered into the command line will refer to Studio Colors until a new fixture type is selected Tip Repeated pressing of the Fixture key will cycle through the available fix ture types Note that throughout this manual the examples generally assume that you have assigned user numbers so that they are unique Selecting Multiple Fixtures You can select more than one fixture using the and Thru keys For example 1 5 Enter selects fixtures 1 and 5 1Thru5 Enter selects fixtures 1 to 5 High End Systems 125 6 1 3 6 1 4 126 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 1Thru5 4 selects fixtures to 5 but not 4 1Thru5 7 selects 1 to 5 and also 7 5ThruEnter selects from fixture 5 of the current type through to the last fixture of the current type ThruEnter selects all fixtures of the current type Note that selections are cumulative building the total selection until the selection is used to perf
446. the top right corner of the browse window Pressing this button will un map and disconnect the network drive High End Systems 77 Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 4 3 4 1 78 Art Net and E1 31 sACN Art Net and E1 31 also known as streaming ACN are two communication protocols supported by the Hog 40S that allow for DMX512 data to be sent over Ethernet While each protocol is unique in terms of specification and implementation they both provide the ability to carry many DMxX universes over a single cat 5 Ethernet cable This section of the manual will help you to understand how to properly configure your console or Hog 4PC to output Art Net and E1 31 Platform Art Net sACN Output Capabil ity Hog 4 Console 16 unique universes adding DMX Processors to HogNet network in creases output capability DMX Processor 8000 16 unique universes Hog 4PC matches output capability of physically connected USB DMX widgets 8 universe maximum Identifying the FixtureNet Port The FixtureNet port is the ethernet port Hog 40S uses to send Art Net and or E1 31 data to fix tures media servers and DMX converters that are capable of receiving these protocols over ethernet The FixtureNet port is located on the rear panel of the Hog 4 Console as well as on the rear panel of the DMX Processor 8000 Depending on the age of your DMX Procressor 8000 the port will either be labeled FixtureNet or Fixture Link When using Hog
447. then wish the chase to step at half or double speed For more on Tap Sync see Adjusting Chase Rate with Tap Sync p 279 e Direction four directions are available Up stepping up through cue numbers Down stepping down through cue numbers Random stepping randomly through cue numbers and Bounce stepping up then down through cue numbers High End Systems 277 278 Chosen Master Disco Chase Playback Options Prorty a DA Override O R Release On Othe ve SS C sone oe E sn O oo aa 100 Cuelist Effect Rate Chase Rate stade Step length Direction f Reset to Defauts 120bpen 100 1 beat Up Section 17 Playback Properties DG vse NO is Achase oO Pile add Effects g Reset On Release El Track Through Loops g k y oO Mark Fade New Cues go Mark Time New Cues DEISE Vrap to beginning of kst Action of Go when GPE Go next Action of Hal when hated ooe Loop Behaviour ee onus after a Release On Stop You can also configure the following loop types in the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window High End Systems Section 17 Playback Chosen Master Disco Chase Playback Options Properties Playback Priorty V aa a A C Pie asd ettects g P Persist On Override T R Release On Other Go qo is A Chase T Reset On Release Timing Lal Track Through Loops g Cue Only uo m GD C Release Time Oo ia once es I EE C MarkFace new cues C mark Time new cues Act
448. this is the case you may ignore the follow ing section on troubleshooting 404 High End Systems Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC 29 4 Operation 29 4 1 Using the Hog 4PC Interface Hog 4PC Windows When Hog 4PC opens the Start window will be displayed along with the splash screen Once a show file is loaded or opened the two Hog 4PC default screens will be displayed The Front Panel Interface The front panel of Hog 4PC looks and behaves very similarly to the front panel of the Hog 4 console Click on buttons to simulate pressing keys on the console You can also click and drag to alter the various encoders or faders In addition when you right click on the trackball it will illuminate blue allowing you to then left click and drag on the trackball to adjust the pan and tilt of the selected fixtures To hold down a single key and make another selection simply press and hold Shift on your computer keyboard when you click the key As long as you are holding shift this key and sub sequent keys will remain held down You can then click on another key button cell or encoder to access further functions High End Systems 405 Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC Right Click Menu orkspaces Default Positions Lock Front Panel Position Toggle Front Panel Show All Minimize Minimize All Maximize Quit When right clicking in most portions of the Hog 4PC application the following options are dis played
449. thor Michael Date Modified 04 04 2012 15 32 25 Notes This fixture is modelled after the tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 New Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry Build Type 344 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder Creating a New Fixture Library From Scratch When you press the Create New button the Create New Custom Type window will open see Figure 25 1 The Create New Custom Type window Create New Custom Type tee elu User Fixture Type 4 Author Notes O Create Blank wr Create From Existing Channel Count 4 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Add patchpoint channel Reset Patchpoints Ok x Cancel Figure 25 1 The Create New Custom Type window Within this window you can define the Model Name Author and enter any Notes You can also choose to create blank or create from existing from within this window In the Channel Count cell enter the total number of DMX channels used by the fixture In the Add Patchpoint Channel cell enter a DMX channel number to define a new patchpoint A patchpoint is used to create fixtures with dual DMX addressing capabilities similar to a scroller dimmer fixture type When the fixture is later patched in the patch window you will be able to patch this fixture at two discrete DMX addresses as you have defined the starting point for each within this window the 1st channel is automatically defined as the first patch point Only 1 additional patch poi
450. through 10 of the cuelist on the currently chosen master e List 1 Cue 3 Group 10 Colour Unblock Enter unblock only the colour parameters of fixtures in Group 3 in cue 3 of cuelist 1 To unblock complete cuelists List 1 Unblock Enter Or on a master Unblock Choose Tip Unblocking obeys the linked parameter preferences assigned in Setup Preferences gt Programming For example if position parameters are not separated and Pan is blocking but Tilt is not Pan will not be unblocked For more on linked functions see Separating Parameters p 147 Important Unblocking will remove parameter values from blocking cues so any fu ture changes to subsequent cues will be tracked through the whole cuelist 11 8 11 8 1 188 Mark Cues Move in Black A Mark cue is a special designator for a cue that looks at the previous cue and any fixtures with an intensity of zero after completion of the cue If a fixture meets these requirements the mark cue allows the fixture s to preset for the next cue by executing the crossfade for all parameters except intensity This allows the fixture s to move in black as they change to their new para meter values When the next cue is later executed only the intensity parameter changes as all other parameters will already be at their new values due to the mark The timing used to mark a cue is determined by the mark method you choose See Fade Mark verses Time Marks p 189 f
451. to Support p 421 E Hog3PC_Widget_Upgrader 409 Section 30 Cheat Sheets 30 1 Keyboard Shortcuts You can use an external keyboard to operate many of the Hog 4OS s functions This is especially useful if you are using Hog 4PC You can toggle keyboard shortcuts on and off using the Pause or Break key on the computer keyboard When shortcuts are enabled known as map mode the computer keyboard is mapped to the shortcuts when disabled text entry via the computer keyboard is possible The current status is shown in the Command Line Toolbar see Figure 30 1 Keyboard Status in the Command Line Toolbar Whenever possible Hog 408S intelligently disables the keyboard shortcuts when text entry is expected after pressing Set or double clicking in a cell When the text entry session is completed the shortcuts are automatically re enabled By default shortcuts are disabled when you start a show When shortcuts are disabled only the shortcut mapped to the Set key remains functional to allow quick labeling from the external keyboard AbcF age 1 Programmer Master 10 O 9 08 AM MAP F age 1 Programmer Master 10 O 9 09 AM Figure 30 1 Keyboard Status in the Command Line Toolbar The following table show how keys map to Hog 40S functions when using a US keyboard High End Systems 411 Section 30 Cheat Sheets Function Keystroke Function Keystroke Toggle Shortcuts Pause or Break Main GO or or Space Pig CTR
452. to the command is complete and ready to be executed High End Systems 21 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Abc Page 1 Programmer Master 4 Figure 2 1 The Command Line Source Mask Command Options Destina Comments tion Record Position 1 Records a position palette to location 1 in the posi tion palette directory No source is given so the content of the current ed itor is assumed Record Replace Position 1 The Replace option on the Record Options Tool bar ensures that the new palette replaces the previ ously recorded palette Position1 Copy Position 2 The Copy command takes the Position 1 palette as its source Position 1 Move Replace Position 2 This example combines using a source and a re cord option Group 2 Record Position 3 Here Group 2 acts asa mask for the record com mand so that only fix tures in Group 2 are recor ded into the Position 3 palette Cue 1 Group 3 Copy Position Cue 5 Here the parameter val ues of fixtures in Group 3 are copied from Cue 1 to Cue 5 The Position option applied to the copy com mand means that only position parameters are included Tip The text of the command line turns red if your syntax is not valid 2 1 2 The Status Bar To the right of the command line is the Status Bar Abc Page 1 Programmer Master 10 0 3 42 PM Figure 2 2 The Status Bar 22 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals The Status Bar gives you basi
453. ton in the Start or Backup window Click on the Map Network Drive button Enter data for the following fields in the Connect to Network Disk window e Server name the host name or IP address of the remote computer Share name the name of the shared directory on the remote computer Username the user name to access the shared directory on the remote computer if required Password the password to access the shared directory on the remote computer if required Domain if the user account is a member of a windows do main enter that domain name here otherwise leave this field blank High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Connect To Network Disk Server name Share name Username Note that depending upon your network drive configuration not all fields may be required 5 Check the box if you want the connection to be saved with the console If this option is not selected then this mapping will be lost when the console is re booted or power cycled 6 Check the box to save the password if you wish to have the password for the drive mapping saved with the above option Accessing Network Drives Once a network drive is mapped it will appear in the Start and Backup windows under the console heading as a valid drive to browse to Sub folders of the primary networked drive will also be available Disconnecting Network Drives When browsing a network drive the Eject button is available in
454. top of the Fixture window 2 Press the Add button below the list of DP800s The Add DP window will open 108 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Add DP Net Number 3 Assign a net number 4 OK close the Add DP window 5 OK close the Fixture Patch window To remove a DP8000 from a show file 1 Setup Patch Patch open the Fixture Patch window The Patch button is on the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window 2 Select the DP8000 you wish to remove from the show file 3 Press the Remove button below the list of DP800s A confirmation dialog will open Press OK to unpatch and remove the DP8000 5 2 5 Fixtures with Multiple Patch Points Some fixture types consist of several separate elements that work together each with their own DMX address An example is a parcan with a scroller which operationally you want to treat as a single fixture a light that can change brightness and colour but that physically consists of a dimmer controlled lamp and a colour scroller Similarly some moving fixtures such as the Vari Lite VL5 consist of the moving head with its own control electronics fed by an external dimmer See Figure 5 4 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points With such fixtures there are two or more DMX start addresses which may not be numerically adjacent and indeed may be on different universes and DP800s Hog 40S handles this by giving thes
455. traction layer See parameter 443 444 gamut gobo graphical user inter face group GUI hard value HTP hue I Wheel in time inhibitive submaster IP address Glossary The range of colours that a fixture is capable of producing Each fixture type has its own gamut Image placed within the optical system of the fixture projected onto lit object Also known as a pattern A way of displaying information and allowing the user to work with it in a visual form Most personal computers use a GUI with windows buttons and a pointer See Also command keys pre recorded fixture selections complete with selection order information stored in the group directory Groups allow the quick selection of multiple fixtures and like ordinary fixture selections can be combined and ma nipulated in a variety of ways See graphical user interface The output of a master running a cuelist is a mix of hard and soft paramet er values Hard values are those that are in the current cue while soft values are those that have tracked through from previous cues See Also tracking Highest Takes Precedence In this system of operation the highest value assigned for a parameter is the one that applies A fixture can be in cues on two masters and the highest level of the two will be the one seen HTP is only relevant to intensity parameters where the idea of highest has meaning See Also LTP The colour pigmen
456. trol many of the console s func tions as well as entering numbers and text see Keyboard Shortcuts p 411 Using the On screen Keyboard You can use the on screen keyboard to enter text when an external keyboard is not present see Figure 3 3 The On screen Keyboard When prompted to insert text press the Set key to launch a touch screen keyboard You can use the Pig key as a shift for uppercase characters Press the Enter key when you have finished typing To close the on screen keyboard without making any changes press Set instead of Enter Backspace Caps Lock Shift Esc Figure 3 3 The On screen Keyboard 3 1 9 Trackball Using an External Trackball External USB trackballs can be connected to the console via the console s USB ports Most ex ternal USB trackballs are supported only as an external mouse with left and right click capabilities however a select set of trackballs listed below are fully supported as functional Hog 4 OS trackballs support for all four trackball buttons and support for the use of the trackball in both pointer and POS mode Kensington Expert Mouse Model K64325 Kensington Orbit Wireless Mobile Trackball Model K72352US note does not have top left and top right buttons Kensington SlimBlade Trackball Model K72327US High End Systems 57 Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 1 10 Shutting Down and Restarting the Console To properly shut down or restart the desk sel
457. ture 5 an intensity of 10 6 4 4 Fanning Options By default fanning adjusts parameter values proportionally from the centre of the fixture selection You can have fanning work in other ways Fan Normal As described above the middle fixture remains unchanged while the first and last fixtures values change the most in opposite directions For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 10 20 30 40 50 e Fan From Start The first fixture in the selection order remains unchanged while the last one s value changes the most For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 30 40 50 60 70 e Fan From End The last fixture in the selection order remains unchanged while the first one s value changes the most For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 70 60 50 40 30 e Fan To Centre the middle fixture remains unchanged while the first and last fixtures values change the most in the same direction For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 50 40 30 40 50 You can set the fanning mode from the Fanning Toolbar e Press and hold the Fan key to display the Fanning Toolbar see Figure 6 10 The Fanning Toolbar All subsequent fans will follow the currently selected fanning mode until the editor is cleared Centre Reverse Reorder Figure 6 10 The Fanning Toolbar 144 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fi
458. ture libraries e You can merge custom libraries from one show to another using the Merge Show function e You can use the Edit Fixtures window to adjust default values and further cus tomize user created libraries e You can replicate and replace to and from user created fixtures e You should send a show containing your custom made fixtures to support fly ingpig com so they may be added to future built in libraries 350 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder 25 2 Fixture Builder Tutorial This tutorial takes you through the process of building a custom fixture library for a fictitious fixture Follow the steps to create a custom fixture library Fictitious 575 Protocol Ch Purpose Value Description 1 Intensity 0 to 255 0 is out 255 is full 2 Pan Coarse 0 to 255 540 degree pan 3 Pan Fine 0 to 255 4 Tilt Coarse 0 to 255 270 degree tilt 5 Tilt Fine 0 to 255 6 Cyan 0 to 255 0 is full 255 is out 7 Magenta 0 to 255 0 is full 255 is out 8 Yellow 0 to 255 0 is full 255 is out 9 Gobo 0 Open 20 30 Gobo 1 breakup 31 40 Gobo 2 bubbles 41 50 Gobo 3 cone 51 60 Gobo 4 radial 100 150 Gobo wheel spin fwd slow to fast 151 200 Gobo wheel spin rev slow to fast 201 255 Random gobo slow to fast 10 Shutter 0 Closed 1 127 Linear Strobe slow to fast 128 200 Random Strobe fast to slow 201 210 Reset Fixture 221 230 Strike Lamp 231 240 Shutdown fixture 241 250 Douse Lamp 255 Open 25 2 1 Step 1 Create the
459. tures 2 Colour Time 4 Enter assigns the fade time of the colour parameters to 4 seconds To assign a delay time press the Time key twice 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixtures 2 Time Time 2 Enter pressing Time twice assigns the delay time To assign a path press the Time key three times 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixtures 2 Time Time Time 2 Enter enter a number to represent the path Select the path by entering a number the mapping is the same as the order they appear on the path toolbar starting at zero for the default path 13 3 3 Assign Parameter Timings in an Editor To assign fade or delay times directly in the spreadsheet of an editor 1 View the required timing type by pressing either the Fade or Delay button in the top left of the editor window 2 Click in the cell for the desired parameter or click and drag to select a range of cells 3 Press Set 4 Type ina time value and press Enter When entering a time value it should be in the form hours h minutes m seconds s hours h minutes m seconds s For example High End Systems 209 210 Section 13 Timing List 2 Cue 1 Rete Show Palettes Changes Num amp ntensty Studie Spot 575 Studio Color 575 1 15s 10s 4 Figure 13 8 The Cue Editor window with Fade selected 2s 2 seconds in and out times 2s 5s 2 seconds in 5 seconds out 1m minute in and out times 1
460. u can choose which fixed kinds and or user kind functions you want to start off with in the mask by listing them on the command line before the Record command e Colour Position Record Colour 3 Enter records the colour and position parameters of the Programmer or editor contents into Colour Palette 3 Recording Only Selected Fixtures By default all fixtures currently in the Programmer or editor are recorded To record only selected fixtures 1 Fixture 2 select the fixture s you want to record in the palette Record On the Record Options Toolbar press Selected S Position Enter records only the position values for fixture 2 into the next available position palette rather than values for all fixtures in the Programmer 8 6 3 Palette Timing Beginning with software v2 0 0 Parameter timings are included by default when recording a palette To exclude timing when recording palettes deselected the Time kind in the kind masking menu after pressing record see Masking Using the Record Options Toolbar p 160 You can also record palettes that contain only timing information no function values by only masking in Time when recording the palette For example to record a time only colour palette with a fade time of 6 seconds 1 Assign any values to the fixture functions you want to create a timing palette for High End Systems 161 8 6 4 8 6 5 162 Section 8 Palettes 2 Assign a fade time to the fixture fun
461. ue Opens the Launched Processes window Opens the Colour Picker rather than the Colour Directory Unparks selected fixtures rather than parking them Pastes into the currently selected cells Releases all masters Toggles the worklight on and off Road Hog 4 only Cycles through the possible window sizes in the reverse order Un touches specified parameters and fixtures rather than touching them Redoes the last undone action High End Systems Section 26 Pig Key Commands Pig with Keys and Buttons Pig with the arrow keys Pig when pressing a button in a dir ectory Pig when entering text with the on screen keyboard Pig with the I Wheel Pig with parameter wheels Pig when dragging files in the File Browser pane of the Show Manager window Extends the selected cells or directory items in spreadsheets and directories Overrides the effect of the Guard button Acts as a shift key to type upper case charac ters Intensities are increased or decreased in propor tion to their individual level rather than all in tensities changing by the same amount For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 11 and 2 will move to 55 Moving the parameter wheel with Pig allows fine adjustment of the parameter so that each turn of the wheel will change the parameter value by a smaller amount making exact adjustments easier Copies the
462. ue is asserted When it is released the path is effectively reversed For example attrib utes with a Start path will snap on the Go of a cue but will snap at the very end of that cue being released behaving like an End path 13 2 4 Assigning Cue Timings in the Cuelist Window You can edit fade or delay times in the Cuelist window Assigning fade or delay times here will assign the new value to all the parameters of all the fixtures in the cue 1 Open Choose open the cuelist of the desired master 2 Click in the cell for the fade or delay time of the desired cue and press Set 3 Type in a time value and press Enter When entering a time value it should be in the form hours h minutes m seconds s hours h minutes m seconds s 204 High End Systems Section 13 Timing Path Description Linea Start End Over Default r Under Damped Brake Speed Up Shake Uses the default path from the fixture s library definition This is generally Linear for continuous parameters and Start for slotted parameters Fades at a steady rate for the duration of the cue Snap change at the beginning of the cue Snap change at the end of the cue The parameters overshoot their destination and then return to it The parameters move first in the opposite direction before going to their destination The parameters change more slowly at the start and end of the cue than in th
463. ues 0O Mark Time New Cues Alternatively you can turn on Use HTP for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Important If you have an HTP master with the fader up i e intensities above zero then using Release or Pig Release has no effect on the intensity para meters To release the intensities of HTP masters bring the fader to zero For more on releasing cuelists see Releasing Masters p 255 High End Systems 265 17 3 2 Section 17 Playback Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others When you have several cuelists active at the same time control of fixture parameters programmed into one cuelist may be taken by another cuelist that also has programming for that fixture para meter For example if Cuelist 1 has programming for desk channels 1 3 and Cuelist 2 has pro gramming for desk channels 3 6 then running a cue in Cuelist 2 will override the intensity parameter of desk channel 3 You may want to return control of desk channel 3 to Cuelist 1 without having to run a cue in Cuelist 1 this is known as asserting Cuelist 1 Asserting a cuelist forces all fixture parameters to their programmed value in the cuelist To assert parameters on the cuelist attached to Master 3 for example press and hold the Choose key for Master 3 and press the Assert key The Assert Time 266 When you assert a cuelist the parameters that have been asserted change to the
464. umber that you use to select a particular fixture when programming By default Hog 40S gives each fixture type its own range of user numbers so that there might be several fixtures numbered 1 of different types If this is the case the fixture number has an asterisk next to it in the Fixture window Fixture Window pi Patch Unpatch Apply Patch R le Fix Num a Note Dfa Pat a Desk Channel 1 2 To change the User Number 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the fixture s Num cell short for User Number 3 Set new number Enter To change several User Numbers at once 1 Open Fixture 2 Select arange of User Number cells by pressing or clicking and then dragging High End Systems 119 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 3 Set new number Enter allocates a range of User Numbers starting with the number that you enter Tip You can renumber the fixtures in your show so that each one has a unique number irrespective of its type By doing this you never have to specify the type when selecting fixtures which can speed up programming See Selecting Fixtures p 125 Notes Notes can be used to attach a comment to a fixture such as its location or intended use To add a note 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the fixture s Note cell 3 Set text of note Enter Type in the note text Tip Fixture notes can be displayed in editors such as the Programmer but this is turned off by default To display n
465. ur calibration data in the fixture library You cannot edit this column but it is useful to be able to check if the fixture is colour calibrated when working with the Colour Picker see Working with Colour p 134 5 7 2 Parameter Configuration You can configure settings that are specific to individual parameters in the Edit Fixtures window Figure 5 12 The Edit Fixtures window High End Systems 121 122 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures e Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures Edit Fixtures Sortby Num a Function Desk Channel 1 Studio Color 575 Studio Spot 575 Spin Colour 2 Colour Time Colour 1 Blink Colour 2 Blink Yes Blink ____ impis Strobe Yes Rate Shutter Figure 5 12 The Edit Fixtures window You can select a fixture type from the list on the left hand side of the window The main part of the window then shows the configurable settings for each fixture of that type The numbered buttons in the Jump Toolbar at the top of the window take you quickly to a particular fixture of that type Pressing the Sort by Function button in the top left of the window changes the view so that the main list groups each parameter together for all the fixtures of the type selected in the list This is often the easiest way to work in the window as you can easily click or press and then drag to select a range of cells to edit For example you could assign in one action
466. ures and Modifying Paramet ers To touch only the parameters of a particular kind press the appropriate parameter type key followed by Touch For example e Position Touch touches all position parameters of the se lected fixtures e To touch a single parameter you can hold the Touch button while moving that parameter s wheel slightly The current value will be touched without modific ation from the parameter wheel Untouched values appear in the editor with a white backgound Once you have touched parameter values they are available for recording in the same way as any value that you have assigned They are shown with a blue background indicating that they have been modified Num 4 intensity Studio Color 575 1 Strobe Position ype Pan Num 4 intensity Studio Color 575 Ea Using Pig Touch You can bring parameter values into an editor without touching them using Pig Touch As the parameters haven t been touched they won t be recorded as part of the contents of the editor This can be useful if you want to have the parameter values in the editor in order to copy them to other fixtures For example to copy parameter values from fixtures 1 5 that are on stage to fixtures 6 10 in the current editor 1 1 Thru 5 Pig Touch select the fixtures 1 5 and bring their onstage values into the editor without touching them Colour Mixing Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue Saturatio 1 2 3 4 5 2 Copy 6 Thru
467. use fixture selections for example e Group 1 Enter selects all the fixtures in Group 1 e Group 1 50 Enter selects all the fixtures in Group 1 and sets their intens ity to 50 e Group 1 Fixture 3 50 Enter you can mix fixture and group selections One particularly useful syntax to use with groups is the key e Group 1 Group 3 selects only fixtures that are in both groups 7 4 7 4 1 Editing Group Contents To edit a group s contents select the group within the Programmer or editor make changes to the selection and re record the group Hog 40S will ask you to choose from Insert Merge and Replace p 152 Select Replace to update the group with the new selection Removing Fixtures from Groups You can remove the fixtures that are currently selected in the Programmer or editor from a pre viously recorded group If you have a fixture selected in the Programmer or editor that is not in the group that fixture is ignored For example if you have a group containing fixtures 1 5 and you want to remove Fixture 2 1 Fixture 2 Enter select the fixture you want to remove 2 Record Remove the Remove button is on the Record Options Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen 3 Group 5 Enter removes Fixture 2 from Group 5 7 5 150 Deleting Groups To delete a group 1 Group 1 Delete deletes group 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete High End Systems Section 7 Groups Or from
468. ustom Setup Select the way you want features to be installed Click the icons in the tree below to change the way features will be installed of SS gt Hog Vizualizer Connectivity This feature requires 2KB on your hard drive Location C Program Files x86 Flying Pig Systems Hog Browses C tivity L Bek J net J conei 5 This prompts a Ready to Install screen with instructions on beginning or can celing the installation Press Install to begin installing 376 High End Systems Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity Click Install to begin the installation Click Back to review or change any of your installation settings Click Cancel to exit the wizard 6 Installation during the installation a progress bar will be shown High End Systems 377 Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity ii eei 48 Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Please wait while the Setup Wizard installs Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Status Validating install AAA Next 7 Completing the installation when the installation is complete press Finish to exit the installer 378 High End Systems Section 27 Visualiser Connectivity 38 Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Setup ia Completed the Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Setup Wizard Click the Finish button to exit the Setup Wizard 27 2 Connecting the Console to the Visualizer The Hog 4 visualiser connectivity supports multiple
469. uto View Remove at r nD Fixtures Type Fixtures Bulder Paleties Kind By OP Hum a Note t of SwoAxes Panievert Tit lvert htenstv Tutorial 25 2 6 Step 6 Edit Fixture to Define Default Values To define the default values for your new fixture you can edit the defaults for each parameter in the Edit Fixtures window Edit Fixtures 4 Aewsss Feature 366 High End Systems Section 25 The Fixture Builder 25 2 7 Step 7 Programming Your Custom Fixture When programming with the fixture from the tutorial bear in mind the following High End Systems Pan and Tilt are 16 bit DMX but appear as a single parameter and use 2 DMX channels each Cyan Magenta and Yellow function properly in respect to the DMX values being inverted from the Real World value The Gobo slots appear on the Slot toolbar The Gobo Spin and Random functions appear on the Gobo encoder wheel The various types of parameters that are controlling channel 10 shutter strobe fixture control and lamp control Notice how each appears as unique functions although they all output on the same DMX channel 367 Section 26 Pig Key Commands The Pig key is the Hog 40S s main modifier key it can be used to modify or extend many of the console s commands The following tables lists its uses with keys and buttons and with other controls High End Systems 369 Section 26 Pig Key Commands Pig with Keys and Buttons Use Result
470. value Highlight will remain active until you press the Highlight key again and you can use the Next and Back keys to highlight in turn each fixture in the current selection You can release each parameter from highlight by adjusting its value in the Programmer or editor letting you modify parameters whilst keeping the fixture beam as visible as possible For example suppose that you have a Studio Spot 575 subtly lighting a part of the stage setting with a dark blue breakup gobo softened using the frost parameter and with the iris controlling the beam size The piece of set that the Studio Spot is lighting has been moved and you need to refocus it while keeping the rest of the lighting state on stage so that rehearsals can continue To do this using Highlight 1 Select the Studio Spot in the Programmer 2 Press the Highlight key The Studio Spot will retain its position on stage but the intensity will go to full the colour to white the gobo and frost to open and the iris to 100 so that you can see the beam clearly on the lit stage 3 Adjust the pan and tilt parameters to position the Studio Spot as required 4 Adjust the iris parameter to give the correct beam size 5 Press the Highlight key again to release the colour gobo and frost parameters from Highlight so that they return to their original programmed values The values for pan tilt and iris retain their new values in the Programmer 6 Press Update and OK to record th
471. wap external screens Press Enter to finish Figure 3 2 The Calibration Screen 3 1 4 Adjusting the Screen Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the touch screens by holding down the Setup key and adjusting the parameter wheels labelled Left Backlight or Right Backlight Tip If you find the graphics on the screens are too bright you can change the console s colour scheme to a darker one in Setup gt Preferences gt Appearance 3 1 5 Changing the LCD Backlight Timeout The backlights that illuminate the console s primary touch screens switch off automatically after a period of time if the console is idle You can adjust the amount of time the backlights will wait before switching off in the Appearance pane of the User Preferences window 1 Setup gt Preferences Appearance 2 Adjust the Backlight Off time located at the bottom of the pane either by pressing the arrows to increment or decrement the value or by clicking on the value pressing Set and typing in a new value 3 Select OK to apply and close Tip Once the Hog displays are asleep you can wake them up by pressing any key It is a good idea to use the Pig key as this will prevent you from ac cidentally changing any data within the show 3 1 6 Adding External Monitors You can attach three external displays to the Hog 4 using standard DVI or VGA connectors High End Systems 53 3 1 7 54 Section 3 Setting Up the System To use externa
472. will see a single window on your screen Select the Disk Image option and make sure ISO is selected from the drop down menu Ensure your USB flash drive is inserted in your Macintosh computer and is selected in drive drop down menu in Unetbootin Now click on the browse button in Unetbootin the browse button is the button with three dots on it and select the correct Full Restore ISO file that you downloaded from the Hog 4OS support website 391 28 3 28 3 1 392 Section 28 Upgrading Console Software 14 Click okay and Unetbootin will proceed to create your USB flash drive 15 When Unetbootin is finished it will alert you Remove your USB flash drive and proceed to use it to restore your console as outlined in section 24 1 Updating the DMX Processor Software Normally updating the console software will also update the software of connected network processors If necessary you can update the software manually 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 The network window will display a list of any connected DMX Processors who s softwae does not match the console software version under a heading titled Upgradeable Nodes 3 Right click on the DP you wish to upgrade and select upgrade node If the console and network processor are running different software versions and the above pro cedure is not fully working or if the console is not recognizing the network processor on the network you can force th
473. xternal 53 dmx address 29 105 dmx processor 64 adding for patching 108 cloning 112 IP address 61 High End Systems locking the controls 62 mains power 60 net number 60 port number 61 removing 108 resetting 63 selecting when patching 105 status 63 updating software and firmware 392 using 60 watchdog 62 dmx processor 8000 expanding XLR outputs 63 reset options 392 technical specifications 437 dmx test 341 dmx universe 105 dmx widgets 85 configuring on Hog 4PC 403 installation with Hog 4PC 402 upgrading 407 edit button 46 edit fixtures window 121 editing cue contents 182 cue timings 204 effects 224 231 group contents 150 palette contents 155 parameter timings in cues 206 scene contents 199 editor toolbar 46 editor values toolbar 45 editors 45 bringing in values from onstage 240 clearing the contents of 146 locking 46 which is the current editor 22 effect directory 34 effects 221 copying 232 deleting 232 editing 224 231 engine 224 fanning 224 length 222 moving 232 453 n shot 222 naming 231 offset 222 palettes 230 predefined 229 rate 222 size 222 tables 221 timing 227 using in programming 231 embedded palettes 153 enable aggregation 41 enable jump toolbar 44 enable timecode 313 326 encoder wheel encoder wheel button options 96 endstops of parameter values 133 ethernet 64 even button 127 expander 63 export prefer
474. xternal Monitor 1 En En lt iq Auto Launch C Enabled E Enabled 2 HogNet 1280 x 1024 60Hz 1280 x 1024 60Hz 2 FixtureNet System info Figure 29 2 The Displays pane of the Control Panel 29 5 Upgrading USB DMX Widgets Some older USB DMX Widgets single universe are compatible only with Hog 2PC These USB DMX widgets will need to be upgraded to be compatible with Hog 4PC Please contact your High End Systems dealer for pricing and details When purchasing you need to provide your Widget serial number and Widget ID number Once the upgrade is purchased you will re ceive an Upgrade Kit for each USB DMX Widget This kit contains labeling hardware software and a unique authorization code compatible only with the specified widget serial number After receiving your upgrade kit follow these steps to upgrade your USB DMX Widget 1 Install Hog 4PC from the included CD ROM 2 Connect your USB DMX Widget s that match the serial numbers on the in cluded authorization sheet 3 In Windows launch the Hog 4PC Widget Upgrader application from the Hog 4PC start menu High End Systems 407 408 Section 29 Installing Hog 4PC Step 1 of 5 Introduction Welcome to the Hog 3PC Upgrade Utility Please ensure that your widgets are connected correctly and their Link lights are on Press Next to continue Ge Gea After confirming that the widget s are properly connected and the Link LED is illumi
475. xture functions organized into wheelsets The wheelsets determine how the fixture functions assigned to the kind will cordinate with the console s main encoder wheels when the kind is selected and a fixture selection is made Kinds are stored in the kinds directory and exist in two different forms fixed kinds and user kinds 15 1 1 Fixed Kinds Fixed kinds are automatically generated by the console and collectivity contain all of the fixture functions used in your show Every function of every fixture scheduled in your show will exists in one of the seven fixed kinds Intensity Position Colour Beam Effects Time or Control The fixed kinds can be selected using dedicated front panel keys or by clicking on their respective buttons in the kinds directory The kinds directory can be openned by holding Open and then selecting Kinds from the main toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen When a new fixture type is added to a show through the fixture scheduler its functions are auto matically populated in the fixed kinds and organized onto wheelsets based on a default master wheelset template established by the Hog 40S Fixed kinds cannot be deleted or moved This is why they are known as fixed kinds Functions that are marked with a lock icon on the wheelsets within a fixed kind cannot be deleted This is because those functions are considered to be permanent residents of that fixed kind and are fundamental to the masking scheme of that fixed
476. xtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 4 5 Multipart Fanning With the command line you can enter multipart fanning 1 Thru 9 10 Thru 50 Thru 10 The fixtures at either end of the range take the value of 10 that in the middle 50 and the others spread between 10 20 30 40 50 40 30 20 10 You can fan in as many parts as you want separating values with the Thru key Note that multipart fanning only works with the command line not when editing values in the spreadsheet 6 4 6 Fanning with Groupings Grouping allows you to control the way that parameters are fanned to make complex patterns You can group fixtures in two ways e Repeat The repeat is the number of fixtures that are fanned before the fan is repeated For example fanning a selection of twelve fixtures with a repeat of three would result in four identical fan patterns or parts each with three fixtures in O00O000O00000 Num Intensity Desk Channel 35 3 3 3 Buddying The buddying number puts the fixtures into gangs that all take the same value For example fanning a selection of twelve fixtures with a buddying value of three would result in fixtures 1 to 3 having the same parameter value fixtures 4 to 6 having the same value and so on OOOOOO0O00000 High End Systems 145 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Num Intensity Desk Channel 31 0 32 0 a4 go 33 0 34 33 35 36 or 38 39 40
477. xtures can be merged between show files Libraries can be built from a blank canvass or can be copied from existing fixtures within the library when using V4 libraries When an existing library is copied many of the unique elements of the factory created library are removed for compatibility with the fixture builder utility The new fixture library may not behave exactly like the library it is a copy of 25 1 1 Creating Editing and Deleting Fixture Libraries You can create edit and delete fixture libraries in the Fixture Builder window e Setup gt Patch gt Fixture Builder open the Fixture Builder window Select an option from the buttons at the top of the window High End Systems 343 Section 25 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder oe ee Create New Copy From Type Information Model Name Date Modified Notes Dmx Footprint 0 Patchpoints Channel a Function Feature Dmx Value Real World The options are e Create New creates a new fixture from scratch See Creating a New Fixture Library From Scratch p 345 Copy From creates a new fixture based on an existing fixture within a fixture library See Creating a New Fixture Library Using an Existing Library p 346 Delete Current deletes the user created library selected in the drop down list To edit any existing User Created libraries select it from the drop down list Fixture Builder Tutorial Ba E e ET aac E E TE Super Cyber MOE Au
478. y as long as the guard button for the kinds directory is turned off If the fixture has more parameters of a particular type than there are parameter wheels you can press the parameter type keys to page through the parameters Center Wheel Functions assigned to the center wheel in the user preferences can be adjusted using the inner wheel and outer jog shuttle controls of the center wheel Hog 4 Console Only Slot Toolbar Use for parameters that have discrete rather than continuous values known as slotted such as the positions of a colour wheel This gives you button press control of the possible values The Slot Toolbar also has buttons to access the control functions Enable Mode and Control Spreadsheet You can directly edit a parameter s value in an editor s spreadsheet view Click on the cell press Set type in a value and press Enter Colour Picker You can assign hue and saturation values for a fixture s colour using the Colour Picker See The Colour Picker p 136 Gel Picker You can assign the colour of fixtures to match a colour filter from various manufacturers ranges using the Gel Picker See The Gel Picker p 137 6 3 1 Intensity Fixture intensities can either be assigned from the keypad or using the l Wheel as well as the parameter wheels and by editing directly in the editor spreadsheet With the Key To assign intensities using the key and the numeric keypad High End Systems 129 Section
479. y into the back of the console or by inputting the LTC audio signal into a DP8000 through an attached USB LTC widget 22 1 LTC Input into Console To bring LTC into the system through the console 1 High End Systems Connect the LTC source timecode generator to the LTC IN port on the con sole s rear panel using a balanced 3 pin XLR connector you can also plug in up to eight external USB LTC widgets to the console for addition LTC inputs Setup Network opens the Network window In the network window right click the DP8000 that is associated with console s built in outputs this is typically DP8000 1 unless you have configured the console s internal DP8000 to run on a different net number NOTE You must be running an internal DP8000 on the console to bring LTC input into the desk as LTC input is handled by the DP8000 process Select Settings from the right click menu opens the Settings window In the Timecode Widgets pane use the drop down menu to map the built in LTC widget or any external USB LTC widdgets to an index 323 Section 22 Linear Timecode LTC View Security Widget Config Toolbar Beacon Processor Unit lt a gt LTC Widget 1040 v 4 DMX FixtureNet Art Net 1 31 SACN DMX Widgets Timecode Widgets Diagnostics 7 WHwWwWwWWHwWWD fF FF OF A Peal 22 2 LTC Input into a DMX Processor 8000 To bring LTC into the system using a DMX Processor 8000 1 Conn
480. yback and effect rates Used after selecting a fixture or group of fixtures setting all remaining fixtures to a zero intensity level The amount of pigment in colour notation See Also hue a single cue stored in the scene directory that has full timing features but does not belong to a cuelist Scenes can be used to store a single look that may be called back for use in later programming or to play back many simple looks directly from physical or virtual masters See Also cue cuelist The order in which the user selects fixtures into the Programmer or editor Hog 40S remembers this and can apply fanning or effects according to a fixture s place in the sequence The sequence is recorded as part of groups and palettes See Also group palette The Hog console that owns a show Other consoles may join the show but the original console that created the show will remain the show server A discrete step in a parameter s range such as the position of a gobo wheel A form of time code that can be used to synchronise the operation of various controllers for example synchronising lighting to video playback The Soft Keys are the row of keys above and below the touchscreens They mimic the function of toolbars docked along the edge of the screens See Also toolbar See tracked value A crossfade where the incoming and outgoing cues have different times causing an imbalanced or dipped fade profile See Also crossfade in ti
481. you know that you are about to record copy or move a macro to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 340 High End Systems Section 24 Direct Control of DMX Channels By default the DMX channel values output by the DP8000 are controlled by patched fixture data as programmed in the Hog show file However you may wish to override these values with manually entered DMX values or with Art Net values streaming into the console from a remote third party Art Net source such as another console Both of these tasks can be accomplished in the DMX output window by following the instructions outlined in this chapter Dmx Output 1 DP 8000 ee ee ee ee o lo l ass 127 i27 fo fois fos f27 f127 o Jo ss fo ss f127 fizz Jo fs jo f2ss fizz fi27 Jo fo fess fo fess f127 o j o Figure 24 1 DMX Output Window 24 1 Manually specifying DMX Channel Values To set a dmx channel or group of channels to a specific value 1 Open the DMX Output window press the SETUP key on the front panel and select the DMX button on the main toolbar Use the two drop down menus at the top of the DMX Output window to select the corresponding DP8000 and universe you wish the manilpulate Double click on the desired dmx channel cell in the spreadsheet or highlight a group of dmx channel cells and press set Enter a valid dmx v

High End Systems H4 manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents